Mazda 2 J64J 2010

MAZDA MAZDA 22 J64J J64J

BODY & ACCESSORIES

09 SECTION

Toc of SCT ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] . . . . . . . . . SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . .

Toc of SCT

09-02A

09-02B

09-02C 09-02D 09-02E 09-02F 09-02G

09-02I

09-03A

09-03B

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . 09-03D SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H BODY PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10 DOORS AND LIFTGATE . . . . . 09-11 GLASS/WINDOWS/ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13 SECURITY AND LOCKS . . . . . 09-14 EXTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16 INTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17 LIGHTING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . 09-18 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM . . . 09-19 ENTERTAINMENT . . . . . . . . . . 09-20 POWER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . 09-21 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22 CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 09-40 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . 09-50 SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . 09-60

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] PAGE 1 OF 2

09-02A ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] RESTRAINTS SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–3 SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–4 FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–5 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–5 DTC B1026:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–9 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–9 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–9 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–9 DTC B1026:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–9 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–9 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–9 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–10 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–10 DTC B1026:96 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–11 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–11 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–11 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–11 DTC B102B:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–11 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–11 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–11 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–12 DTC B108A:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–12 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–12 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–12 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–13 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–13 DTC B10A5:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–14 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–14 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–14 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–14 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–15 DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–15 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–15 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–15 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–16 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–16 DTC B10C7:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–17 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–17 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–17 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–17 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–18

DTC B10C8:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–18 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–18 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–18 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–19 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–19 DTC B10C9:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–20 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–20 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–20 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–21 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–21 DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–22 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–22 Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–22 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–22 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–22 DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–23 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–23 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–23 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–24 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–24 DTC B10E7:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–25 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–25 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–25 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–25 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–25 DTC B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–26 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–26 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–26 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–27 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–27 DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–28 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–28 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–28 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–29 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–29 DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–30 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–30 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–30 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–30 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–31 DTC P1794:16, P1794:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–31 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–31 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–31 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–32 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–32 DTC U0028:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–33 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–33 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–33 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–33

09-02A–1

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] PAGE 2 OF 2

DTC U0401:68 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–34 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–34 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–34 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–34 DTC U201F:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–34 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–34 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–34 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–35 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–35 DTC U201F:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–36 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–36 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–36 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–36 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–36 DTC U2100:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–37 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–37 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–37 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–37

09-02A–2

DTC U3000:41 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–38 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–38 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–38 Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–39 DTC U3004:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–40 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–40 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–40 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–40 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–41 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–42 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–42

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] RESTRAINTS SST WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id086000800100

49 H066 002

49 D066 002

49 L066 002

Deployment tool

Adapter harness

Adapter harness

49 G066 003

49 N088 0A0

Adapter harness

Fuel and Thermometer checker

-

End Of Sie

09-02A–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1344500

B+

3V

B+

STEERING LOCK UNIT

3W 1E

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT

2L THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

IG1 LIFTGATE OPENNER SWITCH (3HB,5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD)

2C ACC

3G

2A KEYLESS BUZZER A B

UNLOCK

LOCK

BCM

2F 3K

PCM

L 3P

J D

DOOR LOCK LINK SWITCH

B+

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

2G

KEYLESS KEYLESS INDICATOR WARNING LIGHT LIGHT (GREEN) (RED) ALARM

CAN-H

2I CAN-L

B+

SECURITY LIGHT

BCM

KEYLESS RECEIVER

1D INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

D C B

2H

3U 3O

A D B

3AD

E

3X

A

REQUEST SWITCH KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, RF)

WITH IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM IG1

D B COIL ANTENNA

C

2D

D

2B

F 3N

3F

B

3AB

E

REQUEST SWITCH

KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, LF)

4SD

3HB/5HB 3R

C

3AA

D KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

3I

C

3Z

D KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

3C 3AC

C D KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

3R

C

3AA

D

3I

A

3Z

B

3C

C

3AC

D

3L

C

3Y

D

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER)

am2zzw0000510 End Of Sie

09-02A–4

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1345500

x The OBD (on-board diagnostic) system has the following functions: — Malfunction detection function: Detects malfunctions in the advanced keyless and start system and outputs DTCs. — PID/data monitor function: Reads out specific input/output signals and the system status. x Diagnostic DTCs can be read/cleared using the M-MDS.

End Of Sie DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1345400

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “RKE”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “RKE”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

End Of Sie CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1400300

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “RKE”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “RKE”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

End Of Sie DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] DTC M-MDS display

Detection condition

B1026:51

Steering lock unit not programmed

B1026:87

Communication error between keyless control module and steering lock unit

B1026:96

Steering lock unit status malfunction signal detected

B102B:51

No advanced key programming record (programming never performed in past)

id0902e1347100

Reference (See 09-02A-9 DTC B1026:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-9 DTC B1026:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-11 DTC B1026:96 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-11 DTC B102B:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

09-02A–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] DTC M-MDS display

Detection condition

B108A:29

Push switch off signal detected while ignition switch is at ON

B10A5:12

Keyless beeper output voltage malfunction

B10C6:1F

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (exterior, rear)

B10C7:1F

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, rear)

B10C8:1F*1

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, center)

B10C9:1F

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, front)

B10D1:23

Request switch (LF) ON signal detected while driving

B10D3:23

Request switch (RF) ON signal detected while driving

B10E7:16

Keyless control module IG1 power voltage malfunction

B113E:11

Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) input voltage malfunction

B11FD:1F

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (LF)

B1210:1F

Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (RF)

P1794:16 P1794:17

Reference (See 09-02A-12 DTC B108A:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-14 DTC B10A5:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-15 DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-17 DTC B10C7:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-18 DTC B10C8:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-20 DTC B10C9:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-22 DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-23 DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-25 DTC B10E7:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-26 DTC B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-28 DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-30 DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Keyless control module power voltage low (power from P/W 20 A (See 09-02A-31 DTC P1794:16, fuse) P1794:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from P/W 20 A AND START SYSTEM].) fuse) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

U0001:88

Module communication error (HS-CAN)

U0028:87

Correct data cannot be received from BCM (no response for 10 times)

(See 09-02A-33 DTC U0028:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

U0100:00

Communication error (no response) between keyless control module and PCM

(See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

U0401:68

U201F:00

09-02A–6

(See 09-02A-34 DTC U0401:68 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-34 DTC U201F:00 Communication error between keyless control module and keyless [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START receiver SYSTEM].) Correct data cannot be received from PCM

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] DTC M-MDS display U201F:13

Keyless receiver not connecting

U2100:00

Configuration error

U3000:41

Keyless control module internal malfunction

U3003:16 U3003:17 U3004:16 *1

Detection condition

Reference (See 09-02A-36 DTC U201F:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-37 DTC U2100:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-02A-38 DTC U3000:41 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Keyless control module power voltage low (power from ROOM 15 A fuse) Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from ROOM 15 A fuse)

(See 09-02A-38 DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Keyless control module ACC power voltage malfunction

(See 09-02A-40 DTC U3004:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

: 4SD

09-02A–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] With Immobilizer System DTC M-MDS display

Security light flashing pattern

B10D5:13

B10D7:05

B10D7:51

B10D7:81

B10D7:94

B10D8:00

B10D9:87

B10DA:51

B10DA:62

U0100:87

End Of Sie

09-02A–8

Detection condition

Reference

(See 09-02B-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-9 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER Key ID number program error SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-14 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/ Keyless control module detected P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER unprogrammed key ID number. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-13 SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/ The keyless control module cannot read P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER key ID number data normally. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-11 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER The key ID number data cannot be read. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-17 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER Only one key has been programmed. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-6 SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ No detected communication with the coil P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER antenna. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-18 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/ Communication error between keyless P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER control module and PCM (data transfer SYSTEM (ADVANCED error) KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-19 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/ ID number data between keyless control P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER module and PCM are different. SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-16 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/ Communication error between the keyless P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER control module and the PCM (no SYSTEM (ADVANCED response/condition mismatch) KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Coil antenna malfunction x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] DTC B1026:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387000

Detection Condition x Steering lock unit not programmed Possible Causes x Programmed not performed after steering lock unit replacement x Steering lock unit malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT PROGRAMMING

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Perform the steering lock unit programming. (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1026:51 displayed? 2

INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT x Inspect the steering lock unit. (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the steering lock unit normal?

3

VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1026:51 displayed?

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the steering lock unit and perform steering lock unit programming.

(See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step. Yes

No

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1026:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1387100

Detection Condition x Communication error between keyless control module and steering lock unit Possible Causes x Steering lock unit connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between steering lock unit and keyless control module x Steering lock unit malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A

BCM 1D B

PUSH SWITCH

G

2L

E

A

3V

H

C

3W

KEYLESS SWITCH

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

STEERING LOCK UNIT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

STEERING LOCK UNIT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

G

E

C

A

H

*

*

B

1E *

* 1D

* *

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

am2zzw0000503

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the steering lock unit connector. Inspect the steering lock unit connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between steering lock unit and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN STEERING LOCK UNIT AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2L and steering lock unit terminal G for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

09-02A–10

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the steering lock unit connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT x Inspect the steering lock unit. (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the steering lock unit normal?

VERIFY DTCs

5

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1026:87 displayed?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the steering lock unit and perform steering lock unit programming. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

End Of Sie DTC B1026:96 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387200

Detection Condition x Steering lock unit status malfunction signal detected Possible Causes x Steering lock unit malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT x Inspect the steering lock unit. (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the steering lock unit normal?

2

VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1026:96 displayed?

Yes No

Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. Replace the steering lock unit and perform steering lock unit programming. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B102B:51 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1387300

Detection Condition x No advanced key programming record (programming never performed in past) Note x If the advanced key has never been programmed, DTC B102B:51 cannot be detected even if the advanced key is cleared. Possible Causes x Advanced key is not programmed.

09-02A–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED ADVANCED KEYS

Yes No

x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the number of programmed advanced keys. (See 09-02A-42 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) — NUMCARD (See 09-02A-42 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is there a programmed advanced key? 2

VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B102B:51 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. Program the advanced key, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-123 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B108A:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1387400

Detection Condition x Push switch off signal detected while ignition switch is at ON Possible Causes x Steering lock unit connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between steering lock unit and keyless control module x Steering lock unit malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–12

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A

BCM 1D B

PUSH SWITCH

G

2L

E

A

3V

H

C

3W

KEYLESS SWITCH

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

STEERING LOCK UNIT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

STEERING LOCK UNIT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

G

E

C

A

H

*

*

B

1E *

* 1D

* *

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

3AB 3Y 3V

* 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

am2zzw0000503

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the steering lock unit connector. Inspect the steering lock unit connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between steering lock unit and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN STEERING LOCK UNIT AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the steering lock unit connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 3V and steering lock unit terminal A for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

09-02A–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

Action

STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION x x x x

Reconnect all disconnected connectors. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Inspect the voltage of steering lock unit terminals A, B, E, and H. (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the voltage normal? 5

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B108A:29 displayed?

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the steering lock unit and perform steering lock unit programming. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

End Of Sie DTC B10A5:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387600

Detection Condition x Keyless beeper output voltage malfunction Possible Causes x Keyless beeper connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless beeper and body ground x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless beeper and keyless control module x Keyless beeper malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram KEYLESS BEEPER KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

3K

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V

* 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

A B

KEYLESS BEEPER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

A

am2zzw0000503

09-02A–14

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER CONNECTOR x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless beeper connector. Inspect the keyless beeper connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS BEEPER AND GROUND

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless beeper and body ground, then go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless beeper and keyless control module, then go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the keyless beeper, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-130 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Keyless beeper connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between keyless beeper terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 3

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

4

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS BEEPER AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless beeper connector or terminal, then go to Step 6.

x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless beeper terminal A and keyless control module terminal 3K for the following: — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? 5

INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER x Inspect the keyless beeper. (See 09-14-131 KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless beeper normal?

6

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10A5:12 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387700

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (exterior, rear) Possible Causes x Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless antenna (exterior, rear) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

3C

C

3AC

D

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V

* 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

D

C

*

*

am2zzw0000503

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless antenna (exterior, rear) connector. x Inspect the keyless antenna (exterior, rear) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless antenna (exterior, rear) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Replace the keyless antenna (exterior, rear), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless antenna (exterior, rear) terminal C and keyless control module terminal 3C, and keyless antenna (exterior, rear) terminal D and keyless control module terminal 3AC for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

4

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C6:1F displayed?

09-02A–16

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless antenna (exterior, rear) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

No

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C6:1F displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10C7:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387800

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, rear) Possible Causes x Keyless antenna (interior, rear) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, rear) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (interior, rear) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram (3HB/5HB) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR) 3I

C

3Z

D

(4SD) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR) 3I

A

3Z

B

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V

3P

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3G

3N 3K 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I

D

3AC 3Z 3W

3F 3C

C

*

(3HB/5HB)

*

B

A

(4SD)

am2zzw0000504

09-02A–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless antenna (interior, rear) connector. x Inspect the keyless antenna (interior, rear) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, rear) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Replace the keyless antenna (interior, rear), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal C (3HB/5HB)/ terminal A (4SD) and keyless control module terminal 3I, and keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal D (3HB/5HB)/terminal B (4SD) and keyless control module terminal 3Z for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

4

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C7:1F displayed?

5

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C7:1F displayed?

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless antenna (interior, rear) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

No

Yes

No

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10C8:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1387900

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, center) Possible Causes x Keyless antenna (interior, center) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (interior, center) malfunction

09-02A–18

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) 3L

C

3Y

D

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V

3P

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3G

3N 3K 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3AC 3Z 3W

D 3F 3C

C

*

*

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless antenna (interior, center) connector. x Inspect the keyless antenna (interior, center) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 7.

Yes

Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground, then go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless antenna (interior, center) connector or terminal, then go to Step 7.

No

x Keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal C — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal D x Is there continuity?

09-02A–19

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to power supply, then go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

x Keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal C — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal D x Is there any voltage? 5

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 7.

Yes

Replace the keyless antenna (interior, center), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Keyless antenna (interior, center) and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3L — Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3Y x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER) MALFUNCTION x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C8:1F displayed?

7

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C8:1F displayed?

No

Yes

No

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10C9:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1388000

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, front) Possible Causes x Keyless antenna (interior, front) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, front) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (interior, front) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–20

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

3R

C

3AA

D

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V

* 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

D

C

*

*

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless antenna (interior, front) connector. x Inspect the keyless antenna (interior, front) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, front) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Replace the keyless antenna (interior, front), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless antenna (interior, front) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

x Inspect the wiring harness between keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal C and keyless control module terminal 3R, and keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal D and keyless control module terminal 3AA for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? 4

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C9:1F displayed?

No

09-02A–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10C9:1F displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1388100

Detection Condition x Request switch (LF) ON signal detected while driving Possible Causes x Outer handle (LF) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between outer handle (LF) and keyless control module x Request switch (LF) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram OUTER HANDLE (LF) A

3X

REQUEST SWITCH (LF) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

D 3F

B

3AB

E

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA (LF)

OUTER HANDLE (LF) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3N 3K 3AC 3Z 3W * * * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

D

A

E

B

*

*

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT OUTER HANDLE (LF) CONNECTOR x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the outer handle (LF) connector. Inspect the outer handle (LF) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02A–22

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the outer handle (LF) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 2

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Repair or replace the wiring harness between outer handle (LF) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN OUTER HANDLE (LF) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND

No

x Outer handle (LF) and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between outer handle (LF) terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 4

INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (LF) x Inspect the request switch (LF). (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the request switch (LF) normal?

5

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10D1:23 displayed?

Yes No

Yes

No

Go to the next step. Replace the request switch (LF), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1388200

Detection Condition x Request switch (RF) ON signal detected while driving Possible Causes x Outer handle (RF) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between outer handle (RF) and keyless control module x Request switch (RF) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–23

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram OUTER HANDLE (RF) A

3U

REQUEST SWITCH (RF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

D 3O

B

3AD

E

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA (RF)

OUTER HANDLE (RF) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

D

A

E

B

*

*

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT OUTER HANDLE (RF) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the outer handle (RF) connector. Inspect the outer handle (RF) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Repair or replace the wiring harness between outer handle (RF) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN OUTER HANDLE (RF) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the outer handle (RF) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

No

x Outer handle (RF) and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between outer handle (RF) terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 4

INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (RF) x Inspect the request switch (RF). (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the request switch (RF) normal?

09-02A–24

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the request switch (RF), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10D3:23 displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10E7:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1388300

Detection Condition x Keyless control module IG1 power voltage malfunction Possible Causes x Battery malfunction x Generator malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and keyless control module — Short to ground in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and keyless control module terminal 2C — ENG 10 A fuse malfunction — Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and keyless control module terminal 2C x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram IGNITION SWITCH (IG1)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

ENG 10 A FUSE 2C

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2L

2C 2A 2I 2G 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000506

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY PCM DTCs x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) Are any DTCs displayed?

Yes

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].)

No

Go to the next step.

x

09-02A–25

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 2

Inspection

BATTERY INSPECTION x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the battery normal?

3

GENERATOR INSPECTION x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-7 GENERATOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) x Is the generator normal?

4

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Recharge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the generator, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the ENG 10 A fuse. x If the fuse is melt: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground. — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is deterioration: — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is normal: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit. Go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 5

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION SWITCH (IG1) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND AND OPEN CIRCUIT x Keyless control module connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Measure the voltage at the keyless control module terminal 2C (wiring harness-side). x Is the voltage B+?

6

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B10E7:16 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1388400

Detection Condition x Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) input voltage malfunction Possible Causes x Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) connector or terminals malfunction

09-02A–26

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between BCM and liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/trunk lid opener switch (4SD) x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless control module and liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/trunk lid opener switch (4SD) x Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) malfunction x BCM malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (3HB/5HB)/ TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

A

3G

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

7A

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (3HB/5HB)/ TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

A

B

BCM

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (3HB/5HB)/TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/ trunk lid opener switch (4SD) connector. x Inspect the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/ trunk lid opener switch (4SD) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT BCM CONNECTOR x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the BCM connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

3

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/ trunk lid opener switch (4SD) connector or terminal, then go to Step 7.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the BCM connector or terminal, then go to Step 7.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 7.

09-02A–27

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (3HB/5HB)/TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground, then go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

x Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/trunk lid opener switch (4SD), BCM and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) terminal A — Liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) terminal B x Is there continuity? 5

INSPECT LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (3HB/5HB)/TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/trunk lid opener switch (4SD), then go to Step 7. (See 09-14-91 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the BCM, then go to the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Inspect the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/ trunk lid opener switch (4SD). (See 09-14-92 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the liftgate opener switch (3HB/5HB)/trunk lid opener switch (4SD) normal? 6

INSPECT BCM x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 7A (wiring harness-side). (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) x Is the voltage normal?

7

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B113E:11 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1388500

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (LF) Possible Causes x Outer handle (LF) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between outer handle (LF) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (LF) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–28

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram OUTER HANDLE (LF) A

3X

REQUEST SWITCH (LF) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

D 3F

B

3AB

E

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA (LF)

OUTER HANDLE (LF) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

D

A

E

B

*

*

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT OUTER HANDLE (LF) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the outer handle (LF) connector. Inspect the outer handle (LF) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between outer handle (LF) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN OUTER HANDLE (LF) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between outer handle (LF) terminal B and keyless control module terminal 3F, and outer handle (LF) terminal E and keyless control module terminal 3AB for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the outer handle (LF) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

09-02A–29

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B11FD:1F displayed? 5

VERIFY DTCs

No

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B11FD:1F displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless antenna (LF), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1388600

Detection Condition x Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (RF) Possible Causes x Outer handle (RF) connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between outer handle (RF) and keyless control module x Keyless antenna (RF) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram OUTER HANDLE (RF) 3U

A REQUEST SWITCH (RF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

D 3O

B

3AD

E

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3AC 3Z 3W * * 3N 3K * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

KEYLESS ANTENNA (RF)

OUTER HANDLE (RF) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

A

E

B

*

*

am2zzw0000504

09-02A–30

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT OUTER HANDLE (RF) CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the outer handle (RF) connector. Inspect the outer handle (RF) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between outer handle (RF) and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Replace the keyless antenna (RF), then go to the next step. (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN OUTER HANDLE (RF) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between outer handle (RF) terminal B and keyless control module terminal 3O, and outer handle (RF) terminal E and keyless control module terminal 3AD for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

4

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1210:1F displayed?

5

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC B1210:1F displayed?

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the outer handle (RF) connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

No

Yes

No

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC P1794:16, P1794:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1388700

Detection Condition x P1794:16: Keyless control module power voltage low (power from P/W 20 A fuse) x P1794:17: Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from P/W 20 A fuse) Possible Causes x Battery malfunction x Generator malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between battery and keyless control module — Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and keyless control module terminal 1E — P/W 20 A fuse malfunction — Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and keyless control module terminal 1E x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–31

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR B+

1E P/W 20 A

1E

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

*

* 1D

* *

am2zzw0000259

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY PCM DTCs x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

2

BATTERY INSPECTION x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the battery normal?

3

GENERATOR INSPECTION x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-7 GENERATOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-5 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the generator normal?

4

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02A–32

Yes

No

Yes No

Yes No

Yes No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step.

Go to the next step. Recharge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step. Replace the generator, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 6.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 5

Inspection

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND AND OPEN CIRCUIT

Action Yes No

x Keyless control module connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the keyless control module terminal 1E (wiring harness-side). x Is the voltage B+? 6

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the following DTC displayed? — P1794:16 — P1794:17

No

Go to the next step. Inspect the P/W 20 A fuse. x If the fuse is melt: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground. — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is deterioration: — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is normal: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit. Go to the next step. Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0028:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1399500

Detection Condition x Correct data cannot be received from BCM (no response for 10 times) Possible Causes x BCM malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U0028:87 displayed?

2

VERIFY BCM DTCs x Verify the BCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

3

VERIFY BCM x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U0028:87 displayed?

Yes No

Yes No Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection, then go to Step 4. (See 09-02G-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].) Go to the next step. Replace the BCM, then go the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

09-02A–33

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U0028:87 displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0401:68 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1399300

Detection Condition x Correct data cannot be received from PCM Possible Causes x PCM malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY PCM DTCs x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

2

VERIFY PCM x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U0401:68 displayed?

3

VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U0401:68 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes

No Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step.

Replace the PCM, then go to the next step. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZCD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) DTC troubleshooting completed. Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U201F:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Detection Condition x Communication error between keyless control module and keyless receiver Possible Causes x Keyless receiver connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between keyless receiver and keyless control module x Keyless receiver malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

09-02A–34

id0902e1388800

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A BCM

D KEYLESS C RECEIVER

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

2H

B

KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

*

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000259

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector. Inspect the keyless receiver connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between keyless receiver and keyless control module, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER SIGNAL CIRCUIT x Inspect the wiring harnesses between keyless receiver terminal C and keyless control module terminal 2H for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply x Is the wiring harness normal?

4

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless receiver normal?

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless receiver connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

09-02A–35

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U201F:00 displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U201F:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1388900

Detection Condition x Keyless receiver not connecting Possible Causes x Keyless receiver connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless receiver and keyless control module x Keyless receiver malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A BCM

D KEYLESS C RECEIVER

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

2H

B

KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

*

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000089

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER CONNECTOR x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector. Inspect the keyless receiver connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02A–36

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless receiver connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 2

Inspection

Action

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Keyless receiver and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between keyless receiver terminal C (wiring harness-side) and keyless control module terminal 2H (wiring harnessside). x Is there continuity?

4

INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless receiver normal?

5

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U201F:13 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC U2100:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0902e1399000

Detection Condition x Configuration error Possible Causes x Configuration was not done correctly for some reason. x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection PERFORM CONFIGURATION x Perform the configuration for the keyless control module using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-102 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U2100:00 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02A–37

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] DTC U3000:41 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1399100

Detection Condition x Keyless control module internal malfunction Possible Causes x Keyless control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection VERIFY DTCs x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U3000:41 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1399400

Detection Condition x U3003:16: Keyless control module power voltage low (power from ROOM 15 A fuse) x U3003:17: Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from ROOM 15 A fuse) Possible Causes x Battery malfunction x Generator malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between battery and BCM — Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and BCM terminal 1O — ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction — Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and BCM terminal 1O x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between BCM and keyless control module — Short to ground in wiring harness between BCM terminal 3P and keyless control module terminal 1D — Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM terminal 3P and keyless control module terminal 1D x BCM malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A

1O • • • • •3P •

1D

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR 1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

1E *

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

3D

* 1D

* *

am2zzw0000089

09-02A–38

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY PCM DTCs x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

2

VERIFY BCM DTCs x Verify the BCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

3

BATTERY INSPECTION x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the battery normal?

4

GENERATOR INSPECTION x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-7 GENERATOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-5 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the generator normal?

5

INSPECT BCM CONNECTOR x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the BCM connector. Inspect the BCM connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 6

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND AND OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes

No

Yes No Yes No

Yes No

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02G-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Recharge or replace the battery, then go to Step 10. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step. Replace the generator, then go to Step 10. (See 01-17A-6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the BCM connector or terminal, then go to Step 10.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the ROOM 15 A fuse. x If the fuse is melt: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground. — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is deterioration: — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is normal: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit. Go to Step 10. Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 10.

x BCM connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 1O (wiring harness-side). x Is the voltage B+?

7

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

09-02A–39

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 8

Inspection

Action

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BCM AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND AND OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground or open circuit, then go to Step 10.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the BCM, then go to the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x BCM and keyless control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the keyless control module terminal 1D (wiring harness-side). x Is the voltage B+? 9

INSPECT BCM x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminals 1O and 3P (wiring harness-side). (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) x Is the voltage normal?

10

VERIFY DTCs x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the following DTC displayed? — U3003:16 — U3003:17

No

End Of Sie DTC U3004:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0902e1399200

Detection Condition x Keyless control module ACC power voltage malfunction Possible Causes x Battery malfunction x Generator malfunction x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (ACC) and keyless control module — Short to ground in wiring harness between ignition switch (ACC) and keyless control module terminal 2A — MIRROR 7.5 A fuse malfunction — Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (ACC) and keyless control module terminal 2A x Keyless control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram ACC MIRROR 7.5 A

2A

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000089

09-02A–40

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY PCM DTCs x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

2

BATTERY INSPECTION x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the battery normal?

3

GENERATOR INSPECTION x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-7 GENERATOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-5 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Is the generator normal?

4

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes

No

Yes No

Yes No

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION SWITCH (ACC) AND KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT TO GROUND AND OPEN CIRCUIT x Keyless control module connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position. x Measure the voltage at the keyless control module terminal 2A (wiring harness-side). x Is the voltage B+?

Go to the next step. Recharge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step. Replace the generator, then go to Step 6. (See 01-17A-6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the keyless control module connector or terminal, then go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the MIRROR 7.5 A fuse. x If the fuse is melt: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground. — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is deterioration: — Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is normal: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit. Go to the next step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the keyless control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 5

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) Go to the next step.

09-02A–41

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 6

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Verify the advanced keyless and start system DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC U3004:16 displayed?

No

Action Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “RKE”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “RKE”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

id0902e1960600

DLC-2 am2zzw0000210

Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] PID name (definition) BZR_OUT (Keyless beeper status) DTC_CNT (Number of DTCs) IG_KEY_IN (Ignition key cylinder status) IG_SW_ST (Ignition switch status) IMMOBI (Immobilizer function present/not present)

Unit/Operation

Off/On



Key-Out/Key-In

Not Pushed/ Pushed

09-02A–42

Off/On*

Data contents

Inspection item (s)

id0902e1960700

Terminal

x Keyless beeper sound: On x Keyless beeper not sound: Off

Keyless beeper inspection

3K

x DTC detected: 1—255 x DTC not detected: 0

Separate DTC inspection



x Ignition key auxiliary key inserted: KeyIn Steering lock unit inspection x No ignition key auxiliary key: Key-Out

3W

x Push switch pushed: Pushed x Push switch released: Not pushed

Steering lock unit inspection

3V

x Immobilizer function present: On x Immobilizer function not present: Off

Keyless control module inspection



ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] PID name (definition) LOCK_SW_ D Door locklink switch status) MASTERKE Y* (Master key present/not present) NUMCARD (Number of advanced keys) NUMKEY* (Number of key codes) PWR_ACC (ACC power supply status) REQ_SW_B K (Liftgate opener switch status) REQ_SW_R Request switch (RF) status REQ_SW_L Request switch (LF) status VPWR_B+ (Keyless control module power supply voltage) *

Unit/Operation

Data contents

Inspection item (s)

Terminal

Lock/Unlock

x Driver's door: UNLOCK: Unlock x Driver's door: LOCK: Lock

Door lock-link switch inspection

3P

Not Pushed/ Pushed

x Master key present: Present x Master key not present: Not present

Keyless control module inspection





x Number of programmed advanced keys: 0—6

Keyless control module inspection





x Number of programmed key codes: 0—8

Keyless control module inspection



Off/On

x Ignition switch at ACC: On x Ignition switch at LOCK: Off

Ignition switch inspection

2A

Off/On

x Liftgate opener switch pressed: On x Liftgate opener switch released: Off

Liftgate opener switch inspection

3G

Off/On

x Request switch (RF) pressed: On x Request switch (RF) released: Off

Request switch (RF) inspection

3U

Off/On

x Request switch (LF) pressed: On x Request switch (LF) released: Off

Request switch (LF) inspection

3X

V

x Continuous: Approx. 12 V

Battery inspection

1D

: With immobilizer system

End Of Sie

09-02A–43

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND

09-02B ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . Security light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02B–1 09-02B–2 09-02B–2 09-02B–2 09-02B–3 09-02B–3

09-02B–6 09-02B–7 09-02B–7

09-02B–8 09-02B–8

09-02B–9 09-02B–10

09-02B–11 09-02B–11

SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–13 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–13 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–14 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–15 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–16 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–16 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–17 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–17 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51 /P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–18 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–18 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–19 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–19 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–20 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] End of Toc WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id0902e3345500

x DTCs are recorded in the PCM and keyless control module when a malfunction is detected. The stored DTCs can be verified using the flashing pattern of the security light and M-MDS. There are some DTCs which cannot be verified using the security light. Verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x If more than one DTC is detected, the security light only displays the DTC with the lowest number. Begin repairs based on the DTC displayed by the security light. All DTCs can be read by the M-MDS. x It is possible for several DTCs to be displayed for a one malfunction cause. Erase the DTCs after one repair and then re-inspect the DTCs. x If immobilizer system DTCs are not recorded even if the engine cannot be started, perform symptom troubleshooting. (See 01-03-12 NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [ZJ, ZY].) x The PID/data monitor function can be used to verify the number of key ID numbers programmed for a single vehicle. (See 09-02B-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) Note x Due to the possibility that the engine cannot be started because transmission between the key and the vehicle is obstructed, do not allow the following items to contact the key ring. — Any metallic object — Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system — Any electronic device, or any credit or EXAMPLES: other card with magnetic strips

End Of Sie

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

ac9uuw00001496

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3345400

Security light 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Verify the security light status. x If a malfunction is detected, the DTC pattern begins flashing after the security light flashes or illuminates for approx. 1 min according to the DTC. However, because there are DTCs which cannot be confirmed using the security light, verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing. — DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times. — DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times. — If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. x If there is no malfunction, the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. Note x The service code flashing pattern repeats 10 times. x If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. 3. If there is a malfunction, verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. When several DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light. Note x Because of the possibility that one malfunction cause could result in several DTCs being detected, erase the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then re-inspect the DTCs. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) M-MDS 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen. x Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self-test”. 2. Select “Module”. 3. Select “RKE”. x Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “Module test”. 2. Select “RKE”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self-test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. When several DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light. (See 09-02B-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)

09-02B–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Note x Because of the possibility that one malfunction cause could result in several DTCs being detected, erase the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then check for DTCs again. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)

End Of Sie CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3400300

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “RKE”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “RKE”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

End Of Sie DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3347100

Note x The security light flashes or illuminates under the following conditions when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position. x If there is any malfunction: — DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table below repeats 10 times. — DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table below repeats 10 times. — If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. x If there is no malfunction: — The security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and then turns off. DTC Security light flashing pattern

11

Keyless warning light

Illuminated

M-MDS display* Keyless control PCM module

B10D9:87

Detection Condition

No detected P1260:0 communication with the 0 coil antenna.

Reference

(See 09-02B-6 SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)

09-02B–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND DTC Security light flashing pattern

Keyless warning light

M-MDS display* Keyless control PCM module

Detection Condition

x Coil antenna malfunction x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.

Illuminated

B10D5:13

P1260:0 0

Not illuminated

B10D7:05

P1260:0 Key ID number program 0 error

Not illuminated

B10D7:94

P1260:0 The key ID number data 0 cannot be read.

14

Not illuminated

B10D7:81

The keyless control P1260:0 module cannot read key 0 ID number data normally.

15

Not illuminated

B10D7:51

Keyless control module P1260:0 detected unprogrammed 0 key ID number.

12

13

09-02B–4

Reference

(See 09-02B-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-9 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-11 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-13 SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-14 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND DTC Security light flashing pattern

Keyless warning light

M-MDS display* Keyless control PCM module

Detection Condition

16

Not illuminated

U0100:87

Communication error between the keyless P1260:0 control module and the 0 PCM (no response/ condition mismatch)

21

Illuminated

B10D8:00

P1260:0 Only one key has been 0 programmed.

22

Not illuminated

B10DA:51

Communication error P1260:0 between keyless control 0 module and PCM (data transfer error)

23

Not illuminated

B10DA:62

ID number data between P1260:0 keyless control module 0 and PCM are different.

Reference

(See 09-02B-16 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-17 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-18 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-19 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)

09-02B–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND DTC M-MDS display* Keyless control PCM module

Keyless warning light

Security light flashing pattern

Illuminated

U0001:88

Illuminated

U0100:00

Not illuminated

*

Detection Condition

Reference

(See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) U0073:0 Module communication (See 09-02I-1 0 error (HS-CAN) FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) PCM communication error (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

: The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and refer to the following: B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network communication system.

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]

id0902e3353000

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-02B–6

11 B10D9:87

No detected communication with coil antenna.

P1260:00 x x x x x

ENG 10 A fuse malfunction The coil antenna is pulled out. Coil antenna malfunction Keyless control module malfunction Related wiring harnesses malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND System wiring diagram COIL ANTENNA

IG1

B

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

C

2D

D

2B

F

3N

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

COIL ANTENNA WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

F

*

D

C

B

*

* 2L

2I *

2G

* 2C 2A 2H 2F 2D 2B

3AB 3Y 3V * 3P * * 3G * * 3N 3K 3AC 3Z 3W * * * * * 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C

am2zzw0000511

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY COIL ANTENNA CORRECTLY INSTALLED

Yes No

x Verify the installation condition of the coil antenna. x Is the coil antenna correctly installed? (Is the connector pulled out?) 2

FUSE INSPECTION x x x x

3

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY x x x x

4

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ENG 10 A fuse. Is the fuse normal? Disconnect the coil antenna connector. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage at coil antenna connector terminal B. — Is the voltage 8 V or more?

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN COIL ANTENNA AND GROUND

Action Go to the next step. Install the coil antenna correctly, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the fuse, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the coil antenna and the keyless control module, then go to Step 9.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal C and ground. x Is there continuity? 5

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (INPUT) FOR CONTINUITY x Disconnect the keyless control module connector x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal C and keyless control module connector terminal 2D. x Is there continuity?

09-02B–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step 6

Inspection

Action

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the coil antenna and the keyless control module, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Replacing the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Replacing the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step.

Yes

No

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal D and keyless control module connector terminal 2B. x Is there continuity? 7

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT x x x x

8

Connect the coil antenna connector. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage at coil antenna connector terminal C. — Is the voltage 8 V or more?

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal D and ground. x Is there continuity?

9

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D9:87 — PCM:P1260:00 10

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]

id0902e3353100

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

12 B10D5:13

x Coil antenna malfunction x PCM determined a malfunction in coil antenna even though it is normal.

P1260:00 x Coil antenna malfunction x Poor connection of the coil antenna connector x PCM malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CONNECTOR x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the coil antenna connector. Is the coil antenna connector and the keyless control module connector securely connected without corrosion, damage or disconnected pins.

09-02B–8

Yes

No

Action x Replacing the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Securely connect the connectors, and go to the next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D5:13 — PCM:P1260:00 3

No

Action Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3353200

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

13 B10D7:05

Key ID number program error

P1260:00 x Errors during key ID number program procedure x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in engine not starting. — Spare keys EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

— Keys for other vehicles equipped with immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips

09-02B–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02B-20 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEY (See 09-02B-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are two or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:05 — PCM:P1260:00

3

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02B–10

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. x Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer system-related parts programming. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3356000

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

13 B10D7:94

Key ID number data cannot be read.

P1260:00 x There is no transponder in the key x Transponder malfunction (key code is not output) x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in engine not starting. — Spare keys EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

— Keys for other vehicles equipped with immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips x Coil antenna malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Is the DTC displayed again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

2

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Is the DTC displayed again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:05 — PCM:P1260:00

Action Yes No

Go to Step 3. Go to the next step.

Yes

Security light: 13, M-MDS: Inspect B10D7:05/ P1260:00. (See 09-02B-9 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.

No

09-02B–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step 3

Inspection

VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT x Are there any keys with which the engine can be started, other than the key that is a cause of the displayed DTC?

4

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY OR COIL ANTENNA x Program an additional key. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

5

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY OR COIL ANTENNA x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Using another valid key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

6

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

7

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

09-02B–12

Action Yes No

Go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the coil antenna, then go to Step 6. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 8.

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes No

Replace the coil antenna, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 8.

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step 8

Inspection

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Yes No

Action Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3356600

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

14 B10D7:81

The keyless control module cannot read key ID number data normally.

P1260:00 x x x x x

Transponder (key) malfunction Coil antenna installation malfunction Coil antenna malfunction Keyless control module malfunction If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in engine not starting. — Spare keys EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

— Keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY COIL ANTENNA CORRECTLY INSTALLED x Verify the installation condition of the coil antenna. x Is the coil antenna correctly installed? (Is the connector not completely connected?)

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Install the coil antenna correctly, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

09-02B–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT x Using another programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x If there is not another programmed key, program an additional key and turn the ignition key to the ON position using the programmed key. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00

3

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x Using another programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00

4

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

No

Yes

No

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00 5

Yes

Action Replace the coil antenna, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 4.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3356700

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-02B–14

15 B10D7:51

Keyless control module has detected unprogrammed key ID number.

P1260:00 x x x x

No keys have been programmed after replacing keyless control module. Unprogrammed key used Attempt made to program ninth key Keyless control module malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02B-20 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEY (See 09-02B-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are one or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02B-20 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEY (See 09-02B-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are eight keys programmed?

3

INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 3.

Yes

Erase the key ID number, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

No

Yes

x Program the key ID number. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Note x Two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine. x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:51 — PCM:P1260:00 4

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10D7:51 — PCM:P1260:00

5

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

No

Yes

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02B–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3356800

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

16 U0100:87

Communication error between keyless control module and PCM (no response/condition mismatch)

P1260:00 x Malfunction in wiring harness (CAN line) between keyless control module and PCM x PCM malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the keyless control module or PCM, or both? — U0001:88

2

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output? — Keyless control module: U0100:87 — PCM:P1260:00

3

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: U0100:87 — PCM:P1260:00

4

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02B–16

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

x Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) x Go to the next step. Go to step 4.

No

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3358000

Security light flashing pattern Keyless DTC M-MDS control display module PCM POSSIBLE CAUSE

21 B10D8:00

Only one key has been programmed.

P1260:00 Only one key has been programmed.

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02B-20 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEY (See 09-02B-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are two or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY DTCs x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B108D:00 — PCM:P1260:00

3

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B108D:00 — PCM:P1260:00

4

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Action x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 3. x Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer system-related parts programming. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 4.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02B–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3358500

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

22 B10DA:51

Communication error between keyless control module and PCM (data transfer error)

P1260:00 x Malfunction in wiring harness (CAN line) between keyless control module and PCM x Keyless control module malfunction x PCM malfunction x The immobilizer system-related parts have not been programmed after replacing the keyless control module.

Diagnostic Procedure Step Inspection 1 VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the keyless control module or PCM, or both? — U0001:88 2 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE x After replacing the keyless control module, have the immobilizer system-related parts been programmed?

3

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

4

EXAMINE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND PCM x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

09-02B–18

Yes

No

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

Go to step 7. x Perform programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts only when replacing the keyless control module. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. x Perform programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts only when replacing the PCM. (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step Inspection 5 EXAMINE PCM x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00 6

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

No Yes

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

7

No

Action x Replace the PCM and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7. Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3358600

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Keyless M-MDS control display module PCM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

23 B10DA:62

ID number data between keyless control module and PCM are different.

P1260:00 x Necessary procedures were not performed using the M-MDS after replacing PCM. x Keyless control module malfunction x PCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step Inspection 1 VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the keyless control module or PCM, or both? — U0001:88

Yes

No

Action Perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

09-02B–19

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Step Inspection 2 EXAMINE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND

Yes

PCM x Perform programming of immobilizer system-related parts only when replacing the PCM (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00 3

EXAMINE PCM

No

No

x Replace the PCM and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00 4

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Keyless control module: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00

5

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

Action x Replace the keyless control module and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

No Yes

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]

id0902e3400500

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “RKE”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “RKE”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

09-02B–20

DLC-2 am2zzw0000210

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)] id0902e3345900

PID name (definition) NUMKEY (Number of key ID numbers programmed in keyless control module)

Detection Condition Number of programmed key ID numbers: 0—8

End Of Sie

09-02B–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

09-02C ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . System wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05 /P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02C–1 09-02C–2 09-02C–2 09-02C–2 09-02C–3 09-02C–3 09-02C–5 09-02C–5 09-02C–5 09-02C–7 09-02C–7 09-02C–8 09-02C–8 09-02C–9 09-02C–9

SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–11 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–11 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–12 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–12 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–13 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–13 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–14 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–14 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–15 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–15 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–16 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–16 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–17 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–18

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id0902e5345500

x DTCs are recorded in the PCM and instrument cluster when a malfunction is detected. The stored DTCs can be verified using the flashing pattern of the security light and M-MDS. There are some DTCs which cannot be verified using the security light. Verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x If more than one DTC is detected, the security light only displays the DTC with the lowest number. Begin repairs based on the DTC displayed by the security light. All DTCs can be read by the M-MDS. x It is possible for several DTCs to be displayed for one malfunction cause. Erase the DTCs after one repair and then re-inspect the DTCs. x If immobilizer system DTCs are not recorded even if the engine cannot be started, perform symptom troubleshooting. (See 01-03-12 NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [ZJ, ZY].) x The PID/data monitor function can be used to verify the number of key ID numbers programmed for a single vehicle. (See 09-02C-17 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) Note x Due to the possibility that the engine cannot be started because transmission between the key and the vehicle is obstructed, do not allow the following items to contact the key ring. — Any metallic object — Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system — Any electronic device, or any credit or EXAMPLES: other card with magnetic strips

End Of Sie

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

ac9uuw00001496

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5345400

Security Light 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Verify the security light status. x If a malfunction is detected, the DTC pattern begins flashing after the security light flashes or illuminates for approx. 1 min according to the DTC. However, because there are DTCs which cannot be confirmed using the security light, verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing. — DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times. — DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times. — If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. x If there is no malfunction, the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. Note x The service code flashing pattern repeats 10 times. x If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. 3. If there is a malfunction, verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. When several DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light. Note x Because of the possibility that one malfunction cause could result in several DTCs being detected, erase the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then re-inspect the DTCs. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the Instrument cluster. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) M-MDS 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen. x Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self-test”. 2. Select “Module”. 3. Select “IC”. x Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “Module test”. 2. Select “IC”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self-test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. When several DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light. (See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) Note

09-02C–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] x Because of the possibility that one malfunction cause could result in several DTCs being detected, erase the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then check for DTCs again. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the Instrument cluster. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)

End Of Sie CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5400300

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000210 screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

End Of Sie DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5347100

Note x The security light flashes or illuminates under the following conditions when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position. x There is a malfunction: — DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table below repeats 10 times. — DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table below repeats 10 times. — If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed. x There is no malfunction — The security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and then turns off. DTC Security light flashing pattern

11

12

M-MDS display* Instrument PCM cluster

B10D9:87

B10D5:13

P1260:00

P1260:00

Detection Condition

No detected communication with the coil antenna.

x Coil antenna malfunction x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.

Page

(See 09-02C-5 SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-7 SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)

09-02C–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] DTC Security light flashing pattern

M-MDS display* Instrument PCM cluster

Detection Condition

B10D7:05

P1260:00 Key ID number program error

B10D7:94

P1260:00

14

B10D7:81

The instrument cluster cannot P1260:00 read key ID number data normally.

15

B10D7:51

The instrument cluster has P1260:00 detected an unprogrammed key ID number.

16

U0100:87

Communication error between P1260:00 the instrument cluster and the PCM (no response)

21

B10D8:00

P1260:00

22

B10DA:51

Communication error between P1260:00 the instrument cluster and the PCM (data transfer failure)

23

B10DA:62

Communication error between P1260:00 the instrument cluster and the PCM (condition mismatch)

U0001:88

U0073:00

U0100:00

-

13 The key ID number data cannot be read.

Only one key has been programmed.

Module communication error (HS-CAN)

Not illuminated

09-02C–4

PCM communication error

Page

(See 09-02C-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-9 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-11 SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-12 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-13 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-14 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-15 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-16 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] *

: The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and refer to the following: B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network communication system.

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] id0902e5353000

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

11 No detected communication with coil antenna.

B10D9:87 P1260:00

x x x x

POSSIBLE CAUSE

METER 10 A fuse malfunction Coil antenna malfunction Instrument cluster malfunction Related wiring harnesses malfunction

System wiring diagram IG1

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

COIL ANTENNA

B

C

2M

D

2Q

F

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

COIL ANTENNA WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

F

*

D

C

B

*

* *

2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M *

2T 2R

*

*

* *

* 2G 2J *

* *

* 2A 2D 2B

am2zzw0000089

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY COIL ANTENNA CORRECTLY INSTALLED

Yes No

x Verify the installation condition of the coil antenna. x Is the coil antenna correctly installed? (Is the connector pulled out?) 2

FUSE INSPECTION x x x x

3

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the METER 10 A fuse. Is the fuse normal?

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY x x x x

Disconnect the coil antenna connector. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage at coil antenna connector terminal B. — Is the voltage 8 V or more?

Action Go to the next step. Install the coil antenna correctly, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the fuse, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 9.

09-02C–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN COIL ANTENNA AND GROUND

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the coil antenna and the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the coil antenna and the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Replacing the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Replacing the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step.

Yes

No

x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal C and ground. x Is there continuity? 5

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (INPUT) FOR CONTINUITY x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal C and instrument cluster connector terminal 2M. x Is there continuity?

6

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal D and instrument cluster connector terminal 2Q. x Is there continuity?

7

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT x Connect the coil antenna connector. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Measure the voltage at coil antenna connector terminal C. — Is the voltage 8 V or more?

8

INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY x Measure the continuity of the wiring harness between coil antenna connector terminal ground. x Is there continuity?

9

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Clear the DTC. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify if any DTCs are displayed. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D9:87 — PCM:P1260:00 10

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02C–6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5353100

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

12 B10D5:13

x Coil antenna malfunction x PCM determined a malfunction in coil antenna even though it is normal.

P1260:00 x Coil antenna malfunction x Poor connection of the coil antenna connector x PCM malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CONNECTOR x x x x

2

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the coil antenna connector. Is the coil antenna connector and the instrument cluster connector securely connected without corrosion, damage or disconnected pins.

Verify after repair x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D5:13 — PCM:P1260:00

3

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Yes

No

Action x Replace the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Securely connect the connectors, and go to the next step.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02C–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5353200

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

13 B10D7:05

Key ID number program error

P1260:00 x Errors during key ID number program procedure x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in engine not starting. — Spare EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

keys — Keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02C-17 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEYS (See 09-02C-18 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are two or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:05 — PCM:P1260:00

3

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02C–8

Yes No

Yes

Action Go to the next step. Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer system-related parts programming. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5356000

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

13 B10D7:94

Key ID number data cannot be read.

P1260:00 x There is no transponder in the key x Transponder malfunction (key code is not output) x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in the engine not starting. — Spare EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

keys — Keys for other vehicles equipped with immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips x Coil antenna malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Is the DTC displayed again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

2

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Is the DTC displayed again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:05 — PCM: 1260:00

3

VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT x Are there any keys with which the engine can be started other than the key that is a cause of the displayed DTC?

Action Yes No

Go to Step 3. Go to the next step.

Yes

No

Security light: 13, inspect DTCs B10D7:05/P1260:00. (See 09-02C-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

09-02C–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY OR COIL ANTENNA x Program an additional key. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

5

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY OR COIL ANTENNA x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Using another valid key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

6

INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

7

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:94 — PCM:P1260:00

8

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02C–10

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Replace the coil antenna, then go to Step 6. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 8.

Replace the coil antenna, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 8.

x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5356600

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

14 B10D7:81

Instrument cluster cannot read key ID number data normally.

P1260:00 x Transponder (key) malfunction x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in engine not starting. — Spare EXAMPLES:

METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD

METAL PART OF ANOTHER KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD

POSSIBLE CAUSE

KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY

keys — Keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system — Any metallic object — Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips x Coil antenna installation malfunction x Coil antenna malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY COIL ANTENNA CORRECTLY INSTALLED

Yes No

x Verify the installation condition of the coil antenna. x Is the coil antenna correctly installed? (Is the connector not completely connected?) 2

VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT x Using another programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x If there is not another programmed key, program an additional key and turn the ignition key to the ON position using the programmed key. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00

Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. Install the coil antenna correctly, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Replace the coil antenna, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Dispose of the malfunctioning key. x Program a new key if necessary. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 4.

09-02C–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 3

Inspection

INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Yes

x Using another programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00 4

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:81 — PCM:P1260:00 5

No

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Action x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] id0902e5356700

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

15 B10D7:51

Instrument cluster has detected unprogrammed key ID number.

P1260:00 x x x x

POSSIBLE CAUSE

No keys have been programmed after replacing instrument cluster. Unprogrammed key used Attempt made to program a ninth key Instrument cluster malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02C-17 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEYS (See 09-02C-18 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are one or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02C-17 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEYS (See 09-02C-18 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are eight keys programmed?

09-02C–12

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 3.

Yes

Erase the key ID number, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

No

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 3

Inspection

INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Yes

x Program the key ID number. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Note x Two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine.

No

Action x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:51 — PCM:P1260:00 4

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

5

No

Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10D7:51 — PCM:P1260:00

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] id0902e5356800

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

16 U0100:87

Communication error between instrument cluster and PCM (no response)

P1260:00 x Malfunction in wiring harness (CAN line) between instrument cluster and PCM x PCM malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the instrument cluster or PCM, or both? — U0001:88

Yes

No

Action Repair the malfunctioning part according to the separate DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

09-02C–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output? — Instrument cluster: U0100:87 — PCM:P1260:00 3

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

No

x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: U0100:87 — PCM:P1260:00 4

No

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Action x Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) x Go to the next step. Go to step 4.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5358000

Security light flashing pattern Instrument DTC M-MDS cluster display PCM POSSIBLE CAUSE

21 B10D8:00

Only one key has been programmed.

P1260:00 Only one key has been programmed.

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS x Using the M-MDS, perform the PID/data monitor inspection and verify the programmed keys. (See 09-02C-17 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) — NUMKEYS (See 09-02C-18 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are two or more keys programmed?

2

VERIFY DTCs x Using the programmed key, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B108D:00 — PCM:P1260:00

09-02C–14

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to Step 3. x Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer system-related parts programming. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 4.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 3

Inspection

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B108D:00 — PCM:P1260:00 4

No

Action Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5358500

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

22 B10DA:51

Communication error between instrument cluster and PCM (data transfer failure)

P1260:00 x Malfunction in wiring harness (CAN line) between instrument cluster and PCM x Instrument cluster malfunction x PCM malfunction x The immobilizer system-related parts have not been programmed after replacing the instrument cluster.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the instrument cluster or PCM, or both? — U0001:88

2

INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER x After replacing the instrument cluster, have the immobilizer system-related parts been programmed?

3

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

Yes

No

Yes No

Yes

No

Action Repair the malfunctioning part according to the separate DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

Go to Step 7. x Perform programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts only when replacing the instrument cluster. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. x Perform programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts only when replacing the PCM. (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

09-02C–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 4

Inspection

EXAMINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PCM x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

5

EXAMINE PCM

Yes

No

No

x Replace the PCM and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7. Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

6

No Yes

VERIFY AFTER REPAIR x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:51 — PCM:P1260:00

7

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Action x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

id0902e5358600

DTC

Security light flashing pattern Instrument M-MDS cluster display PCM

23 B10DA:62

ID number data in instrument cluster and PCM do not match.

P1260:00 x Necessary procedures were not performed using M-MDS after replacing PCM. x Instrument cluster malfunction x PCM malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Is a DTC displayed for either the instrument cluster or PCM, or both? — U0001:88

09-02C–16

Yes

No

Action Repair the malfunctioning part according to the separate DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) Go to the next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Step 2

Inspection

EXAMINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND PCM

Yes

x

Perform programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts only when replacing the PCM (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00 3

EXAMINE PCM

No

No

x Replace the PCM and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. Inspect DTC P1260:00. (See 01-02A-148 DTC P1260:00 [ZJ, ZY].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00

4

Verify after repair x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x Are DTCs output again? — Instrument cluster: B10DA:62 — PCM:P1260:00

5

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Action x Replace the instrument cluster and program the immobilizer system-related parts. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

No Yes

x Verify if other DTCs are displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] id0902e5400500

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000210

09-02C–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] id0902e5345900

PID name (definition) NUMKEYS (Number of key ID numbers programmed in the instrument cluster)

End Of Sie

09-02C–18

Detection Condition Number of programmed key ID numbers: 0–8

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

09-02D ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . READING FREEZE FRAME DATA [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . CLEARING FREEZE FRAME DATA [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . DTC INSPECTION [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . CLEARING DTC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . DTC B109F:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B109F:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B109F:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B10A5:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B10A5:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]. . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02D–2 09-02D–2 09-02D–3 09-02D–3 09-02D–4 09-02D–4 09-02D–5 09-02D–5 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–6 09-02D–7 09-02D–7 09-02D–8 09-02D–8 09-02D–8 09-02D–8 09-02D–9 09-02D–9 09-02D–9 09-02D–9 09-02D–9 09-02D–10 09-02D–10 09-02D–10 09-02D–10

Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–10 DTC B10A5:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–11 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–11 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–11 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–12 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–12 DTC U0300:00, U2100:00, [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 DTC U3000:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–14 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–14 DTC B1172:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–16 DTC B1174:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–19 DTC B1175:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–24 DTC B1176:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–26 DTC B1178:11 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–28 DTC B11C0:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–30 DTC B11C1:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–32 DTC P254F:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–34 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–36 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] . . . . . . 09-02D–36 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–36

End of Toc WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

09-02D–1

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

id0902g7344500

Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles IG B+

METER 10 A B+ INSTRUMENT

ROOM 15 A

CLUSTER

U W WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

PUSH SWITCH

O

KEY REMINDER SWITCH

P

G

BCM

SECURITY LIGHT

M

N

E

DOOR LATCH SWITCH

X HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

S

WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

THEHT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

B+ CAN-H

K Q CAN-L

I BCM KEYLESS RECEIVER

B+

V UNLOCK

LOCK

T B+ WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

LOCK LINK SWITCH WITH DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM

R B+

LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH

C H BONNET LATCH SWITCH

INTRUDER SENSOR B+

J THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

am2zzw0000378

09-02D–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles IG B+

METER 10 A B+ INSTRUMENT

ROOM 15 A

CLUSTER

U W WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

PUSH SWITCH

KEY REMINDER SWITCH

SECURITY LIGHT

THEHT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

BCM E

S

X HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

K WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

I

CAN-H

CAN-L

B+

BCM Q

V UNLOCK

KEYLESS RECEIVER

LOCK

T B+

LOCK LINK SWITCH B+

WITH DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM

HORN 15 A

WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

H BONNET LATCH SWITCH

F

THEFT-DETERRENT HORN

J

am2zzw0000465

End Of Sie READING FREEZE FRAME DATA [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7466100

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the READING FREEZE FRAME DATA.

09-02D–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “VSM Service Functions”. 3. Then, select the following item from the screen menu. 1. Select “Read FFD”. 4. Read the record according to the directions on the screen.

DLC-2

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000065

CLEARING FREEZE FRAME DATA [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

id0902g7466200

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the CLEARING FREEZE FRAME DATA. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “VSM Service Functions”. 3. Then, select the following item from the screen menu. 1. Select “Clear FFD”. 4. Clear the record according to the directions on the screen.

End Of Sie DTC INSPECTION [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

DLC-2 am2zzw0000065

id0902g7345400

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “VSM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “VSM”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000065 screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the theft-deterrent control module. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM])

End Of Sie

09-02D–4

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] CLEARING DTC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

id0902g7400300

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “VSM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “VSM”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

am2zzw0000065

End Of Sie DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC M-MDS display

Detection Condition

B109F:49*1

Intruder sensor internal malfunction

B109F:86*1

Signal error from intruder sensor

B109F:87*1

Communication error between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control module

B10A5:49*1

Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction

B10A5:86*1

Signal error from theft-deterrent siren

B10A5:87*1

Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and theftdeterrent control module

B1172:13

Door lock-link switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction

B1174:13

Door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit malfunction

B1175:13*1

Front door latch switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction

B1176:13*1

Front door latch switch (passenger-side) circuit malfunction

B1178:11*1

Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction

B11C0:13*1

Rear door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction

B11C1:13*1

Rear door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction

P254F:13

Bonnet latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction

U0001:88

Module communication error (HS-CAN)

id0902g7347100

Reference (See 09-02D-6 DTC B109F:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-6 DTC B109F:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-8 DTC B109F:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-9 DTC B10A5:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-10 DTC B10A5:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-11 DTC B10A5:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-16 DTC B1172:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-19 DTC B1174:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-24 DTC B1175:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-26 DTC B1176:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-28 DTC B1178:11 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-30 DTC B11C0:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-32 DTC B11C1:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-34 DTC P254F:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

09-02D–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC M-MDS display U0100:00

PCM communication error

U0140:00

BCM communication error

Detection Condition

Reference

U0300:00 U2100:00 U3000:49 U3003:16 U3003:17

Configuration error Theft-deterrent control module internal malfunction Theft-deterrent control module power supply voltage is other than 9–16 V

(See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02D-13 DTC U0300:00, U2100:00, [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-13 DTC U3000:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) (See 09-02D-13 DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].)

*1 : Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

End Of Sie DTC B109F:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850000

Detection Condition x Intruder sensor internal malfunction Possible Causes x Intruder sensor malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B109F:49 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B109F:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Detection Condition x Signal error from intruder sensor Possible Causes x Short circuit in wiring harness between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control module x Intruder sensor malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

09-02D–6

id0902g7850100

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram B+

BCM

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

J

W

E

C

I

INTRUDER SENSOR

L A B THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

D

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

X

V

T

B R

P

N

K

I

G

E

C

*

J

H

*

*

* *

* L

I *

* *

E *

* *

* *

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* D

A B

am2zzw0000232

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the intruder sensor connector. Inspect the intruder sensor connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent control module connector or terminal.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the intruder sensor and the theft-deterrent control module.

x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the theft-deterrent control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN INTRUDER SENSOR AND THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the intruder sensor connector or terminal.

x Inspect the wiring harness between intruder sensor connector terminal I and theft-deterrent control module connector terminal C for the following: — Short to body ground — Short to power supply x Is the wiring harness normal?

09-02D–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR

Yes

x x x x

Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Inspect the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION.) x Is the intruder sensor normal?

No

INSPECT DTCs

5

Action Replace the intruder sensor, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B109F:86 displayed again?

Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

End Of Sie DTC B109F:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850200

Detection Condition x Communication error between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control module Possible Causes x Open circuit or short in wiring harness between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control module x Intruder sensor malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram B+

BCM

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

J

W

E

C

I

INTRUDER SENSOR

L A B THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

D

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

X

V

T

B R

P

N

K

I

G

E

C

*

J

H

*

*

* *

* L

I *

* *

E *

* *

* *

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* D

A B

am2zzw0000232

09-02D–8

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the intruder sensor connector. Inspect the intruder sensor connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent control module connector or terminal.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the intruder sensor and the theft-deterrent control module.

Yes

Replace the intruder sensor, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the theft-deterrent control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN INTRUDER SENSOR AND THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the intruder sensor connector or terminal.

x Inspect the wiring harness between intruder sensor connector terminal I and theft-deterrent control module connector terminal C for the following: — Short to body ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? 4

INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR x x x x

Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Inspect the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION.) x Is the intruder sensor normal? 5

INSPECT DTCs

No

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B109F:87 displayed again?

No

Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10A5:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850300

Detection Condition x Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction Possible Causes x Theft-deterrent siren malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B10A5:49 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the theft-deterrent siren. (See 09-14-102 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02D–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC B10A5:86 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

id0902g7850400

Detection Condition x Signal error from theft-deterrent siren Possible Causes x Short to wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren and theft-deterrent control module x Theft-deterrent siren malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram B+

BCM

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

J

W

E

C

I

INTRUDER SENSOR

L A B THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

D

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

X

V

T

B R

P

N

K

I

G

E

C

*

J

H

*

*

* *

* L

I *

* *

E *

* *

* *

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* D

A B

am2zzw0000233

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the theft-deterrent siren connector. Inspect the theft-deterrent siren connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the theft-deterrent control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02D–10

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent siren connector or terminal.

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent control module connector or terminal.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Step 3

Inspection

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the theftdeterrent siren and the theft-deterrent control module.

Yes

Replace the theft-deterrent siren, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-102 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

x Inspect the wiring harness between theftdeterrent siren connector terminal B and theftdeterrent control module connector terminal C for the following: — Short to body ground — Short to power supply x Is the wiring harness normal? 4

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN x x x x

Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Inspect the theft-deterrent siren. (See 09-14-104 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN INSPECTION.) x Is the theft-deterrent siren normal? 5

INSPECT DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B10A5:86 displayed again?

No

Yes

No

Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10A5:87 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850500

Detection Condition x Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and theft-deterrent control module Possible Causes x Open or short circuit to wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren and theft-deterrent control module x Theft-deterrent siren malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

09-02D–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] System Wiring Diagram B+

BCM

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

J

W

E

C

I

INTRUDER SENSOR

L A B THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

D

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

X

V

T

B R

P

N

K

I

G

E

C

*

J

H

*

*

* *

* L

I *

* *

E *

* *

* *

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* D

A B

am2zzw0000077

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN CONNECTOR

Yes No

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the theft-deterrent siren connector. Inspect the theft-deterrent siren connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent control module connector or terminal.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the theftdeterrent siren and the theft-deterrent control module.

x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the theft-deterrent control module connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins) x Are the connector and terminals normal? 3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE x Inspect the wiring harness between theftdeterrent siren connector terminal B and theftdeterrent control module connector terminal C for the following: — Short to body ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal?

09-02D–12

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the theft-deterrent siren connector or terminal.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

Yes

x x x x

Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Inspect the theft-deterrent siren. (See 09-14-104 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN INSPECTION.) x Is the theft-deterrent siren normal? 5

No

INSPECT DTCs

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC B10A5:87 displayed again?

No

Action Replace the theft-deterrent siren, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-102 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0300:00, U2100:00, [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850600

Detection Condition x Possible configuration error Possible Causes x Configuration has not been correctly performed for some reason x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC U0300:00 or U2100:00 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3000:49 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM]

id0902g7850800

Detection Condition x Theft-deterrent system control module internal malfunction Possible Causes x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC U3000:49 displayed?

Yes

No

Action Replace the theft-deterrent system control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7850900

Detection Condition x Theft-deterrent control module power supply voltage is other than 9—16 V Possible Causes x ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between battery and theft-deterrent control module x Battery malfunction

09-02D–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction System Wiring Diagram B+ ROOM 15 A BCM

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

J

W

E

C

I

INTRUDER SENSOR

L A B THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

D

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

X

V

T

B R

P

N

*

J

H

*

*

* *

* L

I *

* *

E *

* *

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

* *

* D

A B

am2zzw0000253

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

FUSE INSPECTION x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ROOM 15 A fuse. Is the fuse normal?

09-02D–14

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the fuse.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Step 2

Inspection

BATTERY INSPECTION x Measure the battery positive voltage. x Is the voltage between 9—16 V?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Higher than specification x Replace or inspection the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Go to Step 4.

Lower than specification

3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

Yes No

x Replace or charge the battery. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) x Go to Step 4. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the battery and the theft-deterrent control module.

x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the wiring harness between the battery and theft-deterrent control module connector terminal W for the following: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? 4

INSPECT BCM x x x x

Reconnect the disconnected connectors. Connect the negative battery cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage of BCM connector terminal 3P. (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) x Is the wiring harness normal? 5

VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Verify DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 displayed?

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the theft-deterrent control module. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

End Of Sie

09-02D–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC B1172:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

id0902g7111400

Door lock-link switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the door lock-link switch (driver-side) unlock-side circuit with the door lock-link switch (driver-side) unlocked. x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) terminal D—Body ground x Door lock-link switch (driver-side) malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) terminal L—Theft-deterrent control module terminal V x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE)

V

UNLOCK

L

D J

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W X

U V

S T

Q R

09-02D–16

O P

M N

K K

I J

G H

E F

C D

LOCK

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER-SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

K

I

G

E

C

A

B

L

J

H

F

D

B

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the door lock-link switch (driver-side) unlocked. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER-SIDE) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) terminal L x Is there any voltage? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) terminal D x Is there continuity? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) x Inspect the door lock-link switch (driver-side). (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driverside), then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8.

No Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

09-02D–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

8

9

INSPECTION INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal V x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the door lock-link switch (driver-side) unlocked. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

End Of Sie

09-02D–18

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC B1174:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

id0902g7111300

Door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit with the door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) unlocked.

All door lock-link switches do not operate: x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal B/Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B/Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L—Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

Only the door lock-link switch (passenger-side) does not operate:

POSSIBLE CAUSE

x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal J—Body ground x Door lock-link switch (passenger-side) malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal B—Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

Only the door lock-link switch (LR) does not operate: x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground x Door lock-link switch (LR) malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B—Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

Only the door lock-link switch (RR) does not operate: x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground x Door lock-link switch (RR) malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L—Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

09-02D–19

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION

Door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit malfunction

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) UNLOCK

B

J LOCK

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR) UNLOCK

T

B

J LOCK

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR) UNLOCK

L

D LOCK

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

K

I

G

E

C

A

X

V

T

R

P

N

K

J

H

F

D

B

L

J

H

F

D

B

09-02D–20

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/ RR) unlocked. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Operate the door lock-link switch lock and unlock. x Is there a door lock-link switch that does not operate?

INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE/LR/RR) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Is the voltage normal? (See 09-14-112 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.) INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER-SIDE) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal B x Is there any voltage?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 21.

Yes

All door lock-link switches do not operate: x Go to the next step. Only the door lock-link switch (passenger-side) does not operate: x Go to Step 5. Only the door lock-link switch (LR) does not operate: x Go to Step 10. Only the door lock-link switch (RR) does not operate: x Go to Step 15. Go to Step 20. Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 20. Go to the next step.

No Yes No

Yes No

Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 20. Go to Step 20.

No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 20. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes

09-02D–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

8

9

10

11

12

13

INSPECTION INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal J x Is there continuity? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) x Inspect the door lock-link switch (passengerside). (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Is there any voltage? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (LH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B x Is there any voltage? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J x Is there continuity? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR) x Inspect the door lock-link switch (LR). (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction?

09-02D–22

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 20.

Yes

Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side), then go to Step 20. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 20.

No

Yes

No

Repair or replace the wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal B and theft-deterrent control module terminal T. Go to Step 20. Go to Step 20.

No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 20. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 14.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 20.

Yes

Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator (LH), then go to Step 20. (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 20.

Yes

No

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 14

15

16

17

18

19

20

INSPECTION INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Is there any voltage? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (RH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L x Is there any voltage? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D x Is there continuity? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR) x Inspect the door lock-link switch (RR). (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal T x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/ RR) unlocked. (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present?

Yes

No

Yes

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring between rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B and theft-deterrent control module terminal T, then go to Step 20. Go to Step 20.

No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 20. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 19.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 20.

Yes

Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator (RH), then go to Step 20. (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 20. Repair or replace the wiring between rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L and theft-deterrent control module terminal T, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

No Yes

No

Yes

No

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

09-02D–23

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 21

INSPECTION VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

Yes

No

ACTION Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1175:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0902g7111500

Front door latch switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the front door latch switch (driver-side) circuit with the front door (driver-side) closed (front door latch switch (driver-side) on). x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) terminal D—Body ground x Front door latch switch (driver-side) malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) terminal B—Theft-deterrent control module terminal O x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) DOOR CLOSE ON

O

B

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER-SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W X

U V

S T

09-02D–24

Q R

O P

M N

K K

I J

G H

E F

C D

D

A B

K

I

G

E

C

A

L

J

H

F

D

B

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the front door (driver-side) closed (front door latch switch (driver-side) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER-SIDE) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (driver-side) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) terminal B x Is there any voltage? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) terminal D x Is there continuity? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) x Inspect the front door latch switch (driverside). (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driverside), then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8.

No

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

09-02D–25

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

INSPECTION INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (driverside) and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage between the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal O x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the front door (driver-side) closed (front door latch switch (driver-side) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

8

9

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1176:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0902g7111600

Front door latch switch (passenger-side) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the front door latch switch (passenger-side) circuit with the front door (passenger-side) closed (front door latch switch (passenger-side) on). x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal J—Body ground x Front door latch switch (passenger-side) malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal L—Theft-deterrent control module terminal M x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) DOOR CLOSE ON

L

M

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W X

U V

S T

Q R

09-02D–26

O P

M N

K K

I J

G H

E

C

F

D

J

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER-SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

K

I

G

E

C

A

B

L

J

H

F

D

B

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the front door (passenger-side) closed (front door latch switch (passenger-side) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER-SIDE) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal L x Is there any voltage? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) terminal J x Is there continuity? INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) x Inspect the front door latch switch (passenger-side). (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side), then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8.

No

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

09-02D–27

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

INSPECTION INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER-SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger-side) and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal M x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the front door (passenger-side) closed (front door latch switch (passenger-side) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

8

9

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1178:11 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

id0902g7111100

Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction x Short to ground in the liftgate latch switch circuit with the liftgate closed (liftgate latch switch off). x x x x

Liftgate latch switch connector or terminals malfunction Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction Liftgate latch switch malfunction Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Liftgate latch switch terminal C—Theft-deterrent control module terminal R x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH C

R

LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

X

V

T

R

P

N

K

J

H

F

D

B

09-02D–28

B

C D

A B

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the liftgate closed (liftgate latch switch off). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the liftgate latch switch connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND x Liftgate latch switch and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Liftgate latch switch terminal C x Is there continuity? INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH x Inspect the liftgate latch switch. (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the liftgate closed (liftgate latch switch off). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

Yes

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

No

Yes No

Yes No

Yes

No Yes

No

Yes

No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground, then go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Replace the liftgate latch switch, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02D–29

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DTC B11C0:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0902g7111700

Rear door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the rear door latch switch (RH) circuit with the rear door (RH) closed (rear door latch switch (RH) on). x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground x Rear door latch switch (RH) malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B—Theft-deterrent control module terminal N x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH) DOOR CLOSE ON

N

B

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

K

I

G

E

C

A

X

V

T

R

P

N

K

J

H

F

D

B

L

J

H

F

D

B

09-02D–30

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the rear door (RH) closed (rear door latch switch (RH) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (RH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B x Is there any voltage? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D x Is there continuity? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH) x Inspect the rear door latch switch (RH). (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator (RH), then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8. Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

No Yes No

09-02D–31

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

INSPECTION INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal N x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the rear door (RH) closed (rear door latch switch (RH) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

8

9

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B11C1:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

id0902g7111800

Rear door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the rear door latch switch (LH) circuit with the rear door (LH) closed (rear door latch switch (LH) on). x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground x Rear door latch switch (LH) malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L—Theft-deterrent control module terminal P x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH) DOOR CLOSE ON

P

L

REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W X

U V

S T

09-02D–32

Q R

O P

M N

K K

I J

J

G

E

C

A

K

I

G

E

C

A

H

F

D

B

L

J

H

F

D

B

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the rear door (LH) closed (rear door latch switch (LH) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (LH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L x Is there any voltage? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J x Is there continuity? INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH) x Inspect the rear door latch switch (LH). (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator (LH), then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8. Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

No Yes No

09-02D–33

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 7

8

9

INSPECTION INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal P x Is there any voltage? VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the rear door (LH) closed (rear door latch switch (LH) on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

ACTION Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC P254F:13 [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] DESCRIPTION DETECTION CONDITION

id0902g7111200

Bonnet latch switch circuit malfunction x Open circuit in the bonnet latch switch circuit with the bonnet closed (bonnet latch switch on). x Bonnet latch switch connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Bonnet latch switch terminal B—Body ground x Bonnet latch switch malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals: — Bonnet latch switch terminal A—Theft-deterrent control module terminal H x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE BONNET LATCH SWITCH H

A

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W X

U V

09-02D–34

S T

Q R

O P

M N

K K

I J

B

BONNET LATCH SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

G

E

C

A

H

F

D

B

B

A

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

INSPECTION CONFIRM THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE DTC x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the bonnet closed (bonnet latch switch on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Switch the ignition to off. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the bonnet latch switch connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? VERIFY MALFUNCTIONING LOCATION x Bonnet latch switch connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Bonnet latch switch terminal A x Is there any voltage? INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Bonnet latch switch connector is disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminal (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Bonnet latch switch terminal B x Is there continuity? INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH x Inspect the bonnet latch switch. (See 09-14-31 BONNET LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Is there any malfunction? INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Bonnet latch switch and theft-deterrent control module connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminal (wiring harness-side): — Theft-deterrent control module terminal H x Is there any voltage?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace the bonnet latch switch, then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8.

No Yes No

Yes No

Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step.

09-02D–35

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] STEP 8

9

INSPECTION VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTC using the M-MDS. (See 09-02D-5 CLEARING DTC [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Perform the theft-deterrent control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS with the bonnet closed (bonnet latch switch on). (See 09-02D-4 DTC INSPECTION [THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM].) x Is the same DTC present? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Are any DTCs present?

Yes

No

Yes

No

ACTION Replace the theft-deterrent control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-5 DTC TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7400500

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “VSM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “VSM”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000065

Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] id0902g7345900

Foreword 1. When the theft-deterrent control module switches to the alert mode, it stores the related theft-deterrent control module control status data. 2. Stored data up to the previous tow times can be checked using the PID/data monitor function. 3. There are two storage fields (TRG_1—TRG_2), and the latest data is TRG_1. PID name (definition) DTC_CNT (Number of DTCs) DRSW_D (Door latch switch (driver's door) status)

Unit/Operation 

Close/Open

09-02D–36

Data contents

Inspection item(s)

Terminal

x DTC detected: 1–255 x DTC not detected: 0

Separate DTC inspection



x Driver's door open: Open x Driver's door closed: Close

Door latch switch (driver's side)

O

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] PID name (definition) DRSW_P (Door latch switch (passenger' s door) status) DRSW_RR*

Unit/Operation

Data contents

Inspection item(s)

Terminal

Close/Open

x Passenger's door open: Open x Passenger's door closed: Close

Door latch switch (passenger's door)

M

Close/Open

x Rear door (RH) open: Open x Rear door (RH) closed: Close

Door latch switch (rear door (RH))

N

Close/Open

x Rear door (LH) open: Open x Rear door (LH) closed: Close

Door latch switch (rear door (LH))

P

Close/Open

x Bonnet open: Open x Bonnet closed: Close

Bonnet latch switch

H

Unlock/Lock

x Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Unlock

Door lock-link switch

V

Unlock/Lock

x Door lock knob other than driver's door locked: Lock Door lock-link switch x Door lock knob other than driver's door unlocked: Unlock

T

Close/Open

x Liftgate open: Close x Liftgate closed: Open

Liftgate latch switch

R

Off/On

x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: On x Driver's door lock knob locked: Off

Door lock-link switch

V

Off/On

x Door lock knob other than driver's door unlocked: On Door lock-link switch x Door lock knob other than driver's door locked: Off

T

Off/On

x Theft-deterrent control module power supply interrupted: On x Theft-deterrent control module power supply not interrupted: Off

W

1

(Door latch switch (rear door (RH)) status) DRSW_LR* 1

(Door latch switch (rear door (LH) status) HOOD_SW (Bonnet latch switch status) LLSW_D (Door locklink switch status) LLSW_P+R (Door latch switch (passenger' s door, rear) status) T_GATE_S W (Liftgate latch switch status) TRG1_01 (Door locklink switch status) TRG1_02 (Door latch switch (passenger' s door, rear) status) TRG1_03 (Theftdeterrent control module power supply voltage) TRG1_04 (Angle sensor status) TRG1_05 (Intruder sensor status)

Off/On

Off/On

Theft-deterrent control module

Note x Displayed but not used in the inspection. x Intruder sensor detected intrusion: On x Intruder sensor did not detect intruder sensor intrusion: Off

-

C

09-02D–37

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] PID name (definition) TRG1_06 (Door latch switch (driver's door) status) TRG1_07 (Door latch switch (passenger' s door) status)

Unit/Operation

TRG1_08*1 (Door latch switch (rear door (LH) status) TRG1_09*1 (Door latch switch (rear door (RH)) status) TRG1_10 (Liftgate latch switch status) TRG1_11 (Bonnet latch switch status) TRG1_12 (Ignition key cylinder status) TRG1_13 (Used key status) TRG1_ST_ A (Theftdeterrent system status) TRG1_ST_ B (Theftdeterrent system status) TRG2_01 (Door locklink switch status) TRG2_02 (Door latch switch (passenger' s door, rear) status)

09-02D–38

Data contents

Inspection item(s)

Terminal

Off/On

x Driver's door open: On x Driver's door closed: Off

Door latch switch (driver's side)

O

Off/On

x Passenger's door open: On x Passenger's door closed: Off

Door latch switch (passenger's door)

M

Off/On

x Rear door (LH) open: On x Rear door (LH) closed: Off

Door latch switch (rear door (LH))

P

Off/On

x Rear door (RH) open: On x Rear door (RH) closed: Off

Door latch switch (rear door (RH)

N

Off/On

x Liftgate open: On x Liftgate closed: Off

Liftgate latch switch

R

Off/On

x Bonnet open: On x Bonnet closed: Off

Bonnet latch switch

H

Off/On

x Key reminder switch or push switch off and ignition switch on: On Ignition key cylinder x Key reminder switch or push switch off and ignition switch off: Off



Off/On

Note x Displayed but not used in inspection.

-

Off/On

x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by preparatory mode: On Theft-deterrent control module x Theft-deterrent system initial mode: Off



Off/On

x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by mode: On x Theft-deterrent system stand-by preparatory mode: Off

Theft-deterrent control module



Off/On

x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: On x Driver's door lock knob locked: Off

Door lock-link switch

V

Off/On

x Door lock knob other than driver's door unlocked: On Door lock-link switch x Door lock knob other than driver's door locked: Off

T

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] PID name (definition) TRG2_03 (Theftdeterrent control module power supply voltage) TRG2_04 (Angle sensor status) TRG2_05 (Intruder sensor status) TRG2_06 (Door latch switch (driver's door) status) TRG2_07 (Door latch switch (passenger' s door) status) TRG2_08*1 (Door latch switch (rear door (LH) status) TRG2_09*1 (Door latch switch (rear door (RH)) status) TRG2_10 (Liftgate latch switch status) TRG2_11 (Bonnet latch switch status) TRG2_12 (Ignition key cylinder status) TRG2_13 (Used key status) TRG2_ST_ A (Theftdeterrent system status) TRG2_ST_ B (Theftdeterrent system status)

Unit/Operation

Data contents

Off/On

x Theft-deterrent control module power supply interrupted: On x Theft-deterrent control module power supply not interrupted: Off

Off/On

Inspection item(s)

Terminal

Theft-deterrent control module

Note x Displayed but not used in the inspection.

W

-

Off/On

x Intruder sensor detected intrusion: On x Intruder sensor did not detect intruder sensor intrusion: Off

C

Off/On

x Driver's door open: On x Driver's door closed: Off

Door latch switch (driver's side)

O

Off/On

x Passenger's door open: On x Passenger's door closed: Off

Door latch switch (passenger's door)

M

Off/On

x Rear door (LH) open: On x Rear door (LH) closed: Off

Door latch switch (rear door (LH))

P

Off/On

x Rear door (RH) open: On x Rear door (RH) closed: Off

Door latch switch (rear door (RH)

N

Off/On

x Liftgate open: On x Liftgate closed: Off

Liftgate latch switch

R

Off/On

x Bonnet open: On x Bonnet closed: Off

Bonnet latch switch

H

Off/On

x Key reminder switch or push switch off and ignition switch on: On Ignition key cylinder x Key reminder switch or push switch off and ignition switch off: Off



Off/On

Note x Displayed but not used in inspection.

-

Off/On

x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by preparatory mode: On Theft-deterrent control module x Theft-deterrent system initial mode: Off



Off/On

x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by mode: On x Theft-deterrent system stand-by preparatory mode: Off



Theft-deterrent control module

09-02D–39

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM] PID name (definition) VPWR (Theftdeterrent control module power supply voltage)

Unit/Operation

*1 : 5HB

End Of Sie

09-02D–40

V

Data contents

x Continuous: Approx. 12 V

Inspection item(s)

Battery

Terminal

W

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]

09-02E ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification Using Label or Inscribed Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEARING DTC [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02E–1 09-02E–1 09-02E–1 09-02E–2 09-02E–3

DTC TABLE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–3 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–4 LCD Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–4 Switch Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–5 Speaker Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–5 Radio Reception Condition Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–5 Center Panel Specification Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] End of Toc STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO] WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id0902f6358300

Note x All DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode should be entered in the Audio Repair Order Form. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to off. 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the FM/AM switch and the CD/AUX switch for 2 s or more. Note x If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the UP SEEK switch or DOWN SEEK switch. 4. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie

FM/AM SWITCH UP SEEK SWITCH DOWN SEEK SWITCH CD/AUX SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000495

SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO] id0902f6358400

Note x When asking the supplier (service center) for repair or replacement, identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form using the following procedures. Identification Using Label or Inscribed Lettering 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-02E–1

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] 3. Verify the supplier indicated on the label attached on each unit.

LABEL

am2zzw0000039

Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on. 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the Preset switch 5 for 3 s or more. LCD

PRESET SWITCH 5 POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

4. Identify the supplier code by referring to the LCD. Supplier code 01 02 03 04

Supplier name SANYO Automedia Panasonic Clarion Pioneer

Note am2zzw0000072

x The supplier code can also be identified from the DTC displays screen. 5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie SUPPLIER CODE

am2zzw0000072

09-02E–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] CLEARING DTC [AUDIO]

id0902f6400300

Caution x Before clearing the memory, be sure to enter all of the DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode in the Audio Repair Order Form. 1. Launch the on-board diagnostic test mode. (See 09-02E-1 STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO].) 2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the MENU switch for 2 s or more. 3. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie MENU SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

DTC TABLE [AUDIO] id0902f6363000

Screen display DTC (When starting onboard diagnostic function)

Malfunction description

Inferred cause/verified content

Battery voltage low 09:Er20

Audio does not function

09:Er21

Audio unclear or no audio from radio and CD

09:Er22

Radio not receiving signal

10:Er01

MP3 applicable CD player cannot implement insert and eject commands.

10:Er02

Cannot change tracks.

10:Er07

CD cannot playback (cannot operate)

10:Er10

MP3 applicable CD player does not operate.

21:Er17 21:Er18

Operation differs from the selected switch

x Verify the symptoms described by the customer (such as occurrence frequency and mode). x Short to ground in the wiring harness between the audio unit and speakers x Audio unit malfunction x Verify the sometimes described by the customer (such as time and place of occurrence, and radio frequency). x Audio unit malfunction Audio unit malfunction

Reference

(See 09-03E-6 NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO].)

(See 09-03E-9 NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [AUDIO].)

(See 09-03F-3 NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO].)

(See 09-03G-3 NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD].) (See 09-03G-3 NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD].) (See 09-03G-11 NO.11 TRACK Audio unit malfunction CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD].) x CD incompatible (CD used by (See 09-03G-4 NO.3 CD customer) PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT x Recurs no matter the type of PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND CD (no non-compatible CD) [CD].) (See 09-03G-4 NO.3 CD x Malfunction of connectors between audio unit and MP3 PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT applicable CD player. PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND x Audio unit malfunction [CD].) Verify the center panel and audio (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC unit assembly. ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].)

09-02E–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] Screen display DTC (When starting onboard diagnostic function)

21:Er19

22:Er01

22:Er02

22:Er07

22:Er10 no Err

Malfunction description

Inferred cause/verified content

x Verify conditions such as the non-operation of all audio switches or the non-operation of any particular switch. x Center panel (audio switch system) malfunction x Defective CD (curved, broken or foreign material stuck/ attached, etc.) x Audio unit malfunction

Communication error with center panel (audio switch system)

MP3 applicable CD changer cannot implement insert, eject, and disc change commands.

x Defective CD (curved, broken or foreign material stuck/ Cannot change tracks. attached, etc.) x Audio unit malfunction x CD incompatible (CD used by CD cannot playback customer) (cannot operate) x Recurs no matter the type of CD (no non-compatible CD) x Malfunction of connectors MP3 applicable CD changer between audio unit and MP3 does not operate. applicable CD changer. x Audio unit malfunction  DTC is not recorded.

Reference

(See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].) (See 09-03G-3 NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD].) (See 09-03G-3 NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD].) (See 09-03G-11 NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD].) (See 09-03G-4 NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD].) (See 09-03G-4 NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD].) 

End Of Sie DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO] id0902f6361100

LCD Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on. 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the UP SEEK switch for 0.2 s or more. 4. Inspect according to the following table: UP SEEK SWITCH

LCD

POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000495

Inspection x Launch the LCD inspection mode. x The characters displayed on the LCD are not truncated or faint.

Display Yes

DISC IN ST

AF PTY

RPT RDM

TA

TP AUTO-M

No

Action LCD is normal. Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

09-02E–4

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] Switch Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on. 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the CLOCK switch for 0.2 s or more. 4. Inspect according to the following table:

CLOCK SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

Inspection x Launch the switch inspection mode. x Operate all of the switches (press). x Does the buzzer sound?

Display Yes 

No

Action The switch is normal. Verify the switch. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].)

5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Speaker Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on. 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AUTO–M switch for 0.2 s or more. 4. Inspect according to the following table:

AUTO-M SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

Inspection x Launch the speaker inspection mode. x Does each speaker output sound in the following order?: 1. Front door speaker (LH) and tweeter (LH) 2. Front door speaker (RH) and tweeter (RH) 3. Rear door speaker (RH)/rear speaker (RH) (3HB) 4. Rear door speaker (LH)/rear speaker (LH) (3HB)

Display Yes

 No

Action The speakers and the wiring harness between the audio unit and speakers are normal. x If no sound is produced from all of the speakers. (See 09-03E-6 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO].) x If no sound is produced from some of the speakers. (See 09-03E-7 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO].)

5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Radio Reception Condition Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on. 3. Tune in the radio.

09-02E–5

09

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] 4. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the Preset switch 2 for 0.2 s or more. 5. Inspect according to the following table: Caution x Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where the system is inspected (indoors/ outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before inspecting the system, verify that radio reception is adequate. x When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio frequencies. Inspection

Display (AM 522 kHz reception)

Start the radio reception condition inspection mode.

PRESET SWITCH 2

POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

Action Center roof antenna, antenna feeder and audio unit are normal.

Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.

Inspect the center roof antenna and antenna feeder. (See 09-20-15 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-19 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-21 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSPECTION.) x If either the center roof antenna or the antenna feeder is not normal, replace the malfunctioning part. (See 09-20-13 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x If the center roof antenna and antenna feeder are normal, replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)

6. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Center Panel Specification Inspection 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. Turn the center panel unit power to on.

09-02E–6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] 3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the Preset switch 6 for 3 s or more. 4. Inspect according to the following table:

PRESET SWITCH 6 POWER/VOLUME SWITCH am2zzw0000376

Inspection x Launch the center panel destination mode. x Is there a match to the destination?

Display Yes

ID

CODE

No

ID

00

Specification

Mazda 2

Code 00 01 02 03

Action The center panel is normal. Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

Destination Europe Australia 4A region (With AM frequency pitch: 5KHz pitch) 4A region (With AM frequency pitch: 9KHz pitch)

5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the center panel unit power or by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie

09-02E–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

09-02F ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1A84:41/U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1A84:51/U2100:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1B71:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P193B:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC U0401:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC U0401:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . DTC U0402:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . .

End of Toc

09-02F–1 09-02F–2 09-02F–2 09-02F–3 09-02F–4 09-02F–5 09-02F–5 09-02F–7 09-02F–7 09-02F–9 09-02F–9 09-02F–11 09-02F–11 09-02F–12

DTC U0415:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–12 DTC U0420:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–13 DTC U0452:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–13 DTC U0452:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–13 DTC U0515:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–14 DTC U3000:41 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–14 DTC U3003:16 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–15 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–15 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–16 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–17 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–17 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–18 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–18

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id0902e8345400

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the am2zzw0000250 screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. 4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the instrument cluster. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)

End Of Sie

09-02F–1

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. DLC-2 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

id0902e8400300

am2zzw0000250

End Of Sie DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC B10D5:13

B10D7:05

B10D7:51

B10D7:81

B10D7:94

B10D8:00

B10D9:87

B10DA:51

B10DA:62 B1A84:41 B1A84:51 B1B71:14* P0070:14 P193B:14*

Malfunction location x Coil antenna malfunction x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.

id0902e8347100

Reference (See 09-02C-7 SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ Key ID number program error P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-12 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: The instrument cluster has detected unprogrammed key B10D7:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM ID number. (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-11 SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: The instrument cluster cannot read key ID number data B10D7:81/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM normally. (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-9 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ The key ID number data cannot be read. P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-14 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: Only one key ID number is programmed. B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-5 SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ No detected communication with the coil antenna. P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-15 SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: Communication error between the instrument cluster B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM and the PCM (data transfer failure) (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-16 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: Communication error between the instrument cluster B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM and the PCM (mismatched conditions) (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02F-3 DTC B1A84:41/U0300:00 Instrument cluster configuration data error [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-4 DTC B1A84:51/U2100:00 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-5 DTC B1B71:14 [INSTRUMENT Evaporator temperature sensor circuit malfunction CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-7 DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT Ambient temperature cannot be displayed on LCD of meter CLUSTER].) Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit (See 09-02F-9 DTC P193B:14 [INSTRUMENT malfunction CLUSTER].)

09-02F–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC Malfunction location U0001:88 Module communication error (HS-CAN) U0100:00 PCM communication error

U0100:87

Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (no response)

U0101:00 TCM communication error ABS HU/CM communication error (With ABS) U0121:00 DSC HU/CM communication error (With DSC) U0131:00 EPS control module communication error U0140:00 BCM communication error U0151:00 SAS control module communication error U0214:00 Keyless control module communication error U0300:00 Instrument cluster configuration data error U0401:68 Signal error from PCM U0401:92 Signal error from PCM U0402:92 Signal error from TCM U0415:92

Signal error from ABS HU/CM (With ABS) Signal error from DSC HU/CM (With DSC)

U0420:92 Signal error from EPS U0452:68 Signal error from SAS control module U0452:92 Signal error from SAS control module U0515:68 Signal error from keyless control module U2100:00 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented U3000:41 Instrument cluster internal malfunction U3003:16 Battery positive voltage is low *

Reference (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02C-13 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)

(See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

(See 09-02F-3 DTC B1A84:41/U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-11 DTC U0401:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-11 DTC U0401:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-12 DTC U0402:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-12 DTC U0415:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0420:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0452:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0452:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-14 DTC U0515:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-4 DTC B1A84:51/U2100:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-14 DTC U3000:41 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-15 DTC U3003:16 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)

: MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

End Of Sie DTC B1A84:41/U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

id0902e8999900

DTCs B1A84:41, Instrument cluster configuration error U0300:00 Detection Configuration error Condition Possible Causes Configuration was not done correctly for some reason

09-02F–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION

Yes

x Perform the instrument cluster configuration using the M-MDS. (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) x Clear the DTC. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are DTCs B1A84:41, U0300:00 displayed? 2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED

No

Yes

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are any other DTCs displayed?

No

Action Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1A84:51/U2100:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTCs B1A84:51, U2100:00 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8999800

Instrument cluster configuration not implemented Configuration setting has not been performed Instrument cluster configuration not implemented

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION x Perform the instrument configuration using the M-MDS. (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) x Clear the DTC. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are DTCs B1A84:51, U2100:00 displayed?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are any other DTCs displayed?

End Of Sie

09-02F–4

Yes

No

Yes No

Action Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC B1B71:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC B1B71:14 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8998900

Evaporator temperature sensor circuit malfunction Evaporator temperature sensor resistance value not input for a continuous 5 s x Open or short to ground circuit in wiring harness between evaporator temperature sensor and instrument cluster x Evaporator temperature sensor malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

System Wiring Diagram INSTRUMENT CLUSTER EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

A

B

2N

2H EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR B

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

A 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I

2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000273

09-02F–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector. (See 07-40A-28 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-21 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the evaporator temperature sensor. (See 07-40A-28 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-21 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) After replacement, go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes No

Go to Step 9. Go to the next step.

OPEN CIRCUIT IN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Yes

x Inspect for continuity between instrument cluster terminal 2H and body ground. x Is there continuity?

No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to the next step. Go to the next step.

x Inspect the evaporator temperature sensor. (See 07-40A-28 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-21 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) x Is the evaporator temperature sensor normal? 3

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to Step 9.

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND x Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal B and body ground. x Is there continuity?

4

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Measure the voltage at evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal B. x Is the voltage 5 V?

5

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Measure the voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2N. x Is the voltage 5 V?

6

INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal A and body ground. x Is there continuity?

7

8

VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02F–6

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to the next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Step 9

Inspection

VERIFY THAT SAME DTC IS NOT OUTPUT AGAIN x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Clear the DTC. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x VERIFY DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC B1B71:14 output?

10

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

No

Action Repeat the inspection from Step 1. x If the malfunction does not recur, go to the next step. x If the malfunction recurs, replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Verify other DTC displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC P0070:14 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8999300

Ambient temperature not displayed in LCD meter Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ambient temperature sensor and instrument cluster x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ambient temperature sensor and instrument cluster x Ambient temperature sensor malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

System Wiring Diagram INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

A

B

2F

2H AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR B

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

A 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I

2G 2E 2C 2A

2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000092

09-02F–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor connector. (See 07-40A-26 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the ambient temperature sensor. (See 07-40A-26 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) After replacement, go to Step 9.

Yes No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 8. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes No

Go to Step 9. Go to the next step.

OPEN CIRCUIT IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Yes

x Inspect for continuity between instrument cluster terminal 2H and body ground. x Is there continuity?

No

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to the next step. Go to the next step.

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR x Inspect the ambient temperature sensor. x Is the ambient temperature sensor normal?

3

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to Step 9.

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND x Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between ambient temperature sensor connector terminal B and body ground. x Is there continuity?

4

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Measure the voltage at ambient temperature sensor connector terminal B. x Is the voltage 5 V?

5

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Measure the voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2F. x Is the voltage 5 V?

6

INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the wiring harness for continuity between ambient temperature sensor connector terminal A and body ground. x Is there continuity?

7

8

VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal?

09-02F–8

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to the next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Step 9

Inspection

VERIFY THAT SAME DTC IS NOT OUTPUT AGAIN

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes

x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Clear the DTC. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x VERIFY DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC P0070:14 output? 10

No

Action Repeat the inspection from Step 1. x If the malfunction does not recur, go to the next step. x If the malfunction recurs, replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify other DTC displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie DTC P193B:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC P193B:14 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8998700

Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit malfunction APP sensor resistance value not input for a continuous 5 s x Open or short to ground circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor and instrument cluster x APP sensor malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

System Wiring Diagram APP SENSOR

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

A

1F

B

1D

C

1G

APP SENSOR WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

F E D C B A

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

1K 1I

1G 1E 1C 1A

1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B

am2zzw0000273

09-02F–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT APP SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the APP sensor connector. (See 01-13B-6 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-13C-3 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal? 2

INSPECT APP SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND x Inspect for continuity between the following circuits: — APP sensor terminal A (wiring harnessside) — APP sensor terminal B (wiring harnessside) x Is there any continuity?

3

INSPECT APP SENSOR x Inspect the APP sensor. (See 01-40B-27 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-24 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the APP sensor normal?

4

VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

INSPECT APP SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Go to the next step. Replace the APP sensor. (See 01-13B-6 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-13C-3 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) After replacement, go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to Step 6.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit, then go to the next step.

Yes

No

Repeat the inspection from Step 1. x If the malfunction does not recur, go to the next step. x If the malfunction recurs, replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect for continuity between the following circuits: — APP sensor terminal A (wiring harnessside) and instrument cluster terminal 1F (wiring harness-side) — APP sensor terminal B (wiring harnessside) and instrument cluster terminal 1D (wiring harness-side) x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY THAT SAME DTC IS NOT OUTPUT AGAIN x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. x Clear the DTC. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x VERIFY DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC P193B:14 output?

7

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT x Verify other DTC displayed. x Are any other DTCs output?

End Of Sie

09-02F–10

Repair/replace the malfunctioning vehicle wiring harness. After repair procedure, go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Yes No

x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). x Are the connector and terminals normal? 5

Action Go to the next step. Repair/replace the connector or terminal. After repair procedure, go to Step 6.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0401:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0401:68 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8988800

Signal error from PCM Correct data cannot be received from PCM PCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT FOR PCM MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the PCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0401:68 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step.

Replace the PCM. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0401:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0401:92 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8988700

On request from PCM On request error from PCM PCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT FOR PCM MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the PCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0401:92 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step.

Replace the PCM. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02F–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0402:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0402:92 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8988600

On request from TCM Illumination command signal from TCM continues for 20 s or more TCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT FOR TCM MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the TCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 05-02B-3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC INSPECTION [DJVA-EL].) x Is the DTC displayed again?

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED

2

x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0402:92 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 05-02B-3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC TABLE [DJVA-EL].) Go to the next step.

Replace the TCM. (See 05-19-28 TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [DJVA-EL].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0415:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8988400

Note x If the ignition switch is turned off after reprogramming the PCM and then turned to the ON position within 30 s, the PCM reprogramming cannot be completed correctly and DTC U0415:92 is stored. DTC U0415:92 Detection Condition Possible Causes

On request from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM On request malfunction from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM malfunction x The ignition switch is turned to the ON position within 30 s after the PCM reprogramming

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM FOR MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0415:92 displayed?

End Of Sie

09-02F–12

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) Go to the next step.

Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM. (See 04-13-3 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-13-6 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 04-15-5 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-15-9 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0420:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0420:92 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8988300

On request from EPS control module On request malfunction from EPS control module EPS control module malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT EPS CONTROL MODULE FOR MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the EPS control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 06-02-2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0420:92 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 06-02-2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS.) Go to the next step.

Replace the EPS control module. (See 06-13-4 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0452:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] DTC U0452:68 Detection Condition Possible Causes

id0902e8988100

Signal error from SAS control module Correct data cannot be received from SAS control module SAS control module malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT FOR SAS CONTROL MODULE MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the DTC inspection for the SAS control module using the M-MDS. (See 08-02-6 DTC DISPLAY.) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0452:68 displayed?

Yes No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 08-02-7 DTC TABLE.) Go to the next step.

Replace the SAS control module. (See 08-10-16 SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0452:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8988200

DTC U0452:92 Detection Condition Possible Causes

On request from SAS control module On request malfunction from SAS control module SAS control module malfunction

09-02F–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT SAS CONTROL MODULE FOR MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the DTC inspection for the SAS control module using the M-MDS. (See 08-02-6 DTC DISPLAY.) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0452:92 displayed?

Yes No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 08-02-7 DTC TABLE.) Go to the next step.

Replace the SAS control module. (See 08-10-16 SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0515:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8988000

DTC U0515:68 Detection Condition Possible Causes

Signal error from keyless control module Correct data cannot be received from keyless control module Keyless control module malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

INSPECT FOR KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE MALFUNCTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Perform the keyless control module DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the DTC displayed again?

2

VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0515:68 displayed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-5 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3000:41 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8999500

DTC U3000:41 Detection Condition Possible Causes

09-02F–14

Instrument cluster internal malfunction Malfunction in internal circuit detected Instrument cluster internal malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

2

Inspection VERIFY DTCs x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U0300:41 displayed? VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are any other DTCs displayed?

Yes

No

Yes No

Action Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3003:16 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8999400

DTC U3003:16 Detection Condition

Possible Causes

Battery positive voltage is low Instrument cluster power supply voltage less than 10 V x Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the battery (+) terminal and instrument cluster terminal 2S or terminal 2U. x Open circuit or short to the power supply in the wiring harness between the instrument cluster and body ground x METER 10 A fuse malfunction x ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction x Battery malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction

System Wiring Diagram

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ROOM 15 A 2U

-

+

IGNITION SWITCH

METER 10 A

2S

2A

BATTERY

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I

2G 2E 2C 2A

2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000225

09-02F–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection BATTERY INSPECTION x Refer to the battery inspection and inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the battery normal?

2

FUSE INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Remove the METER 10 A fuse and ROOM 15 A fuse. x Is the fuse normal? INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY (+) TERMINAL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Install the METER 10 A fuse and ROOM 15 A fuse. x Remove the meter hood. (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) x Remove the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage between instrument cluster terminals 2S and 2U. x Is the voltage between 9—15.9 V? INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND BODY GROUND x Inspect the wiring harness between instrument cluster connector terminal 2A and body ground. — Short to power supply — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTC INSPECTION x Connect the instrument cluster connector. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Perform the instrument cluster DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is DTC U3003:16 displayed?

3

4

5

09-02F–16

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Replace or charge the battery. (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. Replace the METER 10 A fuse or ROOM 15 A fuse.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair the related wiring harness.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the wiring harness between the instrument cluster and body ground.

Yes

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

No

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Step 6

Inspection VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE RECORDED x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02F-2 CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Inspect the instrument cluster DTCs. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Are any other DTCs displayed?

Yes No

Action Perform the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8400500

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] PID name (definition) SPDMTR (Speedometer) TACHOMTR (Tachometer) NUMKEYS (Number of key codes) VPWR (Instrument cluster power supply voltage)

Unit/status KPH,MPH

id0902e8345900

Data contents Vehicle driven: Displays vehicle speed



When the engine is running: Indicate the engine speed Number of programmed key ID numbers: 0—8

V

Indicate the battery voltage

RPM

Terminal 2B, 2D 2B, 2D  2S

Displays odometer data ODO_CNT (Odometer rolling count)

FUEL_GAUGE (Fuel gauge) FUEL_INPUT (Fuel gauge sender unit)

m, ft

L ohm

Note x Distance is displayed within a range of 0 to 51 m repeatedly. Data is reset to 0 m by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Displays remaining fuel quantity Resistance value of fuel gauge sender unit

2B, 2D

2R 2R, 2T

End Of Sie

09-02F–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

id0902e8465900

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “IC”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “IC”. DLC-2 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the active command modes from the PID am2zzw0000251 table. 4. Perform the active command modes, inspect the operations for each parts. x If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.

End Of Sie ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0902e8466000

Command name

Operation condition

LCD_SEG

On : LCD segment displayed

WL+IL

On : Warning/indicator lights illuminate

ALARM

On : Warning alarm sounds

SPDMTR

TACHOMTR

End Of Sie

09-02F–18

Off: Speedometer gauge needle moves to 0 km/h {0 mph} 60 km/h: Speedometer gauge needle moves to approx. 63 km/h {39 mph} 120 km/h: Speedometer gauge needle moves to approx. 126 km/h {78.3 mph} Off: Tachometer gauge needle moves to 0 rpm 3,000 RPM: Tachometer gauge needle moves to approx. 3,100 rpm 6,000 RPM: Tachometer gauge needle moves to approx. 6,300 rpm

Output part name LCD segment (Instrument cluster) Warning light, indicator light (Instrument cluster) Warning alarm (Instrument cluster)

Unit/Operation On/Off On/Off On/Off

Speedometer (Instrument cluster)

Off/60 km/h/120 km/h

Tachometer (Instrument cluster)

Off/3000RPM/ 6000RPM

PAGE 2 OF 2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM]

09-02G ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] DTC INSPECTION [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEARING DTC [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC TABLE [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1B55:96 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1C53:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D06:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D06:15 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D07:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D07:15 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D13:12 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D35:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1D36:92 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B10A6:92 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC B1008:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02G–2 09-02G–2 09-02G–3 09-02G–4 09-02G–4 09-02G–4 09-02G–4 09-02G–4 09-02G–5 09-02G–5 09-02G–5 09-02G–5 09-02G–6 09-02G–7 09-02G–8 09-02G–8 09-02G–8 09-02G–8 09-02G–9 09-02G–9 09-02G–10 09-02G–10 09-02G–10 09-02G–10 09-02G–11 09-02G–12 09-02G–14 09-02G–14 09-02G–14 09-02G–14 09-02G–15 09-02G–15 09-02G–16 09-02G–16 09-02G–16 09-02G–16 09-02G–17 09-02G–18 09-02G–20 09-02G–20 09-02G–20 09-02G–20 09-02G–20 09-02G–21 09-02G–21 09-02G–21 09-02G–21 09-02G–21 09-02G–22 09-02G–22 09-02G–23 09-02G–23 09-02G–23 09-02G–23 09-02G–23 09-02G–24 09-02G–25 09-02G–25 09-02G–25 09-02G–25 09-02G–26 09-02G–27 09-02G–28

Malfunction location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–28 Detection condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–28 Possible causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–28 System wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–29 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–30 DTC B1013:23 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–31 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–31 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–31 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–31 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–32 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–32 DTC B1087:83/B1087:86/B1087:87/ B1087:88 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–33 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–33 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–33 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–33 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–34 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–34 DTC B1172:92 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–36 DTC B1175:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–37 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–37 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–37 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–37 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–38 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–38 DTC B1176:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–39 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–39 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–39 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–39 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–40 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–40 DTC B1178:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–41 3HB/5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–41 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–43 DTC U0028:81/U0028:83/U0028:87 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–44 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–44 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–45 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–45 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–46 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–46 DTC U0415:68 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–49 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–49 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–49 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–49 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–49 DTC U2100:00/U3000:44 [BCM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 DTC U3003:16/U3003:17 [BCM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Malfunction Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–50 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–51 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–51

09-02G–1

PAGE 2 OF 2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM]

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–52 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [BCM] . . . . 09-02G–53

ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–54 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–55

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] End of Toc DTC INSPECTION [BCM] WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL

id0902f5345400

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. Verify the following vehicle conditions: x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x All the switches are turned off (except the ignition switch). x All the doors, bonnet, liftgate (3HB/5HB)/trunk (4SD) are closed. x All the doors, liftgate (3HB/5HB)/trunk (4SD) are unlocked. x All the seat belts are unbuckled. DLC-2 x Parking brake lever is pulled. 3. After the vehicle is identified, select the following am2zzw0000251 items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “BCM/GEM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “BCM/GEM”. 3. Select “Self Test”. 4. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the screen. x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02G-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].) 5. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the BCM. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].)

End Of Sie CLEARING DTC [BCM] 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Self Test”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “BCM/GEM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “BCM/GEM”. 3. Select “Self Test”. 3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the screen. 4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more. 7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) 8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.

End Of Sie

09-02G–2

id0902f5400300

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] DTC TABLE [BCM]

id0902f5347100

DTC table DTC No. B1B55:96 B1C53:13 B1D06:11 B1D06:15 B1D07:11 B1D07:15 B1D13:12 B1D35:11 B1D36:92 B10A6:92 B1008:11

B1013:23 B1087:83 B1087:86 B1087:87 B1087:88 B1172:92 B1175:13

B1176:13

B1178:11

U0001:88

Description

Detection condition

Page (See 09-02G-4 DTC Rain sensor internal circuit malfunction Rain sensor malfunction B1B55:96 [BCM].) (See 09-02G-5 DTC Windshield wiper switch circuit Windshield wiper switch INT circuit malfunction malfunction B1C53:13 [BCM].) Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-8 DTC Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction turn light (LH) and BCM B1D06:11 [BCM].) Open circuit or short to power supply in (See 09-02G-10 DTC Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction wiring harness between turn light (LH) and B1D06:15 [BCM].) BCM Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-14 DTC Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction turn light (RH) and BCM B1D07:11 [BCM].) Open circuit or short to power supply in (See 09-02G-16 DTC Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction wiring harness between turn light (RH) and B1D07:15 [BCM].) BCM (See 09-02G-20 DTC Short to power supply in wiring harness Interior light circuit malfunction between interior light and BCM B1D13:12 [BCM].) Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-21 DTC Hazard warning switch circuit malfunction hazard warning switch and BCM B1D35:11 [BCM].) Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-23 DTC Turn switch circuit malfunction turn switch and BCM B1D36:92 [BCM].) Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-25 DTC Light switch circuit malfunction light switch and BCM B10A6:92 [BCM].) Short to ground in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-28 DTC Windshield wiper switch circuit windshield wiper and washer switch B1008:11 [BCM].) malfunction (windshield wiper INT) and BCM Rear window defroster switch is in a (See 09-02G-31 DTC Rear window defroster switch circuit pressed condition for 2 min or more (rear B1013:23 [BCM].) malfunction defroster switch stuck). Error signal from rain sensor (See 09-02G-33 DTC Communication error with rain sensor Communication error between rain sensor B1087:83/B1087:86/ B1087:87/B1087:88 and BCM No response from rain sensor [BCM].) Rain sensor BUS off (See 09-02G-36 DTC Lock/unlock signals are input Door lock-link switch circuit malfunction simultaneously for 6 s or more. B1172:92 [BCM].) Open circuit in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-37 DTC Front door latch switch (driver's side) front door latch switch in front door latch B1175:13 [BCM].) circuit malfunction and lock actuator (driver's side) and BCM Open circuit in wiring harness between (See 09-02G-39 DTC Front door latch switch (passenger's side) front door latch switch in front door latch circuit malfunction and lock actuator (passenger's side) and B1176:13 [BCM].) BCM x Short to ground in wiring harness between liftgate latch switch in liftgate x Liftgate latch switch circuit latch and lock actuator and BCM (3HB/ (See 09-02G-41 DTC malfunction (3HB/5HB) 5HB) B1178:11 [BCM].) x Trunk lid latch switch circuit x Short to ground in wiring harness malfunction (4SD) between trunk lid latch switch and BCM (4SD) (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) Unit communication error BCM CAN system error (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

09-02G–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] DTC No. x U0028:81

x x

U0028:83

x x

U0028:87

x

U0100:00

Description Communication error with keyless control module (vehicles with advanced keyless and start system) Communication error with keyless receiver (vehicles with keyless entry system) Error signal from keyless control module (vehicles with advanced keyless and start system) Error signal from keyless receiver (vehicles with keyless entry system) No response from keyless control module (vehicles with advanced keyless and start system) No response from keyless receiver (vehicles with keyless entry system)

Communication error with PCM

U0101:00*1 Communication error with TCM

Detection condition

x Communication error between keyless control module and BCM (vehicles with (See 09-02G-44 DTC advanced keyless and start system) U0028:81/U0028:83/ x Communication error between keyless U0028:87 [BCM].) receiver and BCM (vehicles with keyless entry system)

Communication error between PCM and BCM Communication error between TCM and BCM

x Communication error with ABS HU/ CM (with ABS) x Communication error with DSC HU/ CM (with DSC)

U0121:00

U2100:00

x Error signal from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Error signal from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) BCM configuration not set

U3000:44

BCM configuration setting invalid

U0415:68

Page

x Communication error between ABS HU/CM and BCM (with ABS) x Communication error between DSC HU/CM and BCM (with DSC) x Correct data cannot be received from ABS HU/CM (with ABS). x Correct data cannot be received from DSC HU/CM (with DSC). BCM configuration setting not done correctly.

(See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02G-49 DTC U0415:68 [BCM].) (See 09-02G-50 DTC U2100:00/U3000:44 [BCM].)

BCM power supply voltage low (less BCM power supply voltage less than 10 V (See 09-02G-50 DTC than 10 V) U3003:16/U3003:17 BCM power supply voltage high (16 V or [BCM].) BCM power supply voltage 16 V or more more)

U3003:16 U3003:17

*1 : ATX

End Of Sie DTC B1B55:96 [BCM] id0902f5389000

Malfunction Location x Rain sensor internal circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Rain sensor malfunction Possible Causes x Rain sensor connector or terminals malfunction x Rain sensor malfunction x BCM malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1B55:96 displayed?

09-02G–4

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Replace the rain sensor, then go to the final step. (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY RAIN SENSOR CONDITION x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1B55:96 displayed?

4

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1B55:96 displayed?

No

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1C53:13 [BCM]

id0902f5389100

Malfunction Location x Windshield wiper switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Windshield wiper switch INT circuit malfunction Possible Causes x Wiper and washer switch connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between windshield wiper and washer switch terminal E and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side) x Open circuit in wiring harness between windshield wiper and washer switch terminal I and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right side) x Windshield wiper and washer switch malfunction x BCM malfunction

09-02G–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

C

D

6F

K

6N

E

6S

F

2H

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR K

I

G

E

C

A

L

J

H

F

D

B

BCM

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

2A

2O 2M

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000505

09-02G–6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right side WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

K

L

6F

C

6N

I

6S

J

2H

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

O P

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

N

L

J

H

F

D

B

BCM

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

2A

2O 2M

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1C53:13 displayed?

2

VERIFY WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the wiper and washer switch connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY BETWEEN WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Wiper and washer switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — Between wiper and washer switch terminal E and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side) — Between wiper and washer switch terminal I and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right side) x Is there continuity? 5

VERIFY WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the windshield wiper and washer switch. (See 09-19-25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the windshield wiper and washer switch normal?

6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1C53:13 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B1D06:11 [BCM] id0902f5389200

Malfunction Location x Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between turn light (LH) and BCM Possible Causes x Front turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Front side turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Rear turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between front turn light (LH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1L x Short to ground in wiring harness between front side turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal1L x Short to ground in wiring harness between rear turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3L x BCM malfunction

09-02G–8

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) A

B

BCM

FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) C

G

1L

4SD REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) A

B

REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) A

F

3L

3HB/5HB FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR A

C

E

G

B

D

F

H

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

C

E

B

D

F

C

(3HB/5HB)

B

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

A

REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3D

A

(4SD)

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D06:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 3

Inspection

VERIFY FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the front side turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 4

VERIFY REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the rear turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY FOR SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH), REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BCM

No

x Front turn light (LH), front side turn light (LH), rear turn light (LH) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — BCM terminal 1L — BCM terminal 3L x Is there continuity? 7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D06:11 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1D06:15 [BCM] Malfunction Location x Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Open circuit or short to power supply in wiring harness between turn light (LH) and BCM Possible Causes x Turn light malfunction x Front turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front turn light (LH) terminal G and body ground x Front side turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front side turn light (LH) terminal B and body ground

09-02G–10

id0902f5389300

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x x x x x x x x x x x

Rear turn light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (LH) terminal F and body ground (3HB/5HB) Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (LH) terminal B and body ground (4SD) BCM connector or terminals malfunction Short to power supply in wiring harness between front turn light (LH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1L Short to power supply in wiring harness between front side turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1L Short to power supply in wiring harness between rear turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3L Open circuit in wiring harness between front turn light (LH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1L Open circuit in wiring harness between front side turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1L Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3L BCM malfunction

System Wiring Diagram FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) A

B

BCM

FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) C

G

1L

4SD REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) A

B

REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) A

F

3L

3HB/5HB FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR A

C

E

G

B

D

F

H

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

C

E

B

D

F

(3HB/5HB)

C

B

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

A

REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3D

A

(4SD)

am2zzw0000505

09-02G–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D06:15 displayed?

2

PERFORM INSPECTION OF FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH), AND REAR TURN LIGHT (LH)

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the bulb, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-16 FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-25 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Remove the bulb. (See 09-18-16 FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-25 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Inspect the front turn light (LH), front side turn light (LH), rear turn light (LH). x Are the bulbs normal? 3

VERIFY FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the front turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 4

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front turn light (LH) connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front turn light (LH) terminal G (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

5

VERIFY FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the front side turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front turn light (LH) and front side turn light (LH) connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front side turn light (LH) terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

09-02G–12

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 7

Inspection

VERIFY REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the rear turn light (LH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 8

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front turn light (LH), front side turn light (LH), and rear turn light (LH) connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear turn light (LH) terminal F (3HB/5HB) — Rear turn light (LH) terminal B (4SD) x Is there continuity?

9

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

10

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH), REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

No

x Front turn light (LH), front side turn light (LH), rear turn light (LH), and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — BCM terminal 1L — BCM terminal 3L x Is there any voltage? 11

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (LH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (LH), REAR TURN LIGHT (LH) AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

x Front turn light (LH), front side turn light (LH), rear turn light (LH), and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — Between front turn light (LH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1L — Between front side turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1L — Between rear turn light (LH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3L x Is there continuity?

09-02G–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 12

Inspection

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D06:15 displayed?

Action Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1D07:11 [BCM] Malfunction Location x Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between turn light (RH) and BCM Possible Causes x Front turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x Front side turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x Rear turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between front turn light (RH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1K x Short to ground in wiring harness between front side turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal1K x Short to ground in wiring harness between rear turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3J x BCM malfunction

09-02G–14

id0902f5389400

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) A

B

BCM

FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) C

G

1K

4SD REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) A

B

REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) A

F

3J

3HB/5HB FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR A

C

E

G

B

D

F

H

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

C

E

B

D

F

C

(3HB/5HB)

B

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

A

REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3D

A

(4SD)

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D07:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 3

Inspection

VERIFY FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Disconnect the front side turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 4

VERIFY REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the rear turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY FOR SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH), REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BCM

No

x Front turn light (RH), front side turn light (RH), rear turn light (RH) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — BCM terminal 1K — BCM terminal 3J x Is there continuity? 7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D07:11 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1D07:15 [BCM] id0902f5389500

Malfunction Location x Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Open circuit or short to power supply in wiring harness between turn light (RH) and BCM Possible Causes x Turn light malfunction x Front turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front turn light (RH) terminal G and body ground x Front side turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction

09-02G–16

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x x x x x x x x x x x x

Open circuit in wiring harness between front side turn light (RH) terminal B and body ground Rear turn light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (RH) terminal F and body ground (3HB/5HB) Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (RH) terminal B and body ground (4SD) BCM connector or terminals malfunction Short to power supply in wiring harness between front turn light (RH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1K Short to power supply in wiring harness between front side turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1K Short to power supply in wiring harness between rear turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3J Open circuit in wiring harness between front turn light (RH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1K Open circuit in wiring harness between front side turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1K Open circuit in wiring harness between rear turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3J BCM malfunction

System Wiring Diagram FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) A

B

BCM

FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) C

G

1K

4SD REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) A

B

REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) A

F

3J

3HB/5HB FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR A

C

E

G

B

D

F

H

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

B

C

E

B

D

F

(3HB/5HB)

C

B

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

A

REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3D

A

(4SD)

am2zzw0000505

09-02G–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D07:15 displayed?

2

PERFORM INSPECTION OF FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH), AND REAR TURN LIGHT (RH)

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the bulb, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-16 FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-25 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the front turn light (RH), front side turn light (RH), rear turn light (RH). x Are the bulbs normal? 3

VERIFY FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Disconnect the front turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 4

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front turn light (RH) connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front turn light (RH) terminal G (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

5

VERIFY FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the front side turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front turn light (RH) and front side turn light (RH) connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front side turn light (RH) terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

7

VERIFY REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the rear turn light (RH) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–18

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 8

Inspection

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BODY GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Front turn light (RH), front side turn light (RH), and rear turn light (RH) connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — Rear turn light (RH) terminal F (3HB/5HB) — Rear turn light (RH) terminal B (4SD) x Is there continuity? 9

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

10

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH), REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

No

x Front turn light (RH), front side turn light (RH), rear turn light (RH), and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — BCM terminal 1K — BCM terminal 3J x Is there any voltage? 11

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT TURN LIGHT (RH), FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT (RH), REAR TURN LIGHT (RH) AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Front turn light (RH), front side turn light (RH), rear turn light (RH), and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — Between front turn light (RH) terminal C and BCM terminal 1K — Between front side turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 1K — Between rear turn light (RH) terminal A and BCM terminal 3J x Is there continuity? 12

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D07:15 displayed?

No

End Of Sie

09-02G–19

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] DTC B1D13:12 [BCM]

id0902f5389600

Malfunction Location x Interior light circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to power supply in wiring harness between interior light and BCM Possible Causes x Interior light connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to power supply in wiring harness between interior light terminal F and BCM terminal 3I (vehicles with theft-deterrent system) x Short to power supply in wiring harness between interior light terminal C and BCM terminal 3I (vehicles without theft-deterrent system) x Interior light malfunction x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram VEHICLES WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM INTERIOR LIGHT DOOR

F

ON OFF

H

C

VEHICLES WITHOUT THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM BCM

INTERIOR LIGHT DOOR

C

ON

B

D

INTERIOR LIGHT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (VEHICLES WITH INTRUDER SENSOR)

H

*

F

C

*

*

3I

OFF

*

3P

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

3D

*

INTERIOR LIGHT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (VEHICLES WITHOUT INTRUDER SENSOR) D

C

B

A

am2zzw0000227

09-02G–20

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the interior light switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the MMDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D13:12 displayed?

2

VERIFY INTERIOR LIGHT CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the interior light connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

4

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN INTERIOR LIGHT AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

x Interior light and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 3I (wiring harness-side). x Is there any voltage? 5

VERIFY INTERIOR LIGHT CONDITION x Inspect the interior light. (See 09-18-44 INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION.) x Is the interior light normal?

6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the interior light switch on. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the MMDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D13:12 displayed?

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the interior light, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

No

End Of Sie DTC B1D35:11 [BCM]

id0902f5389700

Malfunction Location x Hazard warning switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between hazard warning switch and BCM Possible Causes x DTC inspection is performed with hazard warning switch on. x Hazard warning switch connector or terminals malfunction x Hazard warning switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction

09-02G–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x Short to ground in wiring harness between hazard warning switch terminal C and BCM terminal 6Q x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram BCM HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

C

B

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B

A

6Q

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000227

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the hazard warning switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D35:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY HAZARD WARNING SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the hazard warning switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the hazard warning switch connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY HAZARD WARNING SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the hazard warning switch. (See 09-18-41 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the hazard warning switch normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–22

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN HAZARD WARNING SWITCH AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Hazard warning switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 6Q (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

Yes

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the hazard warning switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D35:11 displayed?

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1D36:92 [BCM] id0902f5389800

Malfunction Location x Turn switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between turn switch and BCM Possible Causes x Light switch connector or terminals malfunction x Turn switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal G and BCM terminal 6A x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal E and BCM terminal 6B (vehicles with light switch on left side) x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal I and BCM terminal 6B (vehicles with light switch on right side) x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram Vehicles with light switch on left side TURN SWITCH

BCM G

6A

E

6B

I

LIGHT SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

K

I

G

E

C

A

L

J

H

F

D

B

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000466

09-02G–23

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Vehicles with light switch on right side TURN SWITCH

BCM G

6A

I

6B

E

LIGHT SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR O P

M N

K L

I J

G H

E F

C D

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

B

6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D36:92 displayed?

2

VERIFY LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the light switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the light switch connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY TURN SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the turn switch. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the turn switch normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–24

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN LIGHT SWITCH AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Light switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — BCM terminal 6A — BCM terminal 6B x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the turn switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1D36:92 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B10A6:92 [BCM] id0902f5389900

Malfunction Location x Light switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch and BCM Possible Causes Vehicles with light switch on left side x Light switch connector or terminals malfunction x Light switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal J and BCM terminal 6O x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal D and BCM terminal 6J x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal K and BCM terminal 6L x BCM malfunction Vehicles with light switch on right side x Light switch connector or terminals malfunction x Light switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal F and BCM terminal 6O x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal L and BCM terminal 6J x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal C and BCM terminal 6L x BCM malfunction

09-02G–25

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram Vehicles with light switch on left side BCM

LIGHT SWITCH

J

6O

H

6I

F

6E

D

6J

K

6L

B

LIGHT SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

K

I

G

E

C

A

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

L

J

H

F

D

B

6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000466

09-02G–26

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Vehicles with light switch on right side BCM

LIGHT SWITCH

F

6O

H

6I

J

6E

L

6J

C

6L

N

LIGHT SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

P

N

L

J

H

F

D

B

6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000230

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the light switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B10A6:92 displayed?

2

VERIFY LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the light switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the light switch connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY LIGHT SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the light switch. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the light switch normal?

09-02G–27

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

5

6

Inspection VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN LIGHT SWITCH AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND x Light switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — BCM terminal 6O — BCM terminal 6J — BCM terminal 6L x Is there continuity?

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the light switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B10A6:92 displayed?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

No

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1008:11 [BCM] id0902f5340000

Malfunction location x Windshield wiper switch circuit malfunction Detection condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between windshield wiper and washer switch (windshield wiper INT) and BCM Possible causes x DTC inspection is performed with windshield wiper switch on. x Wiper and washer switch connector or terminals malfunction x Windshield wiper switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between wiper and washer switch terminal E and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side) x Short to ground in wiring harness between wiper and washer switch terminal I and BCM terminal 6S (vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right side) x BCM malfunction

09-02G–28

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System wiring diagram Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

C

BCM

D

6F

K

6N

E

6S

F

2H

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR K

I

G

E

C

A

L

J

H

F

D

B

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

2A

2O 2M

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000229

09-02G–29

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right side WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

K

BCM

L

6F

C

6N

I

6S

J

2H

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

O P

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

N

L

J

H

F

D

B

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K 6X

6V

2A

2O 2M

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

am2zzw0000466

Diagnostic procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1008:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the wiper and washer switch connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the windshield wiper switch. (See 09-19-25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the windshield wiper switch normal?

09-02G–30

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

No

x Wiper and washer switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the BCM terminal 6S (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1008:11 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1013:23 [BCM] id0902f5340100

Malfunction Location x Rear window defroster switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Rear window defroster switch is in a pressed condition for 2 min or more (rear defroster switch stuck). Possible Causes x Climate control unit connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in the wiring harness between climate control unit terminal V and BCM terminal 6D (vehicles with full-auto air conditioner) x Short to ground in wiring harness between climate control unit terminal I and BCM terminal 6D (vehicles with manual air conditioner) x Climate control unit malfunction x BCM malfunction

09-02G–31

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram VEHICLE WITH FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER BCM

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

6D

V

VEHICLE WITH MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

I

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (VEHICLE WITH FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER)

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

X

V

T

R

P

N

L

J

H

F

D

B

6X

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (VEHICLE WITH MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER)

K

I

G

E

C

A

L

J

H

F

D

B

am2zzw0000229

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the rear window defroster switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1013:23 displayed?

09-02G–32

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the climate control unit connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

4

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

No

x Climate control unit and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 6D (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 5

VERIFY CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONDITION

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the climate control unit, then go to the final step. (See 07-40A-32 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-24 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Inspect the climate control unit. (See 07-40A-33 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-30 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) x Is the climate control unit normal? 6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the rear window defroster switch off. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1013:23 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B1087:83/B1087:86/B1087:87/B1087:88 [BCM]

id0902f5340200

Malfunction Location x DTC B1087:83: Error signal from rain sensor x DTC B1087:86: Communication error with rain sensor x DTC B1087:87: No response from rain sensor x DTC B1087:88: Rain sensor BUS off Detection Condition x Communication error between rain sensor and BCM Possible Causes x Rain sensor connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal B and body ground x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7U x Short to power supply in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7U

09-02G–33

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x Open circuit in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7U x Rain sensor malfunction x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram BCM RAIN SENSOR

B

C

7U

RAIN SENSOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR A B

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

C D

am2zzw0000230

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1087:83, B1087:86, B1087:87, or B1087:88 displayed?

2

VERIFY RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY RAIN SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT CONDITION x Rain sensor connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between rain sensor terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–34

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN RAIN SENSOR AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 7U (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN RAIN SENSOR AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

Yes No

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 7U (wiring harness-side). x Is there any voltage? 7

VERIFY BETWEEN RAIN SENSOR AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes

Replace the rain sensor, then go to the final step. (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between rain sensor terminal C (wiring harness-side) and BCM terminal 7U (wiring harness-side). x Is there continuity? 8

VERIFY RAIN SENSOR CONDITION x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1087:83, B1087:86, B1087:87, or B1087:88 displayed?

9

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Turn the windshield wiper switch to AUTO. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1087:83, B1087:86, B1087:87, or B1087:88 displayed?

No

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02G–35

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] DTC B1172:92 [BCM]

id0902f5340600

Malfunction Location x Door lock-link switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Lock/unlock signals are input simultaneously for 6 s or more. Possible Causes x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) connector or terminals malfunction x Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) terminal J and BCM terminal 7K x Short to ground in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) terminal L and BCM terminal 7Q x Short circuit in lock signal and unlock signal wiring harnesses of front door latch and lock actuator x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE)

BCM

J

7K

L

7Q

D

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR K L

I J

G H

E F

C D

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

B

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform locking and unlocking operation. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1172:92 displayed?

2

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER’S SIDE) CONNECTOR CONDITION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–36

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 3

Inspection

VERIFY DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (DRIVER’S SIDE) CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side), then go to the final step. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Inspect the door lock-link switch (driver’s side). (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the door lock-link switch (driver’s side) normal? 4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY FOR SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER’S SIDE) AND BCM

No

x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground: — BCM terminal 7K — BCM terminal 7Q x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN LOCK AND UNLOCK SIGNAL WIRING HARNESSES

Yes No

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) terminals J and L (wiring harness-side). x Is there continuity? 7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform locking and unlocking operation. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1172:92 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC B1175:13 [BCM] id0902f5340700

Malfunction Location x Front door latch switch (driver's side) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch switch in front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) and BCM Possible Causes x DTC inspection is performed with front door latch switch (driver's side) on. x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) terminal D and body ground x Front door latch switch (driver's side) malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction

09-02G–37

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) terminal B and BCM terminal 7I x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE)

B

D

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR K L

I

G

J

H

BCM

E

C

F

D

A B

7I

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the front driver's door (front door latch switch on). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1175:13 displayed?

2

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT CONDITION x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) terminal D (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

09-02G–38

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE) CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side), then go to the final step. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Inspect the front door latch switch (driver's side). (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) x Is the front door latch switch (driver's side) normal? 5

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front door latch and lock actuator (driver's side) terminal B (wiring harness-side) and BCM terminal 7I (wiring harness-side). x Is there continuity?

7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the front driver's door (front door latch switch on). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1175:13 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B1176:13 [BCM]

id0902f5340800

Malfunction Location x Front door latch switch (passenger's side) circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch switch in front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) and BCM Possible Causes x DTC inspection is performed with front door latch switch (passenger's side) on. x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) terminal J and body ground x Front door latch switch (passenger's side) malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) terminal L and BCM terminal 7M x BCM malfunction

09-02G–39

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER'S SIDE)

BCM

L

J

7M

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER'S SIDE) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

K

I

G

E

C

A

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

L

J

H

F

D

B

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

am2zzw0000504

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the front passenger's door (front door latch switch on). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1176:13 displayed?

2

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER'S SIDE) CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER'S SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT CONDITION x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) connector is disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) terminal J (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity?

09-02G–40

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER'S SIDE) CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side), then go to the final step. (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Inspect the front door latch switch (passenger's side). (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) x Is the front door latch switch (passenger's side) normal? 5

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER'S SIDE) AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's side) terminal L (wiring harness-side) and BCM terminal 7M (wiring harness-side). x Is there continuity?

7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the front passenger's door (front door latch switch on). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1176:13 displayed?

No

End Of Sie DTC B1178:11 [BCM] id0902f5340900

3HB/5HB Malfunction Location x Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between liftgate latch switch in liftgate latch and lock actuator and BCM Possible Causes x DTC inspection is performed with liftgate latch switch on. x Liftgate latch and lock actuator connector or terminals malfunction x Liftgate latch switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between liftgate latch and lock actuator terminal C and BCM terminal 7S x BCM malfunction

09-02G–41

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

A

C

LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR C

A

D

B

BCM

7S

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

am2zzw0000230

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the liftgate (liftgate latch switch off). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1178:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator, then go to the final step. (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the liftgate latch and lock actuator connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the liftgate latch switch. (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Is the liftgate latch switch normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–42

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 5

Inspection

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Liftgate latch and lock actuator and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 7S (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

Yes

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the liftgate. (Liftgate latch switch off) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1178:11 displayed?

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

4SD Malfunction Location x Trunk lid latch switch circuit malfunction Detection Condition x Short to ground in wiring harness between trunk lid latch switch and BCM Possible Causes x DTC inspection is performed with trunk lid latch switch on. x Trunk lid latch switch connector or terminals malfunction x Trunk lid latch switch malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between trunk lid latch switch terminal A and BCM terminal 7S x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram BCM

TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH B

A

TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

A

B

7S

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR 7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A 7X 7V 7T 7R 7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B

am2zzw0000505

09-02G–43

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the trunk (trunk lid latch switch off). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1178:11 displayed?

2

VERIFY TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the trunk lid latch switch, then go to the final step. (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the trunk lid latch switch connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH CONDITION x Inspect the trunk lid latch switch. (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) x Is the trunk lid latch switch normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

No

x Trunk lid latch switch and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 7S (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Close the trunk (trunk lid latch switch off). x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC B1178:11 displayed?

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0028:81/U0028:83/U0028:87 [BCM] Malfunction Location Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system x DTC U0028:81: Communication error with keyless control module x DTC U0028:83: Error signal from keyless control module x DTC U0028:87: No response from keyless control module Vehicles with keyless entry system x DTC U0028:81: Communication error with keyless receiver x DTC U0028:83: Error signal from keyless receiver

09-02G–44

id0902f5341100

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x DTC U0028:87: No response from keyless receiver Detection Condition Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system x Communication error between keyless control module and BCM Vehicles with keyless entry system x Communication error between keyless receiver and BCM Possible Causes Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2F and BCM terminal 6W x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2F and BCM terminal 6W x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2F and BCM terminal 6W x Keyless control module malfunction x BCM malfunction Vehicles with keyless entry system x Keyless receiver connector or terminals malfunction x Keyless receiver malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless receiver (4-pin connector type) terminal C and BCM terminal 6W x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless receiver (6-pin connector type) terminal D and BCM terminal 6W x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless receiver (4-pin connector type) terminal C and BCM terminal 6W x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless receiver (6-pin connector type) terminal D and BCM terminal 6W x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless receiver (4-pin connector type) terminal C and BCM terminal 6W x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless receiver (6-pin connector type) terminal D and BCM terminal 6W x BCM malfunction

09-02G–45

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] System Wiring Diagram VEHICLE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

BCM

6W

2F

VEHICLE WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEYLESS RECEIVER

C

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

4-PIN CONNECTOR TYPE 6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

KEYLESS RECEIVER

6X

D

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

6-PIN CONNECTOR TYPE

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

2K

2I

2L 2J

2G 2E

2C

2A

2H

2D

2B

2F

KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR 4-PIN CONNECTOR TYPE

D

C

B

A

6-PIN CONNECTOR TYPE

F

E

D

C

B

A

am2zzw0000505

Diagnostic Procedure Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Lock and unlock the doors using the transmitter. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0028:81, U0028:83, or U0028:87 displayed?

2

VERIFY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR CONDITION

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

09-02G–46

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 4

Inspection

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Yes No

Action Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Keyless control module and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 6W (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 5

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

Yes No

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Keyless control module and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 6W (wiring harness-side). x Is there any voltage? 6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the keyless control module, then go to the final step. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

x Keyless control module and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between keyless control module terminal 2F (wiring harnessside) and BCM terminal 6W (wiring harnessside). x Is there continuity? 7

VERIFY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONDITION x Inspect the keyless control module. (See 09-14-99 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless control module normal?

8

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Lock and unlock the doors using the transmitter. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0028:81, U0028:83, or U0028:87 displayed?

Vehicles with keyless entry system Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Lock and unlock the doors using the transmitter. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0028:81, U0028:83, or U0028:87 displayed?

09-02G–47

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 2

Inspection

VERIFY KEYLESS RECEIVER CONNECTOR CONDITION

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the final step. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 3

VERIFY KEYLESS RECEIVER CONDITION x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-110 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless receiver normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x Disconnect the BCM connector. x Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?

5

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND

No

x Keyless receiver and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal 6W (wiring harness-side) and body ground. x Is there continuity? 6

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND BCM FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

Yes No

Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step. Go to the next step.

x Keyless receiver and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 6W (wiring harness-side). x Is there any voltage? 7

VERIFY BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Keyless receiver and BCM connectors are disconnected. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect for continuity between keyless receiver (4-pin connector type) terminal C (wiring harness-side)/keyless receiver (6-pin connector type) terminal D (wiring harnessside) and BCM terminal 6W (wiring harnessside). x Is there continuity?

09-02G–48

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harness, then go to the final step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 8

Inspection

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Lock and unlock the doors using the transmitter. x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0028:81, U0028:83, or U0028:87 displayed?

Action Yes

No

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U0415:68 [BCM] id0902f5331100

Malfunction Location x Error signal from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Error signal from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Detection Condition x Correct data cannot be received from ABS HU/CM (with ABS). x Correct data cannot be received from DSC HU/CM (with DSC). Possible Causes x ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS) x DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC) x BCM malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the MMDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0415:68 displayed?

2

VERIFY ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM DTCs x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) x Are any DTCs displayed?

3

VERIFY ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM

Yes No

Yes

No Yes

x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the MMDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0415:68 displayed?

4

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the MMDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U0415:68 displayed?

No Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Go to the applicable DTC inspection. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) After completing the DTC troubleshooting, go to the final step. Go to the next step. Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, then go to the final step. (See 04-13-3 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-13-6 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 04-15-5 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-15-9 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) DTC troubleshooting completed. Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

09-02G–49

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] End Of Sie

DTC U2100:00/U3000:44 [BCM] id0902f5342200

Malfunction Location x DTC U2100:00: BCM configuration not set x DTC U3000:44: BCM configuration setting invalid Detection Condition Warning x Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing an inspection. Performing an inspection according to only the detection conditions may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage the system. When performing an inspection, always follow the inspection procedure. x BCM configuration setting not done correctly. Possible Causes x BCM configuration not implemented. x BCM configuration setting invalid x BCM malfunction Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U2100:00 or U3000:44 displayed?

2

PERFORM BCM CONFIGURATION x Perform the BCM configuration using the MMDS. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION.) x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U2100:00 or U3000:44 displayed?

3

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U2100:00 or U3000:44 displayed?

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Perform the BCM configuration again, then go to the final step. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie DTC U3003:16/U3003:17 [BCM] id0902f5310100

Malfunction Location x DTC U3003:16: BCM power supply voltage low (less than 10 V) x DTC U3003:17: BCM power supply voltage high (16 V or more) Detection Condition x DTC U3003:16: BCM power supply voltage less than 10 V x DTC U3003:17: BCM power supply voltage 16 V or more Possible Causes x Battery malfunction

09-02G–50

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] x Generator system malfunction x BCM connector or terminals malfunction x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between battery and BCM — Short to ground in wiring harness between positive battery terminal and BCM terminal 1P — Short to ground in wiring harness between positive battery terminal and BCM terminal 1J — D/L 20 A fuse malfunction — HAZARD 10 A fuse malfunction — Open circuit in wiring harness between positive battery terminal and BCM terminal 1P — Open circuit in wiring harness between positive battery terminal and BCM terminal 1J x BCM malfunction System Wiring Diagram BCM D/L 20 A FUSE 1P

-

+

HAZARD 10 A FUSE 1J 2P

BATTERY

BCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR 2A

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

2O 2M

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

am2zzw0000229

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection

PERFORM DTC INSPECTION x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U3003:16 or U3003:17 displayed?

2

BATTERY INSPECTION x Refer to the battery inspection and inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-4 BATTERY INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZCD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the battery normal?

Yes No

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. DTC troubleshooting completed.

Go to the next step. Recharge or replace the battery, then go to the final step. (See 01-17A-5 BATTERY RECHARGING [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See .01-17B-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]) (See 01-17C-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

09-02G–51

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] Step 3

Inspection

GENERATOR INSPECTION x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-7 GENERATOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-5 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the generator normal?

4

VERIFY BCM CONNECTOR CONDITION x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the BCM connector. Inspect the connection condition and wiring harness. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? 5

VERIFY WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN POSITIVE BATTERY TERMINAL AND BCM FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the generator, then go to the final step. (See 01-17A-6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-17B-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-17C-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to the final step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the D/L 20 A fuse and HAZARD 10 A fuse. x If the fuse is melt: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to ground. — Replace the malfunctioning fuse. x If the fuse is deterioration: — Replace the malfunctioning fuse. x If the fuse is normal: — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open circuit. Go to the final step. Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) DTC troubleshooting completed.

x BCM connector is disconnected. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the voltage at the following terminals (wiring harness-side): — BCM terminal 1P — BCM terminal 1J x Is the voltage B+? 6

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED x Reconnect all disconnected connectors. x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) x Is the DTC U3003:16 or U3003:17 displayed?

Yes

No

End Of Sie PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [BCM] 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “BCM/GEM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “BCM/GEM”. 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table. 4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.

id0902f5960600

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output device is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input device corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output device individually.

09-02G–52

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] End Of Sie

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [BCM] id0902f5960700

PID/DATA monitor item AUTO_L_S W

Unit/ Condition Off/On

BRK_FLUID

Normal/Low

DRSW_D

Close/Open

DRSW_P

Close/Open

DRSW_RR

Close/Open

DRSW_LR

Close/Open

D_LLSW_L OCK D_LLSW_U NCK DR_LOCK_ ACT DR_UNLK_ ACT

Off/Lock Off/Unlock Off/Lock Off/Unlock

FOG_F_RL Y

Off/On

FOG_R_RL Y

Off/On

FOG_F_SW

Off/On

FOG_R_SW

Off/On

HAZARD

Off/On

H/L_HI_SW

Off/On

H/L_LO_SW

Off/On

H/ L_LO_RLY

Off/On

IG_KEY_IN

Key-Out/KeyIn

KEY_LOCK _SW OIL_PRS_S W

Off/On Off/On

PWR_IG1

Off/On

RAIN_SSR

Off/On

ROOM_LM P

%

R_DEF

Off/On

R_DEF_SW

Off/On

Operation condition x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Light switch at AUTO position: On Light switch at position except AUTO: Off Brake fluid level above MIN: Normal Brake fluid level less than MIN: Low Driver's door opened: Open Driver's door closed: Close Passenger's door opened: Open Passenger's door closed: Close Rear door (RH) opened: Open Rear door (RH) closed: Close Rear door (LH) opened: Open Rear door (LH) closed: Close Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Off Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Unlock Driver's door lock knob locked: Off Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Off Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Unlock Driver's door lock knob locked: Off Light switch at FRONT FOG position, lights on condition: On Light switch not at FRONT FOG position: Off Light switch at REAR FOG position, lights on condition: On Light switch not at REAR FOG position: Off Front fog light switch in on position: On Front fog light switch in off position: Off Rear fog light switch in on position: On Rear fog light switch in off position: Off Hazard warning switch in on position: On Hazard warning switch in off position: Off Light switch at HI: On Light switch not at HI: Off Light switch at LO: On Light switch not at LO: Off Headlights on: On Headlights off: Off Key inserted into key cylinder: Key-In Except above: Key-Out Door key cylinder at LOCK: On Door key cylinder not at LOCK: Off Engine running: On Engine stopped: Off Ignition switch at ON: On Ignition switch is off: Off Intermittent operation control signal from rain sensor sent: On Any control signal such as stop, low or high operation from rain sensor sent: Off Door opened: 100 % Door closed: 0 % Rear window defroster operating: On Rear window defroster not operating: Off Rear window defroster switch pressed: On Rear window defroster switch not pressed: Off

Inspection item (s) Light switch

BCM terminal 6E

Brake fluid level sensor switch Door latch switch (driver's side) Door latch switch (passenger's side) Door latch switch (rear door (RH)) Door latch switch (rear door (LH))

7M

Door lock-link switch

7Q

Door lock-link switch

7K

Door lock actuator

3M

Door lock actuator

3O

Front fog light relay

4I

Rear fog light relay

4E

Light switch

6K

Light switch

6M

Hazard warning switch

6Q

Light switch

6I

Light switch

6O

Headlight low relay

4M

Key reminder switch

6R

Door key cylinder switch

7C

Oil pressure switch

4B

Ignition switch

2G

Rain sensor

7U

Interior light

2O

Filament

3B

Climate control unit (rear window defroster switch)

6D

4A 7I

7O 7G

09-02G–53

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] PID/DATA monitor item

Unit/ Condition

R_DEF_IND

Off/On

TNS_SW

Off/On

TURN_L_L

Off/On

TURN_L_R

Off/On

TURN_SW_ L TURN_SW_ R TR/LG_SW

Off/On Off/On Close/Open

VSPD

KPH

WASHER_F

Off/On

WASHER_R

Off/On

WIP_F_INT

Off/On

WIP_F_HI

Off/On

WIP_F_LO

Off/On

WIP_R_ON

Off/On

WPRLY_F_ HI

Off/On

WPRLY_F_ LO

Off/On

WPRLY_R

Off/On

Operation condition x Rear window defroster indicator illuminated: On x Rear window defroster indicator not illuminated: Off x Light switch at TNS position: On x Light switch not at TNS position: Off x Turn light (LH) flashing: On x Turn light (LH) off: Off x Turn light (RH) flashing: On x Turn light (RH) off: Off x Turn switch at left position: On x Turn switch in off position: Off x Turn switch at right position: On x Turn switch in off position: Off x Liftgate opened: Open x Liftgate closed: Close x Vehicle driven: Displays vehicle speed x Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (mph) x Windshield washer switch on: On x Windshield washer switch off: Off x Rear washer switch on: On x Rear washer switch off: Off x Windshield wiper switch at INT position: On x Windshield wiper switch not at INT position: Off x Windshield wiper switch at HI position: On x Windshield wiper switch not at HI position: Off x Windshield wiper switch at LO position: On x Windshield wiper switch not at LO position: Off x Rear wiper switch at ON: On x Rear wiper switch at OFF: Off x Windshield wiper operating at HI: On x Windshield wiper operating in position except HI: Off x Windshield wiper operating at LO: On x Windshield wiper operating in position except LO: Off x Rear wiper operating: On x Rear wiper not operating: Off

Inspection item (s)

BCM terminal

Climate control unit (rear window defroster indicator)

6G

Light switch

6J

Turn light

1L, 3L

Turn light

1K, 3J

Turn switch (light switch)

6B

Turn switch (light switch)

6A

Liftgate latch and lock actuator

6U

-

-

Washer switch

2H

Washer switch

2L

Windshield wiper switch

6S

Windshield wiper switch

6F

Windshield wiper switch

6N

Windshield wiper switch

6C

Front wiper motor

1A

Front wiper motor

1B

Rear wiper motor

3D

End Of Sie ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [BCM]

id0902f5960800

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “DataLogger”. 2. Select “Modules”. 3. Select “BCM/GEM”. x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select “Module Tests”. 2. Select “BCM/GEM”. DLC-2 3. Select “DataLogger”. 3. Select the active command modes from the PID am2zzw0000251 table. 4. Perform the active command modes, inspect the operations for each parts. x If the operation of output device cannot be verified after the active command mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output device.

End Of Sie

09-02G–54

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM] ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [BCM] Command name WPRLY_F_HI*

Operation condition

id0902f5960900

Unit/ Operation

Output part name

1

On : Windshield wiper (HI) operation

Off/On

Windshield wiper motor

WPRLY_F_LO WPRLY_R TURN_L_R TURN_L_L H/L_LO_RLY FOG_F_RLY FOG_R_RLY

On : Windshield wiper (LO) operation On : Rear wiper operation On : Turn light (RH) flashes On : Turn light (LH) flashes On : Headlights (LO) on On : Front fog lights on On : Rear fog lights on

Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On

Windshield wiper motor Rear wiper motor Turn light (RH) Turn light (LH) Headlight low-beam relay Front fog light relay Rear fog light relay

Terminal 1E 1D 3E 1H,3G 1I,3H 4B 4D 4D

*1 : With "WPRLY_F_LO" On

End Of Sie

09-02G–55

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

09-02I ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Table for Determining Malfunctioning Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C ............................. D ............................. E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-02I–1 09-02I–2 09-02I–3

09-02I–7 09-02I–7 09-02I–9 09-02I–9 09-02I–10 09-02I–11 09-02I–12 09-02I–13

G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–14 H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–15 I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–16 J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–17 K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–18 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–19 M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–20 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–20 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–20 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–21 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–21 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–24 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–25

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] End of Toc WM: CAN SYSTEM

FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

id0902j4845700

x If the CAN system is considered to be the cause of the malfunction based on the repair order form and the malfunctioning symptom, follow the 09-02I-2 Troubleshooting Procedure. x DTCs are also output due to a control module or sensor malfunction, or incorrect power supply. Verify the output DTCs and first inspect the DTCs not shown in 09-02I-3 DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]. x If there is an open circuit in the communication lines, it is possible that signal error DTCs may be output in addition to communication error DTCs. Perform 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)], 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] if the communication error and signal error DTCs are output simultaneously.

09-02I–1

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Troubleshooting Procedure Vehicle in repair shop

Verify repair order form and symptom

When CAN system is thought to be malfunctioning based on repair order form and symptom, perform on-board diagnosis using the following procedure.

Perform vehicle identification using M-MDS.

Yes

Is vehicle identified?

Verify communication condition between M-MDS and vehicle. *4

Verify DTCs of all modules.

Are any DTCs output?

No

No

Perform symptom troubleshooting.

Yes

Are DTCs not shown in DTC table*1 output?

Yes

Perform troubleshooting according to corresponding DTC inspection. After repair, verify DTCs of all control modules.

No

Are DTCs U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 displayed?

Yes Inspect DTCs U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073. *2

No There could be open circuit in CAN lines. Determine the open circuit location using DTC output pattern. *3 am2zzw0000466

*1 : 09-02I-3 DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] *2 : 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] *3 : 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] *4 : 09-02I-20 M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

End Of Sie

09-02I–2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

id0902j4845800

HS-CAN DTC output module

DTC

Malfunction location

U0073:00*1 CAN system communication error

PCM (ZJ, ZY)

U0101:00 U0121:00 U0140:00 U0151:00 U0155:00

Communication error to TCM x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Communication error to BCM Communication error to SAS control module Communication error to instrument cluster

U0073:00*1 CAN system communication error

PCM (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)

U0121:00 U0140:00 U0155 U0416 U0423

x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Communication error to BCM Communication error to instrument cluster Communication error to EPS control module Abnormal message from instrument cluster

U0001:00*1 CAN system communication error U0073:00*1 CAN system communication error

PCM (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))

U0121:00 U0122:86 U0122:87 U0155:00 U0167:00 U0300:87

x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Communication error to instrument cluster x Communication error to keyless control module (vehicles with advanced keyless and start system) x Communication error to instrument cluster (vehicles with keyless entry system)

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error ABS HU/CM*2

U0100:00 U0155:00

Communication error to PCM Communication error to instrument cluster

U2101:00

Abnormal message from instrument cluster

Reference for inspection procedure (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

(See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

(See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

09-02I–3

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] DTC output module

DTC

Malfunction location

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error

U0100:00 U0126:00

Communication error to PCM Communication error to EPS control module

U0155:00

Communication error to instrument cluster

*3

DSC HU/CM

U0401:68*1 Signal error from PCM

U2101:00

Abnormal message from instrument cluster

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error

BCM

U0100:00 U0101:00 U0121:00 U0415:68*1

Communication error to PCM Communication error to TCM x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC) x Signal error from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Signal error from DSC HU/CM (with DSC)

U0073:00*1 CAN system communication error TCM*4

U0100:00

U0121:00

Communication error to PCM x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC)

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error

Keyless control module*5

U0028:87

Communication error to BCM

U0100:00

Communication error to PCM

U0401:68*1 Signal error from PCM

09-02I–4

Reference for inspection procedure (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 04-02B-28 DTC U0401:68 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02G-49 DTC U0415:68 [BCM].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02A-34 DTC U0401:68 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] DTC output module

DTC

Malfunction location

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error SAS control module U0155:00

Communication error to instrument cluster

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error

EPS control module U0100:00

Communication error to PCM

U0401:00*1 Signal error from PCM

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error Theft-deterrent control module*6

U0100:00

Communication error to PCM

U0140:00

Communication error to BCM

Reference for inspection procedure (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 06-02-9 DTC U0401:00.) (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].)

09-02I–5

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] DTC output module

DTC

Malfunction location

U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error

U0100:00

Communication error to PCM

U0100:87*1 Communication error to PCM (no response)

U0101:00 U0121:00

Instrument cluster

U0131:00 U0140:00 U0151:00 U0214:00

Communication error to TCM x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Communication error to EPS control module Communication error to BCM Communication error to SAS control module Communication error to keyless control module

U0401:68*1 Signal error from PCM U0401:92*1 Signal error from PCM U0402:92*1 Signal error from TCM U0415:92*1

x Signal error from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) x Signal error from DSC HU/CM (with DSC)

U0420:92*1 Signal error from EPS control module U0452:68*1 Signal error from SAS control module U0452:92*1 Signal error from SAS control module U0515:68*1 Signal error from keyless control module

Reference for inspection procedure (See 09-02I-24 DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02B-16 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-13 SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02I-7 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) (See 09-02F-11 DTC U0401:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-11 DTC U0401:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-12 DTC U0402:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-12 DTC U0415:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0420:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0452:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-13 DTC U0452:92 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-02F-14 DTC U0515:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)

*1 : If only the target DTCs are displayed, perform the corresponding DTC inspection without determining the open circuit location. *2 : With ABS *3 : With DSC *4 : CVT *5 : With advanced keyless entry and start system *6 : With theft-deterrent system

End Of Sie

09-02I–6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

id0902j4846700

Caution x If the malfunctioning part is detected in the communication line, before disconnecting the related connector for inspection, press the connector in the connection direction to verify that there is no looseness or disconnection. x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no damage, deformation, or corrosion of the connector terminals. 1. Verify the CAN system-related module DTCs and the failed module using the (M-MDS). 2. Look for a DTC display pattern and failed module display pattern in tandem which match. Note x A hyphen “- “ in the DTC output pattern table indicates that the DTC may be displayed depending on the malfunction detection conditions. If only an “u “ is indicated, it means the DTC will not be displayed. x If any of the following DTCs is displayed alone, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02I-3 DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)].) — DSC HU/CM: U0401:68 — BCM: U0415:68 — Keyless control module: U0401:68 — EPS control module: U0401:00 — Instrument cluster: U0100:87, U0401:68, U0401:92, U0402:92, U0415:92, U0420:92, U0452:68, U0452:92, U0515:68 3. Refer to the matching tandem diagnostic results (A to L) and inspect the possible cause and inspection item. 4. Perform the DTC inspection after the repair procedure. x If any DTC is displayed, return to 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]. Diagnostic Table for Determining Malfunctioning Part Cross (u): Displayed Hyphen (-): May or may not be displayed M-MDS display DTC output module

PCM (PCM)*1

*2

PCM (PCM)

PCM (PCM)*3

DTC display pattern

DTC U0101:00 U0121:00 U0140:00 U0151:00 U0155:00 U0121:00 U0140:00 U0155 U0416 U0423 U0121:00 U0122:86 U0122:87 U0155:00 U0167:00

u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u*7

U0300:87 ABS (ABS

HU/CM)*4

ABS (DSC HU/CM)*5

U0100:00 U0155:00 U2101:00 U0100:00 U0126:00 U0155:00 U0401:68 U2101:00

u*8

u u u u u -

09-02I–7

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] M-MDS display DTC output module

BCM/GEM (BCM)

TCM (TCM)*6 RKE (Keyless control module)*7 RCM (SAS control module)

DTC U0100:00 U0101:00 U0121:00 U0415:68 U0100:00 U0121:00 U0028:87 U0100:00 U0401:68

DTC display pattern u

u u u -

u u

u u u u

u -

u u

U0155:00

U0100:00 U0401:00 *9 (Theft-deterrent U0100:00 VSM control module) U0140:00 U0100:00 U0100:87 U0101:00 U0121:00 U0131:00 U0140:00 U0151:00 U0214:00 IC (Instrument cluster) U0401:68 U0401:92 U0402:92 U0415:92 U0420:92 U0452:68 U0452:92 U0515:68 M-MDS display module PCM ABS BCM/GEM EPS (EPS control module)

u u

u u

u -

u -

u

u u

u

u u u u u u

u u u u u u

u u

u u u

-

-

u u

u u -

-

-

-

u u

“Fail” display pattern u u u u

u u u

TCM*6

u

*7

RKE RCM EPS

u u u

u

u

u

u u

u u u

*9

VSM IC

Item Possible cause and inspection item Reference page

*1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8

u A B C 09090902I-9 02I-9 02I10 C B A

: ZJ, ZY : MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo : MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) : With ABS : With DSC : CVT : With advanced keyless entry and start system : With keyless entry system

09-02I–8

D 0902I11 D

Diagnostic result E F G H 0909090902I- 02I- 02I- 02I12 E 13 F 14 G 15 H

I 0902I16 I

J 0902I17 J

K 0902I18 K

L 0902I19 L

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] *9 : Theft-deterrent system A Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and branch A x PCM malfunction System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) PCM

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo PCM

1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

1B ZJ, ZY PCM

CAN_H

1AE

4W CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

1AI

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

4U

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item ZJ, ZY x PCM connector x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AE and branch A x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AI and branch A x PCM MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo x PCM connector x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1A and branch A x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1B and branch A x PCM MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) x PCM connector x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 301 and branch A x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 309 and branch A x PCM B Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM and branch A x Open circuit in wiring harness between DSC HU/CM and branch A x ABS HU/CM malfunction

09-02I–9

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] x DSC HU/CM malfunction System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

J

DSC HU/CM

WITH DSC

H

L

ABS HU/CM

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

4U

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x ABS HU/CM connector x DSC HU/CM connector x Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal H and branch A x Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal L and branch A x Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal M and branch A x Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal J and branch A x ABS HU/CM x DSC HU/CM C Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM and branch A

09-02I–10

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x BCM connector x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 4U and branch A x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 4W and branch A D Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness BCM and TCM x TCM malfunction x BCM malfunction

09-02I–11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram : FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

TCM

A17

4V

1AE

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

4X CONNECTOR C-06

CAN_H

7X

4U

4W

1AI

2B BRANCH B

BRANCH A

PCM

A7

BCM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

7V

2D

CAN_L

H

L

ABS HU/CM

F

E DLC-2 am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x TCM connector x BCM connector x Wiring harness between TCM terminal A17 and BCM terminal 4V x Wiring harness between TCM terminal A7 and BCM terminal 4X x TCM x BCM E Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness keyless control module and BCM x Keyless control module malfunction. x BCM malfunction

09-02I–12

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM 309 MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY

BCM CAN_H

1AE

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

4U BRANCH A

PCM

4W

1AI

2B BRANCH B

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

7V

2D

CAN_L

6X

M

J

H

6V

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

K

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x Keyless control module connector x BCM connector x Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2G and BCM terminal 6X x Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2I and BCM terminal 6V x Keyless control module x BCM F Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x BCM malfunction

09-02I–13

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

BCM

4W

1AI CAN_L

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BRANCH A

PCM

M

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x BCM G Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness BCM and branch B

09-02I–14

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U BRANCH A

PCM CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM 4W

1AI

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x BCM connector x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 7X and branch B x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 7V and branch B H Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness SAS control module and branch B x SAS control module malfunction

09-02I–15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM

SAS CONTROL MODULE

CVT 309

EPS CONTROL MODULE

TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x SAS control module connector x Wiring harness between SAS control module terminal 3C and branch B x Wiring harness between SAS control module terminal 3D and branch B x SAS control module I Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness branch B and connector C-06 x Open circuit in wiring harness connector C-06 and branch C x Connector C-06 malfunction

09-02I–16

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x Connector C-06 x Wiring harness between branch B and connector C-06 x Wiring harness between connector C-06 and branch C J Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module and branch C x EPS control module malfunction

09-02I–17

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309

SAS CONTROL MODULE

TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

3C

EPS CONTROL MODULE 1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

7X

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000467

Inspection item x EPS control module connector x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 1G and branch C x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 1H and branch C x EPS control module K Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness between Theft-deterrent control module and branch C x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction

09-02I–18

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM 309 MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CONNECTOR C-06

CAN_H

1AE

CAN_L

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM 4W

1AI

M

7X

4U BRANCH A

PCM

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM am2zzw0000468

Inspection item x Theft-deterrent control module connector x Wiring harness between theft-deterrent control module terminal K and branch C x Wiring harness between theft-deterrent control module terminal I and branch C x Theft-deterrent control module L Possible cause x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion x Open circuit in wiring harness instrument cluster and branch C x Instrument cluster malfunction

09-02I–19

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] System wiring diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 PCM CVT 309 TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo 1A

A17

A7

4V

4X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY CAN_H

1AE

4U

4W

1AI CAN_L

M

BRANCH B

BCM

BRANCH A

PCM

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

CONNECTOR C-06

7X BRANCH C

7V 6X

6V

2G

2I

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

2B INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000468

Inspection item x Instrument cluster connector x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2B and branch C x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2D and branch C x Instrument cluster

End Of Sie M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] id0902j4037400

Caution x Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] troubleshooting procedure. Detection Condition x Possible causes of communication errors between the M-MDS and vehicle include communication circuit interruption due to an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness, or poor contact of connector terminals, or a BUS OFF condition due to a short circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness. Possible Causes x Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and DLC-2 x Open circuit in BCM CAN line x Improper insertion, connector terminal damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of PCM, BCM, or connector C-06 x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN system-related module CAN_L and CAN_H lines x Short circuit to power supply in wiring harness between CAN system-related module x Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between CAN system-related module x Short circuit to power supply in CAN system-related module internal CAN lines x Short circuit to ground in CAN system-related module internal CAN lines x Damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of DLC-2 x PCM power supply is not normal x PCM ground is not normal x PCM internal resistance is not normal

09-02I–20

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] x CAN system-related module malfunction Wiring Diagram MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

: FRONT HARNESS : DASHBOARD HARNESS : REAR HARNESS

301 CVT

PCM 309

TCM

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo

A17

A7

1A

SAS CONTROL MODULE

EPS CONTROL MODULE

3C

1G

3D

1H

PCM 1B ZJ, ZY

CAN_L

J

H

L

DSC HU/CM

ABS HU/CM

WITH DSC

WITH ABS

2B BRANCH B

BCM

6X

6V

2G

2I

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BRANCH C

7V

4W

1AI

M

7X

4U BRANCH A

PCM

CONNECTOR C-06

4X

4V

CAN_H

1AE

2D

K

I

THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM

F

E DLC-2

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000466

Diagnostic Procedure Caution x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation, corrosion, or poor connection of the connector terminals. Step 1

Inspection VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING x Is there communication between the M-MDS and vehicle?

2

VERIFY THAT M-MDS AND DLC-2 ARE CONNECTED x Verify the connection condition between the M-MDS and DLC-2. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? VERIFY PCM POWER SUPPLY CONDITION x Refer to the PCM terminal voltage table and inspect the terminal voltage and fuse condition. (See 01-40C-9 PCM INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-9 PCM INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40A-9 PCM INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) x Is the power supply condition normal?

3

Yes No

Yes No

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Go back to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM. (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) Go to the next step. Correct the connection condition, then go to Step 13.

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the fuse or wiring harness, then go to Step 13.

09-02I–21

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Step 4

5

6

Inspection VERIFY PCM BODY GROUND CONDITION x Inspect the PCM body ground wiring harness and ground point. x Are the ground and ground point normal? INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR TERMINAL x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the PCM connector. x Are the PCM connector terminal normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? INSPECT PCM x Measure the resistance between the following PCM connector terminals:

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 13.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair the connector terminal if necessary, then go to Step 13.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the PCM, then go to the next step. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. There is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13.

ZJ, ZY — Between terminal 1AE and terminal 1AI (part side)

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo — Between terminal 1A and terminal 1B (part side)

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

7

— Between terminal 301 and terminal 309 (part side) x Is the resistance 118—130 ohms? VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO OPEN CIRCUIT IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS Caution x When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it with a paper clip or similar thin pin without directly inserting a tester into the terminals. x Verify the continuity between the following terminals:

ZJ, ZY — Between PCM terminal 1AE and BCM terminal 4U — Between PCM terminal 1AI and BCM terminal 4W — Between DLC-2 terminal F and BCM terminal 7X — Between DLC-2 terminal E and BCM terminal 7V

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo — Between PCM terminal 1A and BCM terminal 4U — Between PCM terminal 1B and BCM terminal 4W — Between DLC-2 terminal F and BCM terminal 7X — Between DLC-2 terminal E and BCM terminal 7V

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) — Between PCM terminal 301 and BCM terminal 4U — Between PCM terminal 309 and BCM terminal 4W — Between DLC-2 terminal F and BCM terminal 7X — Between DLC-2 terminal E and BCM terminal 7V x Is there continuity?

09-02I–22

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Step 8

9

10

Inspection INSPECT CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS IN BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT x Verify the continuity between the following terminals: — Between BCM terminal 7X and BCM terminal 4U — Between BCM terminal 7V and BCM terminal 4W x Is there continuity? VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO SHORT CIRCUIT IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS Caution x When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it with a paper clip or similar thin pin without directly inserting a tester into the terminals. x Measure the resistance between the terminals. — Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC-2 terminal E x Is the resistance 60 ohms or less? VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS Caution x When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it with a paper clip or similar thin pin without directly inserting a tester into the terminals.

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the BCM which has an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness in the BCM, then go to Step 13. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes

There is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13. Go to the next step.

No

Yes No

There is a short circuit to ground in the CAN communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13. Go to the next step.

x Verify the continuity between the following terminals: — Between DLC-2 terminal F and ground — Between DLC-2 terminal E and ground

ZJ, ZY — Between PCM terminal 1AE and ground — Between PCM terminal 1AI and ground

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo — Between PCM terminal 1A and ground — Between PCM terminal 1B and ground

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) — Between PCM terminal 301 and ground — Between PCM terminal 309 and ground x Is there continuity?

09-02I–23

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Step 11

Inspection VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS Caution x When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it with a paper clip or similar thin pin without directly inserting a tester into the terminals.

Yes

No

Action There is a short circuit to the power supply system in the CAN communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13. Go to the next step.

x Verify the continuity between the following terminals: — Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC-2 terminal A — Between DLC-2 terminal E and DLC-2 terminal A

ZJ, ZY — Between PCM terminal 1AE and PCM terminal 1BC — Between PCM terminal 1AI and PCM terminal 1BC

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo — Between PCM terminal 1A and PCM terminal 2Y — Between PCM terminal 1B and PCM terminal 2Y

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

12

13

14

— Between PCM terminal 301 and PCM terminal 331 — Between PCM terminal 309 and PCM terminal 331 x Is there continuity? INSPECT CAN-RELATED MODULES OTHER THAN PCM and BCM x Remove only one of the CAN-related modules other than those related to the PCM and BCM. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle? PERFORM VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle?

PERFORM VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle?

Yes No

Replace the removed module. Inspect all of the CAN-related modules other than those related to the PCM and BCM using the same procedure. After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.

Yes No

DTC troubleshooting completed. Replace the PCM, then go to the next step. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) DTC troubleshooting completed. Replace the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

End Of Sie DTC U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)]

id0902j4001200

U0001:00 CAN system communication error U0001:88 CAN system communication error U0073:00 CAN system communication error Warning x Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to 09-02I-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX DETECTION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] troubleshooting procedure. CONDITION x CAN system-related harness malfunction x CAN system-related module malfunction

DTC

09-02I–24

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] U0001:00 CAN system communication error DTC U0001:88 CAN system communication error U0073:00 CAN system communication error x Open or short circuit in wiring harness x Malfunction of connectors between PCM, DSC HU/CM (with DSC), ABS HU/CM (with ABS), BCM, keyless control module, TCM, SAS control module, EPS control module, theft-deterrent control module and instrument cluster x PCM malfunction x DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC) POSSIBLE x ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS) x BCM malfunction CAUSE x Keyless control module malfunction x TCM malfunction x SAS control module malfunction x Theft-deterrent control module malfunction x EPS control module malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

ZJ, ZY

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo

PCM

PCM

PCM

301

309

1AI

1AE

1B

1A

WITH DSC

M

WITH ABS

H

DSC HU/CM

J WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

2G

6X

2I

6V

CVT

4V

A17

4X

A7

TCM

BCM

7X

SAS CONTROL MODULE

L

4W

4U

ABS HU/CM

7V

3C WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

3D

K

CONNECTOR

C-06

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

I

F

1G

E

1H

DLC-2

2B

EPS CONTROL MODULE

2D

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

: CAN_H : CAN_L

Diagnostic procedure Caution x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation, corrosion, or poor connection of the connector terminals.

09-02I–25

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Step 1

2

3

4

5

6

Inspection VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING x Are any DTCs, except the following, displayed? — U0001:00 — U0001:88 — U0073:00 INSPECTION OF CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR OUTPUTTING DTCs x Inspect the terminal condition of the control module connector outputting DTCs and the mid-connector. x Are the connector terminals normal without damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection? INSPECTION OF POWER SUPPLY OF CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTTING DTCs x Refer to the terminal voltage table of the control module outputting DTCs or use the PID/data monitoring function to inspect the terminal voltage and fuse condition. x Is the power supply voltage normal? INSPECTION OF BODY GROUND CONDITION OF CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTTING DTCs x Inspect the body ground wires and ground point of the control module outputting DTCs. x Are the ground and ground point normal? CAN SYSTEM RELATED WIRING HARNESS INSPECTION x CAN system related wiring harness inspection: — Short to ground — Short to power supply — Short between twisted pair wiring harness — Open circuit x Is the wiring harness normal? INSPECT PCM x Disconnect the PCM connector. x Measure the resistance between the following PCM connector terminals:

No

Action Determine the open circuit location referring to 09-02H-6 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)]. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the PCM, then go to Step 9. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].)

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

Yes

Reinstall the removed module, remove another module and perform the same inspection. Inspect all of the CANrelated modules using the same procedure. After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step. Replace the removed module.

Yes

ZJ, ZY — Between terminal 1AE and terminal 1AI (part side)

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo — Between terminal 1A and terminal 1B (part side)

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

7

8

— Between terminal 301 and terminal 309 (part side) x Is the resistance 118—130 ohms? INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Measure the resistance between the following instrument cluster connector terminals: — Between terminal 2B and terminal 2D (part side) x Is the resistance 118—130 ohms? CAN RELATED MODULE VERIFICATION x Remove only one of the CAN-related modules. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. x Inspect the DTCs of all modules using the MMDS. x Are DTCs U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00 displayed?

09-02I–26

No

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.)] Step 9

Inspection AFTER REPAIR VERIFICATION x Connect all of the modules. x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. x Inspect the DTCs using the M-MDS. x Are DTCs displayed?

Yes

No

Action Perform the CAN system on-board diagnosis again according to the troubleshooting procedure (See 09-02H-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (L.H.D.)].) DTC troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

09-02I–27

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

09-03A SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–2 FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–3 Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–3 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–3 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–4 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–5 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–6 Manual Open/close Function Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–6 Auto Open/close Function (Driver’s Side) Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–6 IG-OFF Timer Function Inspection . . . 09-03A–6 Auto Reverse Pinch Protection Function Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–7 Two-step Down Function Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–7 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–8

No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–9 No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–11 No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–11 No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–11 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–13 No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03A–15

End of Toc WM: POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

09-03A–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

id0903a0805200

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IG1 B+

1M MANUAL CLOSE

MANUAL OPEN

POWER-CUT SWITCH

1N

CLOSE

CLOSE

CLOSE

1B AUTO OPEN

OPEN

1F

OPEN

1D BCM

1A

P/W CM

1H 1K

CLOSE RELAY

1J

1L

E

F

OPEN RELAY

*1

*2

1C

E

D

1E

1I

E

D

1G

HALL EFFECT SWITCH 2

D

A

A

D

A

E POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH

A C B HALL EFFECT SWITCH 1

POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER'S SIDE)

POWER WINDOW POWER WINDOW MOTOR (LF) MOTOR (RR)

POWER WINDOW MOTOR (LR)

TERMINAL *1: 2B (L.H.D.), 2L (R.H.D.) *2: 2A (L.H.D.), 2K (R.H.D.) am2zzw0000383

End Of Sie

09-03A–2

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

id0903a0805400

Troubleshooting Procedure START (Customer arrives)

Confrim customer's concern

Can you duplicate the symptom?

Confirm to the customer using the "Power Window System Troubleshooting Questionnaire "

NO

YES Confirm the symptom

Is there same symptom in the Symptom Troubleshooting Chart?

Confirm the symptom on-vehicle

NO

Carry-out the basic inspection

YES Follow the appropriate diagnostic procedure

Repair the problem

Complete am2zzw0000021

x Slightly shake the wiring harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. Caution x If any of the following conditions continues indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up causing the protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the operation of the power window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows. — Continuous up and down operation of the power window. — Continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed. — Continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass fully opened. x A malfunction in the power window system will be determined and the system will shift to malfunction mode if the power windows are operated up or down using the power window switch while the power window protection circuit is operating. x While the power window system is in malfunction mode, but they do not operate using the auto open/close function. x The power window system reverts to normal operation after performing the Power Window system initialization procedure. Note x If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down and two-step down operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary. — Negative battery cable disconnected — Power window main switch connector disconnected — Power window system power supply fuse removed POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIAL SETTING x Refer to 09-12-27 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE. End Of Sie

09-03A–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

id0903a0805600

Malfunction symptom 09-03A-8 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-9 No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-11 No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-11 No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-11 No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-13 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 09-03A-15 No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

End Of Sie

09-03A–4

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] POWER WINDOW SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

id0903a0835500

Date : When did the malfunction first occur ? Wheather conditions Driving conditons

Fair weather Cloudy Driving

Duplicate symtom?

YES

Road conditions

City

Rain

Stopped (Engine is : NO

Outer city

Snow

Other (

Running

Frequency Freeway

Other (

Outside temperature

)

Approx.

°F

Stopped) Always )/

Sometimes (

Paved

times/month)

Dirt road

*Follow the appropriate diagnostic procedures shown below or perform the basic troubleshooting flow. (No.1) The auto open/close function on the driver's side power window inoperative. (No.2) The driver's side power window is inoperative. (No.3) All power windows other than driver's side do not operate using the power window subswitch. (No.4) All power windows other than driver's side do not operate using the power window main switch. (No.5) All power windows are inoperative. (No.6) Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode. Please clarify the position where the driver side front door glass opens automatically. Completely closed position Approx. ( )mm lower than completely closed position Approx. ( )mm upper than the completely open position. (No.7) Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing. Other (Describe the symptom below if the symptom does not appear in the above list.)

Please describe the conditions when the malfunction occurs. (Example) : When the outer mirrors are operated

Please describe the conditions under which the system returns to normal operation after malfunctioning. (Example) : The ignition switch is turned to the ON position after inserting the ignition key into the key cylinder

am2zzw0000463

End Of Sie

09-03A–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] POWER WINDOW SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

id0903a0831700

Manual Open/close Function Inspection STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Operate the power window using the manual open/close function on the power window main switch. x Does the power window operate properly? x Set the power cut switch to the UNLOCK position. x Operate the power window using the power window subswitch. x Does the power window operate properly? x Set the power cut switch to the LOCK position. x Operate all power windows other than the driver side. x Does the power window operate properly?

Yes No

Yes No

Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. x Inspect the power window main switch and the wiring harness. x Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Go to the next step. x Inspect the power window subswitch and the wiring harness. x Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. x x x x

Inspect the power cut switch and the wiring harness. Replace the power window main switch. Manual open/close function is normal. Perform the auto open/close function inspection.

Auto Open/close Function (Driver’s Side) Inspection STEP 1

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Operate the power window using the auto open / close function on the power window main switch. x Does the power window operate properly?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step.

If the power window automatically opens during the closing operation: x Go to 09-03A-13 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM].

Others:

2

3

x Operate the power window main switch to the close position while the power window is opening. x Does the power window operation stop? x Operate the power window main switch to the open position while the power window is closing. x Does the power window operation stop?

Yes No Yes No

x Go to 09-03A-8 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]. Go to the next step. x Replace the power window main switch (power window control unit is malfunctioning.) x Auto open/close function is normal. x Perform the IG-OFF timer function inspection. x Replace the power window main switch (power window control unit is malfunctioning.)

IG-OFF Timer Function Inspection STEP 1

INSPECTION x Close all doors. x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK position. x Operate the power window main switch within 43 s after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Does the power window operate?

2

x Open any door. x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK position. x Operate the power window main switch within 43 s after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Does the power window operate?

09-03A–6

Yes No

Yes

No

ACTION Go to the next step. x Inspect the door switches and related wiring harness. x If above parts are okay, replace the power window main switch, then go to the next step. x If above parts are incorrect repair or replace malfunction part (s), then go to the next step. x Inspect the door switches and related wiring harness. x If above parts are okay, replace the power window main switch, then go to the next step. x If above parts are incorrect repair or replace malfunction part (s), then go to the next step. x Go to the next step.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] STEP 3

INSPECTION x Close all doors. x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK position. x Operate the power window main switch within 60 s after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Does the power window operate?

Yes No

ACTION x Replace the power window main switch (power window control unit is malfunctioning.) x IG-OFF timer function operation is normal. x Perform the auto reverse pinch protection function inspection.

Auto Reverse Pinch Protection Function Inspection STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Fully open the driver's side power window. x Set the hammer (thickness: 10 mm or more) as shown below. Then, close the power window. x Verify that the power window opens 200 mm after contacting the hammer and the operation stops. x Does auto reverse pinch protection function operate properly? x Does power window open before contacting the hammer?

Yes No

Yes

No

ACTION x Auto reverse pinch protection function is normal. x Perform the two-step down function inspection. Go to the next step.

x Go to 09-03A-13 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]. x Initialize the power window main switch. Note x Before initializing the power window main switch, cut off the power supply to the power window main switch for 60 s. Then, reconnect it again after 60 s: — Disconnect the negative battery cable. — Disconnect the power window main switch connector. — Remove the fuse for the power window system.

HAMMER am2zzw0000022

Two-step Down Function Inspection Note x Before inspecting the two-step down function, make sure that the two-step down function is turned on.(if the two-step down function is turned off, the power window does not stop once.) x The two-step down position is adjustable within 20—100 mm {0.79—3.9 in}. x The two-step down function does not operate while the IG-OFF timer function is activated.

09-03A–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] STEP 1

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Turn on the two-step down function, if it is turned off. x Fully close the driver’s side power window. x Open the power window using the manual open/ close function on the power window main switch. x Verify that the power window stops 30 mm lower than the fully closed position for 1 s. x Does power window operate properly? Note x While the auto open/close function is activated, the two-step down function does not operate.

Yes No

ACTION Two-step down function is normal. x Verify that the auto open/close function operates properly.

If the auto open/close function operates properly: x Verify that the two-step down function is turned on.

If the auto open/close function does not operate properly: x Replace the power window main switch (power window control unit is malfunctioning.) (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] id0903a0831000

1

POSSIBLE CAUSE

The auto open/close function on the driver’s side power window is inoperative x Power window system in fail-safe function (Power window motor heat protection circuit is operating) x No power supply to power window main switch x Power window main switch malfunction (power window control unit malfunction, auto switch malfunction) x Power window motor malfunction (Sensor inside motor malfunction) x Malfunction in wiring harness between power window motor (sensor) and power window main switch

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position for 3 min. x Turn the ignition switch to ON position. x Initialize the power window system. x Operate the auto open/close function. x Dose the power window operate properly?

2

x Turn the ignition switch to ON position. x Inspect the two-step down operation. (See 09-03A-6 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM].) x Does the two-step down function operate properly? x Does the sensor built into the power window motor send pulse signals while the power window motor is operating? x Inspect the voltage at the following power window motor terminals: — B (sensor 1 signal) — A (sensor 2 signal) x Is the voltage approx. 6 V? x Does the sensor built into the power window motor send pulse signals while the power window motor is operating? x Inspect the voltage at the following power window main switch (14-pin connector) terminals: — 1D (sensor 1 signal) — 1H (sensor 2 signal) x Is the voltage approx. 6 V?

3

4

End Of Sie

09-03A–8

Yes

No Yes

No

ACTION System is normal. The power window system auto open/close function dose not operate temporarily for any of the following reasons: x The power window switch is operated while the power window motor protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) is operating. x The power window main switch power supply is cut off by disconnection of the negative battery cable or removing the fuse. Go to the next step. Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Yes

Replace the power main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in wiring between the power window motor (sensor) and the power window main switch. Inspect the connection of the power window motor and power window main switch connectors. (damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair of replace necessary.

No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 2

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903a0831100

The driver’s side power window is inoperative. x Power supply circuit or ground circuit malfunction — Burnt fuse (B+) — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between fuse (B+) and power window main switch — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window motor — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and ground x Power window main switch malfunction x Power window motor malfunction x Power window regulator malfunction

09-03A–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Does the LED on the power window main switch illuminate? x Operate all power windows other than the driver’s side window using the power window main switch. x Does the power window operate properly?

ACTION Yes No

Go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect for an open or short circuit in the following wiring harnesses. Inspect the connector connections (damage/ pulled-out pins, corrosion): x P/W 30 A fuse—Power window main switch terminal 1M x Power window main switch terminal 1B—ground. Repair or replace if necessary. Go to Step 5. Inspect the following: x Short circuit in B+ power supply wiring harness x Short circuit in power window motor Repair or replace if necessary. Replace with the appropriate standard fuse. Then, go to the next step. Troubleshooting is completed. Re-confirm the symptom and go to Step 1.

3

x Is the P/W 20 A fuse normal?

Yes No

4

x x x x

Yes No

5

Initialize the power window system. Operate the power window system. Do the power windows operate properly? Measure the voltage at the power window main switch terminal 1N. x Is the voltage B+?

Yes

No

6

7

8

9

x Measure the voltage at the power window main switch. (power window motor output terminal) while operating the power window using the power window main switch. x Is the voltage B+? (Open: terminal 1L/ close: terminal 1J) x Measure the voltage at the power window motor. (battery power supply terminal) while operating the power window using the power window motor. x Is the voltage B+? (Open: terminal F/ close: terminal E)

x Operate the driver's side power window using the power window main switch. x Does the power window motor operate (rotate)? Caution x If the power window motor temperature is high, the motor may not rotate due to the motor internal bimetal function. Leave it untouched for about 3 min to cool it down, then reinspect. x Remove the door glass from the carrier plate. x Make sure that the door glass moves smoothly using your hand. x Does the door glass move smoothly?

Yes No

Yes No

Yes No

Yes

No

End Of Sie

09-03A–10

Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window main switch wiring harness (battery power supply). Inspect the power window main switch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Go to the next step. Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the power window main switch and the power window motor. Inspect the power window main switch and power window motor connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Go to the next step. Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Replace the power window regulator. (See 09-12-12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-15 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for a bent regulator guide or other possible malfunction. If normal, replace the door glass run-channel.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] id0903a0831200

3 POSSIBLE CAUSE

All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power window subswitch. x Open or short circuit in power window subswitch wiring harness (battery power supply circuit). x Power window subswitch malfunction

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Set the power cut-switch to the UNLOCK position. x Measure the voltage at the power window subswitch terminal A. x Is the voltage B+?

Yes

No

ACTION Replace the power window subswitch. (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the power window main switch and the power window subswitch. Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary.

End Of Sie No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] id0903a0831300

4 POSSIBLE CAUSE

All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power window main switch x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and power window main switch (IG1). x Power window main switch malfunction

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Set the power cut-switch to the UNLOCK position. x Operate all power windows other than the driver’s side using the power window main switch. x Do any power windows operate?

Yes

No

ACTION Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window main switch wiring harness (battery power supply). Inspect the power window main switch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary.

End Of Sie No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] 5

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903a0831400

All power windows are inoperative. x Power supply circuit or ground circuit malfunction — Burnt fuse (B+) — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and power window main switch — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window subswitch — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window motor — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and ground x Power window main switch malfunction (power cut-off switch malfunction, switch malfunction) x Power window subswitch malfunction x Power window motor malfunction x Power window regulator malfunction

09-03A–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Set the power cut-off switch to the UNLOCK position. x Inspect the power window system operation again. x Does the system operate properly? x Operate all power windows other than driver’s side window using the power window main switch. x Does any power window operate? x Operate the driver’s side power window using the power window main switch. x Does the power window operate?

4

x Is the P/W 30 A fuse normal?

5

x Measure the voltage at the power window main switch terminal 1M. x Is the voltage B+?

No

ACTION System is now normal. (power cut-off switch is not set properly.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect for an open circuit in the wiring harness between the power window main switch and the body ground. Inspect the power window main switch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Replace with the appropriate standard fuse. If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for a short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace the fuse. Go to the next step. Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window main switch wiring harness (battery power supply). Inspect the power window main switch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes

Yes

No Yes

No

6

7

8

9

x Identify the inoperative power window. x Measure the voltage at the suspect power window motor (battery power supply) while operating the power window motor using the suspect power window subswitch. x Is the voltage B+? (Open: terminal F/ close: terminal E) x Operate the power window using the power window subswitch. x Does the power window motor operate (rotate)? Caution x If the power window motor temperature is high, the motor may not rotate due to the motor internal bimetal function. Leave it untouched for about 3 min. to cool it down, then reinspect. x Remove the door glass from the carrier plate. x Make sure that the door glass moves smoothly using your hand. x Does the door glass move smoothly? x Measure the voltage at the power window subswitch (power window motor output) while operating the power window subswitch. x Is the voltage B+? (Open: terminal E/ close: terminal D)

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Replace the power window regulator guide. Inspect for a bent regulator guide or other possible malfunction. If normal, replace the glass run channel.

Yes

Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the power window subswitch and power window motor. Inspect the power window subswitch and power window motor connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Go to the next step.

No

09-03A–12

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] STEP 10

11

INSPECTION Note x Do not operate the power window subswitch during the following inspection. x Inspect the continuity between power window subswitch terminal D (vehicle harness-side) and ground. x Is there continuity? Note x Do not operate the power window subswitch during the following inspection. x Inspect the continuity between power window subswitch terminal E and ground. x Is there continuity?

12

13

Note x Do not operate the power window main switch during the following inspection. x Inspect the continuity between power window main switch terminal (up-side 2B (L.H.D.), 2L (R.H.D.), 1C, 1I) and ground. x Is there continuity? Note x Do not operate the power window main switch during the following inspection. x Inspect the continuity between power window main switch terminal (down-side 2A (L.H.D.), 2K (R.H.D.), 1E, 1G) and ground. x Is there continuity?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window subswitch wiring harness. Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Then go to Step 12.

Yes

Replace the power window subswitch. (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window subswitch wiring harness. Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Then go to Step 12. Go to the next step. Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

No

Yes No

Yes

No

Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the power window main switch and power window subswitch. Inspect the power window main switch and subswitch connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion) Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] id0903a0831500

Note x Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of windows where the door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode. 6

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode. x Extreme change in the sliding resistance of the glass while the door glass is closing. — Improper installation of the acrylic door visor. — Power window motor malfunction. — Object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass. — Insufficient tightening of the door glass to the carrier plate. — Glass run channel malfunction. — Glass guide related malfunction. Note x The auto-reverse pinch protection function is a mechanism that automatically reverses (opens) the door glass while it is closing when the power window main switch detects the signal from the power window motor indicating that an object is obstructing the door glass movement. x The auto-reverse pinch protection function may operate if the sliding resistance of the door glass increases causing the closing speed to decrease. x If the door glass closing speed has changed, concentrate the inspection on the following locations: (Slip occurrence) — If the door glass is slipping forward, inspect the front side of the glass guide or glass run channel. — If the door glass is slipping rearward, inspect the rear side of the glass guide or glass run channel.

09-03A–13

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

INSPECTION x Inspect malfunction symptom. x Does the malfunction symptom occur only under the following special conditions?: — Driving over railroad tracks. — Driving on bumpy roads. — Opening/closing the door. x Inspect acrylic door visor installation condition. x Is the acrylic door visor normal? x Inspect door glass closing speed. x Affix tape to the rear edge of the door glass as shown in the figure for placing marks. (to facilitate seeing the door glass movement) x Start the engine and idle it (to ensure a stabilized operational voltage). x Does the door glass hesitate only once while its closing? x Reinspect door glass closing speed. x Does the door glass hesitate periodically while it is closing? x Inspect glass run channel and door glass sliding surface. x Is there an object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass, or is there roughness on the sliding surface (rubber surface)?

Yes

No Yes No Yes No

Yes

No Yes

ACTION The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that this does not indicate a malfunction because the system is designed to reverse the door glass while it is closing if it receives vibration when the vehicle is crossing railroad tracks, driving on a bumpy road, or when the door is opened/closed.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Install the side visor properly, then go to the next step. Mark the point where the door glass closing speed changed, then go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 8. (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to Step 8.

Object is caught between glass run channel and door glass: x Remove the object.

Roughness on the sliding surface (rubber surface):

No Yes No

6

x Inspect tightening of door glass to carrier plate. x Is it normal?

7

x Inspect condition of glass run channel and door glass. x Is it normal?

Yes No

8

x Inspect door glass closing speed. x Does the door glass hesitate at any location?

Yes No

x Replace the glass run channel. After performing one of the above actions, reinspect. If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. After tightening correctly, reinspect. If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3. Go to the next step. Assemble the glass run channel and door glass securely, and reinspect. If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3. Repeat the inspection from Step 3. Troubleshooting completed.

If door glass slips rearward slightly If door glass slips forward slightly Affx tape to rear edge

Speed change position

am2zzw0000022

End Of Sie

09-03A–14

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM] id0903a0831600

7

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing x Installation screw is loose between the door glass and carrier plate. x Deformity in the power window regulator plastic part due to use. — Scratching, wear marks to the power window regulator resin part due to twisting of the cable. — Gear deformity in the power window motor. Note x Identify the location of the noise using a stethoscope or similar device.

Diagnostic procedure Noise type Clanking noise

Time of occurrence Door glass begins to move

Possible cause

Location of noise

Action

Between door glass Securely tighten the lower edge and carrier installation screw. plate. Power window regulator Replace the power window regulator (See 09-12-12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/ Note INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-15 REAR x Noise does not occur if a POWER WINDOW roller is equipped to power REGULATOR REMOVAL/ window regulator resin part. INSTALLATION.) Gear inside power window motor is Gear in power window Replace the power deformed due to use. motor window motor (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

Insufficiently tightened installation screw between the door glass and carrier plate. Groaning noise While door glass Vibration caused by wear on the (Sound is operating resin part from cable twisting due increases due to to use of the power window use) regulator.

Whining noise Clicking noise (Periodic noise)

End Of Sie

RESIN PART POWER WINDOW MOTOR

POEWR WINDOW REGULATOR

CARRIER PLATE

am2zzw0000087

09-03A–15

SYMPTOM SYMPTOM TRO TROUBLESHOOT UBLESHOOTING [ADV [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND STAR START T SYSTEM]

09-03B SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–1 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03B–2 TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–3 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–3 NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–3

End of Toc

Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–4 NO.2 FLASHING KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-03B–6 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-03B–9 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–9

SYMPTOM SYMPTOM TRO TROUBLESHOOT UBLESHOOTING [ADV [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND STAR START T SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] WM: KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

No. Troubleshooting item 1 Door cannot be locked/unlocked by transmitter 2

Flashing keyless indicator light

3

Advanced keyless entry function inoperative

4

Advanced keyless start function inoperative

id0903d1814300

Page See 09-03B-3 NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] See 09-03B-6 NO.2 FLASHING KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] See 09-03B-6 NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] See 09-03B-9 NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

End Of Sie

09-03B–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0903d1800900

B+

3V

B+

STEERING LOCK UNIT

3W 1E

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT

2L THEFTDETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

IG1 LIFTGATE OPENNER SWITCH (3HB, 5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD)

2C ACC

3G

2A KEYLESS BUZZER A B

UNLOCK

LOCK

BCM

2F 3K

PCM

L 3P

J D

DOOR LOCK LINK SWITCH

B+

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

2G

KEYLESS KEYLESS INDICATOR WARNING LIGHT LIGHT (GREEN) (RED) ALARM

CAN-H

2I CAN-L

B+

SECURITY LIGHT

BCM

KEYLESS RECEIVER

1D INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

D C B

2H

3U 3O

A D B

3AD

E

3X

A

REQUEST SWITCH KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, RF)

WITH IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM IG1

D B COIL ANTENNA

C

2D

D

2B

F 3N

3F

B

3AB

E

REQUEST SWITCH

KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, LF)

3HB, 5HB

4SD 3R

C

3AA

D KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

3I

C

3Z

D KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

3C 3AC

C D KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

3R

C

3AA

D

3I

A

3Z

B

3C

C

3AC

D

3L

C

3Y

D

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER)

am2zzw0000510

End Of Sie

09-03B–2

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0903d1801000

x Refer to the general information and check the basic troubleshooting procedure. x The advanced keyless and start system is controlled by the Keyless control module. x The phrase “All doors” includes the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD).

End Of Sie KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0903d1800400

Note x “All doors” includes the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD). START

1. Remove the key from the steering lock. 2. Close all doors.

Open the driver-side door.

Perform the following procedures within 24 s. 1. Insert the key into the steering lock. 2. Repeat the following 4 times. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then back to the LOCK position. 3. Open and close the driver-side door 3 times (then leave the door open).

Confirm the following operations: All doors lock. Driver-side door unlocks. Passenger-side and rear doors unlock. Hazard flash. Are the above operations normal?

Yes

The on-board diagnostic function is operated properly. The on-board diagnostic is competed.

No

Was the on-board diagnosis performed properly?

Yes

The on-board diagnostic function is inoperative. Perform symptom troubleshooting.

No am2zzw0000215

End Of Sie NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0903d1900300

1

Possible Cause

Door cannot be locked/unlocked by transmitter x Transmitter (advanced key) malfunction (battery or other parts) x Keyless control module malfunction x Keyless receiver malfunction x Customer's mis-operation or misunderstanding x Effect of non-standard equipment (any control unit with built-in micro computer such as radio set, mobile telephone, and TV)

09-03B–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

2

Inspection x Does the operation indicator light illuminate when the transmitter (advanced key) is operated? x Did the customer operate the transmitter (advanced key) within the operation range (2.5 m {8.2 ft} from the vehicle)?

3

x Did the customer operate at a place where extrinsic noise is received such as a TV tower, electric power station, or a broadcast station.

4

x Did the customer operate the transmitter (advanced key) with all the following conditions met? — All doors are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. — The start knob is in the LOCK position. — The start knob is being pressed. x Did the malfunction occur after any non-standard equipment (any control unit with built-in micro computer such as radio set, mobile telephone, and TV) was installed? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Was the malfunction corrected when the connector of the equipment was disconnected? x Connect the negative battery cable. x Is lock/unlock possible only near the keyless receivers when the transmitter (advanced key) is operated? x Verify the advanced keyless and start system operation using another normal battery. x Does the advanced keyless and start system operate normally?

5

6

7

8

9

x Visually inspect the transmitter (advanced key) battery. x Are the following correct? — Battery direction (polarity) — Battery type (CR2025)

10

x Visually inspect the transmitter (advanced key) battery. (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) — Is there any rust on the battery terminals (+), (-)? — Is there any poor contact between the battery terminals and the battery when the battery is inserted? x Inspect the battery. x Is it normal?

11 12

x Verify the advanced keyless and start system operation using another normal battery. x Does the advanced keyless and start system operate normally?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes No

Go to the next step. System is normal. (Explain to the customer to operate the transmitter within the operation range.) System is normal. (Explain to the customer to operate the transmitter (advanced key) away from extrinsic noise.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. System is normal. (Explain to the customer that the system does not operate due to the cancel function with the auxiliary key in the ignition key cylinder.)

Yes

No Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

Yes No

System is normal. (Explain to the customer that noise from the equipment affected the operation.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes

Replace the battery, then go to Step 23. (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Insert the battery correctly or replace it with a specified one (CR2025), then go to Step 23. (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Replace the transmitter (advanced key) or repair the battery terminals, then go to Step 23. Go to the next step.

No Yes No

Yes No

Yes No Yes

No 13

x Inspect the keyless receiver installation condition. x Is the bracket installed securely?

09-03B–4

Yes No

Go to Step 13. Go to the next step. Replace the battery, then go to Step 22. (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Replace the transmitter (advanced key), then go to Step 22. Go to the next step. Install the bracket securely, then go to the next step.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 14

x

x

Inspection Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Is the keyless receiver power supply voltage normal? — Power supply (+B) (terminal D) Inspect the keyless receiver. Is the keyless receiver grounded normally? — Power supply (0 V) (terminal B)

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect for a burnt fuse (ROOM 15 A) Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an open or short circuit.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the ground system wiring harness for an open circuit. Inspect the ground tightening screw and nut for looseness. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the keyless receiver connector and keyless control module connector, then go to the next step.

15

x x

16

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector (4pin) and the keyless control module connector (12-pin). x Inspect the wiring harness between the following terminals for an open or short circuit. — Terminal C (4-pin) to terminal 2H (12-pin) x Is the wiring harness normal? x Are the following keyless control module power supply voltages normal? — Power supply (IG1) (Terminal 2C) — Power supply (+B) (Terminals 1D and 1E) — Power supply (ACC) (Terminal 2A)

Yes No

18

x Is the following keyless control module ground voltage normal? — 0 V (Terminal 3N)

Yes No

19

x Inspect the following keyless control module (12pin, 30-pin) signal voltages with the auxiliary key not in the ignition key cylinder, and the start knob in the LOCK position and not being pressed. — Keyless switch: 10 V or less (Terminal 3W) — Start knob (push switch): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3V) — Power supply (ACC): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2A) — Power supply (IG1): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2C) x Are the signal voltages normal? x Are the following BCM terminal voltages normal? (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) — When the front door (RH) is open: Wave pattern (Terminal 7I) — When the front door (RH) is closed: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 7I) — When the front door (LH) is open: Wave pattern (Terminal 7M) — When the front door (LH) is closed: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 7M) — When the rear door (RH) is open: Wave pattern (Terminal 7O) — When the rear door (RH) is closed: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 7O) — When the rear door (LH) is open: Wave pattern (Terminal 7G) — When the rear door (LH) is closed: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 7G) — When the liftgate is open: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 7S) — When the liftgate is closed: B+ (Terminal 7S)

Yes No

17

20

Yes No

Yes

No

Go to the next step. Inspect for a burnt fuse (ENG10 A, ROOM15 A, P/W 20 A, MIRROR 7.5 A). Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an open or short circuit, repair or replace if necessary, then go to the next step. Go to the next step. Inspect the ground system wiring harness for an open circuit, then go to the next step. Go to the next step. Inspect the keyless switch. Inspect the keyless switch system wiring harness for an open or short circuit, then go to the next step.

Inspect the wiring harness between BCM terminal 6W and keyless control module terminal 2F. If there is any open or short circuit, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. If there is no malfunction, go to the next step. Inspect the door latch switch. (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) Inspect the door latch switch system wiring harness for an open or short circuit, then go to the next step.

09-03B–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 21

x x

Inspection Is the signal voltage transmitted from the BCM to the door lock actuator normal? Does BCM terminal voltage change as follows when locking/unlocking using the transmitter (advanced key)? — Unlocking: B+ (Terminal 3O) — Locking (Vehicles with double locking system): 1.0 V or lessoB+o1.0 V or less (Terminal 3E) — Locking (Vehicles without double locking system): B+ (Terminal 3M) Replace the keyless receiver. Does the advanced keyless and start system operate normally?

22

x x

23

x Does the advanced keyless and start system operate normally?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the wiring harness between the BCM and the door lock actuator for an open or short circuit. Inspect the door lock actuator, then go to Step 23. (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. Replace the BCM, then go to the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Troubleshooting completed. Verify the malfunction, then go to Step 1 if it recurs.

Yes No

End Of Sie NO.2 FLASHING KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0903d1892600

2 Possible Cause

Flashing keyless indictor light x Transmitter (advanced key) battery voltage low

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Action Replace the transmitter (advanced key) battery. (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

End Of Sie NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0903d1801400

3 Possible Cause

Advanced keyless entry function inoperative x Transmitter (advanced key) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction x Keyless receiver malfunction x Keyless antenna malfunction x Customer's mis-operation

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

2

Inspection x Inspect for any advanced keyless systemrelated DTCs. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Are any DTCs displayed? x Verify the operation method for the request switch and the liftgate (3HB,5HB)/ trunk lid (4SD) opener switch. x Was the operation performed using any front door switch (driver's side/passenger's side) or the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch?

09-03B–6

Yes No

Yes No

Action Perform the corresponding DTC troubleshooting. Go to the next step.

Go to the next step. Verify the advanced keyless system operation by pressing each switch. If the system does not operate, go to the next step.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 3

4

Inspection x Verify the advanced keyless system operation by operating each request switch and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch with all the following conditions met. — The advanced key is outside of the cabin. — All doors and trunk lid (4SD) are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. — The start knob is in the LOCK position, and not pressed. — The advanced key is within the reception area (80 cm {31 in} radius from near the driver's door, front passenger's door, and the liftgate (3HB,5HB)/trunk lid (4SD). x Does the advanced keyless entry operate normally? x Inspect the signal voltages at the following keyless control module connector (30-pin) when the request switches and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch are pressed.

Yes No

Action System is normal. (Explain the customer about the keyless entry system.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the applicable wiring harness between the request switch and the keyless control module for an open or short circuit, then go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the applicable wiring harness between the switch and the keyless control module, repair if necessary, then go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC troubleshooting. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the wiring harness between the keyless receiver and the keyless control module.

12 Vo1.0 V or less — Request switch (RF) (Terminal 3U) — Request switch (LF) (Terminal 3X)

5 Vo3.0 V or less

5

x x

6

x x

x

7

x x

x

— Liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch (Terminal 3G) Are the signal voltages normal? Inspect the following keyless control connector signal voltages with the auxiliary key not in the ignition switch key cylinder, and the start knob in the LOCK position and not being pressed. — Keyless switch: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3W) — Start knob (push switch): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3V) — Power supply (ACC): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2A) — Power supply (IG1): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2C) Are the signal voltages normal? Perform the advanced keyless and start system DTC inspection with all the following condition met. — The start knob is not in the LOCK position. — The start knob is not pressed. — All doors and trunk lid (4SD) are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Are any DTCs displayed? Measure the signal voltage at keyless control module terminal 2H when each request switch and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch are operated. Is the signal voltage B+o1.0 V or less when the transmitter (advanced key) is pressed?

If the wiring harness is normal: x Replace the advanced key, then go to the next step.

If the wiring harness is malfunctioning: x Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to the next step.

09-03B–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 3

4

Inspection x Verify the advanced keyless system operation by operating each request switch and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch with all the following conditions met. — The advanced key is outside of the cabin. — All doors and trunk lid (4SD) are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. — The start knob is in the LOCK position, and not pressed. — The advanced key is within the reception area (80 cm {31 in} radius from near the driver's door, front passenger's door, and the liftgate (3HB,5HB)/trunk lid (4SD). x Does the advanced keyless entry operate normally? x Inspect the signal voltages at the following keyless control module connector (30-pin) when the request switches and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch are pressed.

Yes No

Action System is normal. (Explain the customer about the keyless entry system.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the applicable wiring harness between the request switch and the keyless control module for an open or short circuit, then go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the applicable wiring harness between the switch and the keyless control module, repair if necessary, then go to the next step.

Yes No

Perform the corresponding DTC troubleshooting. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the wiring harness between the keyless receiver and the keyless control module.

12 Vo1.0 V or less — Request switch (RF) (Terminal 3U) — Request switch (LF) (Terminal 3X)

5 Vo3.0 V or less

5

x x

6

x x

x

7

x x

x

— Liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch (Terminal 3G) Are the signal voltages normal? Inspect the following keyless control connector signal voltages with the auxiliary key not in the ignition switch key cylinder, and the start knob in the LOCK position and not being pressed. — Keyless switch: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3W) — Start knob (push switch): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3V) — Power supply (ACC): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2A) — Power supply (IG1): 1.0 V or less (Terminal 2C) Are the signal voltages normal? Perform the advanced keyless and start system DTC inspection with all the following condition met. — The start knob is not in the LOCK position. — The start knob is not pressed. — All doors and trunk lid (4SD) are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Are any DTCs displayed? Measure the signal voltage at keyless control module terminal 2H when each request switch and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch are operated. Is the signal voltage B+o1.0 V or less when the transmitter (advanced key) is pressed?

If the wiring harness is normal: x Replace the advanced key, then go to the next step.

If the wiring harness is malfunctioning: x Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to the next step.

09-03B–8

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 8

x

9

x x

x x

10

Inspection Inspect the wiring harness between BCM terminal 6W and keyless control module terminal 2F. Is there any open or short circuit? Measure the signal voltages at the following BCM connector (16-pin) when each request switch and the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch are operated. (See 0940-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) — Door lock actuator (Vehicles with double locking system) x When the doors are locked (Terminal 3E): 1.0 V or lessoB+o1.0 V or less x When the doors are unlocked (Terminal 3O): B+ — Door lock actuator (Vehicles without double locking system) x When the doors are locked (Terminal 3M): B+ x When the doors are unlocked (Terminal 3O): B+ — Liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD) opener switch x When the switch is operated with all doors locked (Terminal 6U): Wave pattern Are the voltages normal? Does the advanced keyless system operate normally?

Yes No Yes

Action Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Connect the connector, then go to the next step.

No

Inspect the BCM and replace it if necessary. (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inspect the wiring harness between the BCM and the door lock actuator for an open or short circuit. Inspect the door lock actuator, repair if necessary, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. Verify the malfunction, then go to Step 1 if it recurs.

End Of Sie NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0903d1801500

4 Possible Cause

Advanced keyless start function inoperative x Transmitter (advanced key) malfunction x Keyless control module malfunction x Keyless receiver malfunction x Keyless antenna malfunction x PCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

x

2

x x x

3

Inspection Inspect for any advanced keyless and start system-related DTCs. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Are any DTCs displayed? Verify if the engine can be started using the auxiliary key. Does the engine start?

x Verify that the keyless indicator light (green) illuminates when the start knob is pressed.

Yes No

Yes No

Yes No

Action Perform the corresponding DTC troubleshooting. Go to the next step.

Go to the next step. Perform symptom troubleshooting No.3 (Section 0103). (See 01-03-12 NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [ZJ, ZY].) Go to Step 10.

If the keyless indicator light (green) does not illuminate: x Go to the next step.

If the keyless indicator light (red) flashes: x Go to Step 5.

If the keyless indicator light (red) illuminates: x Go to Step 8.

09-03B–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] Step 4

Inspection x Bring the advanced key into the cabin. x Inspect the signal voltages at the following keyless control module connector (30-pin) when the start knob is pressed. — Start knob (push switch): B+ (Terminal 3V) — Keyless switch: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 3W) x Are the signal voltages normal?

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the wiring harness between the steering lock unit and the keyless control module.

If the wiring harness is normal: x Replace the steering lock unit, then go to the next step. (See 06-13-4 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].)

If the wiring harness is malfunctioning:

5

6

7

8

x Perform advanced keyless and start system DTC inspection with all the following condition met. — The start knob is not in the LOCK position. — The start knob is not pressed. — All doors are closed. — The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder. x Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-5 DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Are any DTCs displayed? x Inspect the advanced key. x Is the advanced key normal?

x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the keyless receiver normal? x Measure the voltage at keyless control module connector (12-pin) terminal 2L. x Is the voltage 5.0 V?

Yes No

Yes

No Yes No

Yes No

x Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to the next step. Perform the corresponding DTC troubleshooting. Go to the next step.

Replace the keyless receiver, then go to Step 8. (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Replace the advanced key, then go to the next step. Go to the next step. Inspect the corresponding part following “Inspection item(s)”. Go to the next step. Inspect the wiring harness between keyless control module connector (12-pin) terminal 2L and steering lock unit (8-pin) terminal G for an open or short circuit.

If the wiring harness is normal: x Go to the next step.

If the wiring harness is malfunctioning:

9

x Inspect the steering lock unit. (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) x Is the steering lock unit normal?

10

x Turn the start knob to the START position. x Does the advanced keyless entry and start system operate normally?

End Of Sie

09-03B–10

Yes

No Yes No

x Replace the malfunctioning part, then go to the next step. Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step. Troubleshooting completed. Verify the malfunction, then go to Step 1 if it recurs.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

09-03C SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–1 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–2 TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–2 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK SHEET [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–2 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–4

NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–5 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–5 NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–6 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–6 NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03C–7 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–8

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] SYMPTOM End of Toc TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] WM: KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

No. Troubleshooting item 1 One or more on-board diagnostic functions inoperative

Description x Malfunction in door lock linkage system

2

All on-board diagnostic functions inoperative

x Malfunction in BCM power supply circuit, door latch switch circuit, BCM ground circuit, or keyless receiver.

3

Transmitter ID code cannot be reprogrammed

x Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter, keyless receive bracket, keyless receive bracket ground screw, or BCM circuit. keyless receive circuit.

id0903d2814300

Page See 09-03C-5 NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] See 09-03C-6 NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] See 09-03C-7 NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

End Of Sie

09-03C–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] B+

id0903d2800900

IG2

F.WIP 20 A

2F

LIFTGATE OPENER RELAY(3HB,5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER RELAY(4SD) 3A

RWIP 10 A

LIFTGATE OPENER MOTOR(3HB,5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER MOTOR(4SD)

2N R.DEF 20 A

1C HAZARD 10 A

1J

M

3C LIFTGATE OPENER RELAY(3HB,5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER RELAY(4SD)

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR WITHOUT DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM

3O

ROOM 15 A

1O TAIL 15 A

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

3M 1E

BCM

IG1

WITH DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM

2M IGNITION SWITCH

2P

4SD METER 10 A

3E 2G

6U B+

KEYLESS RECIEVER

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

7C

DOOR LOCK LINK SWITCH

7K 7A

6W 4S

7Q 7G DOOR LATCH SWITCH(LR)

7O

4Q DOOR LATCH SWITCH(RR)

4U 4W CAN RELATED MODULE

7M

4V 4X

DOOR LATCH SWITCH(LF)

7I

7X DOOR LATCH SWITCH(RF)

7V 6X 6V

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM am2zzw0000510

End Of Sie TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2801000

x Refer to the general information and check the basic troubleshooting procedure. x The keyless entry system is controlled by the BCM. x The phrase “All doors” includes the liftgate (3HB, 5HB)/trunk lid (4SD).

End Of Sie KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK SHEET [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2871400

x Use the sheet below as a customer interview sheet when accepting a vehicle for service. x If the symptom is “Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter at all,” find out how the customer uses the keyless entry system by following the check sheet below.

09-03C–2

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] Perform the following inspection with customer. Q1. What's the customer's complaint? Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter (door does not lock/unlock). Other Q2. Is system factory-installed or after-market? Factory-installed system GO to Q3. After-market system Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless entry system manual. Q3. Operate transmitter with customer from 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from center of vehicle. (Make sure the ignition key is either in the LOCK position or removed.) Does keyless entry system work? Yes Explain the following to the customer. Keyless entry system does not work when ignition switch is in ON position. Keyless entry system does not work form excessive distances (more than 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from center of vehicle). No Go to Q4. Q4. Check location where customer uses keyless entry system. Does a particular area, such as being near TV towers, power plants, power lines, or factories, have an effect on malfunction? Yes Place Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside interference on transmitter to customer. No Go to Q5. Q5. Make sure there are no after-market electrical parts installed on vehicle. Are there any of the following present? Cellular phone Radio-wave equipment Remote engine starter TV, etc. Yes Parts No Perform the keyless entry system preliminary inspection. am2zzw0000200

End Of Sie KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2800300

x Perform the following preliminary inspection before troubleshooting. STEP 1

INSPECTION x Is system an after-market one?

Yes

2

x Did customer activate keyless entry system when ignition switch was in LOCK position?

No Yes No

3

x Did customer use keyless entry system in particular area, such as being near TV towers, power plants, power lines, or factories?

Yes

ACTION Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless entry system manual. Go to next step. Go to next step. x Explain to customer that system does not work when ignition is in ON position. x Turn ignition switch to LOCK position, then go to next step. Attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter in noninterference area.

If system operates: x Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside interference on transmitter to customer.

If system does not operate: No

x Go to next step. Go to next step.

09-03C–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] STEP 4

INSPECTION x Are any of the following after-market electrical parts on the vehicle? — Cellular phone — Radio-wave equipment — Remote engine starter — TV, etc.

5

x Perform on-board diagnostic function. (See 09-03C-4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Does on-board diagnostic function work?

6

x Attempt to reprogram transmitter ID code. x Can transmitter ID code be reprogrammed?

Yes

ACTION Disconnect after-market electrical part connectors and attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter.

If system operates: x After-market electrical parts are interfering with keyless entry system.

If system does not operate: No Yes No

Yes No

x Go to next step. Go to next step. Go to next step. x Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE. x Go to Step 1 of NO. 2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE. System is normal now. Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting NO. 3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED.

End Of Sie ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2871500

START

1. Remove ignition key from steering lock. 2. Close all doors.

Open driver-side door.

Perform the following procedures within 24 seconds. 1. Insert ignition key into steering lock. 2. Repeat the following 4 time. Turn ignition switch to ON position, then back to LOCK position. 3. Push driver-side door switch 3 times.

Confirm the following operations: All doors lock. Driver-side door unlocks. Passenger-side and rear doors unlock. Horn sounds twice hazard flash.

Yes

On-board diagnostic function is operated properly. On-board diagnostic is competed.

Are above operations okay?

No

Did you conduct on-board diagnosis properly?

Yes

On-board diagnostic function is inoperative. Perform symptom troubleshooting.

No Wait for 40 seconds. Return am2zzw0000468

09-03C–4

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] End Of Sie

NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2800600

1

One or more on-board diagnostic functions inoperative x BCM power supply, ground, or input/output signal error — Power supply (IG1) — Power supply (B+) — Key reminder switch Possible Cause — Ground — Door latch switch — Turn light system malfunction — Door lock actuator malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

2

3

4

Inspection Did any of the following operate during the malfunction diagnosis? x All doors lock/unlock x Hazard warning lights flash Did the following operate during the malfunction diagnosis? x All doors lock/unlock Did the following operate during the malfunction diagnosis? x Hazard warning lights flash Are the BCM power supply voltages normal? x Power supply (IG1) (Terminal 2G) x Power supply (B+) (Terminals 1J, 1O, and 1P)

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Inspect the connection of the BCM connectors, then go to Step 4.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 7.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Inspect for a burnt fuse (METER 10A, ROOM 15A, D/L 20 A). x Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an open or short circuit. Go to the next step. Inspect the ground system wiring harness for an open circuit. Go to the next step. x Inspect the door latch switch. (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Inspect the door latch switch system wiring harness for an open or short circuit. Go to the next step. x Inspect the wiring harness between the BCM and the key reminder switch for an open or short circuit. x Replace the key reminder switch.

5

Is the BCM ground voltage normal? x 0 V (Terminals 2M and 2P)

Yes No

6

Are the BCM and each door latch switch normal? x Inspect each terminal (7G, 7O, 7M, and 7I) under the following conditions. (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) — When the door is closed: 1.0 V or less — When the door is open: Wave pattern

Yes No

7

Is the signal voltage transmitted from the key reminder switch to the BCM normal? — When the key is inserted into the steering lock: B+ (Terminal 6R) — When the key is not inserted into the steering lock: 1.0 V or less (Terminal 6R) Are the signal voltages transmitted from the BCM to the door lock actuator normal? x Do the signal voltages transmitted to the door lock actuator change as follows when the malfunction diagnosis inspection procedure is performed. — When the doors are unlocked: 1.0 V or lessoB+o1.0V or less (Terminal 3O) — When the doors are locked (Vehicles with double locking system): 1.0 V or lessoB+o1.0V or less (Terminal 3E) — When the doors are locked (Vehicles without double locking system): 1.0 V or lessoB+o1.0V or less (Terminal 3M) Is the signal voltage transmitted to the BCM and each turn light normal? x Does the signal voltage transmitted to each turn light change as follows when the malfunction diagnosis inspection procedure is performed. — B+ œ 1.0 V or less (Terminals 1K, 1L, 3J, and 3L)

Yes No

8

9

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. x Inspect the wiring harness between the BCM and the door lock actuator for an open or short circuit. x Inspect the door lock actuator. (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. x Inspect the wiring harnesses between the BCM and each turn light for an open or short circuit. x Inspect each turn light. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)

09-03C–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] End Of Sie

NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2800700

2

All on-board diagnostic functions inoperative x Transmitter malfunction (battery or other parts) x Customer's mis-operation or misunderstanding x Effect of non-standard equipment (any control unit with built-in micro computer such as radio set, Possible Cause mobile telephone, and TV) x Mistakes in previous services x Keyless receiver malfunction x BCM malfunction

Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection Does the on-board diagnosis function operate?

2

Can any operation be performed using the transmitter?

3

Did the customer operate the transmitter within the operation range (7.5 m {25 ft} from the vehicle)?

4

Did the customer operate at a place where extrinsic noise is received such as a TV tower, electric power station, or a broadcast station.

5

Did the customer operate the transmitter with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder?

6

Has the customer ever updated the transmitter ID number before?

7

Did the malfunction occur after the ID number updating?

8

Does the malfunction occur only when the transmitter which had been used before the ID number updating is used?

9

Did the malfunction occur after any nonstandard equipment (any control unit with built-in micro computer such as radio set, mobile telephone, and TV) was installed? Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Was the malfunction corrected when the connector of the equipment was disconnected? Is there repair record of the customer's keyless entry system?

10

11 12

Does the malfunction occur after the repair?

13

Connect the negative battery cable. Is the malfunction corrected when the ID numbers for all the customer's transmitters are updated? (See 09-14-120 TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

14

Is lock/unlock possible only near the keyless receivers when the transmitter is operated?

15

Verify the keyless and start system operation using another normal battery. Does the keyless system operate normally?

Yes No

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

No Yes No Yes

No

09-03C–6

Action Go to the next step. Perform symptom troubleshooting No.1 (See 09-03C-5 NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Replace the transmitter, then go to Step 24. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. System is normal. (Explain to the customer to operate the transmitter within the operation range.) System is normal. (Explain to the customer to operate the transmitter away from extrinsic noise.) Go to the next step. System is normal. (Explain to the customer that the system does not operate due to the cancel function with the key in the ignition key cylinder.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to Step 9. Go to the next step. Go to Step 9. Update the ID number of the transmitter which cause the malfunction, then go to Step 24. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to Step 11. System is normal. (Explain to the customer that noise from the equipment affected the operation.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to Step 14. Go to the next step. Go to Step 14. System is normal. (Explain to the customer that the malfunction occurred because all the transmitter ID numbers were not updated even though the body control module or a transmitter was replaced in the previous servicing.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to Step 16. Replace the battery, then go to Step 26. (See 09-14-118 TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] Step 16

17

18

Inspection Visually inspect the transmitter battery. Are the following correct? x Battery direction (polarity) x Battery type — CR1620 Visually inspect the transmitter. x Is there any rust on the battery terminals (+), (-)? x Is there any poor contact between the battery terminals and the battery when the battery is inserted? Inspect the battery. Is it normal?

19

Verify the keyless and start system operation using another normal battery. Does the keyless system operate normally?

20

Inspect the keyless receiver installation condition. Is the bracket installed securely? Perform ID number updating using another normal transmitter. After the updating, does the keyless entry system operate normally? Inspect the keyless receiver. x Is the keyless receiver power supply voltage normal?

21

22

Action Yes No

Go to the next step. Properly install the battery or replace the battery with a specified one (CR1620), then go to Step 26

Yes

Replace the transmitter or repair the battery terminals, then go to Step 23. Go to the next step.

No

Yes No Yes

No Yes No

Go to Step 20. Go to the next step. Replace the battery, then go to Step 26. (See 09-14-118 TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Replace the transmitter, then go to Step 26. Go to the next step. Install the bracket securely, then go to the next step.

Yes No

Replace the transmitter, then go to Step 26. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Inspect for a burnt fuse (ROOM 15 A). x Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an open or short circuit.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Inspect the ground system wiring harness for an open circuit. x Inspect the ground tightening screw and nut for looseness.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the keyless receiver connector and the BCM.

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. Replace the BCM, then go to the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed. Verify the malfunction, then go to Step 1 if it recurs.

4-pin connector type — Power supply (+B) (terminal B)

6-pin connector type 23

— Power supply (+B) (terminal A) Inspect the keyless receiver. x Is the keyless receiver ground normal?

4-pin connector type — 0 V (terminal D)

6-pin connector type 24

— 0 V (terminal E) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector and the BCM connector. x Inspect the wiring harness between the following terminals for an open or short circuit.

4-pin connector type — Terminal C to 6W

6-pin connector type

25

26

— Terminal D to 6W x Is it normal? Replace the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) x Does the keyless entry system operate normally? Does the keyless entry system operate normal?

End Of Sie NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0903d2800800

3 Transmitter ID code cannot be reprogrammed Possible Cause x Mis-operation in ID number updating or BCM malfunction

09-03C–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] Diagnostic Procedure Step 1

Inspection Is the customer's keyless entry system standard equipment?

2

Does the on-board diagnosis function operate?

Yes No

3

Do all doors lock/unlock using the transmitter?

Yes No

4

Perform ID number updating following the procedure. (See 09-14-120 TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Can the ID number be updated? Inspect the keyless receiver. x Is the keyless receiver power supply voltage normal?

Yes No

5

Yes No

Action Go to the next step. Perform troubleshooting following the separate service manual. Go to the next step. Perform symptom troubleshooting No.1. (See 09-03C-5 NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Go to the next step. Perform symptom troubleshooting No.2. (See 09-03C-6 NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) System is normal. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. x Inspect for a burnt fuse (ROOM 15 A) x Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an open or short circuit.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect the ground system wiring harness for an open circuit.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the wiring harness between the keyless receiver connector and the BCM connector, then go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the BCM, then go to the next step. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Troubleshooting completed. Verify the malfunction, then go to Step 1 if it recurs.

4-pin connector type — Power supply (+B) (terminal B)

6-pin connector type 6

— Power supply (+B) (terminal A) Inspect the keyless receiver. x Is the keyless receiver grounded normally?

4-pin connector type — 0 V (terminal D)

6-pin connector type 7

— 0 V (terminal E) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector (4pin/6-pin) and the BSM connector (24-pin). x Inspect the wiring harness between the following terminals for an open or short circuit.

4-pin connector type — Terminal C to 6W

6-pin connector type

8

9

— Terminal D to 6W x Is it normal? Connect the negative battery cable. Is the signal voltage transmitted from the keyless receiver to the BCM is normal when the transmitter is operated with the key not inserted into the ignition key cylinder. x B+o1.0V or less (Terminal 6W) Can the ID number be updated? (See 09-14-120 TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

End Of Sie

09-03C–8

No

Yes No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]

09-03D SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03D–1

NO.1 THE SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–1

09

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] WM: IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

id0903f5814200

No. 1

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM The security light display is not normal

PAGE 09-03D-1 NO.1 THE SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]

End Of Sie NO.1 THE SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] 1

DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903f5900400

The security light display is not normal x The security light remains illuminated 2 min or more after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position x The security does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position x The security light remains illuminated while the ignition switch is at the LOCK position x The security light does not flash or the flashing interval is abnormal while the ignition switch is at the LOCK position x Keyless control module malfunction (with advanced keyless and start system) x Instrument cluster malfunction Note x If the security light continues to remain illuminated or flashing even after 1 min has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position and a DTC is displayed, perform the immobilizer system malfunction diagnosis according to that DTC. (See 09-02B-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)].)(See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x While performing immobilizer system security access using the M-MDS, the security light does not illuminate even if the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Verify the illumination condition of the security light by disconnecting the DLC-2 to release security access. x The flashing security light conditions while the ignition switch is in the LOCK position are as follows: ILLUMINATED

APPROX.1.9 S

APPROX.1.9 S

SECURITY LIGHT GOES OUT APPROX. 0.1 S

Note x Normal operation of the security light is as follows. The light starts flashing every 2 s when the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC position and the immobilizer system is armed. The light stops flashing when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the correct ignition key. At this time, the immobilizer system is disarmed and the security light illuminates for about 3 s and then goes out.

09-03D–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] Diagnostic procedure STEP INSPECTION 1 THE MALFUNCTION LOCATION IS SPLIT INTO EITHER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT OR ELSEWHERE x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Verify that the other warning lights in the instrument cluster condition. x Do the warning lights illumination normal? 2 THE MALFUNCTION LOCATION IS SPLIT INTO EITHER SECURITY LIGHT CONTROL (MICRO-COMPUTER ALWAYS ON) OR ELSEWHERE x Verify that the security light illumination. x Does the security light remains illuminate above 2 min? 3 THE MALFUNCTION LOCATION IS SPLIT INTO EITHER SECURITY LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT (SHORT CIRCUIT) OR ELSEWHERE x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Verify that the security light illumination. x Does the security light remain illumination? 4 THE MALFUNCTION LOCATION IS SPLIT INTO EITHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM OR ELSEWHERE x Verify that the security light is flashing. x Does the security light flash normally?

Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes No

5

VEHICLE SPECIFICATION VERIFICATION x Is the advanced keyless and start system equipped?

Yes No

6

THE MALFUNCTION LOCATION IS SPLIT INTO EITHER THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE OR THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER.

Yes

No Note x DTCs could be stored in the keyless control module by performing the following procedure. x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Disconnect the keyless control module connectors. x Connect the negative battery cable. x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Does the security light illuminate normally?

End Of Sie

09-03D–2

ACTION Go to the next step. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting and inspect the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION.)

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

Go to the next step. If the security light flashes with DTC patterns, perform the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02B-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM)]. (See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) If the security light does not flash, replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO]

09-03E SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] FOREWORD [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–1 Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–1 Quick Diagnostic Chart (Entire Audio System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO] . . . 09-03E–2 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–3 CONFIRMATION STEP 2: AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–3 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–3 NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [AUDIO] . . . . 09-03E–4 NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–6

NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–6 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–7 NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [AUDIO] . . . . 09-03E–9 NO.6 SOUND BECOMES LOUD OR WEAK WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–9 NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–10 NO.8 NO AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–10 NO.9 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] FOREWORD [AUDIO] WM: AUDIO UNIT

id0903e1802700

Note x Note down all radio programs set by the customer prior to the repairs. Reset all radio programs and adjust the time after the repairs. Troubleshooting Index No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Symptom AF noise or POP noise at all sources (Radio, CD) No power to the entire audio system No sound from all speakers No sound from some speakers Sound break-up or poor sound quality Sound becomes loud or weak while driving the vehicle ALC function is inoperative No audio system illumination LCD does not display at all

Possible DTC 09:Er20, 09:Er21 09:Er20 09:Er20, 09:Er21, 10:Er07, 22:Er07 — 09:Er21 — — 09:Er20, 21:Er19 09:Er20, 21:Er19

09-03E–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Quick Diagnostic Chart (Entire Audio System)

5

6

7

No sound from some speakers

Sound break-up or poor sound quality

Sound becomes loud or weak while driving the vehicle

ALC function is inoperative

X

X

X

Low vehicle battery voltage

X

Jammed radio signals from after market equipment

X

Speaker malfunction (e. g., any foreign material, broken)

X

Improper speaker installation

X

Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage

X

Antenna malfunction (e.g., poor ground)

X X

Burnt fuse (B+)

X

Burnt fuse (ACC)

X

Open or short circuit in power supply (B+) wiring harness

X

Open or short circuit in power supply (ACC) wiring harness

X

X

X

X

X

X

Short circuit inside speaker Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness Burnt fuse (TNS signal)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Open circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker

Vibration of door trim and/or package trim

9

X X

Audio unit malfunction

Short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker

8

LCD does not display at all

4

No audio system illumination

3

No sound from all speakers

Possible factor

2

No power on the entire audio system

Troubleshooting item

1

AF noise or POP noise on all sources (Radio, CD)

X: Applicable

X

X

X X X

Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness

X

Center panel malfunction

X am2zzw0000378

End Of Sie CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]

id0903e1828800

x Verify the customer complaint and identify the malfunction as occurring from either the center panel or the audio unit.

09-03E–2

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Activate the audio switch inspection mode. (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) x Does the buzzer sound when a switch is pressed? x Disassemble and reassemble the center panel and audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) x Activate the audio switch inspection mode. (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) x Does the buzzer sound when a switch is pressed? x Does the audio system operate properly?

Yes No

ACTION Verify the customer complaint and then go to the appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

Yes No

The system is normal. Verify the customer complaint and then go to the appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.

End Of Sie CONFIRMATION STEP 2: AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]

id0903e1802900

x Verify the customer complaint and identify the malfunction as occurring from either the audio control switch or the audio unit. Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Is the symptom related to either the audio control switch or the audio panel operation?

Yes No

ACTION Verify the customer complaint and then go to the appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.

The symptom is related to the audio panel operation: x Follow “Confirmation Step 1”. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].)

The symptom is related to the audio control switch operation: 2

3

4

x Disconnect the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Inspect both the audio unit and the wiring harness-side connectors for a poor connection. (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion). — Terminal 1N (ST SW1) — Terminal 1P (ST SW2) x Are all the pins normal?

Yes No

x Inspect the continuity between audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminals 1N and 1P while operating the audio control switch. x Does the resistance change? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Remove the audio control switch. (See 09-20-23 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector (24-pin) terminal and the audio control switch wiring harness-side connector (16-pin) terminal. — Terminal 1N (24-pin) — Terminal K (16pin) — Terminal 1P (24-pin) — Terminal M (16pin) x Is there continuity?

Yes

x Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

If the audio unit side connector is malfunctioning: x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector is malfunctioning:

No Yes

No

x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector. Verify the customer complaint and then go to the appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure. Go to the next step. Replace the audio control switch. (See 09-20-23 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Repair or replace the related wiring harnesses.

09-03E–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] End Of Sie

NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [AUDIO] id0903e1817600

1 Possible DTC

Possible cause

09-03E–4

AF noise or POP noise at all sources (Radio, CD) 09:Er20, 09:Er21 x Low vehicle battery voltage. x Jammed radio signals from after market equipment. x Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material penetration, damage) x Improper speaker installation x Audio unit malfunction x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage x Antenna malfunction (e.g., poor ground) Note x AF noise is a snapping noise that generally occurs during ON/OFF switching operations of electrical equipment other than the audio unit, or a continual rasping noise that occurs when electrical equipment is operated. This is caused by noise interference in the power supply wiring, signal wiring, speaker cable or head of cassette deck. Therefore noise can be heard regardless of radio wave conditions or the audio volume position. The noise will start after one click from the minimum position of the POWER/VOLUME switch but normally does not change even when volume is turned to a higher position. x POP noise is snapping or popping noise that occurs during ON/OFF switching operation of the audio unit, or when switching from radio to CD. Even a normal audio unit sometimes emits a little noise depending on the conditions.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Inspect the vehicle battery voltage. x Is the vehicle battery voltage normal?

Specification:

2

Ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more Idle: 12.5 V or more x Turn the audio system on. x Is there any noise?

Yes No

Yes No

x Are any of the following after-market equipment installed? (Inspect especially near the antenna.) — Radar detector — Remote engine starter — Anti-theft device — Other x Remove the after-market equipment. x Turn the audio system on. x Is there any noise?

Yes No

5

x Is there noise coming from all the speakers?

6

x Inspect the suspect speaker. (See 09-20-7 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-11 REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION [3HB].) (See 09-20-12 TWEETER INSPECTION.) x Is the speaker normal?

Yes No Yes No

3

4

Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Charge the battery, then go to the next step.

Go to the next step. The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the vehicle battery voltage was low. Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

Go to the next step. The system is normal. The after-market electrical devices might be the cause of the noise. Go to Step 7. Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

If there is any foreign material adhering to the speaker: x Remove the foreign material from the speaker.

If the speaker is malfunctioning: x Replace the speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-20-12 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

If the speaker is not installed properly: 7

8

x Attempt to duplicate the symptom on another vehicle. x Does the noise level improve compared to the customer’s vehicle?

x Remove the center panel unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Disconnect the audio unit connector and inspect both the audio unit and the wiring harness-side connectors for a poor connection. (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion). x Are all the pins normal?

9

x Is there any noise?

10

x Inspect the ground condition of manual antenna. x Is the ground condition normal?

Yes No

Yes No

x Install the speaker properly. Go to the next step. The system is normal. Explain the noise generation mechanism to the customer. Note x The noise level that may be heard varies depending on the operating speed of the audio power and/or mode switches. Go to the next step.

If poor connection of audio unit connector: x Securely connect the audio unit connector.

If the audio unit side connector is malfunctioning: x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector is malfunctioning:

Yes No Yes No

x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector. After treating either the above-mentioned, then go to the next step. Go to the next step. The system is normal. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the ground. Go to the next step.

09-03E–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] STEP 11

INSPECTION x Is there any noise?

Yes

No

ACTION x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) The system is normal.

End Of Sie NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO] 2 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id0903e1817800

No power to the entire audio system 09:Er20 x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage x Audio unit malfunction x Burnt fuse (B+) x Burnt fuse (ACC) x Open or short circuit in power supply (B+) wiring harness x Open or short circuit in power supply (ACC) wiring harness

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the following fuses: — MIRROR 7.5 A — ROOM 15 A x Are the fuses normal?

Yes No

x Remove the center panel unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Disconnect the audio unit connector and inspect both the audio unit and the wiring harness-side connectors for a poor connection. (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion). x Are all the pins normal?

Yes No

x Connect the audio unit connector. x Inspect the voltage for the power supply line (B+, ACC).

Yes No

4

If audio unit connector has a poor connection: x Securely connect the audio unit connector.

If the audio unit side connector is malfunctioning: x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector is malfunctioning:

Specification: Ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more Idle: 12.5 V or more x Is the voltage normal? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Remove the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Inspect the continuity between audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminal 1W and the ground. x Is there continuity?

ACTION Go to the next step. Replace with the appropriate standard fuse. x If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for a short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace the fuse. Go to the next step.

Yes

No

x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the related wiring harnesses. Charge the battery, if necessary.

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Repair or replace the wiring harness.

End Of Sie NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO] 3 Possible DTC Possible cause

09-03E–6

No sound from all speakers 09:Er20, 09:Er21, 10:Er07, 22:Er07 x Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material penetration, damage) x Audio unit malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker x Short circuit inside speaker

id0903e1803200

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

x x x x

x x x x

INSPECTION Press AUDIO CONT switch for 1 s or more. Play the CD or Radio. Adjust the volume between “10” and “15”. Is there sound? Note x Press the MENU switch for approx. 1 s or more to initialize the sound adjustment value, then start the inspection. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Remove the center panel unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Disconnect the audio connector (24-pin). Inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminal and ground:

For front door speakers

ACTION Yes No

The system is normal. Go to the next step.

Yes

Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker unit.

No

Note x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound. Go to the next step.

— Terminal 1A (LH+)—ground — Terminal 1C (LH-)—ground — Terminal 1D (RH+)—ground — Terminal 1F (RH-)—ground

For rear door speakers/rear speakers (3HB)

3

x x

x x

— Terminal 1S (LH+)—ground — Terminal 1U (LH-)—ground — Terminal 1V (RH+)—ground — Terminal 1X (RH-)—ground Is there continuity? Remove the speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Disconnect the speaker connector (4-pin). Inspect the continuity between the speaker wiring harness-side connector (4-pin) terminal and ground:

Yes No

Replace the speaker. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

For each speaker — Terminal B—ground — Terminal C—ground x Is there continuity?

End Of Sie NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO] id0903e1818100

4 Possible DTC Possible cause

No sound from some speakers — x Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material penetration, damage) x Audio unit malfunction x Short circuit inside speaker x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker

09-03E–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Activate the speaker Inspection mode. (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) x Is there any speaker that does not output sound?

x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Remove the center panel unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector (24-pin) terminal and ground. x Is there continuity? x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Remove the audio unit. Disconnect the audio unit connector (24-pin). Inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminal and ground:

ACTION Yes

If there is no sound from some speakers: x Go to the next step.

If there is no sound at all:

No Yes

No Yes No

x Go to the troubleshooting of “No.3 No sound from all speakers”. (See 09-03E-6 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO].) The troubleshooting is completed. Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker unit. Note x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness or the speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker unit. Go to the next Step. Note x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound.

For front door speaker — Terminal 1A (LH+)  GND — Terminal 1C (LH-)  GND — Terminal 1D (RH+)  GND — Terminal 1F (RH-)  GND

For rear speaker/rear door speaker

4

— Terminal 1S (LH+)  GND — Terminal 1U (LH-)  GND — Terminal 1V (RH+)  GND — Terminal 1X (RH-)  GND x Is there continuity? x Disconnect the speaker connector (2-pin) and inspect the resistance of speaker. x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminal and speaker wiring harness-side connector:

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker unit.

Yes

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-20-12 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Audio unit-front door speaker — Terminal 1A (LH+)  terminal C — Terminal 1C (LH-)  terminal B — Terminal 1D (RH+)  terminal C — Terminal 1F (RH-)  terminal B

Audio unit-rear speaker/rear door speaker

5

— Terminal 1S (LH+)  terminal C — Terminal 1U (LH-)  terminal B — Terminal 1V (RH+) terminal C — Terminal 1X (RH-)  terminal B x Is there continuity? x Inspect the suspect speaker. (See 09-20-7 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-9 REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-11 REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION [3HB].) (See 09-20-12 TWEETER INSPECTION.) x Is the speaker normal? Note x If the speaker lead wire contacts to either ground or vehicle frame, replace the speaker.

End Of Sie

09-03E–8

No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [AUDIO] 5 Possible DTC Possible cause

id0903e1818300

Sound break-up or poor sound quality 09:Er21 x Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material penetration, damage) x Improper speaker installation x Audio unit malfunction x Vibration of door trim and/or package trim

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

3

INSPECTION x Is there sound break-up or poor sound quality from all speakers? x Inspect the sound while adjusting the sound volume. x Is there sound break-up or poor sound quality between “15” and “20”? x Inspect the BASS/TREB. x Is there poor sound quality between “-3 — +3” of “BASS/TREB”?

4

x Attempt to duplicate the symptom on another vehicle. x Is the sound quality better than the customer’s vehicle?

5

x Identify the speaker with sound break-up by adjusting BAL/FADE. x Is the suspect speaker pointed upward? x Remove the speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) x Is there any foreign material penetration or damage to the speaker? x Inspect the sound again. x Is there sound break-up?

6

7

8

x Replace with a speaker known to be operational. (e.g., swap right and left speakers) x Does the sound break-up heard at the same location?

ACTION Yes No Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. Go to the next step. The system is normal.

Yes No

No Yes No

Go to the next step. If there is sound break-up between “+6—-6” of BASS/TREB at the maximum volume, the system is normal. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) The system is normal. Go to the next step. Install the speaker properly.

Yes No

Repair or replace the suspect speaker. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Inspect for vibration from the door trim and/or package trim. Repair or replace the suspect trim if necessary. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the speaker.

Yes

Yes

No

End Of Sie NO.6 SOUND BECOMES LOUD OR WEAK WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE [AUDIO] id0903e1803500

6 Possible DTC Possible cause

Sounds becomes loud or weak while driving the vehicle — x Audio unit malfunction Note x Inspect the ALC function while driving the vehicle and playing a CD.

09-03E–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Does the ALC function turn on?

x Turn the ALC function off. x Does the sound change while driving the vehicle?

Yes No

Yes

No

ACTION Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) The system is normal. Explain the ALC function to the customer.

End Of Sie NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO] 7 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id0903e1803600

ALC function is inoperative — x Audio unit malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction x Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e. g., instrument cluster) Note x Inspect the ALC function while driving the vehicle and playing a CD.

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Turn the ALC function on. x Inspect the ALC function operation while driving the vehicle. x Does the ALC system operate properly? x Verify that the speedometer operation. x Does the speedometer indicate vehicle speed correctly? x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring between the audio unit (24-pin) terminal 1I and instrument cluster terminal 2O. x Is the open or short circuit detected?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

ACTION The system is normal.Explain the ALC function to the customer. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting “No.7 Speedometer indication is defective.” procedure. Repair or replace for open or short circuit. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.8 NO AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION [AUDIO] 8 Possible DTC

Possible cause

09-03E–10

No audio system illumination 09:Er20, 21:Er19 x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage x Audio unit malfunction x Burnt fuse (TNS signal) x Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness x Center panel malfunction

id0903e1818700

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AUDIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

INSPECTION x Is all the illumination on the audio unit turned off?

x x x x x

x x x

x

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Inspect the fuse (ILLUMI 7.5 A). Is the fuse normal? Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the audio unit connector (24-pin) and inspect the continuity between the audio unit wiring harness-side connector terminal 1E (TNS) and the ground. Is there continuity? Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24-pin). Inspect both the audio unit and wiring harness-side connector terminal 1E for a poor connection (such as damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion). Are all the pins normal?

Yes No

Yes No Yes

No Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the Step 4. Go to the next step. Repair or replace the short circuit in the suspect wiring harness. After repairing the wiring harness, replace with the appropriate standard fuse. Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

If audio unit connector has a poor connection: x Securely connect the audio unit connector.

If the audio unit side connector is malfunctioning: x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector is malfunctioning: 5

x Connect the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position. x Inspect the voltage at the audio unit connector terminal 1E (TNS). x Is the voltage B+ when the light switch is turned to the TNS position?

Yes

No

x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Repair or replace the related wiring harness (TNS signal).

End Of Sie NO.9 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [AUDIO] 9 Possible DTC Possible cause

id0903e1803800

LCD does not display at all 09:Er20, 21:Er19 x Audio unit malfunction x Center panel malfunction.

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Activate the LCD inspection mode. (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) x Does the LCD display properly?

Yes

No

ACTION Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie

09-03E–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO]

09-03F SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] FOREWORD [RADIO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Diagnostic Chart (Radio) . . . . . . CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/ NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO] . . . . . . NO.2 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-03F–1 09-03F–1 09-03F–2 09-03F–2 09-03F–2 09-03F–3 09-03F–3 09-03F–5

NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–7 NO.4 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO]. . . . 09-03F–9 NO.5 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–10 NO.6 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO SLIPS [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–11 REFERENCE [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12 1. Multipath Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12 2. Flutter/Skip Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12 3. Stereo and Monaural Receptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12 Measures in Audio System . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12 Effect Setting of Separation Control and High Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–12

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] FOREWORD [RADIO] WM: AUDIO UNIT

id0903e3802700

Note x If the case location, time, and broadcasting station etc. can be specified through interview with the customer, there is the possibility that the signal reception environment is the cause of the problem. x Perform confirmation of symptom and evaluate under the conditions that customer reported (location, time, broadcasting station etc.). If this is not possible, perform it under equivalent conditions. x Before inspection or repair, record the broadcasting stations that customer has preset and reset them accordingly after the inspection or repair. Adjust the clock too. Troubleshooting Index No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Symptom No radio reception (AM/FM)/No or low volume Noise from radio (AM only) Noise from radio (FM only) Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop) Cannot preset (preset function does not operate) Reception frequency of radio slips

Possible DTC 09:Er20, 09:Er22 09:Er22 09:Er22 09:Er20, 09:Er22 — 09:Er22

09-03F–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Quick Diagnostic Chart (Radio) X: Applicable

Reception frequency of radio slips

6

Cannot preset (preset function does not operate)

5

Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop)

4

Noise from radio (FM only)

3

Noise from radio (AM only)

2

No radio reception (AM/FM)/No or low volume

1

Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc)

X

X

X

Audio unit

X

X

X

X

X

X

Antenna plug poor connection

X

X

X

X

Troubleshooting item

Possible factor

Antenna feeder

X

X

X

X

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and antenna (antenna amplifier power supply system)

X

X

X

X

Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave

X

X

X

X

Antenna rod is not installed (standard parts)

X

X

X

X

Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump)

X

X

Battery

X

X

Charging system

X

X

Antenna installation loosened

X

X X

Center panel

X

X am2zzw0000497

End Of Sie CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO] id0903e3804000

Symptom Only a buzzing sound from the speakers A buzzing or crunching sound and normal sound produced at the same time from the speakers A thumping sound and normal sound produced at the same time from the speakers (FM only)

Antenna signal condition x There is no broadcasting wave. x Signals from antenna to audio unit are not transmitted. x Though signals are transmitted from antenna to audio unit, electric noise from other sources is larger. x Noise occurs due to radio wave environment at specific places (e.g. in valleys between buildings). Noise varies when own vehicle or surrounding vehicles moves. (FM only)

x x x x x

Source Electric noise caused by the operation of internal circuit from audio unit it self Atmosphere noise Electrical noise caused by operation of electrical component on vehicle Electrical noise from high tension wire, transformer substation (factory), electrical feeder line (street car), or motorcycle. Interference between direct and reflected waves of FM signals causes noise (Multipass noise).

End Of Sie CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO] id0903e3804100

Possible cause x Antenna feeder axis, open circuit x Antenna feeder plug not attached

AM reception condition NG: No reception

x Antenna feeder axis (+) to ground (-), open circuit

NG: No reception

09-03F–2

FM reception condition YES: Reception possible. (Sensitivity decreases, but reception is possible under strong electric field.) NG: No reception

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Possible cause x Antenna feeder and antenna, poor ground

AM reception condition YES: Reception possible (Noise may occur)

x Antenna feeder, jack and plug poor connection

NG: No reception (Depending on connection conditions)

FM reception condition YES: Reception possible (Sensitivity decreases, but reception is possible under strong electric field.) YES: Reception possible (Depending on connection conditions)

End Of Sie CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO]

id0903e3804200

x Because the antenna system is equipped with a capacitor, the continuity cannot be checked. Therefore proceed to the following simple inspection. 1. Turn the AM radio on. 2. Tune to the frequency with no broadcast and listen for a buzzing sound. 3. Turn a hand-held light on and shake it around the antenna rod (around 10—20 mm{0.40—0.78 in}) 4. If a whirring sound from the speaker synchronized to the work light movement is confirmed, the antenna system is normal. Note x Use a fluorescent light type for the inspection. Accurate diagnostic cannot be done with an incandescent light.

End Of Sie

adejjw00001109

NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO] 1 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id0903e3804300

No radio reception (AM/FM) / no or low volume 09:Er20, 09:Er22 x x x x x x

Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) Audio unit malfunction Poor connection of antenna feeder plug Antenna feeder malfunction Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave Antenna rod is not installed

09-03F–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

INSPECTION x Turn the audio unit power to on. x Is the LCD indicated correctly? x Measure the voltage at B+ and ACC terminals. x Is the voltage normal?

Yes No Yes No

Specification

3

4

5

6

7

With ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more At idling: 12.5 V or more x Set the volume between 10 and 15. x Is a buzzing sound or voice confirmed?

x Tune to a local broadcasting station and check the reception condition. x Is the reception normal? x Push the Preset switches and check the preset conditions. x Have preset stations been stored? x Is aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) installed? Note x A TV antenna located close to the audio antenna can be the cause of noise. Relocate the TV antenna. x Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. x Turn the audio unit on and check the reception condition. x Does reception improve?

8

x Refer to confirmation Step 3, and inspect the antenna system. x Is a whirring sound present?

9

x Inspect the antenna feeder plug connection condition. x Is the connection normal? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Measure the continuity between the antenna feeder axis and ground. x Is there any continuity?

10

Yes No

Yes No

Go to the next step. Follow diagnostic procedure for symptom No. 3 (Audio) or No. 4 (Audio). (See 09-03E-6 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO].) (See 09-03E-7 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO].) Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No

The system is normal. Preset broadcasting stations.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes

The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that aftermarket electronic equipment is the cause of the noise) Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Insert the antenna feeder plug securely.

No Yes

No Yes No Yes

No

09-03F–4

ACTION Go to Step 3. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Follow diagnostic procedure for symptom No. 2 (Audio). (See 09-03E-6 NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO].)

Replace the antenna feeder. (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] STEP 11

INSPECTION x Compare the reception with another audio unit on the same model (model/unit) under the same problem conditions. x Is the reception equivalent to the customer’s unit? Note x Due to the following differences, you may sense a difference in reception efficiency.

ACTION Yes

No

The system is normal. (It is caused by electronic jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting station signal condition.) Replace audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

(Vehicle factor) — Antenna installation location, height, feeder wiring routing, optional electrical equipment

(Audio unit factor) — High-tone setting: Decreases effective volume range when signals become weak. (Noise is easy to be conspicuous) — Noise restraint setting: Widens effective volume range when signals become weak.

End Of Sie NO.2 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) [RADIO] id0903e3804400

2 Possible DTC

Possible cause

Noise from radio (AM only) 09:Er22 x x x x x x x x x x

Antenna rod is not installed Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump) Battery malfunction Charging system malfunction Audio unit malfunction Poor connection of antenna feeder plug Antenna feeder malfunction Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave Antenna installation loosened

09-03F–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Tune to a local broadcasting station and check the reception condition. x Is the reception normal?

2

x Inspect the antenna rod condition. x Is the antenna rod installed?

3

x Is aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) installed?

4

5

x x x x x

Note x A TV antenna located close to the audio antenna can be the cause of noise. Relocate the TV antenna. Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. Turn the audio unit on and check the reception condition. Does reception improve? Measure the battery voltage. Is battery voltage normal?

Standard

Yes No Yes No Yes No

Yes No

ACTION Tune to the correct frequency for the broadcasting station. If not preset, preset it. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Advise the customer to install the antenna rod when the radio is used. Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that aftermarket electronic equipment is the cause of the noise) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Charge the battery. Inspect the charging system, and repair or replace if necessary.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Troubleshooting completed.

With ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more At idling: 12.5 V or more

6

7

Note x Verify that the battery cables are connected to the terminals securely. x Does the noise occur only when the vehicle electrical system (e.g. fuel pump) operates? Note x Identify the suspect electrical component by disconnecting fuses, turning switches on & off, or disconnecting & connecting connectors. x It is easier to use the simulation function on the M-MDS. x Verify the condition of the power supply and ground of the electric components, and the noise prevention capacitor. x Is noise present after the inspection?

8

x

9

x x x x

Note x Inspect the following: — Power supply to electrical component for voltage drop (compare with battery voltage) — Resistance between ground of electrical component and body. (Should be close to 0 ohm) — Installation condition of noise prevention capacitor for fuel pump. Inspect the antenna feeder plug connection condition. Is the connection normal? Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Measure the continuity between the antenna the feeder axis and ground. Is there any continuity?

Note x The audio unit supplies 12 V battery power to the antenna amplifier for AM radio reception in the radio mode. The audio unit cannot receive AM signals without the 12 V battery power to the antenna amplifier. If the AM signals strengthen, the audio unit may receive the signals with noise.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Insert the antenna feeder plug securely.

Yes

Replace antenna feeder. (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step.

No

09-03F–6

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] STEP INSPECTION 10 Compare the reception with another audio unit on the same model (model/unit) under the same problem conditions. x Is the reception equivalent to the customer’s unit?

Yes

No

ACTION The system is normal (It is caused by electronic jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting station signal condition). Go to the next step.

Note x Due to the following differences, you may sense a difference in reception efficiency.

(Vehicle factor) — Antenna installation location, height, feeder wiring routing, optional electrical equipment

(Audio unit factor)

11

— High-tone setting: Decreases effective volume range when signals become weak. (Noise is easy to be conspicuous) — Noise restraint setting: Widens effective volume range when signals become weak. (Noise is not conspicuous.) x Retighten the ground for the antenna and antenna amplifier. x Retighten the antenna rod. x Is noise present, after retightening?

Yes

No

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY) [RADIO] id0903e3804500

3 Possible DTC

Possible cause

Noise from radio (FM only) 09:Er22 x x x x x x x x x x

Antenna rod is not installed Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump) Battery malfunction Charging system malfunction Audio unit malfunction Poor connection of antenna feeder plug Antenna feeder malfunction Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave Antenna installation loosened Note x FM broadcasts are known for good sound quality and resistance to noise, but FM broadcasts do carry characteristic noise. Though the audio unit is designed to reduce noise, there are times when noise occurs due to reception conditions.

09-03F–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Tune to a local broadcasting station and check the reception condition. x Is the reception normal?

2

x Inspect the antenna rod condition. x Is the antenna rod installed?

3

x Is aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) installed? x Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. x Turn the audio unit on and check the reception condition. x Does the reception improve? x Measure the battery voltage. x Is the battery voltage normal?

4

5

Standard

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

ACTION Tune to the correct frequency for the broadcasting station. If not preset, preset it. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Advise the customer to install the antenna rod when the radio is used. Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. The system is normal. (Explain to the customer that the aftermarket electronic equipment is the cause of the noise) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Charge the battery. Inspect the charging system, and repair or replace if necessary.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Troubleshooting completed.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Insert the antenna feeder plug securely.

Yes

Replace the antenna feeder. (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. The system is normal (It is caused by electronic jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting station signal condition). Go to the next step.

With ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more At idling: 12.5 V or more

6

7

Note x Verify that the battery cables are connected to the terminals securely. x Does the noise occur only when the vehicle’s electrical system (e.g. fuel pump) operates? Note x Identify the suspect electrical component by disconnecting fuses, turning switches on & off, or disconnecting & connecting connectors. x It is easier to use the simulation function on the M-MDS. x Verify the condition of the power supply and ground of the electric components, and the noise prevention capacitor. x Is the noise present after inspection?

8

x

9

x x x x

10

Note x Inspect the following: — Power supply to electrical component for voltage drop (compare with battery voltage) — Resistance between ground of electrical component and body. (Should be close to 0 ohm) — Installation condition of noise prevention capacitor for fuel pump. Inspect the antenna feeder plug connection condition. Is the connection normal? Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Measure the continuity between the antenna feeder axis and ground. Is there any continuity?

x Compare the reception with another audio unit on the same model (model/unit) under the same problem conditions. x Is the reception equivalent to the customer’s unit?

09-03F–8

No Yes

No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] STEP 11

INSPECTION x Retighten the ground for the antenna installation part and antenna amplifier. x Retighten the antenna rod. x Is the noise present, after retightening? Note x When the antenna is not grounded properly, FM noise is likely to be noticed.

ACTION Yes

No

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie NO.4 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO] 4 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id0903e3804600

Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop) 09:Er20, 09:Er22 x x x x x x

Center panel malfunction Poor connection of antenna feeder plug Antenna feeder malfunction Audio unit malfunction Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave Antenna rod is not installed

09-03F–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Verify that the SEEK switch is normal when the switch is pushed and released. x Is it normal?

Yes No

2

x Inspect the indication of LCD. x Does the frequency indication increase or decrease when SEEK switch is pushed?

Yes No

3

x Manually tune to a local broadcasting station and check the reception condition. x Is the reception normal? x Inspect the antenna feeder plug connection condition. x Is the connection normal? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Measure the continuity between the antenna feeder axis and ground. x Is there any continuity?

Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Perform confirmation step 1: audio switch confirmation. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].) Replace the center panel if necessary. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Perform confirmation step 1: audio switch confirmation. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].) Replace the center panel if necessary. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to Step 6. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Insert the antenna feeder plug securely.

Yes

Replace antenna feeder. (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Go to the next step. The system is normal. (Explain to customer that SEEK sometimes does not stop depending on the signal reception condition.)

4

5

6

x Check if the number of broadcasting stations changes depending on time and place. x Does it change?

No Yes

No

Note x Signals tend to reach longer distances at night. (It is conspicuous in AM signals, several audio functions may stop due to foreign broadcasting station or noise.) Though the audio system restrains sensitivity of SEEK and SCAN functions at night, the audio system may select broadcasting stations other than those desired when signals are considerably strong. This function is linked to the parking light. When the parking light or the headlights are turned on, SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals. Replace audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.5 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO] 5 Possible DTC Possible cause

Cannot preset (preset function does not operate) — x Audio unit malfunction x Center panel malfunction

09-03F–10

id0903e3804700

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Tune to the desired station and press channel preset switch 1 for about 2 s to store it. x Repeat the above for other stations using channel preset switch 2 to 5. x Press channel preset switch 1 to 6 one by one. x Are the stored stations present? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK and then to ACC. x Check if the preset stations are stored by pressing the preset switch. x Are the stations stored?

x Remove the center panel from the audio unit, and reinstall the center panel to the audio unit. x Activate the audio switch inspection mode. (See 09-02E-4 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO].) x Does the buzzer sound when a switch is pressed?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 3.

Yes

The system is normal. (Explain preset procedure to customer using Owner’s Manual) Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Replace the center panel. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

No

Yes

No

End Of Sie NO.6 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO SLIPS [RADIO] id0903e3804800

6 Possible DTC Possible cause

Reception frequency of radio slip 09:Er22 x Audio unit malfunction x Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Press the SEEK switch and check if the desired broadcasting station is tuned. x Is it normal? x Check if another broadcasting station is received at a certain location when the indication of the reception frequency remains. x Is other station received? Note x While receiving a weak signal from one broadcasting station and approaching a broadcasting antenna which emits a strong signal, broadcasting from the strong signal is sometimes received. x Compare the reception with another audio unit on the same model (model/unit) under the same problem conditions. x Is the reception equivalent to the customer’s unit?

ACTION Yes No

Go to Step 3. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Replace audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

Yes No

Troubleshooting completed (Audio unit is normal). Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie

09-03F–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] REFERENCE [RADIO]

id0903e3830000

1. Multipath Noise x Signals from an FM transmitter are a high frequency and similar to beams of light because they do not bend around corners, but they do reflect. Since FM signals can be reflected by obstructions, it is possible to receive both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the same time. This causes a slight delay in reception and may be heard as a broken sound or a distortion.

E6U902HWB007

2. Flutter/Skip Noise x Signals become weak in valleys between mountains, tall buildings, and other obstacles. When the vehicle passes through such an area, the reception conditions may change suddenly, resulting in annoying noise.

E6U902HWB008

3. Stereo and Monaural Receptions x As signals become weak, noise may appear more in stereo reception. Compared to stereo reception, noise in monaural reception is relatively less striking. Measures in Audio System Separation control x Utilizing the characteristic of monaural reception that noise is relatively less striking than stereo reception, the audio system automatically changes the reception from stereo to monaural and lessens annoying noise when signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs. High tone control x When signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs, the audio system restrains volume level in high frequency band and lessens annoying noise. Effect Setting of Separation Control and High Tone Control x The separation and high tone controls influence sound quality. Therefore they are specifically tuned for individual model. (Comparison of characteristic must be done on the same models) High tone setting

Less effective range

Noise is conspicuous

Noise restraint setting

Wider effective range

Noise is less conspicuous DPE903EW1V0A

09-03F–12

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO] Remarks x Signals tend to reach longer distances at night. It is conspicuous in AM signals, several audio functions may stop due to foreign broadcasting station or noise. Though the audio system restrains sensitivity of SEEK and SCAN functions at night, the audio system may select other than desired broadcasting station when signals are considerably strong. This function is linked to the parking light. When the parking light or the headlight is turned on, SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals.

Signal strength

Daytime A: The level that AUTO-M, SEEK, SCAN function. AUTO-M, SEEK, and SCAN tune to 4 broadcasting stations (C, E, H, and J)

A

530

A st.

B st.

C st.

D st.

E st. F st. G st. Frequency (kHz)

H st.

I st.

J st.

1710

H st.

I st.

J st.

1710

Signal strength

Night When the TNS is turned on: 4 broadcasting stations are tuned, same as daytime. B A

530

A st.

B st.

C st.

D st.

E st.

F st.

G st.

Frequency (kHz) When the TNS is turned off: As signal strength is higher at night, AUTO-M, SEEK, and SCAN tune to 10 broadcasting stations (A to J). e5u903azw5s03

End Of Sie

09-03F–13

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD]

09-03G SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] FOREWORD [CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–1 Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–1 NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD] . . . . . . . . 09-03G–3 NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–3 NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD]. . . . . . 09-03G–4 NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–5 NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD] . . . . . . 09-03G–6 NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–6

NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3-FORMATTED FILE [CD] . . . . 09-03G–7 NO.8 MP3-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS INOPERATIVE [CD] . . . . . . 09-03G–8 NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3 TITLE TEXT [CD] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–9 NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD] . . . . . . 09-03G–10 NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–11 REFERENCE [CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–11 MP3-Formatted File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–12

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] FOREWORD [CD] WM: AUDIO UNIT

id090362804900

Troubleshooting Index No. 1

Items

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CD player/changer

CD changer

MP3 applicable CD player/changer

CD player/changer

Symptom CD player/changer does not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately CD player/changer does not eject the CD CD player/changer does not play the CD/No sound Sound jumps CD player/changer scratches on the CD Disc changer is inoperative CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file MP3-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/Track search is inoperative CD player does not indicate the MP3 title text CD player does not play the audio data (CDDA) Track change is inoperative

Possible DTC 10:Er01, 10:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10 10:Er01, 10:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10 10:Er02, 10:Er07, 10:Er10, 22:Er02, 22:Er07, 22:Er10 10:Er02, 22:Er02 10:Er01, 22:Er01 22:Er01 — — — — 10:Er02, 22:Er02

09-03G–1

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD]

8

9

CD player dose not indicate the MP3 title text

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Defective CD (egg., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc) Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pull-out pin, corrosion)

X

Improper center panel installation

X

Improper CD cover installation

X X X

Center panel is malfunctioning

X

X

X

Inadequate tire pressure

Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time

X

X

Improper audio unit installation (e.g., rattle, loose) Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)

X

X

X

X X

X

CD-R/RW written format is out of specification

X

MP3 and other format data are in the CD-R/RW

X

File extension for MP3-formatted file is incorrect (Correct: ".mp3", Incorrect: e.g., RIFF)

X

Defective CD-R/RW (e.g., dirty, scratch)

X

CD-R/RW (MP3 files are all written to RIFF format)

X

X

X

X

Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW

X

X

Improper folder and/or music title in CD-R/RW

X

The number of characters of folder/music file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum number of characters

X

X

X

X

X

X

Improper encode in CD-R/RW MP3 applicable CD player malfunction

X

No title input in CD-R/RW

X

Input title text by 2-bytes characters

X

Data other than the audio data is in CD-R/RW

Track change is inoperative

X

Audio unit malfunction

10 11 CD player dose not play the audio data (CODA)

CD is inserted upside down

Possible factor

CD player/changer

7

Disc change is inoperative

6

CD player/changer scratches on the CD

5

Sound jumps

4

MP3-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/ Track search is inoperative

3 CD player/changer dose not play the CD/No sound

2

CD player/changer dose not eject the CD

1 CD player/changer dose not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately

Troubleshooting Item

MP3 applicable CD player/changer

CD player dose not play the MP3-formatted file

CD player/changer

CD changer

X: Applicable

X

X

X

X am2zzw0000495

End Of Sie

09-03G–2

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD] 1 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id090362826100

CD player/changer does not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately 10:Er01, 10:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10 x CD is inserted upside down x Audio unit malfunction x Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) x Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc) x Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin, corrosion) x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

INSPECTION x Is CD inserted properly, label-side up?

x Replace with a CD known to be good. x Does the CD player/changer load the CD?

Visually inspect the CD. — Is there any dirt, scratch or deformation on the CD? — Is the CD a non-conventional disc? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Inspect both audio unit connector and wiring harness-side connector for a poor connection. (such as damaged/bent/pulledout pins, corrosion) x Are all the pins and connector normal?

Yes No Yes No

Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Explain to the customer that CD should be inserted into the slot, label-side up. Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Explain to the customer that the defective CD or nonconventional disc cannot be used. Go to the next step.

Yes

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

No

If the audio unit connector/pin is malfunctioning: x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector/pin is malfunctioning: x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.

End Of Sie NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD] id090362826200

2 Possible DTC

Possible cause

CD player/changer does not eject the CD 10:Er01, 10:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10 x Audio unit malfunction x Defective CD. (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) x Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc) x Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin, corrosion) x Improper center panel installation x Improper CD cover installation x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc). x Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time Note x The CD may be malfunctioning if the CD player/changer does not eject the certain CD only. Inspect the CD player/changer operation using a CD known to be operational.

09-03G–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Inspect the operation of the audio system other than CD player/changer (e.g. Radio). x Does the other audio system operate? x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. x Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24-pin). x Inspect both audio unit connector and wiring harness-side connector for poor connection. (such as damaged/bent/pulled-out pins, corrosion) x Are all the pins and connector normal?

ACTION Yes No

Go to Step 3. Go to the next step.

Yes No

If the audio unit connector/pin is malfunctioning:

Go to the next step. x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

If the wiring harness-side connector/pin is malfunctioning:

3

x Eject the CD. x Is the CD ejected from the CD player/ changer?

Yes No

4

x Insert the CD into the CD player/changer. x Does the CD insert into the CD player/ changer smoothly?

Yes

5

x Is the CD ejected from the CD player/ changer?

No Yes No

x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector. Go to the next step. Inspect the center panel installation. Securely install the center panel if necessary. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Install the center panel properly, then go to the next step. Troubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the customers. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD] 3 Possible DTC

Possible cause

09-03G–4

id090362806100

CD player/changer does not play the CD/No sound 10:Er02, 10:Er07, 10:Er10, 22:Er02, 22:Er07, 22:Er10 x CD is inserted upside down x Audio unit malfunction x Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) x Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc)

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Turn the radio on and check for sound. x Is there a sound? Note x Check the volume dial position. x Was CD inserted properly, label-side up?

Yes No

Yes No

3

x Replace with a CD known to be operational. x Does the CD player/changer load the CD?

Yes No

4

x Visually inspect the CD. — Is there any dirt, scratches or deformation on the CD? — Is the CD a non-conventional disc? — Is there a CD in MP3 recording?

Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.3 (audio) (See 09-03E-6 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO].) Go to the next step. Explain to the customer that CD should be inserted into the slot, label-side up. Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Explain to the customer that the defective CD or nonconventional disc cannot be use. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD] 4 Possible DTC

Possible cause

id090362806200

Sound jumps 10:Er02, 22:Er02 x Audio unit malfunction x Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) x Improper audio unit installation (e.g., rattle, loose) x Inadequate tire pressure Note x The CD may be malfunctioning if the sound jumps on the certain CD only. Inspect the CD player/ changer operation using a CD known to be operational.

09-03G–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

3

INSPECTION x Does the sound jump when the vehicle is stopped? x Drive the vehicle. x Does the sound jump when driving over uneven surfaces? x Is the audio unit installed securely?

4

x Inspect the tire pressure. x Is the tire pressure normal?

5

x Adjust the tire pressure within specification. x Does the sound jump when driving the vehicle?

6

x Replace with a CD other than the one known to be operational. x Does the sound jump when driving the vehicle?

ACTION Yes No Yes No

Go to Step 6. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes No Yes

Go to the next step. Install the audio unit securely. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Audio system is normal. Explain repairs to the customers. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD is malfunctioning.

No Yes

No Yes

No

End Of Sie NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD] id090362806300

5 Possible DTC Possible cause

CD player/changer scratches on the CD 10:Er01, 22:Er01 x Audio unit malfunction x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc) x Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

INSPECTION x Were the multiple CDs inserted into the CD player at the same time? x Visually inspect the CD. x Is the CD a deformed disc (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)?

Yes No Yes No

ACTION Explain to the customer to insert a CD one by one. Go to the next step. Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD is malfunctioning. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD] id090362806400

6 Possible DTC Possible cause

09-03G–6

Disc change is inoperative 22:Er01 x Audio unit malfunction x Improper center panel installation x Center panel malfunction

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Inspect the CD changer operation. x Does the CD changer operate properly?

2

x Inspect the followings: — Is the display shown properly when operating the disc change switch? — Does the radio band selection operate properly?

3

x Inspect the center panel installation. x Does the CD changer change the disc properly after re-installing the center panel?

Yes No

Yes

No Yes No

ACTION Go to the next step. Go to the symptom troubleshooting “No.3 CD player/ changer does not play the CD/No sound”. (See 09-03G-4 NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD].) Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Install the center panel securely and properly. Go to the “Confirmation step 1: Audio switch confirmation” in this section. Replace the center panel as necessary. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].)

End Of Sie NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3-FORMATTED FILE [CD] id090362806500

7 Possible DTC

Possible cause

CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file — x CD-R/RW written format is out of specification x MP3 and other format data are in the CD-R/RW x File extension for MP3-formatted file is incorrect (Correct. “.mp3”, incorrect: e.g., RIFF) x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g. dirty CD, scratch) x MP3 applicable CD player malfunction Note x Free-software for MP3-formatting available on the market may cause deterioration of sound quality, or cause noise and defective play, which could result in the CD player not playing the customer-made MP3-formatted files. x The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition. x If there are MP3-formatted files and other files on the same disc, the CD player may not play the disc. x If there are MP-3-formatted file and audio data on the same disc, the CD player loads and plays the first session of the data only.

09-03G–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Inspect the written format of the recorded data on the CD-R/RW. x Is the write format correct? x Inspect the recorded data on the CD-R/RW. x Are there MP3 or other format data on the CD-R/RW.

Yes No Yes

ACTION Go to the next step. Write the CD-R/RW to the correct specification. Replace with an operational CD-R/RW (MP3-formatted file data only), then inspect the CD player operation.

If the CD player plays the MP3-formatted file: x Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD player does not operate properly if MP3 or other format data are recorded the CD-R/RW.

If the CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file:

3

x Inspect the CD-R/RW written format. x Is the written format within the specification (“.mp3” is the correct file extension)?

No Yes

x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Replace with the CD-R/RW using the “.mp3” file extension, then inspect the CD player operation.

If the CD player plays the MP3-formatted file: x Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD player does not operate properly if the correct file extension is not used.

If the CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file:

4

x Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. x Is there any dirt or scratches on the CD-R/ RW?

No Yes No

x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Clean the disc or replace it within an operational CD-R/RW. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.8 MP3-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS INOPERATIVE [CD] id090362806600

8 Possible DTC

Possible cause

MP3-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/Track search is inoperative — x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g. dirty CD, scratch) x Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW x Improper folder and/or music title in CD-R/RW x The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum number of characters x Improper encode in CD-R/RW x MP3 applicable CD player malfunction

Note x ID3 is a tagging format for MP3-formatted file. ID3 allows metadata (e.g., title, artist, track number, etc.) to be added to the MP3-formatted file. x There are two versions in the ID tag. — ID3v1: This is the most widespread standard tag formats and most software is compatible with this version. There is a limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data. — ID3v2: There are a variety of version in V2, but there is no interchangeability among the versions.

09-03G–8

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data (ID3v1) Item Title Artist Album Year Genre Comment Track

Maximum number of characters 30 30 30 4 — 30 3

Description Music title Artist name Album title Album produced year/CD wholesale year Music category selection Free comment Track number

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD/R/RW?

Yes No Yes No Yes No

2

x Inspect the ID tag version. x Is ID tag correct?

3

x Inspect folder and audio file name. x Are all file name input correctly?

4

x Inspect the encode for the folder and audio file name in the CD-R/RW. x Is the encode correct?

Yes No

Note x Unreadable characters may be displayed if incorrect encode is used. x Inspect the number of characters for the folder and audio file name. x Is the number of characters within the maximum number of characters?

Yes

5

No

ACTION Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag version. Go to the next step. Use the CD-R/RW that a folder and audio file name is input correctly. Go to the next step. Use the correct encode.

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Input the folder and audio file name within the maximum number of characters.

End Of Sie NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3 TITLE TEXT [CD] id090362806700

9 Possible DTC

Possible cause

CD player does not indicate the MP3 title text — x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g. dirty CD, scratch) x Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW x The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum number of characters x Improper encode in CD-R/RW x MP3 applicable CD player malfunction x No title input in CD-R/RW x Input title text by 2-bytes characters

09-03G–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

INSPECTION x Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD/R/RW?

2

x Inspect the display the LCD. x Is the CD (other than MP3 compatible) displayed on the LCD?

3

x Inspect the ID tag version. x Is the ID tag correct?

4

x Is the title text input into the CD-R/RW?

5

6

x Inspect the encode for the folder and audio file name in the CD-R/RW. x Is the encode correct? x Inspect the number of characters for the folder and audio file name. x Is the number of characters within the maximum number of characters?

Yes No Yes No

ACTION Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good. Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.9 (audio). (See 09-03E-11 NO.9 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [AUDIO].) Go to the next step. Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag version. Go to the next step. Input the title text.

Yes No

Note x Do not input the title text by two-bytes character. Go to the next step. Use the correct encode.

Yes No Yes No

Yes

No

Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Input the folder and audio file name within the maximum number of characters.

End Of Sie NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD] 10 Possible DTC

id090362806800

CD player does not play the audio data (CDDA) — x CD-R/RW written format is out of specification x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g., dirty CD, scratch) x MP3 applicable CD player malfunction x Data other than the audio data is in CD-R/RW

Possible cause Note x The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition. x If there are MP-3-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD player loads and plays the first session of the data only.

09-03G–10

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

INSPECTION x Replace with the audio-CD known to be good. x Does the CD player play the audio-CD properly?

x Inspect the written format of the recorded data on the CD-R/RW. x Is the written format correct? x Inspect the recorded data in the CD-R/RW. x Is any data other than the audio data recorded in the CD-R/RW?

Yes No

Yes No Yes

ACTION Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Write the CD-R/RW with the correct specification. Replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (record audio data only), then inspect the CD player operation.

If the CD-R/RW plays: x Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD player does not operate properly if the audio data and other data are recorded in the CD-R/RW.

If the CD-R/RW does not play:

4

x Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD-R/RW?

No Yes No

x Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the next step. Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD] id090362806900

11 Track change is inoperative Possible DTC 10:Er02, 22:Er02 x Audio unit malfunction x Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation) Possible cause x Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc) x Center panel malfunction x MP3 applicable CD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Replace the CD/MD known to be good. x Does the CD player/MD player change the track? x Inspect the center panel installation. x Does the CD player change the track number on the display when pressing the track up or down switch?

Yes No Yes

No

ACTION Explain to the customer that the defective CD or nonconventional disc cannot be used. Go to the next step. Replace the audio unit. (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Go to the “Confirmation step 1: Audio switch confirmation” in this section. Replace the center panel as necessary. (See 09-03E-2 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO].)

End Of Sie REFERENCE [CD] id090362830000

x The CD player/changer has been designed to play CDs bearing the identification logo, COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO, as shown. No other discs can be played on the CD player/changer other than MP3 applicable one.

09-03G–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] x The CD player/changer may not play the following CD: — Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD condensation) — 8 cm (3 in) CDs accessories (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, sticker, label) — Nonstandard CD (e.g., Diameter/thickness is out of specification) Specification: 119.7—120.3 mm (4.668— 4.692 in) of diameter, 1.2+0.3 or -0.1 mm (0.047+0.012 or 0.004 in) of thickness — Do not use non-conventional discs. The CD player/changer could be damaged. Examples: x Although the same physical size as the compact disc, SACD uses a different kind of digital audio signal, Direct Stream Digital. x The CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/ RW properly due to the disc condition (excluding the MP3).

am2zzw0000023

am2zzw0000023

MP3-Formatted File Outline of CD-R and CD-RW x Definition — CD-R: The CD-R is a non-rewritable version. Once a section of a CD-R is written, it cannot be erased or rewritten. — CD-RW: The CD-RW is a re-writable version of CD-ROM and the data can be written an unlimited number of times. — Since the reflected laser beam amount of a CD-R/RW is less than the reflected laser beam amount of the conventional CD media, the CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW or the sound may jump. — Since the recording quality of the CD-R/RWs vary widely, some CD-R/RWs may not play. Recording method x There are two methods for recording. x Classification by recorder — Record the audio data in the audio-CD by audio recorder x The price of the audio recorder and original audio-CD include the copyright fee. — Record the audio data to a conventional data-CD using a personal computer x The data-CD is cheaper than the audio-CD. But, there are lower quality CDs. x Classification by audio data extraction/compression — Extracted audio data x The CD-R/RW player can play the extracted audio data. — Compressed audio data x It is possible to record a large quantity of music to a disc. The sound quality varies depending on the audio data compression format. The compressed audio data can be played on the applicable player only. — Types of compression format: x MP3: MPEG Audio Layer 3—Mazda genuine MP3 applicable CD player is available. x WMA: Windows Media Audio x ATRAC: Adaptive TRansform Acoustic Coding MP3 x The following conditions should be met in order to record the MP3-formatted data to the MP3 applicable CD player: Media Logical format Directory hierarchy

09-03G–12

Applicable to the CD-R/RW ISO 9660 level 1&2 /Joliet /Romeo To 8 levels

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD] Media Number of files ID3 TAG File extension Packet writing Bit rate Sampling rate

Applicable to the CD-R/RW Maximum 255 as the total number of files and folders Maximum of 155 for folders Applicable to Ver1.1, 2.3 and 2.4 MP3 Not applicable 8kbps—320 kbps/VBR 11.025kHz—48 kHz

End Of Sie

09-03G–13

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

09-03H SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–1 QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–2 NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE INDICATION IS INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–2 NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–4 NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–5 NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–7 NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–9

NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–11 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–12 NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–14 NO. 9 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/ HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES OR FLASHES CONTINUOUSLY [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–16

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] WM: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

id0903d5807200

No. 1 2 3 4 5

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM Fuel gauge indication is incorrect All meters and gauges do not operate ABS warning light illuminates MIL illuminates Brake system warning light illuminates

6 Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate 7 8

Speedometer indication is defective Tachometer indication is defective

9 Low engine coolant temperature indicator light/High engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates or flashes continuously

PAGE (See 09-03H-2 NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE INDICATION IS INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-4 NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-5 NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-7 NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-9 NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-11 NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-12 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-14 NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-03H-16 NO. 9 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES OR FLASHES CONTINUOUSLY [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)

End Of Sie

09-03H–1

No.

1 Fuel gauge indication incorrect

2 All meters and gauges do not operate X X

3 ABS warning light illuminates X X

4 MIL illuminates X X

5 Brake system warning light illuminates X X

6 Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate X X

7 Speedometer indication is defective X X

8 Tachometer indication is defective X

9

Low engine coolant temperature indicator light/High engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates or flashes continuously

X

1

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-03H–2 X X X

X X X

X X

X X X X X

X X X X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X X

X X X X X

X X X

X X X X X

Parking brake switch Fuse malfunction (ROOM, ILLUMI)

X

Poor connection of Parking brake switch connector, terminal damage

X

Poor connection of brake fluid level sensor connector, terminal damage Brake fluid level sensor

CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other Poor connection of PCM connector, terminal damage PCM

BCM Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H)

Poor connection of ABS HU/CM, DSC HU/CM connector, terminal damage ABS HU/CM, DSC HU/CM

Fuse malfunction (METER) Open or short circuit in power supply (IG1) wiring harness Open or short circuit in ground wiring harness ABS HU/CM, DSC HU/CM

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and ground Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and fuel gauge sender unit

Troubleshooting item Instrument cluster Fuel gauge sender unit is improperly installed

Possible factor Poor connection of fuel gauge sender unit connector, terminal damage Poor connection of instrument cluster connector, terminal damage Fuel gauge sender unit

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0903d5807300

X: Applicable

X X X

X X

am2zzw0000461

End Of Sie

NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE INDICATION IS INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

id0903d5005000

Fuel gauge indication is incorrect x Fuel gauge sender unit malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Fuel gauge sender unit is improperly installed x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and fuel gauge sender unit

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5

6

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Verify that the fuel gauge needle does not move after ignition switch is turned off, or the display does not indicate F even though fuel tank is full. x Is the fuel gauge normal? x Retrieve the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Inspect the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-12 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the fuel gauge display normal? x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal? x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect for continuity following the wiring harness between instrument cluster and fuel gauge sender unit. — 2T terminal—B terminal — 2R terminal—D terminal x Is there continuity? x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Remove the instrument cluster. x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. x Inspect for continuity between the following wiring harness. — 2R terminal—ground x Is there continuity?

Yes No

Yes

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step.

No

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace the terminal.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Repair or replace for open circuit in the wiring harness between the instrument cluster and the fuel gauge sender unit.

Yes

Repair or replace the wiring harness for short to ground.

No

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit. (See 09-22-18 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-18 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Reinstall the fuel gauge sender unit. (See 09-22-15 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-15 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

7

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

8

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Is the fuel gauge sender unit installed properly?

Yes

No

09-03H–3

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] End Of Sie

NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0903d5807500

2 POSSIBLE CAUSE

All meters and gauges do not operate x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Fuse malfunction x Open or short circuit in power supply (IG1) wiring harness x Open or short circuit in ground wiring harness

Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Inspect the following: — Does the odometer/tripmeter illuminate? — Does the fuel gauge operate? — Does the MIL turn ON? x Inspect the METER fuse. x Is the fuse normal?

x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. x Have any DTC’s been recorded in memory? x x x x

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. Remove the instrument cluster. Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. Inspect the voltage between instrument cluster wiring harness-side connector terminal 2S and terminal 2A. x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. x Is the voltage B+?

Yes No

Yes No

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step.

No Yes

Go to the next step. Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for a short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace the fuse. Perform the recorded DTC’s troubleshooting. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step. Go to the next step.

No

Inspect the suspect wiring harness, then repair or replace.

Yes

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

Yes

2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

5

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

No

End Of Sie

09-03H–4

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 3

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903d5807600

ABS warning light illuminates x ABS HU/CM malfunction x ABS HU/CM stores DTC x DSC HU/CM malfunction x DSC HU/CM stores DTC x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

09-03H–5

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

3

4

INSPECTION x Start the engine. x Does the ABS warning light turn off? x Start the engine. x Verify that the warning and indicator lights condition. x Do two or more lights illuminate at the same time? x Reactive the DTC of ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM using M-MDS. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) x Is the DTC detected? x Turn off the ABS warning light using M-MDS instrument cluster active command modes WL+IL. (See 09-02F-18 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Does the ABS warning light turn off according to active command modes?

Yes No Yes No

Yes

No Yes

6

7

8

No Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 6.

Yes

Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

x Reactive the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. x Is the resistance below 60 ohms? x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. x Is there any malfunction?

Yes

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

09-03H–6

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) Go to the next step. Verify that the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is connected securely. If the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is poor connection: Connect the ABS HU/CM connector securely. If malfunction is in the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM side connector: Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM. (See 04-13-3 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-13-6 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 04-15-5 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-15-9 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

No

5

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 9

INSPECTION x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

ACTION Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

End Of Sie NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 4

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903d5807700

MIL illuminates x PCM malfunction x PCM stores DTC x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

09-03H–7

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1 2

3

4

INSPECTION x Start the engine. x Does the MIL turn off? x Start the engine. x Verify that the warning and indicator lights condition. x Do two or more lights illuminate at the same time? x Reactive the DTC of PCM using M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the DTC detected? x Turn off the MIL using M-MDS instrument cluster active command modes WL+IL. (See 09-02F-18 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Does the MIL turn off according to active command modes?

Yes No Yes No

Yes

No

Yes

6

7

8

No Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes

Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

x Reactive the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. x Is the resistance below 60 ohms? x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. x Is there any malfunction?

Yes

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

09-03H–8

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step.

Verify that the PCM connector is connected securely. If the PCM connector is poor connection: Connect the PCM connector securely. If malfunction is in the PCM side connector: Replace the PCM. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

No

5

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step. Go to Step 5. Go to the next step.

No

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 9

INSPECTION x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

ACTION Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

End Of Sie NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 5

POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903d5807800

Brake system warning light illuminates x ABS HU/CM malfunction x DSC HU/CM malfunction x BCM malfunction x Brake fluid level sensor malfunction x Parking brake switch malfunction x Short to ground circuit in wiring harness between brake fluid level sensor and BCM x Short to ground circuit in wiring harness between parking brake switch and BCM x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

09-03H–9

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2 3

4

5

6

INSPECTION x Start the engine. x Release the parking brake. x Does the brake system warning light turn off? x Does the brake fluid need replenishment? x Inspect following: — Brake fluid level sensor — Parking brake switch — Wiring harness between brake fluid level sensor and BCM terminal 4A — Wiring harness between parking brake switch and BCM terminal 7B x Is there any malfunction? x Start the engine. x Verify that the warning and indicator lights condition. x Do two or more lights illuminate at the same time? x Reactive the DTC of BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM using M-MDS. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) x Is the DTC detected? x Turn off the brake system warning light using M-MDS instrument cluster according to active command modes WL+IL. (See 09-02F-18 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Does the brake system warning light turn off active command modes?

Yes No

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step.

Yes No Yes No

Add brake fluid. Go to the next step. Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to Step 7. Go to the next step.

Yes

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02G-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) Go to the next step.

No Yes

No

Verify that the BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is connected securely. If the BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is poor connection: Connect the BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector securely. If malfunction is in the BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM side connector: Replace the BCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 04-13-3 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-13-6 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 04-15-5 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-15-9 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 10.

No

7

8

x Reactive the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. x Is the resistance below 60 ohms?

09-03H–10

Yes

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 9

INSPECTION x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. x Is there any malfunction?

Yes No

10

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

11

x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

ACTION Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

End Of Sie NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 6 POSSIBLE CAUSE

id0903d5807900

Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Fuse malfunction

09-03H–11

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

INSPECTION x Turn the light switch to the TNS position. x Does the instrument cluster illumination turn on? x Does the non-illumination include the entire instrument cluster?

Yes No Yes No

3

x Inspect the ROOM and ILLUMI fuse. x Are the fuses normal?

Yes No

4

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes

No

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step. Go to the next step. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. Replace the fuse. x If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace the fuse. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

End Of Sie NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0903d5808000

7

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-03H–12

Speedometer indication is defective x ABS HU/CM malfunction x DSC HU/CM malfunction x PCM malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

INSPECTION x Start the engine, and drive the vehicle. — Does the speedometer needle move smoothly? — Does the speedometer needle indicate correct speed? x Reactive the DTC of PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM using M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) x Is the DTC detected? x Start the engine. x Verify that the tachometer indication and high engine coolant temperature warning light illumination. x Do the tachometer and high engine coolant temperature warning light work properly? x Monitor the following PIDs for the ABS HU/ CM or DSC HU/CM using the M-MDS: WSPD_LF, WSPD_LR, WSPD_RF, WSPD_RR Caution x To prevent an accident, work with two people when the vehicle is being driven. (One drives the vehicle and the other operates the M-MDS.)

Yes No

Yes

No

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

Yes

Verify that the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is connected securely. If the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector is poor connection: Connect the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector securely. If malfunction is in the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM side connector: Replace the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 04-13-3 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-13-6 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (See 04-15-5 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [L.H.D.].) (See 04-15-9 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. If malfunction is not detected: Inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor and related part. (See 04-13-14 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.) (See 04-13-16 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.) Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

x Drive the vehicle and compare the M-MDS monitored value with the speedometer indication. x Does the M-MDS monitored value correspond to the speedometer indication?

No

5

x Reactive the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected?

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step.

Yes No

09-03H–13

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 6

7

x x x x x x

INSPECTION Disconnect the negative battery cable. Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. Is the resistance below 60 ohms? Disconnect the negative battery cable. Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. Is there any malfunction?

ACTION Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes

Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

No

8

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

9

x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

End Of Sie NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] 8

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-03H–14

Tachometer indication is defective x PCM malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

id0903d5808100

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

INSPECTION x Start the engine. — Does the tachometer needle move smoothly? — Does the tachometer needle indicate correct engine speed? x Reactive the DTC of PCM using M-MDS. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) x Is the DTC detected? x Start the engine. x Verify that the tachometer indication and high engine coolant temperature warning light illumination. x Do the tachometer and high engine coolant temperature warning light work properly? x Monitor the PCM PID RPM using the MMDS. x Start the engine and compare the M-MDS monitored value with the tachometer indication. x Does the M-MDS monitored value correspond to the tachometer indication?

Yes No

Yes

No

Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 01-02A-14 DTC TABLE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-02B-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-02C-8 DTC TABLE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 5.

Yes

No

Verify that the PCM connector is connected securely. If the PCM connector is poor connection: Connect the PCM connector securely. If malfunction is in the PCM side connector: Replace the PCM. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 8.

Yes

Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

No

5

6

7

8

ACTION Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.) Go to the next step.

x Reactive the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. x Is the resistance below 60 ohms? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. x Is there any malfunction?

Yes

x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

Yes No

No

09-03H–15

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 9

INSPECTION x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

ACTION Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

End Of Sie NO. 9 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES OR FLASHES CONTINUOUSLY [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] id0903d5869200

9

POSSIBLE CAUSE

09-03H–16

Low engine coolant temperature indicator light/High engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates or flashes continuously. x PCM malfunction x Instrument cluster malfunction x Connector or pin malfunction x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and ground x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] Diagnostic procedure STEP 1

2

3

4

5 6

7

8

INSPECTION x Retrieve the DTC of instrument cluster using M-MDS. (See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Is the DTC detected? x Cool down the engine. x Turn the ignition switch to ON position. x Verify that the high engine coolant temperature warning light condition. x Does the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminate or flash while 3— 30 s after the ignition switch is turned to ON position? x Monitor the PCM PID ECT using the M-MDS. x Is the PID ECT monitoring value for following value? — Above 120 qC {248 qF} when high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes. — Above 125 qC {257 qF} when high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates. x Start the engine. x Monitor PCM PID ECT using the M-MDS. x Verify that the low engine coolant temperature indicator light condition when the ECT monitoring value above 55 qC {131qF} [ZJ, ZY], 40 qC {104qF} [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. x Does the low engine coolant temperature indicator light illuminate? x Do the speedometer and tachometer indicate correct? x Turn on and off both low engine coolant temperature indicator light/high engine coolant temperature warning light using MMDS instrument cluster active command modes WL+IL. (See 09-02F-18 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) x Do the both low engine coolant temperature indicator light/high engine coolant temperature warning light turn on and off according to active command modes? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals F and E. x Is the resistance below 60 ohms? x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for short to power supply or ground. x Is there any malfunction?

No

ACTION Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) Go to the next step.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Go to Step 4.

Yes No

Go to the next step. No Go to Step 5.

Yes No

Go to the next step. Troubleshooting is completed. (The system is normal.)

Yes No Yes

Go to the next step. Go to Step 7. Inspect the ECT sensor. (See 01-40A-29 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40B-23 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40C-21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. Go to Step 9.

Yes

No

Yes No Yes No

Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

09-03H–17

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] STEP 9

INSPECTION x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position. x Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). x Are the terminals normal?

10

x Disconnect the negative battery cable. x Measure the resistance between the instrument cluster connector terminals 2B and 2D. x Is the resistance 114—126 ohms?

ACTION Yes No

Yes

No 2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

End Of Sie

09-03H–18

Go to the next step. If the instrument cluster connector is poor connection: Connect the instrument cluster connector securely. If malfunction is in the instrument cluster side connector: Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) If malfunction is in vehicle side connector: Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

BODY PANELS

09-10

BODY PANELS

BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . BONNET ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Gap Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Height Difference Adjustment . . . . . . . TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT [4SD] . . . . . TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT . . . . . FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Front Bumper Installation Note . . . . . . FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand Manufactured Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand Manufactured Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . .

09-10–1 09-10–2 09-10–2 09-10–3 09-10–3 09-10–4 09-10–4 09-10–5 09-10–6 09-10–6 09-10–7 09-10–8 09-10–8 09-10–8 09-10–9 09-10–10 09-10–10 09-10–11

FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB] . . . . 09-10–13 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–15 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–17 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–18 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–18 Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note . . . 09-10–20 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–20 Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note . . . 09-10–23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–23 Rear Bumper Installation Note . . . . . . . 09-10–25 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-10–25 Rear Bumper Installation Note . . . . . . . 09-10–27 REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-10–27 REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [4SD] . . . . 09-10–28

BODY PANELS BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX [3HB] SOKYU_WM: BODY AND ACCESSORIES

id0910004047z3

1

4

3

2

5

6

7

9

8

am2zzw0000349 .

1

2

Bonnet (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-4 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.) Cowl panel (See 09-10-23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

3

4

Fuel-filler lid (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.) Seal board upper (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-10–1

BODY PANELS 5

6

7

8

9

Shroud panel (See 09-10-18 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-13 FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY [3HB].) Front fender panel (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear bumper (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-27 REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB]

id0910004047z8

4SD 1

4

2

5

3

6

7

9

10

8

am2zzw0000491 .

1

2

3

4

5

Bonnet (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-4 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.) Cowl panel (See 09-10-23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Fuel-filler lid (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.) Seal board upper (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Shroud panel (See 09-10-18 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-10–2

6

7

8

9

Bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-10 FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Front fender panel (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Trunk lid (See 09-10-6 TRUNK LID REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) (See 09-10-6 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT [4SD].) (See 09-10-7 TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL [4SD].)

BODY PANELS 10

Rear bumper (See 09-10-25 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY [4SD].)

5HB 1

4

3

2

5

6

7

9

8

adejjw00001457 .

1

2

3

4

5

Bonnet (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-4 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.) Cowl panel (See 09-10-23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Fuel-filler lid (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.) Seal board upper (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Shroud panel (See 09-10-18 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-20 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)

6

7

8

9

Bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-10 FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Front fender panel (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear bumper (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-27 REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091000407200

Warning x Removing the bonnet without supporting it could cause the bonnet to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the bonnet from falling.

09-10–3

BODY PANELS 1. After loosening bolt A and removing bolt B, remove the bonnet in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BOLT A,B:19—25 N·m {1.9—2.6 kgf·m,14—18 ft·lbf}

BOLT A

BOLT B am2zzw0000158

2. Remove bolt C, and remove the bonnet hinge in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. When installing the bonnet, adjust the bonnet by moving the bonnet hinge. (See 09-10-4 BONNET ADJUSTMENT)

BOLT C:19—25 N·m {1.9—2.6 kgf·m,14—18 ft·lbf}

End Of Sie

BOLT C

am2zzw0000158

BONNET ADJUSTMENT

id091000407300

Gap Adjustment 1. Measure the gap between the bonnet and body. a

b

e

F DD

SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B

SEC. E—E

A

E B

c

DITAIL C

d

SEC. D—D

f

E

C

A

B

DITAIL F am2zzw0000378

Standard clearance a:2.96.1 mm {0.120.24 in} b:3.06.0 mm {0.120.23 in} c:-1.01.0 mm {-0.0390.039 in} d:2.54.5 mm {0.100.17 in} e:3.06.0 mm {0.120.23 in} f:-1.01.0 mm {-0.0390.039 in} 2. Remove the front fender molding. (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-10–4

BODY PANELS 3. Loosen the bonnet hinge installation bolts and adjust the gap by moving the bonnet hinge back and forth, left and right. 4. Tighten the bolts. (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 5. Install the front fender molding. (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION)

BOLT

am2zzw0000503

Height Difference Adjustment 1. Measure the height difference between the bonnet and body.

b a

C C

SEC. A—A

A

SEC. B—B B

c

A

B

SEC. C—C am2zzw0000159

Standard clearance a:1.94.5mm {0.080.17 in} b:0.83.7mm {0.040.14 in} c:-1.00.5mm {-0.030.01 in} 2. Turn the stop rubber to adjust.

End Of Sie

STOP RUBBER

BONNET SIDE

DOWN

BODY SIDE

UP

STOP RUBBER

UP DOWN

am2zzw0000160

09-10–5

BODY PANELS TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id0910008016z5

Warning x Removing the stay damper without supporting the trunk lid can be dangerous. The trunk lid may fall and injure you. Be sure to open the trunk lid completely and support it securely before removing the stay damper. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the trunk lid wiring harness connector, then take the trunk lid wiring harness out from the vehicle. TRUNK LID WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR

am2ccw0000019

3. Pry off the stay damper band using a flathead screwdriver. 4. Pry out the connecting part of the stay damper and the hinge with a flathead screwdriver to disconnect them, then remove the stay damper.

BAND

BAND

am2ccw0000019

5. Remove the nuts, then remove the trunk lid. 6. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid hinge. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. 8. Adjust the trunk lid. (See 09-10-6 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT [4SD].)

End Of Sie

NUT

20—28 {2.1—2.8, 15—20}

TRUNK LID HINGE TRUNK LID

BOLT 20—28 {2.1—2.8, 15—20}

N·m {kgf·m, ft·lbf} am2zzw0000498

TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT [4SD] id0910008017z5

1. Measure the gap and height difference between the trunk lid and the body. 2. Loosen the trunk lid hinge installation bolts and adjust the trunk lid. x If necessary, loosen the trunk lid lock striker installation bolts and adjust the trunk lid. (See 09-14-98 TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-10–6

BODY PANELS

TRUNK LID HINGE INSTALLATION BOLT

TRUNK LID HINGE

TRUNK LID am3zzw0000223

Standard clearance a: 4.0—8.0 mm {0.16—0.31 in} b: 2.5—4.5 mm {0.10—0.17 in} c: -0.5—1.5 mm {-0.019—0.059 in} d: 3.8—5.8 mm {0.15—0.22 in}

C C

3. Tighten the bolts. (See 09-10-6 TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)

B

B

End Of Sie

A

A

d

c

b

c a

SEC. C—C

SEC. B—B

SEC. A—A am2zzw0000503

TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL [4SD] id0910008027z5

Note x The gas in the trunk lid stay damper is colorless, odorless, and non-toxic. 1. Wear protective eye wear. 2. Lay the trunk lid stay damper flat. 3. Saw2—3 mm {0.08—0.11 in} into the trunk lid stay damper using a hacksaw, and allow the gas to escape from the trunk lid stay damper. 4. Verify that the gas has escaped from the trunk lid stay damper. 5. Discard the stay damper.

HACKSAW

TRUNK LID STAY DUMPER

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000491

09-10–7

BODY PANELS FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the fuel filler lid in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the fuel-filler lid. (See 09-10-8 FUELFILLER LID ADJUSTMENT)

id091000404800

FUEL-FILLER LID

End Of Sie BOLT 3.9—5.9 N·m {40—60 kgf·cm, 35—52 in·lbf} am2zzw0000160

FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT

id091000404900

1. Measure the gap and height difference between the fuel-filler lid and the body. 2. Loosen the fuel-filler lid installation bolts and A adjust the fuel-filler lid. Standard clearance a: 1.73.7 mm {0.070.14 in} b: -0.51.5 mm {-0.010.05 in}

b a

3. Tighten the bolts. (See 09-10-8 FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

A SEC. A—A am2zzw0000383

FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091000405100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (Vehicles with front fog lights) 2. Remove screw A and screws B, and set the mudguard out of the way in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. SCREW A

MUDGUARD

SCREW B am2zzw0000160

3. Remove screws C.

FRONT BUMPER

SCREW C

FRONT

am2zzw0000346

09-10–8

BODY PANELS 4. Remove the fastener D. 5. Remove the bolts from position (1) indicated in the figure, pull the front bumper in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure to disengage the both ends from the front bumper slider, then remove the front bumper in the direction of arrow (3).

FASTENER D

RADIATOR GRILLE

am2zzw0000160

FRONT BUMPER SLIDER TAB

(1) BOLT

(1) BOLT

(2) FRONT BUMPER

(2)

(2)

FRONT BUMPER TAB (3) FRONT BUMPER SLIDER

BOLT:6.9—9.8 N·m {71—99 kgf·cm,62—86 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000178

Caution x The front bumper and front bumper slider are engaged firmly. If they are disengaged forcibly the bumper could fall and be damaged. Perform the servicing carefully when disengaging the front bumper from the front bumper slider. x When disengaging the front bumper from the front bumper slider, the front bumper could fall and be damaged. Support the front bumper so that it does not fall. 6. Disconnect the front fog light connector. (Vehicles with front fog lights) 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. 8. Adjust the front fog light aiming for vehicles with front fog lights. (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING) Front Bumper Installation Note 1. Spread the front bumper ends apart. 2. Assemble the front bumper to the body. 3. Press the front bumper connecting area in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to engage with the front bumper slider.

FRONT BUMPER SLIDER

End Of Sie

FRONT BUMPER am2zzw0000160

09-10–9

BODY PANELS FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

id091000405200

Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand Manufactured Vehicles Standard type 1. Remove the front fog light. (see 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the radiator grille. (see 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

7

2

3 7 C

B

A 4

1 C 5

B A 6

9 6 8 am2zzw0000160

1 2 3 4 5

Front bumper face Bracket Front bumper retainer Screw Front bumper mesh

6 7 8 9

Fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog light) Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) Rivet Airdam skirt

4. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Sports type 1. Remove the front fog light. (see 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the radiator grille. (see 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-10–10

BODY PANELS 3. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

7

2

7

3

C

B

A 4

1

C 5

B A 6

9

8

6

am2zzw0000257

1 2 3 4 5

Front bumper face Bracket Front bumper retainer Screw Front bumper mesh

6 7 8 9

Fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog light) Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) Rivet Airdam skirt

4. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand Manufactured Vehicles Standard type 1. Remove the front fog light. (Vehicles with front fog light) (see 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION)

09-10–11

BODY PANELS 2. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table. 2 4 5 3 9 4 5

9

6 7 1 1

13

12 11 8

10 10 8 am2zzw0000443

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Fastener A Screw B Radiator grille reinforcement Screw C Bracket Screw D Front bumper mesh

8 9 10 11 12 13

Fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog light) Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) Rivet Airdam skirt Ornament Front bumper face

3. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Sports type 1. Remove the front fog light. (see 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-10–12

BODY PANELS 2. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table. 2 4 5 3 4 5 6 7 1 1

12

11 10 8

9 9 8 am2zzw0000443

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fastener A Screw B Radiator grille reinforcement Screw C Bracket Screw D

7 8 9 10 11 12

Front bumper mesh Front fog light cover Rivet Airdam skirt Ornament Front bumper face

3. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB] id0910004052z3

1. Remove the front fog light. (see 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the radiator grille. (see 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

09-10–13

BODY PANELS Standard Type 2 7 3 7 C

B

A 4

1 C 5

B A 6

9

A

TAB A A

8 0.5 mm {0.02 in}

6

A

A A

A

10 8 am2zzw0000343

1 2 3 4 5

Front bumper face Bracket Front bumper retainer Screw Front bumper mesh

09-10–14

6 7 8 9 10

Fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog light) Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) Rivet Airdam skirt RH Airdam skirt LH

BODY PANELS Sport Type 2 7 3 7 C

B

A 4

1

C 5

B A 6 9

A

TAB A A

8 0.5 mm {0.02 in}

A

A A

6

A

10 8 am2zzw0000344

1 2 3 4 5

Front bumper face Bracket Front bumper retainer Screw Front bumper mesh

6 7 8 9 10

Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) Fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog light) Rivet Airdam skirt RH Airdam skirt LH

4. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091000405700

Caution x Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel using a jack before removing the bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the shroud panel. x Since the servicing is performed with the bonnet open, secure the bonnet using a piece of wood to prevent it from falling. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front combination light. (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the horn. (See 09-22-20 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the washer tank. (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-10–15

BODY PANELS 6. Remove bolt A. BOLT A

FRONT BOLT A:29—39 N·m {3.0—4.0 kgf·m,22—29 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000346

7. Remove bolts B. BOLT B BOLT B

FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

FRONT

BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

BOLT B:8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm,71—97 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000346

8. Remove bolts C and D then remove the bumper reinforcement in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BOLT C

BOLT D BOLT C

BOLT C

BOLT C:29—39 N·m {3.0—4.0 kgf·m,22—29 ft·lbf} BOLT D:8.0—11.0 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm,71—97 in·lbf}

BUMPER REINFORCEMENT

am2zzw0000344

09-10–16

BODY PANELS 9. Remove the bracket in the direction shown of the arrow shown in the figure. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BRACKET

End Of Sie

FRONT

am2zzw0000346

FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091000405900

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front side turn lights. (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front combination lights. (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the side step molding. (vehicles with side step molding) (See 09-16-12 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL) (See 09-16-14 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION) (See 09-16-13 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL [3HB]) (See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION [3HB]) 7. Remove fastener A, then remove the front fender molding in the direction of the arrow shown in the FASTENER A figure.

FRONT FENDER MOLDING

am2zzw0000161

8. Remove bolt B and clip C, then remove the front bumper slider. CLIP C

CLIP C

FRONT BUMPER SLIDER

BOLT B

FRONT

BOLT B:8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000346

09-10–17

BODY PANELS 9. Remove bolts D, then remove the front fender panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. BOLT D FRONT

BOLT D FRONT

BOLT D FRONT

BOLT D

BOLT D

BOLT B:8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}

BOLT D am2zzw0000347

10. Install in the reverse order of removal. 11. Adjust the headlight aiming. (See 09-18-7 HEADLIGHT AIMING)

End Of Sie SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091000466600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. After removing fasteners A, detach hooks B and remove the seal board upper in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. FRONT

SEAL BOAD UPPER HOOK B

HOOK B FRONT REAR

HOOK B REAR FASTENER A am2zzw0000447

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091000406300

Caution x Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel using a jack before removing the bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the shroud panel. x Since the servicing is performed with the bonnet open, secure the bonnet using a piece of wood to prevent it from falling.

09-10–18

BODY PANELS 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Front combination lights (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (3) Horn (See 09-22-20 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (4) Washer tank (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (5) Bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (6) Seal board upper (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (7) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove bolts A, then remove the bumper stiffener lower in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER

BOLT A BOLT A:9—12 N·m {90—129 kgf·cm,78—112 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000161

4. Remove fasteners B, then remove the closing plate in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

FASTENER B

CLOSING PLATE

am2zzw0000162

5. Remove bolts C, then set the shroud upper plate out of the way. BOLT C

FRONT

BOLT C FRONT FRONT

BOLT C:8.0—11.0 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm,71—97 in·lbf}

BOLT C

am2zzw0000337

09-10–19

BODY PANELS 6. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket in the direction of the arrow in the figure, then remove the upper mount rubber. (See 09-10-20 Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note)

UPPER MOUNT RUBBER

UPPER MOUNT RUBBER BRACKET

FRONT am2zzw0000447

7. Pull the shroud panel in the direction of arrow (1) in the figure, and remove it in the direction of arrow (2). Caution x Support the lower surface of the radiator with a floor jack to prevent the radiator from falling off after the shroud panel is removed. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(1) (2) FRONT

am2zzw0000447

Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note 1. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket while pressing down the upper mount rubber bracket tab in the direction of the arrow in the figure.

A

End Of Sie

SHROUD PANEL TAB UPPER MOUNT BRACKET COVER

FRONT

A

ENGINE ROOM SIDE SEC.A-A am2zzw0000447

SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] id0910004063z4

Caution x Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel using a jack before removing the bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the shroud panel. x Since the servicing is performed with the bonnet open, secure the bonnet using a piece of wood to prevent it from falling. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-10–20

BODY PANELS (2) Front combination lights (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (3) Washer tank (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (4) Bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (5) Seal board upper (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (6) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove bolts A, then remove the bumper stiffener lower in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER

BOLT A BOLT A:9—12 N·m {90—129 kgf·cm,78—112 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000161

4. Remove bolts B, then set the shroud upper plate out of the way. FRONT SHROUD UPPER PLATE

BOLT B

FRONT BOLT B FRONT BOLT B:8.0—11.0 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm,71—97 in·lbf}

BOLT B

am2zzw0000398

5. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket in the direction of the arrow in the figure, then remove the upper mount rubber. (See 09-10-23 Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note)

UPPER MOUNT RUBBER

UPPER MOUNT RUBBER BRACKET

FRONT am2zzw0000447

09-10–21

BODY PANELS 6. Remove the nuts C. 7. Set the condenser out of the way.

NUT C 6.9—9.8 N·m {71—99 kgf·cm, 62—86 in·lbf}

FRONT am2zzw0000448

8. Release the hooks D in the direction of arrow shown in the figure. HOOK D

HOOK D

am2zzw0000402

9. Pull the shroud panel in the direction of arrow (1) in the figure, and remove it in the direction of arrow (2). Caution x Support the lower surface of the radiator with a floor jack to prevent the radiator from falling off after the shroud panel is removed. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(1) (2) FRONT

am2zzw0000448

09-10–22

BODY PANELS Upper Mount Rubber Removal Note 1. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket while pressing down the upper mount rubber bracket tab in the direction of the arrow in the figure.

A

End Of Sie

SHROUD PANEL TAB UPPER MOUNT RUBBER BRACKET

FRONT

A

ENGINE ROOM SIDE SEC.A-A am2zzw0000448

COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091000406200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Windshield wiper arm (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Front fender molding (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (3) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (4) Windshield wiper motor (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the washer hose grommet from the cowl panel and disconnect the front washer hose. 4. Remove bolts, and remove the cowl panel in the BOLT BOLT BOLT:8—10 N·m direction of the arrow shown in the figure. {82—101 kgf·cm,71—88 in·lbf} 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

FRONT

BOLT am2zzw0000347

REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4.

id091000405300

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the fastener A.

REAR BUMPER

FASTENER A

am2zzw0000160

09-10–23

BODY PANELS 5. Remove the fasteners B.

REAR BUMPER FASTENER B am2zzw0000161

6. Remove the screws C.

SCREW C

REAR BUMPER am2zzw0000161

7. Pull the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to disengage the bumper from the rear bumper slider, then remove the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (2). Caution x When disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider, the rear bumper could fall and be damaged. Support the rear bumper so that it does not fall.

(1) (2)

(1)

REAR BUMPER am2zzw0000161

09-10–24

BODY PANELS 8. Remove clips D,E and the license plate light bulb, then set aside the wiring harness to the vehicle side. LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB

REAR BUMPER WIRING HARNESS

CLIP E

WIRING HARNESS

CLIP D

CLIP D

CLIP E

REAR BUMPER

REAR BUMPER am2zzw0000178

9. Disconnect the rear fog light connector. (Vehicles with rear fog light) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear Bumper Installation Note 1. Spread the rear bumper ends apart. 2. Assemble the rear bumper to the body. 3. Press the rear bumper connecting area in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to engage with the rear bumper slider.

REAR BUMPER SLIDER

End Of Sie

REAR BUMPER am2zzw0000161

REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0910004053z5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-10–25

BODY PANELS 3. Remove the screw.

SCREW REAR BUMPER

am2ccw0000025

4. Remove the fasteners.

REAR BUMPER

FASTENER am2ccw0000025

5. Remove the screws.

SCREW

REAR BUMPER am2ccw0000026

6. Pull the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to disengage the bumper from the rear bumper slider, then remove the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (2). Caution x When disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider, the rear bumper could fall and be damaged. Support the rear bumper so that it does not fall.

(1)

(1)

(2) REAR BUMPER

am2ccw0000026

09-10–26

BODY PANELS 7. Remove clip and the license plate light, then set aside the wiring harness to the vehicle side. LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB

REAR BUMPER WIRING HARNESS

CLIP

WIRING HARNESS CLIP

REAR BUMPER am2ccw0000026

8. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear Bumper Installation Note 1. Spread the rear bumper ends apart. 2. Assemble the rear bumper to the body. 3. Press the rear bumper connecting area in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to engage with the bumper slider.

REAR BUMPER SLIDER

End Of Sie

REAR BUMPER am2zzw0000161

REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY id091000405600

1. Remove the rear fog light. (Vehicles with rear fog light) (See 09-18-26 REAR FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION)

09-10–27

BODY PANELS 2. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

1

Rear bumper fascia Screw Rear bumper guard

3. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie 3 2 2

3

adejjw00003272

REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [4SD]

id0910004056z5

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

Rear bumper fascia Screw Rear bumper reflector

3 3

1

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie 2 am2ccw0000019

09-10–28

DOORS AND LIFTGATE

09-11

DOORS AND LIFTGATE

DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Connector Removal Note. . . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . Connector Removal Note. . . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . .

09-11–1 09-11–2 09-11–3 09-11–4 09-11–5 09-11–5 09-11–6 09-11–7 09-11–8 09-11–8 09-11–9 09-11–10 09-11–11 09-11–12 09-11–13

REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–15 Connector Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–16 REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–16 REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-11–17 REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–18 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-11–20 DOOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–23 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–24 LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–26 LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-11–28 LIFTGATE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–28 Opening the Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–28 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–29 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–30

DOORS AND LIFTGATE DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX WM: DOORS AND LIFTGATE(LOCATION INDEX)

id091100520000

3

2

1

4

5

6 7 8 9

10

11

12

am2zzw0000434 .

1

Liftgate hinge (See 09-11-26 LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

2

Stay damper (See 09-11-29 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL.)

09-11–1

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 3

Front door pad (See 09-11-7 FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4 Front door (See 09-11-4 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.) 5 Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6 Rear door (See 09-11-15 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.) 7 Rear door module panel (See 09-11-19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 8 Front door hinge (See 09-11-10 FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 9 Front door checker (See 09-11-8 FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 10 Rear door hinge (See 09-11-18 REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 11 Rear door checker (See 09-11-16 REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 12 Liftgate (See 09-11-24 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-30 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.) (See 09-11-28 LIFTGATE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX [3HB]

id091100520006

3

2

1

4

5

6 7

8 am2zzw0000493

.

1

2

Liftgate hinge (See 09-11-28 LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Stay damper (See 09-11-29 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL.)

09-11–2

3

Front door pad (See 09-11-8 FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].)

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 4

5

6

7

8

Front door (See 09-11-5 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT [3HB].) Front door module panel (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Front door hinge (See 09-11-11 FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Front door checker (See 09-11-9 FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Liftgate (See 09-11-24 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-30 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.) (See 09-11-28 LIFTGATE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX [4SD]

id091100520008

1

2

3

4

5 6 7

8

10

9

am2zzw0000491 .

1 2

3

4

Stay damper (See 09-11-29 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL.) Front door pad (See 09-11-7 FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front door (See 09-11-4 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

5

6

7

8

Rear door (See 09-11-15 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-23 DOOR ADJUSTMENT [4SD].) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-20 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Front door hinge (See 09-11-10 FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front door checker (See 09-11-8 FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-11–3

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 9

Rear door hinge (See 09-11-18 REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 10 Rear door checker (See 09-11-17 REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].)

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091100520100

Warning x Removing the front door without supporting it could cause the front door to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the front door from falling. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove in the order indicated in the table. *1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf}

3

4

2

1 20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

3 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000480 .

1 2

Bolt A Connector (See 09-11-5 Connector Removal Note.)

3 4

3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the front door. (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)

09-11–4

Bolt B Front door

DOORS AND LIFTGATE Connector Removal Note 1. Pull the rubber boot outward.

RUBBER BOOT

am2zzw0000041

2. Press the tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, and remove the connector from the body in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER TAB (1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(1) (1)

am2zzw0000041

3. Lower the lever in the direction of arrow (1), and disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (2).

End Of Sie

(2)

TAB (1)

LEVER am2zzw0000437

FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id091100520106

Warning x Removing the front door without supporting it could cause the front door to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the front door from falling. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

09-11–5

DOORS AND LIFTGATE .

1 2 3 4

Bolt A Connector (See 09-11-6 Connector Removal Note.) Bolt B Front door

18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf}

2

3

4

3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the front door. (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT [3HB].)

1 20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf}

3 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000480

Connector Removal Note 1. Pull the rubber boot outward.

RUBBER BOOT

am2zzw0000041

2. Press the tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, and remove the connector from the body in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure.

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER TAB (1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(1) (1)

am2zzw0000041

09-11–6

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 3. Lower the lever in the direction of arrow (1), and disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (2).

(2)

End Of Sie

TAB (1)

LEVER am2zzw0000437

FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091100520300

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. {4.33 in} 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ am2zzw0000438 INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the fasteners. 5. Remove the front door pad. 6. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the front door pad and body using a utility knife.

FRONT DOOR PAD

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. FASTENER

am2zzw0000040

(1) When reusing the front door pad, affix doublesided adhesive tape to the front door pad as shown in the figure.

End Of Sie

FRONT DOOR PAD

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

am2zzw0000040

09-11–7

DOORS AND LIFTGATE FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id091100520306

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. {4.33 in} 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ am2zzw0000438 INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-8 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the fasteners. 5. Remove the front door pad. 6. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the front door pad and body using a utility knife.

FRONT DOOR PAD

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. FASTENER

am2zzw0000337

(1) When reusing the front door pad, affix doublesided adhesive tape to the front door pad as shown in the figure.

End Of Sie

FRONT DOOR PAD

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

am2zzw0000338

FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091100520400

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fully close the front door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-11–8

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 6. Remove the bolt.

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

FRONT DOOR CHECKER

BOLT 20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

am2zzw0000480

7. Remove the bolts. FRONT DOOR CHECKER *1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

BOLT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 4.1—8.3 N·m {42—84 kgf·cm, 37—73 in·lbf} *2

am2zzw0000481

8. Pull out the front door checker from the front speaker installation hole. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id091100520406

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fully close the front door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-11–9

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 6. Remove the bolt.

FRONT DOOR CHECKER

BOLT 20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000481

7. Remove the bolts. FRONT DOOR CHECKER

BOLT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000481

8. Pull out the front door checker from the front speaker installation hole. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091100520500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front side turn light (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front combination light (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Side step molding (vehicles with side step molding) (See 09-16-12 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-14 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION.) (6) Front fender panel (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front door (See 09-11-4 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-11–10

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m, 14—21 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

1

2

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

2

am2zzw0000481

1 2

Bolt Front door hinge

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id091100520506

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front side turn light (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front bumper (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front combination light (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Side step molding (vehicles with side step molding) (See 09-16-13 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL [3HB].) (See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front fender panel (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front door (See 09-11-5 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m, 14—21 ft·lbf}

1

2

2 am2zzw0000040

09-11–11

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 1 2

Bolt Front door hinge

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091100520200

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the clips securing the front door wiring harness from the front door module panel.

APPROX.110 mm {4.33 in}

am2zzw0000437

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL FRONT DOOR HARNESS

CLIP

CLIP am2zzw0000040

09-11–12

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 5. Remove the bolts. FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT

BOLT

2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf} 18—26 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000493

6. Remove the fastener. 7. Remove the front door module panel. 8. Remove the front power window motor. (See 0912-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 9. Remove the front power window regulator. (See 09-12-12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

End Of Sie

FASTENER

am2zzw0000493

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id091100520206

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

APPROX.110 mm {4.33 in}

am2zzw0000437

09-11–13

DOORS AND LIFTGATE (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-8 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the clips securing the front door wiring harness from the front door module panel. FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL FRONT DOOR HARNESS

CLIP CLIP

am2zzw0000338

5. Remove the bolts. FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT

BOLT

2.0—3.0 N·m 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf} 18—26 in·lbf} am2zzw0000438

09-11–14

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 6. Remove the fastener. 7. Remove the front door module panel. 8. Remove the front power window motor. (See 0912-18 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) 9. Remove the front power window regulator. (See 09-12-14 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

End Of Sie

FASTENER

am2zzw0000493

REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091100520600

Warning x Removing the rear door without supporting it could cause the rear door to fall and cause serious injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the rear door from falling. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf}

3

4

2

20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

1

18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf}

3 *1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles am2zzw0000481 .

1 2

Bolt A Connector (See 09-11-16 Connector Removal Note.)

3 4

Bolt B Rear door

09-11–15

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the rear door. (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.) Connector Removal Note 1. While pressing the tab in the direction of arrow (1), disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (2).

End Of Sie (1)

TAB

(2)

am2zzw0000042

REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

id091100520700

Fully close the rear door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the bolt. *1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

BOLT 20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

am2zzw0000481

09-11–16

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 7. Remove the bolts.

REAR DOOR CHECKER

8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 4.1—8.3 N·m {42—84 kgf·cm, 37—73 in·lbf} *2

BOLT

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles am2zzw0000481

8. Pull out the rear door checker from the rear speaker installation hole. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

id091100520708

Fully close the rear door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the bolt.

BOLT 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000491

09-11–17

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 6. Remove the bolts. 7. Pull out the rear door checker from the rear speaker installation hole. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

4.1—8.3 N·m {42—84 kgf·cm, 37—73 in·lbf}

REAR DOOR CHECKER

End Of Sie

BOLT

am2zzw0000491

REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091100520800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear door (See 09-11-15 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2

2

1 3

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

3

1 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m, 14—22 ft·lbf} *1 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} *2 am2zzw0000481

1 2 3

Bolt Nut Rear door hinge

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. End Of Sie

09-11–18

DOORS AND LIFTGATE REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091100520900

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5)Rear door glass (See 09- 12- 9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4.Remove the clips securing the rear door wiring REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL harness from the rear door module panel.

am2zzw0000438

REAR DOOT HARNESS

CLIP

CLIP am2zzw0000041

09-11–19

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 5. Remove the bolts. REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf} am2zzw0000438

6. Remove the fastener. 7. Remove the rear door module panel. 8. Remove the rear power window motor. (See 0912-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 9. Remove the rear power window regulator. (See 09-12-15 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FASTENER

End Of Sie

REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL am2zzw0000493

REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id091100520908

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-11–20

APPROX. 210mm {8.27 in}

am2zzw0000041

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 4. Remove the clips securing the rear door wiring harness from the rear door module panel.

REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REAR DOOT HARNESS

CLIP

CLIP am2zzw0000041

5. Remove the bolts. REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf}

BOLT 2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm, 18—26 in·lbf} am2zzw0000493

09-11–21

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 6. Remove the fastener. 7. Remove the rear door module panel.8. Remove the rear power window motor. (See 0912-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 9. Remove the rear power window regulator. (See 0912-15 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FASTENER

End Of Sie

REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL am2zzw0000494

DOOR ADJUSTMENT

id091100521100

1. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts. 2. Adjust the gap and height difference to the standard range by moving the door back and forth, left and right.

C

C B

REAR DOOR

REAR FENDER PANEL

B

A

A

REAR DOOR a

)+( FRONT DOOR

FRONT DOOR

)+(

a

FRONT FENDER PANEL a

b )-(

b )-( SEC. C—C

SEC. B—B

b SEC. A—A am2zzw0000042

Standard range a: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in} b: -1.0—1.0 mm {-0.039—0.039 in} 3. Tighten the bolts. 4. If the door does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the door lock striker installation screw.

End Of Sie DOOR ADJUSTMENT [3HB] id091100521106

1. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts.

09-11–22

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 2. Adjust the gap and height difference to the standard range by moving the door back and forth, left and right.

B

REAR FENDER PANEL

B

A

FRONT DOOR

A

FRONT DOOR

FRONT FENDER PANEL a

a

b

b

SEC. B—B

SEC. A—A am2zzw0000337

Standard range a: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in} b: -1.0—1.0 mm {-0.039—0.039 in} 3. Tighten the bolts. 4. If the door does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the door lock striker installation screw.

End Of Sie DOOR ADJUSTMENT [4SD]

id091100521108

1. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts. 2. Adjust the gap and height difference to the standard range by moving the door back and forth, left and right.

C

C B

REAR DOOR

REAR FENDER PANEL

B

A

A

REAR DOOR a

)+( FRONT DOOR

FRONT DOOR

)+(

a

FRONT FENDER PANEL a

b )-(

b )-( SEC. C—C

SEC. B—B

b SEC. A—A am2zzw0000485

09-11–23

DOORS AND LIFTGATE Standard range a: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in} b: -1.0—1.0 mm {-0.039—0.039 in} 3. Tighten the bolts. 4. If the door does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the door lock striker installation screw.

End Of Sie LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091100521200

Note x If the liftgate cannot be locked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunctions in the electrical system, open the liftgate using the liftgate manual open/close procedure. (See 09-11-28 LIFTGATE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE PROCEDURE.) Warning x When removing the stay damper, serious injury may occur if the stay damper is removed without supporting the liftgate. Always perform the procedure with at least another person. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Disconnect the connectors. CONNECTOR Remove the grommets from the liftgate. Note x If the liftgate is to be replaced with a new one, remove the liftgate wiring harnesses without tying them with strings.

6. Tie each string to connectors (1) and (2) shown in the figure.

CONNECTOR

Note x Prepare two strings of 150 cm {59.1 in} or longer length. GROMMET

am2zzw0000509

STRING

CONNECTOR(1)

STRING

CONNECTOR(2) am2zzw0000509

09-11–24

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 7. Pull out the liftgate wiring harness as shown in the figure while grasping the end of the string so that the end of the string does not enter the liftgate.

STRING

CONNECTOR(1)

CONNECTOR(2) STRING am2zzw0000191

8. Untie the strings from connectors (1) and (2). 9. Disconnect the joint pipe of the rear washer hose. JOINT PIPE

am2zzw0000042

09-11–25

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 10. Remove the stay damper band using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver. LH

RH

BAND

BAND

STUD BALL

STUD BALL

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

STAY DAMPAR

STAY DAMPAR

STUD BALL

STUD BALL

BAND

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BAND

am2zzw0000042

11. Remove the stay damper. 12. Remove the stud ball. 13. Remove the bolts. RH

LH

LIFTGATE

LIFTGATE

BOLT

BOLT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} *2

8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} *2

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles am2zzw0000494

14. Remove the liftgate. 15. Install in the reverse order of removal. 16. Adjust the liftgate. (See 09-11-30 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091100521300

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Liftgate (See 09-11-24 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-11–26

DOORS AND LIFTGATE (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (5) Lower anchor installation bolts on the rear seat belt. (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Peel back the seaming welt to the point indicated by the arrow in the figure. LH

RH B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

FRONT

B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

FRONT

SEAMING WELT

SEAMING WELT

am2zzw0000043

4. Remove the fasteners on the rear part of the headliner and remove the nut while partially peeling back the headliner. Note x Be careful not to leave a fold-seam. LH

RH LIFTGATE HINGE

NUT

LIFTGATE HINGE

NUT

33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m, 25—35 ft·lbf} *1 68—92 N·m {7.0—9.3 kgf·m, 51—67 ft·lbf} *2

33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m, 25—35 ft·lbf} *1 68—92 N·m {7.0—9.3 kgf·m, 51—67 ft·lbf} *2

HEADLINER

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

FASTENER am2zzw0000494

5. Remove the liftgate hinge. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

09-11–27

DOORS AND LIFTGATE LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id091100521306

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Liftgate (See 09-11-24 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (6) Lower anchor installation bolts on the rear seat belt. (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (8) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 3. Remove the fasteners on the rear part of the headliner and remove the nut while partially peeling back the headliner. Note x Be careful not to leave a fold-seam. LH

RH LIFTGATE HINGE

NUT

LIFTGATE HINGE

NUT

33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m, 25—35 ft·lbf}

33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m, 25—35 ft·lbf}

HEADLINER

FASTENER am2zzw0000509

4. Remove the liftgate hinge. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie LIFTGATE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE PROCEDURE id091100009500

Note x If the liftgate cannot be unlocked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunction in the electrical system, it can be opened using the following procedure. Opening the Liftgate 1. Fold down the rear seat back. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Caution x Wear gloves when performing the procedure. The body edge can injure bare hands.

09-11–28

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 3. Move the lever shown in the figure to the left to unlock the liftgate.

End Of Sie

LEVER

am2zzw0000043

STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL

id091100521000

Note x The stay damper contains colorless, odorless, nontoxic gas. 1. Wear protective eye wear. 2. Position the stay damper horizontally. 3. Drain gas and oil by cutting the position indicated in the figure to a 2—3 mm {0.08—0.11 in} depth using a metal saw. Caution x Be careful. The gas and oil may spray out with force. 40—50mm {1.6—1.9 in}

am2zzw0000043

4. Verify that the gas and oil is drained completely by pulling and pushing the piston rod several times with the cut position facing downward. PISTON ROD

am2zzw0000043

09-11–29

DOORS AND LIFTGATE 5. Cut off the bottom of the stay damper. 6. Dispose of the stay damper.

End Of Sie

STAY DAMPAR

am2zzw0000043

LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT

id091100521400

1. Measure the gap and height difference between the liftgate and the body. 2. Loosen the liftgate hinge installation bolts and adjust the gap by moving the liftgate. ROOF PANEL A B

a LIFTGATE

A

B

b

C

C

D

D

SEC. A—A E E

d

LIFTGATE

c SEC. B—B LIFTGATE

LIFTGATE

f

REAR BUMPER

LIFTGATE

h

i REAR BUMPER

SEC. E—E

g

SEC. D—D

e SEC. C—C am2zzw0000043

Standard clearance a: 5.0—7.0 mm {0.20—0.27 in} b: -2.0—0.0 mm {0.078—0.000 in} c: 2.5—6.5 mm {0.10—0.25 in} d: -0.2—4.2 mm {0.00—0.16 in} e: 2.8—5.2 mm {0.12—0.20 in} f: -0.7—1.7 mm {0.02—0.06 in} g: 2.0—6.0 mm {0.08—0.23 in} h: -1.5—2.5 mm {0.059—0.098 in} i: 4.0—8.0 mm {0.16—0.31 in} 3. Tighten the bolts.

End Of Sie

09-11–30

PAGE 1 OF 2

09-12

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–2 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–6 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-12–8 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9 Rear Door Glass Guide Removal Note 09-12–10 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-12–10 REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-12–11 REGULATOR HANDLE REMOVAL . . . . 09-12–12 REGULATOR HANDLE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-12–14 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–15 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-12–16 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–17 Front Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . 09-12–17 Rear Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . 09-12–18 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-12–18 Front Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . 09-12–18 POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–19 Driver’s Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–19 Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–19 Rear Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–19 POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–20 Driver's Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–20 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–20 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-12–21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–21 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-12–22 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–22 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-12–23 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-12–24 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24

POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-12–24 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–25 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–25 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–25 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–26 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–26 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . 09-12–27 TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–27 DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–28 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–29 Not Reusing Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–29 Reusing Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–29 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . 09-12–30 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL . . . . 09-12–32 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–34 Not Reusing Rear Window Glass . . . . . 09-12–35 Reusing Rear Window Glass . . . . . . . . 09-12–35 REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–36 REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–39 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [3HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–41 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–42 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–44 POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–45 Mirror glass adjustment, retract/return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–45 Heated outer mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–45 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL . . . 09-12–46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–46 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–47 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-12–48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–50 FILAMENT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–53 FILAMENT REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–53 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL . . . . . . . 09-12–54 Vehicles With Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–54

PAGE 2 OF 2

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS

Vehicles Without Rain Sensor . . . . . . . 09-12–56 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–57 Vehicles With Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–57

Vehicles Without Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . 09-12–57 BASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–57 BASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–57

09-12–1

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX 2

1

13

3

4

12

id091200000000

5 6

7

11

10

8

9 am2zzw0000232

.

1

2

3

4

Windshield (See 09-12-29 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-30 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION.) Rearview mirror (See 09-12-54 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-57 BASE REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 BASE INSTALLATION.) Power window motor (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-19 POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.) Front power window regulator (See 09-12-12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–2

5

6

Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-45 POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-47 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-48 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH INSTALLATION.)

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Power outer mirror switch (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION.) Power window main switch (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-27 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-27 TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-28 DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE.) Power window subswitch (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.) Rear power window regulator (See 09-12-15 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear window glass (See 09-12-32 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-36 REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT REPAIR.) Regulator handle (See 09-12-12 REGULATOR HANDLE REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-12 REGULATOR HANDLE INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

09-12–3

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX [4SD] 2

1

3

4

id091200000081

5 6

13

7

12 11 10

8

9 am2ccw0000021

.

1

2

3

4

5

Windshield (See 09-12-29 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-30 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION.) Rearview mirror (See 09-12-54 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-57 BASE REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 BASE INSTALLATION.) Power window motor (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-19 POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.) Front power window regulator (See 09-12-12 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-12–4

6

7

Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-45 POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-47 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-48 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH INSTALLATION.) Power outer mirror switch (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION.)

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8

9

10

11

12

13

Power window main switch (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-27 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-27 TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-28 DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE.) Power window subswitch (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (See 09-12-25 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [4SD].) Rear power window regulator (See 09-12-16 REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Rear door glass (See 09-12-10 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) Rear door quarter glass (See 09-12-11 REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Rear window glass (See 09-12-34 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [4SD].) (See 09-12-39 REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [4SD].) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT REPAIR.)

End Of Sie

09-12–5

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX [3HB] 1

2 3

4

id0912000000z3

5 6

11

7

8

9

10

am2zzw0000338 .

1

2

3

4

5

Windshield (See 09-12-29 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-30 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION.) Rearview mirror (See 09-12-54 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-57 BASE REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-57 BASE INSTALLATION.) Power window motor (See 09-12-18 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-12-20 POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION [3HB].) Front power window regulator (See 09-12-14 FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Front door glass (See 09-12-8 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-12–6

6

7

Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-45 POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-47 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-48 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH INSTALLATION.) Power outer mirror switch (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-48 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION.)

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8

9

10

11

Power window main switch (See 09-12-21 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-12-22 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION [3HB].) (See 09-12-27 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-27 TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-28 DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE.) Power window subswitch (See 09-12-24 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-12-26 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [3HB].) Quarter window glass (See 09-12-41 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [3HB].) (See 09-12-42 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [3HB].) Rear window glass (See 09-12-32 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-36 REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-53 FILAMENT REPAIR.)

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091200000100

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the hole cover. 7. Remove the bolts. Caution x If the bolts are removed without supporting the front door glass, the front door glass may fall off and be damaged. Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the front door speaker installation hole to support the front door glass.

APPROX. 110 mm {4.33 in}

am2zzw0000439

FRONT DOOR GLASS

HOLE COVER

BOLT 4.5—6.5 N·m {46—66 kgf·cm, 40—57 in·lbf} am2zzw0000046

09-12–7

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8. Lift up the front door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the direction of arrow (2). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(2)

(1)

FRONT DOOR GLASS

Caution x If the bolts are installed without supporting the front door glass, the front door glass may fall off and be damaged. When installing the front door glass, align the glass edge with the front door glass guide by hand through the speaker installation hole, and then install the bolts.

am2zzw0000046

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0912000001z3

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 5. Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the hole cover. 7. Remove the bolts. Caution x If the bolts are removed without supporting the front door glass, the front door glass may fall off and be damaged. Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the front door speaker installation hole to support the front door glass.

APPROX. 110 mm {4.33 in}

am2zzw0000439

HOLE COVER

FRONT DOOR GLASS BOLT 4.5—6.5 N·m {46—66 kgf·cm, 40—57 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000046

8. Lift up the front door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the direction of arrow (2). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(2)

(1)

Caution x If the bolts are installed without supporting the front door glass, the front door glass may fall off and be damaged. When installing the front door glass, align the glass edge with the front door glass guide by hand through the speaker installation hole, and then install the bolts.

End Of Sie

09-12–8

FRONT DOOR GLASS

am2zzw0000046

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091200000300

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. 210 mm {8.27 in} of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the rear door garnish. (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR am2zzw0000439 DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 7. Remove the rear door glass guide and glass run channel as a single unit. (See 09-12-10 Rear Door Glass Guide Removal Note.) 8. Remove the hole cover.

REAR DOOR GLASS

COVER am2zzw0000434

9. Remove the bolts. Caution x If the bolts are removed without supporting the rear door glass, the rear door glass may fall off and be damaged. Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the rear door speaker installation hole to support the rear door glass.

REAR DOOR GLASS

BOLT 4.5—6.5 N·m {46—66 kgf·cm, 40—57 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000434

10. Lift up the rear door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the direction of arrow (2). 11. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x If the bolts are installed without supporting the rear door glass, the rear door glass may fall off and be damaged. When installing the rear door glass, align the glass edge with the rear door glass guide by hand through the speaker installation hole, and then install the bolts.

(2) (1) REAR DOOR GLASS

am2zzw0000047

09-12–9

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Rear Door Glass Guide Removal Note 1. Pull up the rear door weatherstrip and remove the screw. 2. Remove the bolt.

SCREW

BOLT 6.9—9.8 N·m {71—99 kgf·cm, 62—86 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000047

3. Slide the rear door glass guide in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 4. While rotating the rear door glass guide in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, pull out the rear door glass guide and the glass run channel as a single unit from the rear door.

GLASS RUN CHANNEL

(1)

(2)

End Of Sie REAR DOOR GLASS GUIDE am2zzw0000047

REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id091200000381

1. Fully lower the rear door glass. 2. Remove the rear beltline molding. (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top 210mm {8.27 in} of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) am2ccw0000020

7. Remove the bolts and screw. SCREW

BOLT 6.9—9.8 {71—99, 62—86}

BOLT 6.9—9.8 {71—99, 62—86}

HOLE PLUG N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf} am3zzw0000191

09-12–10

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8. Remove the rear door glass guide and glass run channel as a single unit. 9. Remove the hole cover.

GLASS RUN CHANNEL

GLASS GUIDE

am2ccw0000020

10. Remove the screw. 11. Lift the rear door glass up and remove while tilting it. 12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BOLT 4.5—6.5 N·m {46—66 kgf·cm, 40—57 in·lbf}

End Of Sie

HOLE COVER am2zzw0000501

REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

id091200005681

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear beltline molding. (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the bolts and screw. SCREW

BOLT

BOLT

6.9—9.8 {71—99, 62—86}

6.9—9.8 {71—99, 62—86}

HOLE PLUG N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf} am3zzw0000275

6. Remove the rear door glass guide and glass run channel as a single unit. GLASS RUN CHANNEL

GLASS GUIDE

am2ccw0000020

09-12–11

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 7. Remove the rear door quarter glass. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

QUARTER WINDOW GLASS

am3zzw0000275

REGULATOR HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Using a cloth, remove the regulator handle installation clip and remove the regulator handle.

End Of Sie

id091200009600

REGULATOR HANDLE

CLOTH

CLIP

am2zzw0000426

REGULATOR HANDLE INSTALLATION id091200009700

1. Fully raise the door glass. 2. Install the clip to the regulator handle. 3. Install the regulator handle while tilting it as shown in the figure and press it onto the shaft.

45°

End Of Sie VEHICLE FRONT

CLIP

MANUAL WINDOW REGULATOR SHAFT

am2zzw0000347

FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091200001100

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000440 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front power window motor (See 09-12-17 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–12

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Remove the nuts.

NUT 8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm, 70—95 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000481

5. Insert a hand through the front door speaker installation hole and rotate the drum housing in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to detach the tabs from the front door module panel.

DRUM HOUSING

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

FRONT DOOR OUTER PANEL

TAB

FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000501

6. Remove the front power window regulator from the speaker installation hole. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x When installing, do not allow the cable to come out from the drum housing.

End Of Sie

FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000047

09-12–13

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0912000011z3

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000440 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-8 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Front power window motor (See 09-12-18 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the nuts. 5. Insert a hand through the front door speaker installation hole and rotate the drum housing in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to detach the tabs from the front door module panel. NUT 8—10 N· m {80—110 kgf· cm, 70—95 in· lbf}

am2zzw0000338

DRUM HOUSING

FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL

FRONT DOOR OUTER PANEL

TAB

FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000502

09-12–14

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 6. Remove the front power window regulator from the speaker installation hole. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x When installing, do not allow the cable to come out from the drum housing.

End Of Sie

FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000047

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the nuts.

id091200001200

am2zzw0000440

NUT 8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm, 70—95 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000481

09-12–15

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Insert your hand through the rear door speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the direction shown in the figure and disengage the tabs from the rear door module panel.

DRUM HOUSING

TAB

REAR DOOR MODULE

REAR DOOR OUTER PANEL

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000232

6. Remove the rear power window regulator from the rear speaker installation hole. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x When installing, do not allow the cable to come out from the drum housing.

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000047

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id091200001281

1. Fully lower the rear door glass. 2. Remove the rear beltline molding. (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top 210mm {8.27 in} of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 4. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 7. Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) am2zzw0000496 8. Remove the rear door glass. (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–16

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 9. Remove the nuts. 10. Insert your hand through the rear door speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the direction shown in the figure and disengage the tabs from the rear door module panel.

NUT 8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm, 70—95 in·lbf} am2zzw0000491

DRUM HOUSING

TAB

REAR DOOR MODULE

REAR DOOR OUTER PANEL

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR am2zzw0000232

11. Remove the rear power window regulator from the rear speaker installation hole. 12. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x When installing, do not allow the cable to come out from the drum housing.

REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000047

POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091200001400

Front Power Window Motor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–17

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Disconnect the front power window motor connector, remove the bolt, then remove the front power window motor from the front power window regulator drum in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR CONNECTOR

BOLT Note 6.2—8.2 N·m x When installing the front power window {64—83 kgf·cm, motor to the front power window regulator 55—72 in·lbf} drum, the drum housing hooks may detach from the door module panel. If this happens, am2zzw0000247 remove the front door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the drum housing hooks, and while supporting the drum housing, install the front power window motor to the drum.

Rear Power Window Motor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the rear power window motor connector, remove the bolt, then remove the power window motor from the power window regulator drum. REAR POWER 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. WINDOW MOTOR

REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR CONNECTOR

Note x When installing the rear power window motor to the rear power window regulator drum, the drum housing hooks may detach from the door module panel. If this happens, remove the door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the drum housing hooks, and while supporting the drum housing, install the rear power window motor to the drum.

BOLT 6.2—8.2 N·m {64—83 kgf·cm, 55—72 in·lbf}

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000506

POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0912000014z3

Front Power Window Motor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Disconnect the front power window motor connector, remove the bolt, then remove the front FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR power window motor from the front power window regulator drum in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. FRONT POWER 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. WINDOW MOTOR BOLT CONNECTOR Note 6.2—8.2 N·m x When installing the front power window {64—83 kgf·cm, motor to the front power window regulator 55—72 in·lbf} drum, the drum housing hooks may detach from the door module panel. If this happens, am2zzw0000338 remove the front door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the drum housing hooks, and while supporting the drum housing, install the front power window motor to the drum.

End Of Sie

09-12–18

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION

id091200001700

Driver’s Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the power window motor connector. 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E and F, and then inspect the power window motor operation.

CLOSE

M OPEN

F

E

A

B

D

E

C

A

F

D

B

C am2zzw0000446

x If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it. Operation Open Close

Terminal E Ground B+

F B+ Ground

6. Connect the battery positive voltage to power window motor terminal D and connect terminal C to ground. 7. Operate the power window motor and measure the voltage at terminals A and B. x If there is any malfunction, replace the power window motor. Voltage Pulse: max. 5 V/min. 0 V Passenger’s Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the power window motor connector. 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the power window motor terminals, and CLOSE then inspect the power window motor operation. x If the power window motor does not operate M as indicated in the table, replace it. E Operation Open Close

OPEN

Terminal E Ground B+

F

*

*

*

*

F B+ Ground F

E am2zzw0000447

Rear Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the Rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the power window motor connector.

09-12–19

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the power window motor terminals, and then inspect the power window motor operation. x If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it.

CLOSE

M

Operation

E Ground B+

Open Close

E F

OPEN

Terminal

*

*

*

*

F B+ Ground F

E

End Of Sie am2zzw0000447

POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION [3HB]

id0912000017z3

Driver's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Disconnect the power window motor connector. 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E and F, and then inspect the power window motor operation.

CLOSE

M OPEN

F

E

A

B

D

E

C

A

F

D

B

C am2zzw0000447

x If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it. Operation Open Close

Terminal E Ground B+

F B+ Ground

6. Connect the battery positive voltage to power window motor terminal D and connect terminal C to ground. 7. Operate the power window motor and measure the voltage at terminals A and B. x If there is any malfunction, replace the power window motor. Voltage Pulse: max. 5 V/min. 0 V Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Disconnect the power window motor connector.

09-12–20

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the power window motor terminals, and then inspect the power window motor operation. x If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace it. Operation Open Close

CLOSE

M

E Ground B+

E F

OPEN

Terminal

*

*

*

*

F B+ Ground F

E

End Of Sie am2zzw0000447

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

id091200002000

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the driver's side front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the power window main switch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0912000020z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the driver's side front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the power window main switch. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION

id091200002100

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Verify that the door glass (driver’s side) can be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. x If the door glass (driver’s side) cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, of if the door glass (driver’s side) can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power window main switch. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the switch panel. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 7. Connect the power window main switch connector. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Measure the voltage at each terminal. x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses. 10. If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the power window main switch. POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

1M 1K

1I 1G 1E 1C 1A

2K

1N

1J 1H 1F 1D 1B

2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

1L

2I 2G 2E 2C 2A

am2zzw0000510

09-12–21

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) Ter min al

Signal name

1A

Sensor ground

Power window Under any condition motor (driver’s side)

1B

GND

Body ground

1C

Window close signal

Power window motor (RR)

1D

Pulse 1

Power window Door glass (driver’s side) motor (driver’s side) operating

1E

Window open signal

Power window motor (RR)

1F

Sensor power supply

Power window motor (driver’s side) Switch the ignition to off

1G

Window open signal

Power window motor (LR)

1H

Pulse 2

Power window Door glass (driver’s side) motor (driver’s side) operating

1I

Window close signal

1J

Window close signal

1K

Door open/ close signal

1L

Window open signal

1M IG1 1N

Power supply

Connected to

Measurement condition

Under any condition Door glass (RR) closing Other

Door glass (RR) opening Other Switch the ignition to ON

Door glass (LR) opening Other

Voltage (V)

1.0 or less 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less Alternates between 1.0 or less and 5 B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less Alternates between 1.0 or less and 5 B+ 1.0 or less

Door glass (LR) closing Other Door glass (driver’s side) B+ Power window closing motor (driver’s side) Other 1.0 or less Terminal used for communication therefore BCM determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Door glass (driver’s side) B+ Power window opening motor (driver’s side) Other 1.0 or less Switch the ignition to ON B+ P.WIND 30 A fuse Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less Power window motor (LR)

P.WIND 20 A fuse

Under any condition

2A*1 Window open signal 2B*1

Door glass (passenger’s side) Power window motor (passenger’s opening side) Other

2K*2 Window open signal 2L*2

Door glass (passenger’s side) Power window motor (passenger’s opening side) Other

B+ B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

Inspection item (s) x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (RR) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (RR) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (LR) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (LR) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x BCM x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x P.WIND 30 A fuse x Related wiring harness x P.WIND 20 A fuse x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (passenger’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (passenger’s side) x Related wiring harness

*1 : L.H.D. *2 : R.H.D.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION [3HB]

id0912000021z3

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Verify that the door glass (driver’s side) can be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. x If the door glass (driver’s side) cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, of if the door glass (driver’s side) can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power window main switch. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 6. Remove the switch panel. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 7. Connect the power window main switch connector.

09-12–22

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Measure the voltage at each terminal. x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses. 10. If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the power window main switch. POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

1M 1K

1I 1G 1E 1C 1A

2K

1N

1J 1H 1F 1D 1B

2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

1L

2I 2G 2E 2C 2A

am2zzw0000510

Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) Ter min al

Signal name

1A

Sensor ground

Power window Under any condition motor (driver’s side)

1B

GND

Body ground

1D

Pulse 1

Power window Door glass (driver’s side) motor (driver’s side) operating

1F

Sensor power supply

Switch the ignition to ON Power window motor (driver’s side) Switch the ignition to off

1H

Pulse 2

Power window Door glass (driver’s side) motor (driver’s side) operating

1J

Window close signal

1K

Door open/ close signal

1L

Window open signal

1M IG1 1N

Power supply

Connected to

Measurement condition

Under any condition

Voltage (V)

1.0 or less 1.0 or less Alternates between 1.0 or less and 5 B+ 1.0 or less Alternates between 1.0 or less and 5

Door glass (driver’s side) B+ Power window closing motor (driver’s side) Other 1.0 or less Terminal used for communication therefore BCM determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Door glass (driver’s side) B+ Power window opening motor (driver’s side) Other 1.0 or less Switch the ignition to ON B+ P.WIND 30 A fuse Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less P.WIND 20 A fuse

Under any condition

2A*1 Window open signal 2B*1

Door glass (passenger’s side) Power window motor (passenger’s opening side) Other

2K*2 Window open signal 2L*2

Door glass (passenger’s side) Power window motor (passenger’s opening side) Other

B+ B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

Inspection item (s) x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x BCM x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (driver’s side) x Related wiring harness x P.WIND 30 A fuse x Related wiring harness x P.WIND 20 A fuse x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (passenger’s side) x Related wiring harness x Power window motor (passenger’s side) x Related wiring harness

*1 : L.H.D. *2 : R.H.D.

End Of Sie

09-12–23

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091200002200

Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door garnish. (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id091200002281

Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0912000022z3

Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION id091200002300

Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester. A E D x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power window subswitch. F CLOSE

E

D

C

*

A

OPEN

C

F

am2zzw0000247

09-12–24

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS : Continuity Terminal

Switch Position

A

C

D

E

F

CLOSE OFF OPEN

am2zzw0000213

Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door garnish. (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 6. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester. A E D x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power window subswitch. F CLOSE

E

D

C

*

A

OPEN

C

F

am2zzw0000247

End Of Sie : Continuity Terminal

Switch Position

A

C

D

E

F

CLOSE OFF OPEN

am2zzw0000213

POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [4SD] id091200002381

Passenger's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester. A E D x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power window subswitch. F CLOSE

E

D

C

*

A

OPEN

C

F

am2zzw0000247

09-12–25

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS : Continuity Terminal

Switch Position

A

C

D

E

F

CLOSE OFF OPEN

am2zzw0000213

Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail garnish. (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester. A E D x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power window subswitch. F CLOSE

E

D

C

*

A

OPEN

C

F

am2zzw0000247

End Of Sie : Continuity Terminal

Switch Position

A

C

D

E

F

CLOSE OFF OPEN

am2zzw0000213

POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION [3HB]

id0912000023z3

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester. A E D x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power window subswitch. F CLOSE

E

D

C

*

A

OPEN

C

F

am2zzw0000247

09-12–26

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS End Of Sie : Continuity Switch Position

Terminal

A

C

D

E

F

CLOSE OFF OPEN

am2zzw0000213

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

id091200004100

Note x If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down and two-step down operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary. — Negative battery cable is disconnected. — Power window main switch connector is disconnected. — Power window system power supply fuse is removed. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press the driver's seat switch to fully open the door glass. 3. Pull up the driver's seat switch to the manual-up position to fully close the door glass and keep holding the switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.

End Of Sie TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE id091200004200

Note x By following the procedure below, the two-step down function is switched to non-operative when it is operative, and to operative when it is non-operative.

Start

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. Perform within 5 s.

2. Perform auto open two times. 3. Perform auto close two times.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF position. Start the following procedure within 43 s. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. Perform within 5 s.

2. Perform auto open two times. 3. Perform auto close two times.

Switching completed. acxuuw00001670

09-12–27

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS End Of Sie DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE id091200004400

Note x After performing the following procedure, verify that the two-step down function operates normally and the door glass position has changed. If the two-step down function does not operate or the door glass position has not changed, the procedure was not performed properly. Repeat the procedure from the beginning.

Start

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. Perform within 5 s.

2. Perform auto close once. 3. Perform auto open two times. 4. Perform auto close three times. Note The door glass is fully closed when the above procedure is completed.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF position. Start the following procedure within 43 s. Note The two-step down function will not operate during the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. 2. Adjust the door glass position from the fully closed position by moving the power window main switch up or down. (Approximately 20 —100 mm {0.79 —3.40 in}) Note The door glass position from the fully closed position is the change in distance. The change in distance is approx. 20 mm {0.79 in} when the door glass is opened less than 20 mm {0.79 in}, and approximately 100 mm {3.40 in} when the door glass is opened more than 100 mm {3.40 in}. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position. Start the following procedure within 43 s. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. Perform within 5 s.

2. Perform auto close once. 3. Perform auto open two times. 4. Perform auto close three times.

Door glass position change completed. acxuuw00001671

End Of Sie

09-12–28

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS WINDSHIELD REMOVAL

id091200000500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (2) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Cowl panel (See 09-10-23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rain sensor (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear view mirror (See 09-12-54 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.) (6) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Interior light (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Set the headliner out of the way. 4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body. BODY SIDE PROTECTIVE TAPE

Note x Overlap and adhere the protective tape to the corners to prevent damage. 5. Remove the windshield molding by pulling it outward. Note x If the windshield molding is difficult to remove, warm the windshield molding using a hot air blower. x The windshield molding is a replacement part.

A

A

SEC. A—A GLASS SIDE am2zzw0000208

Not Reusing Windshield Note x If it is difficult to cut sealant, use piano wire and follow the procedure under “Reusing Windshield”. Warning x Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano wire. 1. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a sealant remover. 2. Remove the windshield.

SEALANT REMOVER

49 G050 1A0

acxuuw00001522

Reusing Windshield Warning x Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano wire. Caution x Because the lens for rainfall/illumination level detection is integrated with the windshield, the auto

09-12–29

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS wiper/auto light systems may not operate correctly if the lens is damaged. When removing the windshield, be careful not to damage the lens. If the lens is damaged, replace the windshield. Note x Before removing the windshield from the body, mark the position of the windshield by affixing tape to the windshield and body panel. 1. Avoiding the pin on the inside of the vehicle, insert piano wire which has been cut to sufficient length. 2. Wind each end of piano wire around a bar.

B PIN

A

PIN

B

Note x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of piano wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.

A

PROTECTIVE TAPE PIANO WIRE

SEALANT

PIN

SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B am2zzw0000233

3. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the windshield. 4. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and detach it. 5. Remove the windshield. 6. If the pin is damaged, remove the pin. Note x Before removing the pin from the windshield glass, place an alignment mark on the windshield.

PIANO WIRE am2zzw0000209

End Of Sie WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION id091200000700

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife. Caution x If a door is opened or closed when all the window glass is closed, the resulting change in air pressure could cause the sealant to crack preventing the proper installation of the windshield. Keep the door glass opened until the windshield installation is completed. x If the rain sensor is replaced with a new one, the reflection rate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the first time is memorized as a condition that no rainfall is on the windshield. Therefore, remove water and dirt from the windshield before turning the ignition switch to the ON position. Perform the rain sensor initial setting in the following cases: (See 09-19-31 RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING.) — The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused. — The auto wiper system does not operate correctly after the windshield is installed. 1. Remove the sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife. (When reusing the glass)

09-12–30

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the windshield. 3. Inspect the glass for cracks. If it is cracked, chamfer it using sandpaper. 4. Align the alignment marks made before removal HOLLOWED MARK IN THE A and install the pin to the windshield referring to CERAMIC COATING the figure. (Reusing glass, pin removed) A

PIN

PIN SEC. A—A am2zzw0000209

5. Install the windshield molding. 6. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.

FRONT WIND MOLDING

Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

A

A SEC. A—A

Note x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating.

am2zzw0000209

A

A B

B

9.5 {0.37}

9.5 {0.37}

SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B

9.5 {0.37}

HOLLOWED MAKE IN THE CERAMIC COATING

PRIMER C C

HOLLOWED MAKE IN THE CERAMIC COATING

SEC. C—C mm {in} am2zzw0000247

7. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the frame. 8. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it approx. 30 min to dry. Then apply 2 mm {0.08 in} thickness of new sealant. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

avejjw00001067

9. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the bonding area on the body. 10. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

09-12–31

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Note x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating.

A

OVER END OF RADIUS

OVER END OF RADIUS

A *2

*2 B

4.4*2 {0.17}

B

10*1 {0.39}

PRIMER SEC. A—A

10.0*1 {0.39}

OVER END OF RADIUS

4.9*2 {0.19} 5*2 {0.2}

3.0*2 {0.12} 10.0*1 {0.39}

SEC. B—B

SEC. C—C

C C

*1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA *2:POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA

mm {in} am2zzw0000247

11. Apply sealant to the area of the glass surface as shown in the figure. 12. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install the windshield.

11 {0.43}

APPLY SEALANT TO THIS AREA.

5 {0.2}

mm {in}

am2zzw0000247

13. Verify that the clearance between the A-pillar and 0.24—0.063 6.7—0.11 the roof is within the range shown in the figure, B {0.24—0.063} {0.27—0.43} and press along the perimeter of the glass. B 14. Install the headliner. A A 15. Install the following parts: (1) Interior light (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) SEC. B—B SEC. A—A (2) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR mm {in} REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM am2zzw0000347 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rearview mirror (See 09-12-57 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.) (6) Rain sensor (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Cowl panel (See 09-10-23 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 16. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h

End Of Sie REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL id091200000600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Liftgate lower trim (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-17 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.) (4) High-mount brake light (See 09-18-28 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–32

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 3. Disconnect the filament connector. FILAMENT CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000439

4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body. BODY SIDE

Note x Overlap and adhere the protective tape to the corners to prevent damage.

PROTECTIVE TAPE

A

A

GLASS SIDE

SEC. A—A am2zzw0000210

5. Avoiding the pin on the inside of the vehicle, insert piano wire which has been cut to sufficient length. PIANO WIRE

Warning x Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano wire. Note x Before removing the rear window glass from the body, mark the position of the glass by affixing tape to the glass and body panel.

REAR WINDOW GLASS

PROTECTIVE TAPE

SEALANT am2zzw0000439

6. Wind each end of piano wire around a bar. Note x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of piano wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating. 7. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the rear window glass.

PIANO WIRE am2zzw0000210

09-12–33

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and detach it. 9. Remove the rear window glass.

End Of Sie

REAR WINDOW GLASS

PIN

PIN

am2zzw0000439

REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [4SD]

id091200000681

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear package trim (See 09-17-68 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Disconnect the filament connector. 4. Set the headliner out of the way. 5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body. 6. Cut the rear window glass molding lip using a razor. A

B

A

B SEC. B—B C

SEC. E—E

C

D E E

D SEC. C—C

SEC. A—A

SEC. D—D am2ccw0000021

Warning x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. Note x The rear window glass molding is a replacement part.

09-12–34

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Not Reusing Rear Window Glass Note x For the areas of the sealant that are difficult to cut, use the piano wire and follow the procedure under “Reusing Rear Window Glass”. 1. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a sealant remover. 2. Remove the sealant by pulling it off. 3. Remove the rear window glass.

SEALANT REMOVER

49 G050 1A0 am3zzw0000282

Reusing Rear Window Glass Note x Before removing the rear window glass from the body, mark the position of the glass by affixing tape to the glass and body panel. 1. Make a hole through the sealant from the inside of the vehicle using an awl, avoiding the pins.

PIN

am2ccw0000021

2. Pass the piano wire, cut to sufficient length, through the hole. PIANO WIRE

Warning x Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using the piano wire.

PROTECTIVE TAPE

3. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar. SEALANT

Note x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.

am2ccw0000027

09-12–35

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the rear window glass. Note x As the upper part of the pin adheres to the sealant, cut it using the piano wire.

PIANO WIRE am2ccw0000027

5. Cut the pins out. 6. Remove the rear window glass. 7. Mark the seating positions of the pins and remove the pins from the rear window glass. 8. Remove the rear window glass molding from the rear window glass.

CUTTING LINE

End Of Sie

PIN R am3zzw0000283

REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION

id091200000800

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife. Caution x Proper installation of the glass may be difficult if sealant is cracked or the glass is pushed out by air pressure when a door is opened/closed with all the window glass closed. Keep the door glass open until the rear window glass installation is completed. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife or scraper. (When reusing the glass) Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the glass. Inspect the glass for cracks. If it is cracked, chamfer it using sandpaper. Install the spacers, fasteners, and pins to the glass as shown in the figure. When reusing the glass, align it with the SPACER FASTENER SPACER FASTENER SPACER alignment mark placed before the glass was removed. PIN

PIN

SPACER

SPACER SPACER

SPACER REMOVE MARK

FASTENER REMOVE MARK

PIN REMOVE MARK am2zzw0000211

09-12–36

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Install the fastener to the bead on the body side. 6. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the figure then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. FASTENER

Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

BEAD

Note x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating.

am2zzw0000211

9.5 *1 {0.37}

PRIMER A A B

9.5 *1 {0.37}

32.8 {1.29}

14.1 {0.555}

B SEC. A—A

HOLLOWED MARK IN THE CERAMIC COATING MAKE SURE TO APPLY PRIMER OVER ALL MARKS.

SEC. B—B 9.5 *1 {0.37} 17.0 {0.669}

C

C

SEC. C—C HOLLOWED MARK IN THE CERAMIC COATING MAKE SURE mm {in} TO APPLY PRIMER OVER ALL *1:PRIMER MARKS. APPLICATION AREA am2zzw0000247

7. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the frame. 8. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the bonding area on the body. 9. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer, and allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

am2zzw0000424

10. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand. Note x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating.

09-12–37

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS A 17.0 {0.67}

B B

A

*2

14.1 {0.555}

*2 11*1 {0.43}

*2

OVER EBD OF RADIUS

*2

13*1 {0.516}

OVER EBD OF RADIUS SEC. A—A PRIMER

SEC. C—C

32.8 {1.29}

*1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA

C

C

OVER EBD OF RADIUS

*2

*2:POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA

11*1 {0.43}

mm {in}

SEC. B—B

am2zzw0000247

11. Apply sealant to the area of the glass surface as shown in the figure. 12. Install the rear window glass. 13. Verify that the gap at the upper and lower parts of the glass is within the specification shown in the figure, then press along the perimeter of the glass.

11 {0.43} 5 {0.2}

APPLY SEALANT TO THIS AREA

mm {in}

am2zzw0000248

A

A

2.4—5.6 {0.10—0.22}

SPORT 1.6—5.6 {0.07—0.22}

SEC. A—A

3.8—7.0 {0.15—0.27}

SEC.B—B

B

B

mm {in} am2zzw0000248

14. Connect the filament connector. 15. Install the following parts: (1) High-mount brake light (See 09-18-28 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-19 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.) (3) Liftgate lower trim (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 16. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h

End Of Sie

09-12–38

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [4SD]

id091200000881

Caution x Proper installation of the rear window glass may be difficult if sealant is cracked or the glass is pushed out by air pressure when a door is opened/closed with all the window glass closed. Leave all the windows open until the rear window glass is installed completely. 1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that a 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the frame. Warning x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. 2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Then apply a 2 mm {0.08 in} thickness of sealant. 3. Clean and degrease the perimeter approx. 50 mm {1.97 in} from the glass end and the bonding area on the body. 4. If installing a reused rear window glass, install the rear window glass molding according to the following procedure. (1) Clean and degrease the rear window glass molding installation area of the rear window glass. (2) Apply the glass primer to the rear window glass molding installation area of the rear window glass. 5. Apply glass primer on the rear window glass, and body primer on the rear window glass molding as shown in the figure. Allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise, the primer may not properly bond to the surface of the glass and body, which may cause leakage.

am3zzw0000283

REAR WINDOW GLASS MOLDING

A

A

SEC. A—A

am2ccw0000020

09-12–39

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 9.5 {0.37} 5 {0.2}*

11 {0.43}

5 {0.2}*

SEC. A—A

A A

9.5 {0.37}

A

5 {0.2}*

A

B

B

B

B

5 {0.2}* 11 {0.43}

SEC.B—B C C C C

BODY SIDE

REAR WINDOW GLASS SIDE

7.46 {0.29}* 9.5 {0.37}

11 {0.43}

SEC. C—C *: POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA mm {in} am2ccw0000020

6. Apply sealant to the glass surface as shown in the figure. 7. Insert the positioning pins into the body, then install the rear window.

11 {0.43}

APPLY SEALANT TO THIS AREA.

5 {0.2}

mm {in}

am2zzw0000247

8. Press the rear window pins to engage the tabs to the body.

PIN

am2ccw0000020

09-12–40

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 9. Press completely along the perimeter of the glass so that the measurement of the molding lip gap is within the specification. 10. Connect the filament connector. 1.65—5.65 {0.065—0.222} 11. Install the following parts: (1) Rear package trim (See 09-17-68 REAR A A PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (2) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM SEC. A—A REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) am2ccw0000020 (4) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 12. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h 13. Apply soapy water to the rear window glass molding side and blow air from the interior, then verify that there are no bubbles or air leakage. x If there are any bubbles or air leakage, repair the damaged part of the sealant and verify it again.

End Of Sie QUARTER WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL [3HB]

id0912000025z3

Warning x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. x Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using the piano wire. 1. Remove the following parts: (1) Partially peel back the seaming welt. (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Lower anchor installation bolts on the rear seat belt. (See 08-11-7 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (7) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (8) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 2. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body and the quarter window glass. PROTECTIVE TAPE BODY SIDE A A GLASS SIDE SEC. A—A am2zzw0000338

09-12–41

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 3. Cut out the sealant all around the glass from inside the vehicle using a sealant remover and the piano wire.

PIN

SPACER B B

A

A

C

C

SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B

SEC. C—C

SEC. D—D

D D FASTENER

SPACER

PIN

PRIMER

am2zzw0000338

4. Pull the quarter window glass outward and detach the pins from the body. Note x The pin is a replacement part.

End Of Sie QUARTER WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION [3HB] id0912000026z3

Warning x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. Caution x If a door is opened or closed when all the window glass is closed, the resulting change in air pressure could cause the sealant to crack preventing the proper installation of the glass. Keep the door glass open until the quarter window glass installation is completed. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a razor or scraper. (when reusing the glass) Clean and degrease the ceramic part along the perimeter of the glass. Inspect the glass for cracks. If it is cracked, chamfer it using sandpaper. If the glass is reused, attach the pins, spacers and garnish to the glass as shown in the figure. Align with the alignment marks marked before removing the glass. PIN

A

SPACER

A

PIN

FASTENER

SPACER

GARNISH 0.5 {0.02} SEC. A—A mm {in} am2zzw0000347

5. Apply glass primer along the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating on the new glass, along the sealant tracks on the reused glass, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

09-12–42

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Note x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating. 9.5 {0.37}

9.5 {0.37}

B

A

B A

C

C

SEC. B—B

SEC. A—A 9.5 {0.37}

D D

9.5 {0.37}

SEC. C—C

SEC. D—D mm {in} am2zzw0000347

6. Cut away the old sealant using a razor or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the frame. 7. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it approx. 30 min to dry. Then apply 2 mm thickness of new sealant. 8. Clean and degrease the bonding surface along the perimeter of the body. 9. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min. Caution x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.

13.5 {0.53} 13.5 {0.53}

B A

A

B C

C

SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B

D D

13.5 {0.53}

PRIMER SEC. C—C

13.5 {0.53} SEC. D—D

*: POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA

mm {in} am2zzw0000347

09-12–43

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 10. After the primer has dried, apply 13.5 mm {0.53 in} in thickness, 5 mm {0.2 in} in width of sealant using a sealant gun. Where it is not applied properly, correctly apply it using a spatula. 4.75 {0.187}

13.6 {0.54}

9.5 {0.37} 9.5 {0.37}

B

A

B A

C

C

SEC. B—B

SEC. A—A 9.5 {0.37}

D

9.5 {0.37}

D

90°

14.2 {0.56}

90° 11 {0.43}

5 {0.2}

SEC. C—C

SEC. D—D mm {in} am2zzw0000347

11. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install the quarter window glass. 12. Install the following parts: (1) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (4) Lower anchor installation bolts on the rear seat belt. (See 08-11-7 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Partially peel back the seaming welt. 13. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h

End Of Sie POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091200002400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the power outer mirror connector.

POWER OUTER MIRROR

POWER OUTER MIRROR CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000498

09-12–44

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the power outer mirror by pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to release the tab. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

TAB

POWER OUTER MIRROR

BOLT 3.5—5.0 N·m {36—50 kgf·cm, 31—44 in·lbf} am2zzw0000498

POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION

id091200002700

Mirror glass adjustment, retract/return 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Apply battery positive voltage to the power outer mirror terminals and inspect the operation of the power outer mirror. G

I

H

D

LEFT

M

RETURN

RETRACT

A C

RIGHT

D G E H F I

M

ADJUSTMENT MOTOR

RETRACTABLE MIRROR MOTOR

UP

M DOWN ADJUSTMENT MOTOR

F am2zzw0000502

x If not as specified, replace the power outer mirror. Mirror operation direction Up Down Left Right Retract Return

terminal B+ G H I H F D

Ground H G H I D F

Heated outer mirror 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-12–45

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Apply battery voltage to power outer mirror connector terminal A, and connect terminal C to ground.

A

A C

D E F

G H I

C

acxwzw0000082

x If not as indicated in the table, or if the resistance is not within the specification, replace the power outer mirror. : Resistance

End Of Sie Terminal

Mirror operation

A

C

Heater Resistance : 9—15 ohm

acxwzw0000082

OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL

id091200002800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Press area A of the outer mirror glass so that area B moves outward. OUTER MIRROR GLASS A

B

am2zzw0000255

3. Detach pin A while lifting up the inside of the mirror glass holder. 4. Pull the outer mirror glass and remove pins B. 5. Disconnect the connector. (Vehicles with heated outer mirror) 6. Remove the outer mirror glass.

End Of Sie

PIN B

PIN A

OUTER MIRROR GLASS

PIN B

CONNECTOR

A B B

MIRROR GLASS HOLDER am2zzw0000255

OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION id091200002900

1. Connect the connector to the outer mirror glass. (Vehicles with heated outer mirror)

09-12–46

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 2. Press part A on the outer mirror glass and install pin A. 3. Press part B on the outer mirror glass and install pins B.

PIN B

PIN A

OUTER MIRROR GLASS

End Of Sie PIN B

CONNECTOR

A B MIRROR GLASS HOLDER

B

am2zzw0000256

OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL

id091200003100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the outer mirror glass from the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) 3. Pinch the end of the tab which is visible, and release the tab by pressing it toward the vehicle front (4 locations).

MIRROR BODY TAB

MIRROR BODY

OUTER MIRROR GARNISH TAB

am2zzw0000498

4. Grasp the upper side of the outer mirror garnish and remove it by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.

End Of Sie

09-12–47

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS OUTER MIRROR GARNISH INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer mirror garnish against the mirror body in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and insert the outer mirror garnish tabs (5 locations) into the mirror body. 2. Install the outer mirror garnish so that there are no gaps around the component. 3. Install the outer mirror glass. (See 09-12-46 OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.)

id091200003200

MIRROR BODY

TAB

End Of Sie OUTER MIRROR GARNISH am2zzw0000256

POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091200003500

Note x The power outer mirror switch is integrated with the power window main switch. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (driver-side) (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the power outer mirror switch. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0912000035z3

Note x The power outer mirror switch is integrated with the power window main switch. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (driver-side) (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the power outer mirror switch. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION id091200003400

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and verify that the power outer mirror switch can be operated for approx. 43 s. x If the power outer mirror switch cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, or if the switch can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power outer mirror switch. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the switch panel. (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) 7. Using a tester, verify that the continuity between the power outer mirror switch terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror switch.

09-12–48

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS R.H.D. +B

ACC

* 1N

1N

2F

* *

* *

* *

* *

2D

2C

LH

* *

2B

2A

RH

2I 2G 2E 2C 2A

* *

* *

*

2H 2F 2D 2B

2H

LH

2G

RH RETRACT

RETURN

P/W CM

UP

DOWN

LEFT

2I

RETURN

RETRACT

RIGHT

IG-OFF TIMER RILEY

2E am2zzw0000502

End Of Sie

:Continuity OPERATION

2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 2G 2H 2I

UP DOWN LH LEFT RIGHT UP DOWN RH LEFT RIGHT

RETRACT SWITCH

RETRACT RETURN am2zzw0000383

POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION [3HB] id0912000034z3

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and verify that the power outer mirror switch can be operated for approx. 43 s.

09-12–50

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS x If the power outer mirror switch cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, or if the switch can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power outer mirror switch. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 6. Remove the switch panel. (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) 7. Using a tester, verify that the continuity between the power outer mirror switch terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror switch. R.H.D. +B

ACC

* 1N

1N

2F

* *

* *

* *

* *

2D

2C

LH

* *

2B

2A

RH

2I 2G 2E 2C 2A

* *

* *

LH

*

2H 2F 2D 2B

2H

UP

DOWN

LEFT

2I

RH RETURN

P/W CM

2G

RETRACT

RETURN

RETRACT

RIGHT

IG-OFF TIMER RILEY

2E am2zzw0000502

09-12–51

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS End Of Sie

:Continuity OPERATION

2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 2G 2H 2I

UP DOWN LH LEFT RIGHT UP DOWN RH LEFT RIGHT

RETRACT SWITCH

RETRACT RETURN am2zzw0000383

FILAMENT INSPECTION

id091200003600

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Turn the rear window defroster switch on. Caution x Directly touching the rear window defroster filament with the lead of the tester could damage it. Wrap aluminum foil around the end of the lead and inspect the filament by touching it with the foil.

LEAD OF VOLTMETER PUSH

FILAMENT ALUMINUM FOIL

3. Connect the positive lead of the tester to the positive side of each filament and the negative lead to ground. 4. Gradually slide the positive lead from the positive side to the negative side and verify that the voltage decreases accordingly. x If the voltage changes rapidly, the filament has a malfunction. Repair the filament. Measured part (1) to (2)

Voltage (Reference) Approx. 11 V to 0 V

acxuuw00001514

(2) NEGATIVE SIDE

(1) POSITIVE SIDE

End Of Sie acxuuw00001515

FILAMENT REPAIR

id091200003700

1. Clean the filaments using isopropyl alcohol.

09-12–53

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 2. Affix tape along both sides of the filament to be repaired. 3. Apply commercially available silver paint using a fine-tipped tool such as a small brush or a drawing pen. 4. After 2—3 min, peel off the tape being careful not to damage the painted area.

BROKEN FILAMENT

Caution x Do not operate the rear window defroster until the repaired area is completely dried to prevent a malfunction.

TAPE

SECTION TO BE REPAILRED

am2zzw0000502

5. Completely dry the repaired area referring the followings: x If the room temperature is 25 qC {77 qF}, leave it for 24 h. x When using a hot air blower, dry for 30 min at 150 qC {302 qF}.

End Of Sie REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL

id091200004900

Vehicles With Rain Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rain sensor from the windshield. (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Detach the hook in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver. 4. Remove the rain sensor in the direction of arrows (2) shown in the figure.

(1) HOOK

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

HOOK

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

CONNECTOR FRONT (2)

RAIN SENSOR am2zzw0000363

09-12–54

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Make a tool as shown in the figure using wire. APPROX. 2.6 mm {0.10 in}

Caution x Using the tool with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using the tool. x To prevent damage to the lens, do not use a flathead screwdriver.

APPROX. 30 mm {1.2 in}

6. Insert the tool to the position shown in the figure and press the center part of the spring in the direction of arrows (1), and then pull out the rearview mirror toward in the direction of arrows (2) shown in the figure.

MORE THAN 50 mm {2.0 in} am2zzw0000449

BASE

SPRING TOOL

SPRING

TOOL (1)

(2)

REAR VIEW

TOOL am2zzw0000502

09-12–55

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Caution x Perform the procedure while being careful not to damage the lens. x When removing the rearview mirror, it may hit the headliner and cause a damage. Hold the rearview mirror with hands and be careful not to contact it with the headliner. Vehicles Without Rain Sensor 1. Insert a flathead screwdriver between the rearview mirror and base. 2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver to the position shown in the figure and press the center part of the spring. BASE

SPRING FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

SPRING

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

BASE

REARVIEW MIRROR am2zzw0000441

3. Pull out the rearview mirror toward the vehicle rear.

End Of Sie

09-12–56

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION Vehicles With Rain Sensor 1. Install the rearview mirror to the base. 2. Install the rain sensor. (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

id091200005000

REARVIEW MIRROR

BASE

am2zzw0000235

Vehicles Without Rain Sensor 1. Install the rearview mirror to the base.

End Of Sie

REARVIEW MIRROR

BASE

am2zzw0000235

BASE REMOVAL

id091200005300

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rain sensor. (Vehicles with rain sensor.) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rearview mirror. (See 09-12-54 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL) 4. Wind each end of a wire around a bar. Warning x Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using the piano wire.

PIANO WIRE

Note x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano wire to prevent it from breaking. 5. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant to remove the base.

acxuuw00001981

End Of Sie BASE INSTALLATION id091200005400

1. Cut away all of the original sealant using a razor. Warning x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor. 2. Clean and degrease the ceramic coating on the glass and the base. Caution x Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise, the primer may not properly bond to the surface of the glass. 3. Apply primer to the bonding area of the glass and the base.

09-12–57

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the base. Allow the primer to dry for approx. 30 min. 5. Apply 3.0 mm {0.12 in} layer of sealant to the BASE base. NOZZLE

3.0 mm {0.12 in}

SEALANT

acxuuw00001982

6. Center the base in the ceramic coating and press it onto the glass. 7. Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any excess repair sealant. Hardening time of sealant Temperature

Surface hardening time

5 qC {41 qF} 20 qC {68 qF} 35 qC {95 qF}

Approx. 1.5 h Approx. 1 h Approx. 10 min

5 mm {0.2 in}

CERAMIC COATING BASE

Time required until car can be put into service Approx. 12 h Approx. 4 h Approx. 2 h acxuuw00001983

8. Install the rearview mirror.

End Of Sie

09-12–58

SEATS

09-13

SEATS

SEAT LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–2 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–3 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–4 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–5 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–6 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–8 FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–9 Band Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–10 FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS] . . . . . . . . . 09-13–10 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–11 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–13 Band Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–16 Holder Bracket Installation Note. . . . . . 09-13–16 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS] . . . . . . . . . 09-13–19 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–20

FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–22 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–24 FRONT SEAT RAIL COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–26 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–27 REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–28 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–31 REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–31 REAR SEAT BACK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–31 SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–32 SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–32 SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION . . . . 09-13–33

End of Toc SOKYU_WM: SEATS

09-13–1

SEATS SEAT LOCATION INDEX R.H.D.

id091300424300

1

12

3

2

11

10

9

8

7 6

5

4 am2zzw0000511

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Seat warmer switch (See 09-13-32 SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-13-32 SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Front seat (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) Rear seat back striker (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT BACK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front seat back trim (See 09-13-11 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS].) (See 09-13-19 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS].) Front seat cushion trim (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front seat rail cover (See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT RAIL COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-13–2

7

8

9

10

11

12

Front seat side cover (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front seat back component (See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS].) (See 09-13-10 FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS].) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear seat cushion trim (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear seat back frame (See 09-13-28 REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

SEATS FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles]

id0913004244z3

Warning x Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. Note x When removing the front seat out of the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the headrest. R.H.D. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. (Vehicles with side air bags) 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable.(Vehicles without side air bags) 4. Using a fastener remover, widen the front cover in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to release the tabs, then raise the cover in the direction of arrow (2).

(1)

(2) COVER

(1)

(1) TAB

(1)

TAB

am2zzw0000243

5. Remove the front cover in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.

(3) adejjw00003315

09-13–4

SEATS 6. Using a fastener remover, widen the rear inner cover in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure to release the tabs, then pull the cover in the direction of arrow (5). 7. Remove the rear inner cover in the direction of arrow (6) shown in the figure.

(6) (6) (4) TAB (4)

(5)

(4)

(4) TAB

TAB am2zzw0000243

8. Using a fastener remover, widen the rear outer cover in the direction of arrow (7) shown in the figure to release the tab, then remove the cover by pulling it in the direction of arrow (8).

(7)

(8) (7) HOOK

TAB

(8) am2zzw0000243

9. Disconnect the connector. 10. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat. 11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BOLT

End Of Sie CONNECTOR

BOLT

BOLT BOLT BOLT :41—55 N·m {4.2—5.6 kgf·m,31—40 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000444

FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] id0913004244z4

Warning x Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. Note x When removing the front seat out of the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by removing the headrest.

09-13–6

SEATS R.H.D. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. (Vehicles with side air bags) 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable.(Vehicles without side air bags) 4. Using a fastener remover, widen the front cover in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to release the tabs, then raise the cover in the direction of arrow (2).

(1) (1)

(2) COVER

(1) TAB

(1)

TAB

am2zzw0000243

5. Remove the front cover in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.

(3) adejjw00003315

6. Using a fastener remover, widen the rear inner cover in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure to release the tabs, then pull the cover in the direction of arrow (5). 7. Remove the rear inner cover in the direction of arrow (6) shown in the figure.

(6) (6) (4) TAB (4)

(5)

(4)

(4) TAB

TAB am2zzw0000243

09-13–8

SEATS 8. Using a fastener remover, widen the rear outer cover in the direction of arrow (7) shown in the figure to release the tab, then remove the cover by pulling it in the direction of arrow (8).

(7)

(8) (7) TAB

HOOK

(8) am2zzw0000243

9. Disconnect the connector. 10. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat. 11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BOLT

End Of Sie CONNECTOR

BOLT

BOLT BOLT BOLT :37—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·m,28—39 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000444

FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS]

id091300428837

Warning x Handling a front seat improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. 3. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 4. Remove the headrest. 5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-13–9

SEATS 6. Detach clip A shown in the figure. 7. Cut clip B shown in the figure. CLIP A

CLIP B

R am2zzw0000244

8. Cut the band securing the side air bag wiring harness. (See 09-13-10 Band Installation Note.)

AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS

BAND am2zzw0000244

9. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat back component. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BILT : 36.3—54.0 N·m am2zzw0000244

Band Installation Note 1. Install the band with the end pointed to the front. 2. Cut off the end of the band at the position shown in the figure.

End Of Sie

CUT 5 mm {0.2 in} OR MORE

BAND

am2zzw0000244

FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS] id091300428838

Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-13–10

SEATS 2. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 3. Remove the headrest. 4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat back component. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

BOLT BOLT : 37—54 N·m BOLT

{3.8—5.5 kgf·m, 28—39 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000515

FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITH SIDE AIR BAGS]

id091300487737

Warning x Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. R.H.D. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. 3. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 4. Remove the headrest.

09-13–11

SEATS 5. Detach clip A shown in the figure. 6. Cut clip B shown in the figure. CLIP A

CLIP B

R adejjw00001860

7. Cut the band securing the side air bag wiring harness. (See 09-13-16 Band Installation Note.)

SIDE AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS

BAND R am2zzw0000375

8. Slide hook A in the order shown in the figure to detach it from hook B.

HOOK B HOOK A (1)

(2)

(3) am2zzw0000207

9. Open the fastener. 10. Pull out the side air bag wiring harness from the hole of the seat back trim and seat back pad by pulling it in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure. 11. Partially peal back the front seat back trim, release the pole guide tabs in the direction of arrow (5) shown in the figure, then pull the pole guide out in the direction of arrow (6). 12. Remove the nut.

POLE GUIDE (6) FASTENER (5)

NUT

(5)

8—12 N·m {82—122 kgf·cm, 71—106 in·lbf}

TAB

(4)

SIDE AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS HOLE am2zzw0000375

09-13–14

SEATS 13. Press in the holder bracket to the seat back pad being careful not to catch the frame spring. (See 09-13-16 Holder Bracket Installation Note.) HOLDER BRACKET

FRAME SPRING

am2zzw0000207

14. Pull out part A shown in the figure to the front.

A

A

adejjw00001864

15. Remove the seat back trim and the seat back pad as a single unit from the seat frame by pulling them in the direction of the arrow.

SEAT BACK PAD

SEAT BACK TRIM SEAT FRAM

am2zzw0000207

16. Partially peal back the seat back trim from the seat back pad, remove rings C in the order of (7), (8), (9) shown in the figure, then remove the seat back trim. 17. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(8)

(7)

(9)

SEAT BACK PAD RINGS C

SEAT BACK TRIM am2zzw0000207

09-13–15

SEATS Band Installation Note R.H.D. 1. Install the band with the end pointed to the front. 2. Cut the band end so that the length of the band end is 5 mm or less from the securing point.

CUT

5 mm {0.2 in} OR MORE

BAND

adejjw00003319

Holder Bracket Installation Note R.H.D. 1. Pass holder bracket A through slit A of the seat back pad. Caution x Set the holder bracket A with the sleeve not caught in the seat frame spring.

FRONT

SLIT A

SEAT BACK TRIM

SEAT BACK PAD

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE

HOLDER BRACKET A

am2zzw0000245

HOLDER BRACKET A

GOOD

HOLDER BRACKET A

NO GOOD am2zzw0000498

09-13–16

SEATS 2. Pass holder bracket B through slit B of the seat back pad. Caution x Install it without twisting the sleeve.

FRONT

SEAT BACK PAD

SEAT BACK TRIM

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FRAM

HOLDER BRACKET B

SLIT B

am2zzw0000245

3. Assemble the holder bracket A to the frame.(1) 4. Assemble the holder bracket B to the frame.(2) 5. Install holder bracket A and B to the frame using the nut.(3)

HOLDER BRACKET A

HOLDER BRACKET B

End Of Sie (3) (1)

(2) NUT 8—12 N·m {82—122 kgf·cm, 71—106 in·lbf} am2zzw0000208

FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [VEHICLES WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAGS]

id091300487738

Caution x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is installed. x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat. x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat. R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 3. Remove the headrest. 4. Slide hook A in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to detach it from hook B.

HOOK B HOOK A (1)

(2)

(3) am2zzw0000246

09-13–18

SEATS 5. Partially peal back the front seat back pad, release the pole guide tabs in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure, then pull the pole guide out in the direction of arrow (5).

POLE GUIDE (5)

(4) TAB

(4) TAB

am2zzw0000246

6. Pull out part A of the seat back pad to the front of the seat. A

A

adejjw00001864

7. Remove the seat back trim and the seat back pad as a single unit from the seat frame by pulling them in the direction of the arrow.

SEAT BACK PAD SEAT BACK TRIM SEAT FRAME

am2zzw0000378

8. Partially peal back the seat back trim from the seat back pad, remove rings C in the order of (6), (7) shown in the figure, remove the surface fastener, then remove the seat back trim. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

SURFACE FASTENER (7)

(6)

End Of Sie

FRONT BACK PAD RINGS C

SEAT BACK TRIM

am2zzw0000375

09-13–21

SEATS FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300487800

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. (Vehicles with side air bags) Disconnect the negative battery cable.(Vehicles without side air bags) Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Detach hook A by sliding it in the order of (1), (2), and (3) as shown in the figure. 7. Detach hook B and C in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. HOOK A

(3)

(2) (1) HOOK B HOOK B HOOK C

am2zzw0000246

8. Remove the seat cushion trim and the seat cushion pad from the seat frame as a single unit.

SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND SEAT CUSHION PAD

am2zzw0000498

9. Remove rings C in the order of (4), (5), and (6) as shown in the figure, then remove the seat cushion trim from the seat cushion pad in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

(4)

(5)

(6) SEAT CUSHION TRIM

RINGS C

End Of Sie

SEAT CUSHION PAD am2zzw0000375

FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091300433300

R.H.D. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. (Vehicles with side air bags) 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable.(Vehicles without side air bags) 4. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].)

09-13–22

SEATS 5. Operate the lift lever in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure. (Right side of the driver's seat) (Vehicles with seat lifter) 6. Insert a fastener remover from the position of arrow (2) shown in the figure, and remove the lift lever cover by disengaging the tab. (Right side of the driver's seat) (Vehicles with seat lifter)

(1) LIFT LEVER

(2) LIFT LEVER COVER

TAB am2zzw0000213

7. Remove the screws, then remove the lift lever in the direction of the arrow. (Right side of the driver's seat) (Vehicles with seat lifter) LIFT LEVER

SCREW

am2zzw0000377

8. After operating the recliner knob in the upward direction (1), cut the area indicated in the figure, then remove the recliner knob in the direction of arrow (2). Caution x The seat back folds forward when the recliner knob is operated. Be careful when operating the recliner knob.

RECLINER KNOB (2)

R

(1)

CUT

adejjw00002335

9. Remove the screw.

SCREW am2zzw0000377

09-13–24

SEATS 10. Pull the front seat side cover in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to disengage the clip, hook and tab. 11. Remove the front seat side cover from the hook by sliding the front seat side cover in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure. 12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

SEAT BACK FRAME

REVERSE COVER

(2)

(3) FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER

TAB

End Of Sie

FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER

(4)

SEAT CUSHION FRAME

HOOK

FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER

(1)

FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER

CLIP am2zzw0000377

09-13–25

SEATS FRONT SEAT RAIL COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300555500

R.H.D. 1. Remove the screws. FASTENER

FASTENER

SCREW

SCREW

am2zzw0000377

2. Slide the front seat rail cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to remove it from the fasteners. 3. Remove the front seat rail cover. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] id0913004260z3

1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the rear buckle installation bolt. 3. Press the push knob to fold the rear seat back. PUSH KNOB

am2zzw0000058

4. Remove bolts A. 5. Remove the rear seat back from the rear seat bracket by pulling the rear seat back in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BOLT A

BOLT A

BOLT A

BOLT A• 4• 1—55 N·m {4.2—5.6 kgf·m, 31—40 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000445

09-13–26

SEATS 6. Remove bolts B and remove the center hinge. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CENTER HINGE

BOLT B BOLT B• 4• 1—55 N·m {4.2—5.6 kgf·m, 31—40 ft·lbf}

REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles]

id0913004260z4

1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the rear buckle installation bolt. 3. Press the push knob to fold the rear seat back. PUSH KNOB

am2zzw0000058

4. Remove bolts A. 5. Remove the rear seat back from the rear seat bracket by pulling the rear seat back in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

BOLT A

BOLT A

BOLT A

BOLT A• 3• 7—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·m, 27—39 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000445

6. Remove bolts B and remove the center hinge. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CENTER HINGE

BOLT B BOLT B• 3• 7—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·m, 27—39 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000445

09-13–27

SEATS REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300450000

1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the rear buckle installation bolt. 3. Remove the rear seat back. (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 4. Remove the bolt, then remove the bushing, BOLT washer, hinge, and the cover. WASHER BUSHING HINGE HINGE

BUSHING COVER WASHER BOLT

COVER BOLT• 3• 7—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·cm, 27—39 in·lbf}

adejjw00001878

5. Remove the child-restraint seat anchor covers. 6. Slide hooks A in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to detach them from hooks B.

CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR COVER

HOOK B

(1)

(2)

(3)

HOOK A adejjw00003478

7. Move the hooks in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to remove them from the frame.

FRAME

HOOK am2zzw0000220

8. Peal back the rear seat trim, release the pole guide tabs in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the figure, then pull out the pole guides in the direction of arrow (5).

POLE GUIDE

(5)

(4) TAB

(4) TAB

POLE GUIDE

SEAT BACK FRAM

SEAT BACK FRAM

am2zzw0000221

09-13–28

SEATS 9. Release the tab of the rod by pulling it in the direction of arrow (6) shown in the figure. 10. Release the rod from the frame by pulling it in the direction of arrow (7) shown in the figure.

ROD (7) TAB ROD TAB

ROD TAB

(6)

ROD

(7)

TAB (6) am2zzw0000377

11. While releasing the tabs of the bezel in the direction of arrow (8) shown in the figure, remove the bezel, recliner knob, and rod as a single unit by pulling them in the direction of arrow (9).

(9)

TAB (8) A

TAB(8)

(8) TAB A

SEC. A—A

(8) TAB

am2zzw0000377

12. While releasing the tabs of the recliner knob in the direction of arrow (10) shown in the figure, pull the recliner knob in the direction of arrow (11) to disassemble the recliner knob, bezel, and the rod.

(11)

TAB (10)

TAB (10) KNOB BEZEL ROD

am2zzw0000221

13. Remove the screws, then remove the belt cover. SCREW

BELT COVER

am2zzw0000059

09-13–29

SEATS 14. Remove the seat back frame from the seat back pad by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.

SEAT BACK FRAME

SEAT BACK PAD am2zzw0000377

15. Remove the bolt, then remove the rear center seat belt.

BOLT

REAR CENTER SEAT BELT am2zzw0000059

16. Remove the seat back trim from the seat back pad by peeling off the surface fastener while opening the seat back trim. 17. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

SURFACE FASTENER

SURFACE FASTENER adejjw00001886

09-13–30

SEATS REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300555800

1. Detach the hooks from the grommets by pulling the rear seat cushion in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. HOOK GROMMET

am2zzw0000377

2. From the backside of the seat, detach the hook in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove the rear seat cushion by pulling it in the direction of arrow (2). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

(2)

(1) HOOK am2zzw0000221

REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300455800

1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove rings C, then remove the seat cushion trim from the seat cushion pad. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

RINGS C am2zzw0000221

REAR SEAT BACK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091300426400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear seat back. (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 4. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 7. C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB])

09-13–31

SEATS 8. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear seat back striker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BOLT

End Of Sie REAR SEAT BACK STRIKER

BOLT:37—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·cm, 27—39 in·lbf} am2zzw0000449

SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091300716000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 3. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. While pressing the tab of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, remove the seat warmer switch in the SEAT WARMER SWITCH direction of the arrow (2). (2) 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie (1)

(1)

TAB

TAB

am2zzw0000201

SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION

id091300716100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the seat warmer switch. (See 09-13-32 SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer switch terminals using an ohmmeter. x If not as specified, replace the seat warmer switch.

: Continuity

: Bulb

Terminal Switch position

B

H

F

G

A

ON OFF

am2zzw0000201

End Of Sie G

F

G H F

H

B

*

A B

A am2zzw0000203

09-13–32

SEATS SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION

id091300716200

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. (Vehicles with side air bags) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (Vehicles without side air bags) Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 5. Remove the front seat cushion trim. (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 6. While inspecting for continuity between the connector terminals A and B, use a dryer to warm the thermostat of the seat warmer unit on seat cushion.

HOT AIR

THERMOSTAT CONNECTOR B

A

am2zzw0000202

7. When the indication on the ohmmeter is no continuity, turn off the dryer, then use a thermometer to measure the temperature of the thermostat. 8. Verify that the temperature is approx. 29 qC {84 qF}. THERMOMETER THERMOSTAT

am2zzw0000202

9. Verify that there is continuity between terminals of the seat warmer unit’s connector using an ohmmeter when temperature drops to approx. 20 qC {68 qF}.

: Continuity Thermostat temperature

Terminal A

B

More than approx. 29 ˚C {84 ˚F} Less than approx. 20 ˚C {68 ˚F} am2zzw0000202

09-13–33

SEATS x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front seat cushion.

End Of Sie

B

A

B

A

am2zzw0000203

09-13–34

PAGE 1 OF 3

09-14

SECURITY AND LOCKS

SECURITY AND LOCKS

SECURITY AND LOCKS LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–3 Locks and Openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–3 Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Advanced Keyless and Start System] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–9 Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Keyless Entry System] . . . . . 09-14–15 Theft-deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–16 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–17 5HB, 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–17 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–20 Outer handle bracket Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–22 REAR OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–23 Handle Protector Installation Note . . . . 09-14–27 Outer handle bracket Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–27 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–27 Front Inner Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–27 Rear inner handle(5HB, 4SD) . . . . . . . 09-14–27 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–28 Bonnet latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–28 Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–29 BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–30 BONNET LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–31 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-14–32 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–34 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-14–36 Fuel-filler Lid Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–36 Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever . . . . . . . . . 09-14–39 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB] . . . . 09-14–40 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–40 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB] . . . . 09-14–43 Fuel-filler Lid Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–43 Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever . . . . . . . . . 09-14–46 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-14–47 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–47 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-14–51 Fuel-filler Lid Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–51 Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever . . . . . . . . . 09-14–54 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–55 5HB, 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–55 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–59 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–62 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–63

5HB, 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–63 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–65 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–67 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–70 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–72 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–74 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–75 Font Door Lock-link Inspection . . . . . . . 09-14–75 Rear Door Lock-link Inspection . . . . . . . 09-14–77 DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–78 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–79 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–79 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–80 Double Locking System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–81 Power Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–82 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–83 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–83 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–84 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–85 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–85 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–87 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–89 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–89 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–90 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–91 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–92 LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–93 TRUNK LID LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–93 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–94 TRUNK LID RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–95 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–96 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–97

PAGE 2 OF 3

SECURITY AND LOCKS

TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14–98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–99 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–99 Generated pulse (reference) . . . . . . . . 09-14–101 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14–102 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–102 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–102 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–103 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–104 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–104 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–106 THEFT-DETERRENT HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–107 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–107 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14–108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–109 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–110 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14–110 4-pin Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–110 6-pin Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–110 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–112 Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–112 AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–116 Generated pulse (reference) . . . . . . . . 09-14–117 TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–118 TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–120 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–122 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–123 Two Programmed Advanced Keys Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–123 Using the M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–124

CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–124 CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–125 3HB, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–125 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–127 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–130 3HB, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–130 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–131 KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–131 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–132 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14–133 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–134 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–135 INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION. . . . . 09-14–135 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–136 Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–136 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–136 Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . 09-14–137 No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys) . . . 09-14–138 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS) . . . . . . 09-14–139 No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–140 No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–141 No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement. . . . . 09-14–142 No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–144 No.7 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM, Keyless Control Module, and Steering Lock Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–147

09-14–1

PAGE 3 OF 3

SECURITY AND LOCKS

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–150 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–150 Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming . 09-14–150 M-MDS Connecting Procedure . . . . . . 09-14–151 No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys) . . . 09-14–151 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS). . . . . . 09-14–152

No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–153 No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–154 No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Instrument Cluster Replacement. . . . . 09-14–155 No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM and Instrument Cluster) . . . . . . 09-14–156 SECURITY ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . 09-14–158

09

09-14–2

SECURITY AND LOCKS SECURITY AND LOCKS LOCATION INDEX SOKYU_WM: SECURITY AND LOCKS

id091400428600

Locks and Openers 5HB 3

1

4

5

2

14

13

12

15

11

10

9

8

7

1

6 am2zzw0000348

1

Inner handle (See 09-14-27 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–3

SECURITY AND LOCKS 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

09-14–4

Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front outer handle (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bonnet release cable (See 09-14-30 BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Fuel-filler lid opener lever (See 09-14-43 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB].) Fuel-filler lid opener cable (See 09-14-40 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB].) Liftgate lock striker (See 09-14-93 LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Liftgate latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-89 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-89 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-80 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) Rear outer handle (See 09-14-23 REAR OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Door lock striker (See 09-14-78 DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-67 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-62 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

15

Fuel-filler lid opener (See09-14-43 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB].)

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3HB 3

1

4

5

2 12

11 10

13

9

8

7

6 am2zzw0000328

1

2

3

4

5

Inner handle (See 09-14-27 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front outer handle (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bonnet release cable (See 09-14-30 BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

6

7

8

9

Fuel-filler lid opener lever (See 09-14-51 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Fuel-filler lid opener cable (See 09-14-47 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Liftgate lock striker (See 09-14-93 LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Liftgate latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-89 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-89 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

09-14–5

SECURITY AND LOCKS 10

11

12

13

09-14–6

Door lock striker (See 09-14-78 DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-67 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-62 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Fuel-filler lid opener (See 09-14-51 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4SD

1

3

4

5

2

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

1

6 am2ccw0000017

1

2

3

4

5

Inner handle (See 09-14-27 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front outer handle (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Bonnet release cable (See 09-14-30 BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

6

7

8

9

Fuel-filler lid opener lever (See 09-14-36 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Fuel-filler lid opener cable (See 09-14-32 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Trunk lid lock striker (See 09-14-98 TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Trunk lid latch and release actuator (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-95 TRUNK LID RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

09-14–7

SECURITY AND LOCKS

10

11

12

13

14

15

09-14–8

Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-80 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) Rear outer handle (See 09-14-23 REAR OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Door lock striker (See 09-14-78 DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-67 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-14-62 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Fuel-filler lid opener (See 09-14-36 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)

SECURITY AND LOCKS Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Advanced Keyless and Start System] 5HB 1

2

1

5

1 4

3

1

1

8

7

6 am2zzw0000328

1

2

3

Keyless antenna (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Request switch (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Liftgate opener switch (See 09-14-91 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-92 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.)

4

5

Keyless beeper (See 09-14-130 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-131 KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Advanced key (See 09-14-123 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-124 CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

09-14–9

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6

7

8

Coil antenna (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless receiver (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless control module (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-99 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-102 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-125 CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-158 SECURITY ACCESS PROCEDURE.)

09-14–10

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3HB 1

2

1

3

1

5

4

1

8

7

6 am2zzw0000328

1

2

3

Keyless antenna (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Request switch (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Liftgate opener switch (See 09-14-91 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-92 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.)

4

5

Keyless beeper (See 09-14-130 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-131 KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Advanced key (See 09-14-123 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-124 CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

09-14–11

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6

7

8

Coil antenna (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless receiver (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless control module (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-99 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-102 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-125 CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-158 SECURITY ACCESS PROCEDURE.)

09-14–12

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4SD 1

1

2

1

1

4

3

1

5

1

8

7

6 am2ccw0000017

1

2

3

Keyless antenna (See 09-14-125 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Request switch (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-132 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Trunk lid opener switch (See 09-14-97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.)

4

5

Keyless beeper (See 09-14-130 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-131 KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Advanced key (See 09-14-123 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-124 CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-122 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

09-14–13

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6

7

8

Coil antenna (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless receiver (See 09-14-108 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Keyless control module (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-99 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-102 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-125 CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-158 SECURITY ACCESS PROCEDURE.)

09-14–14

SECURITY AND LOCKS Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Keyless Entry System] 2

1

3 am2zzw0000061

1

2

Coil antenna (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) Transmitter (See 09-14-118 TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-120 TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

3

Keyless receiver (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-110 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

09-14–15

SECURITY AND LOCKS Theft-deterrent System Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 1

2

3 am2zzw0000220

1

2

Theft-deterrent siren (See 09-14-102 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-104 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN INSPECTION.) Intruder sensor (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION.)

09-14–16

3

Theft-deterrent control module (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-112 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)

SECURITY AND LOCKS AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 5HB

1

1

4SD

2

am2zzw0000462

1

2

Theft-deterrent horn (See 09-14-107 THEFT-DETERRENT HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Theft-deterrent control module (See 09-14-111 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-112 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091400432300

5HB, 4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX.110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000517 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–17

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect the keyless antenna connector (With advanced keyless entry system). FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000062

5. Press the hook on the front outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow. HOOK

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

am2zzw0000062

6. Maintaining the condition in procedure 5, remove the front outer handle.

FRONT OUTER HANDLE am2zzw0000062

09-14–18

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the handle protector and handle seat. 8. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape from the handle protector and body. (See 09-14-22 Outer handle bracket Installation Note.)

HANDLE SEAT am2zzw0000352

9. Remove the service hole cover. 10. Remove the screw from the service hole. Note x The screw cannot be removed because of the stopper. SERVICE HOLE COVER

am2zzw0000062

SERVICE HOLE

SCREW

am2zzw0000062

09-14–19

SECURITY AND LOCKS 11. Press down the rod holder in the direction of arrow (1) and remove the front outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (2).(See 09-14-22 Outer handle bracket Installation Note.) 12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

(1) (2) ROD HOLDER am2zzw0000062

3HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX.110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000518 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–20

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect the keyless antenna connector (With advanced keyless entry system).

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000331

5. Press the hook on the front outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow. HOOK

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

am2zzw0000331

6. Maintaining the condition in procedure 5, remove the front outer handle.

FRONT OUTER HANDLE am2zzw0000062

09-14–21

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the handle seat. 8. Remove the screw from the service hole. Note x The screw cannot be removed because of the stopper.

HANDLE SEAT am2zzw0000352

SCREW

am2zzw0000352

9. Press down the rod holder in the direction of arrow (1) and remove the front outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (2).(See 09-14-22 Outer handle bracket Installation Note.) 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

(1) (2) ROD HOLDER am2zzw0000332

Outer handle bracket Installation Note 1. Hook the outer handle bracket tabs as shown in the figure.

09-14–22

SECURITY AND LOCKS End Of Sie TAB

TAB

OUTER HANDLE BRACKET am2zzw0000255

REAR OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

id091400432600

Fully close the rear door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rubber. RUBBER

am2zzw0000062

6. Remove the service hole cover.

SERVICE HOLE COVER am2zzw0000063

09-14–23

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the screw from the service hole. Note x The screw cannot be removed because of the stopper. 8. Press the tab on the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow.

SCREW

am2zzw0000063

REAR OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

TAB

am2zzw0000063

09-14–24

SECURITY AND LOCKS 9. Maintaining the condition in procedure 8, remove the outer handle garnish. OUTER HANDLE GARNISH

am2zzw0000063

10. Press the hook on the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow. HOOK

REAR OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

am2zzw0000063

11. Maintaining the condition in procedure 10, remove the rear outer handle.

REAR OUTER HANDLE am2zzw0000063

09-14–25

SECURITY AND LOCKS 12. Remove the handle protector and handle seat. 13. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape from both surfaces of the handle protector and the body. (See 09-14-27 Handle Protector Installation Note.)

HANDLE PROTECTOR HANDLE SEAT

am2zzw0000063

14. Loosen the screw.

REAR OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

SCREW am2zzw0000063

15. Press down the rod holder in the direction of arrow (1) and remove the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of arrow (2).(See 09-14-27 Outer handle bracket Installation Note.) 16. Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

•• ••••

•• •••• ROD HOLDER am2zzw0000063

09-14–26

SECURITY AND LOCKS Handle Protector Installation Note 1. If the handle protector is reused, adhere doubleadhesive tape to the both surfaces of the handle protector as shown in the figure.

HANDLE PROTECTOR

DOUBLE -SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

am2zzw0000063

Outer handle bracket Installation Note 1. Hook the outer handle bracket tabs as shown in the figure.

End Of Sie TAB

TAB

OUTER HANDLE BRACKET am2zzw0000255

INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400432700

Front Inner Handle 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect each cable and remove the front inner handle. DOOR LOCK KNOB CABLE 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

INNER HANDLE CABLE

FRONT INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000064

Rear inner handle(5HB, 4SD) 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–27

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect each cable and remove the rear inner handle. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DOOR LOCK KNOB CABLE

End Of Sie

INNER HANDLE CABLE

REAR INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000064

BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Bonnet latch 1. Open the bonnet. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the bonnet latch switch connector. (vehicles with theft-deterrent system)

id091400436800

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000071

4. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press down the shroud seal plate tab in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure, and remove the shroud seal plate. (vehicles with theft-deterrent system)

SHROUD SEAL PLATE

FLATHEAD SCREWDRI VER

TAB

am2zzw0000071

09-14–28

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Remove the clip.Vehicles with theft-deterrent system

CLIP

CLIP

CLIP

am2zzw0000071

6. 7. 8. 9.

Remove the bolts. Remove the bonnet latch. Install in the reverse order of removal. Adjust the bonnet. (See 09-10-4 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.)

Vehicles without theft-deterrent system BONNET LATCH

BOLT 8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm, 71—97 in·lbf}

Vehicles with theft-deterrent system BONNET LATCH

BOLT 8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm, 71—97 in·lbf} am2zzw0000057

Bonnet release lever 1. Pull the bonnet release lever.

BONNET RELEASE LEVER

am2zzw0000064

09-14–29

SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. While maintaining the condition in procedure 1, insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver as shown in the figure, press the ends of the tabs with the screwdriver in the direction of the arrows (1), pull the bonnet release lever in the direction of arrow (2), and then disconnect the lower panel. LOWER PANEL

TAB BONNET RELEASE LEVER

LOWER PANEL

(1)

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

(2)

BONNET RELEASE LEVER

TAB

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW am2zzw0000399

Caution x Remove the bonnet release lever while being careful not to damage the bonnet release cable with the flathead screwdriver. 3. Pull the latch release lever outward, remove it from the lower panel, and then disconnect the bonnet release cable. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie LOWER PANEL

BONNET RELEASE CABLE

BONNET RELEASE LEVER am2zzw0000065

BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400456800

1. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the seal board upper. (See 09-10-18 SEAL BOAD UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the bonnet release lever. (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the bonnet release cable from clips A. 5. Remove the clips B. 6. Disconnect the bonnet latch from the bonnet release cable.

09-14–30

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the bonnet release cable from outside of the vehicle. L.H.D.

BONNET RELEASE CABLE CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP A

CLIP B HOOD LATCH

CLIP B

R.H.D.

CLIP A

BONNET RELEASE CABLE CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP B CLIP A

CLIP B HOOD LATCH am2zzw0000071

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie BONNET LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION id091400450000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the bonnet latch. (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/

09-14–31

SECURITY AND LOCKS INSTALLATION.) 3. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition. SCREWDRIVER BONNET LATCH

LATCH LEVER

LATCH LEVER

OPEN

CLOSE am2zzw0000045

4. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.

A B

A

B am2zzw0000045

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the bonnet latch.

End Of Sie

CONTINUITY BONNET LATCH SWITCH

TERMINAL A

B

OPEN CLOSE

am2zzw0000046

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id0914004458d3

R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat (driver's seat) (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Front scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (6) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (8) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–32

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2ccw0000024

4. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2ccw0000025

5. Flip over the floor mat and remove the cable from the fuel-filler lid opener lever.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000065

09-14–35

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. Remove the fuel-filler lid opener cable. FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE

CLIP

CLIP

CLIP am2zzw0000509

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0914004352d3

Fuel-filler Lid Opener R.H.D. 1. Open the fuel-filler lid. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2ccw0000015

09-14–36

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect the release cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover. 5. Rotate the fuel-filler lid opener in the direction of the arrow (1) as shown in the figure and pull it out in the direction of the arrow (2).

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2ccw0000024

(1)

(2)

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER

am2ccw0000015

6. Pull the lift spring in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to remove it from the tab. 7. While keeping the lift spring in the condition of Step 6, rotate the lift spring in the direction of •• •••• •• •••• arrow (2) shown in the figure to remove it. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal. TAB

LIFT SPRING am2ccw0000015

09-14–38

SECURITY AND LOCKS Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the front side trim. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Partially peel back the floor covering. L.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

R.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

am2zzw0000071

4. Remove the bolts. 5. Disconnect the cable and fuel-filler lid opener lever. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

L.H.D. CABLE BOLT 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

End Of Sie

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER R.H.D.

CABLE BOLT

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER am2zzw0000512

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB] R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat (Driver's seat) (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Front scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–39

SECURITY AND LOCKS (5) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2zzw0000345

4. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000345

5. Flip over the floor mat and remove the cable from the fuel-filler lid opener lever.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000065

09-14–40

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. Remove the fuel-filler lid opener cable. FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE

CLIP

CLIP

CLIP am2zzw0000071

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB] id0914004352d4 Fuel-filler Lid Opener R.H.D. 1. Open the fuel-filler lid. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (LH) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–42

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2zzw0000345

4. Disconnect the release cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000345

5. Rotate the fuel-filler lid opener in the direction of the arrow (1) as shown in the figure and pull it out in the direction of the arrow (2). 6. Pull the lift spring in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to remove it from the tab.

(1)

(2)

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER

am2zzw0000064

09-14–45

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. While keeping the lift spring in the condition of Step 6, rotate the lift spring in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure to remove it. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

•• ••••

•• ••••

TAB

LIFT SPRING am2zzw0000064

Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the front side trim. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Partially peel back the floor covering. 4. Remove the bolts.

L.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

R.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

am2zzw0000071

09-14–46

SECURITY AND LOCKS Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles L.H.D.

AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles L.H.D.

CABLE

CABLE BOLT

BOLT

5.0 N·m {51 kgf·cm, 44 in·lbf}

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER R.H.D.

CABLE BOLT

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER R.H.D.

CABLE BOLT

5.0 N·m {51 kgf·cm, 44 in·lbf}

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER am2zzw0000512

5. Disconnect the cable and fuel-filler lid opener lever. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat (driver's seat) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (5) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

09-14–47

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2zzw0000346

4. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000346

5. Flip over the floor mat and remove the cable from the fuel-filler lid opener lever.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000065

09-14–50

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. Remove the fuel-filler lid opener cable. FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE

CLIP A

CLI P A

CLIP B

CLIP B am2zzw0000331

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0914004352d5

Fuel-filler Lid Opener R.H.D. 1. Open the fuel-filler lid. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Front scuff plate (LH) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–51

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Open the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

TAB

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER am2zzw0000345

4. Disconnect the release cable from the fuel-filler lid opener cable cover.

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE COVER

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE am2zzw0000345

5. Rotate the fuel-filler lid opener in the direction of the arrow (1) as shown in the figure and pull it out in the direction of the arrow (2). 6. Pull the lift spring in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to remove it from the tab.

(1)

(2)

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER

am2zzw0000329

09-14–53

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. While keeping the lift spring in the condition of Step 6, rotate the lift spring in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the figure to remove it. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

•• ••••

•• ••••

TAB

LIFT SPRING am2zzw0000064

Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 2. Remove the front side trim. (Driver's side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Partially peel back the floor covering.

L.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

R.H.D. FLOOR COVERING

am2zzw0000071

09-14–54

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Disconnect the cable and fuel-filler lid opener lever. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

L.H.D. CABLE BOLT 5.0 N·m {51 kgf·cm, 44 in·lbf}

End Of Sie

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER R.H.D.

CABLE BOLT

5.0 N·m {51 kgf·cm, 44 in·lbf}

VEHICLE FRONT

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER am2zzw0000071

FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400429400

5HB, 4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

APPROX. 110 mm {4.33 in}

am2zzw0000517

(3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-14–55

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Remove the service hole cover.

SERVICE HOLE COVER

am2zzw0000066

5. Remove the tab, then remove the door lock-link bracket. (Driver’s door).

BRACKET

NUT

7.0—9.0 N·m {72—91 kgf·cm, 62—79 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000066

6. Remove the service hole cover. 7. Remove the screw from the service hole.

SERVICE HOLE COVER

Note x The screw cannot be removed because of the stopper.

am2zzw0000332

09-14–56

SECURITY AND LOCKS

SCREW

am2zzw0000066

8. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow (1), and pull out the key rod in the direction of the arrow (2).

CLIP

1

2 KEY ROD am2zzw0000066

09-14–57

SECURITY AND LOCKS 9. Press the tab on the front outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow. FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

TAB

am2zzw0000066

10. Maintaining the condition in Step 9, remove the front key cylinder. FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

am2zzw0000066

09-14–58

SECURITY AND LOCKS 11. Using a tape-wrapped fastener remover, press up the collar cap in the direction of the arrow shown in the arrow, press aside the front door key cylinder tabs (1), and remove the collar cover from the front door key cylinder. 12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TAB FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

(1)

TAB FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

COLLAR CAP

(1)

TAB am2zzw0000067

3HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000517 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Remove the sealing sheet. 5. Remove the nuts. 6. Remove the fastener.

SEALING SHEET

am2zzw0000331

09-14–59

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the rod protector.

NUT 6.5—9.8 N·m {67—99 kgf·cm, 58—86 in·lbf}

ROD PROTECTOR FASTENER

am2zzw0000331

8. Remove the service hole cover. 9. Remove the screw from the service hole. Note x The screw cannot be removed because of the stopper.

SERVICE HOLE COVER

am2zzw0000332

3.7—5.7 N·m {38—58 kgf·cm, 33—50 in·lbf}

SCREW

am2zzw0000332

09-14–60

SECURITY AND LOCKS 10. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow (1), and pull out the key rod in the direction of the arrow (2). 11. Press the tab on the front outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow.

CLIP

1

2 KEY ROD am2zzw0000332

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

TAB

am2zzw0000332

12. Maintaining the condition in Step 11, remove the front key cylinder. FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

am2zzw0000066

09-14–61

SECURITY AND LOCKS 13. Using a tape-wrapped fastener remover, press up the collar cap in the direction of the arrow shown in the arrow, press aside the front door key cylinder tabs (1), and remove the collar cover from the front door key cylinder. 14. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TAB FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

(1)

End Of Sie

TAB FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER

COLLAR CAP

(1)

TAB am2zzw0000067

FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION

id091400801300

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000517 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. If the door lock condition is to be inspected, pull the door lock-link switch cable, or press it in. Note x The door lock-link switch cable locks or unlocks only when the latch lever is locked.

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH CABLE

LOCK UNLOCK

am2zzw0000181

09-14–62

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. L.H.D.

UNLOCK

J

H

LOCK

J

H

R.H.D.

UNLOCK

F

D

LOCK

D

F am6zzw0000044

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

End Of Sie

: Continuity Key cylinder position Unlock Lock

Terminal L.H.D. : J R.H.D. : D

L.H.D. : H R.H.D. : F R R: 1 kilohm

am6zzw0000044

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400429500

5HB, 4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front inner handle (See 09-14-75 DOOR am2zzw0000517 LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) (4) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–63

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect the key rod from the front outer handle bracket.

FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET

CLIP

1

2 KEY ROD am2zzw0000070

5. Remove the screw 6. Detach the clips.

SCREW

CLIP

4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm, 38—54 in·lbf}

CLIP am2zzw0000517

09-14–64

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Press down the rod holder of the front door latch and lock actuator in the direction of the arrow.

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOOK ACTUATOR

•• •••• ROD HOLDER am2zzw0000070

8. Maintaining the condition in Step 7, remove the front door latch and lock actuator. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

CLIP

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR am2zzw0000067

3HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front inner handle (See 09-14-75 DOOR am2zzw0000518 LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) (4) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front door module panel (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-14–65

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Disconnect the key rod from the front outer handle bracket.

CLIP

1

2 KEY ROD am2zzw0000332

5. Remove the screw 6. Detach the clips.

CLIP SCREW

4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm, 38—54 in·lbf}

CLIP

am2zzw0000518

09-14–66

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Press down the rod holder of the front door latch and lock actuator in the direction of the arrow. FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOOK ACTUATOR

•• •••• ROD HOLDER am2zzw0000332

8. Maintaining the condition in Step 7, remove the front door latch and lock actuator. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

End Of Sie

CLIP FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR am2zzw0000332

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION id091400430500

1. The following actuators and switches are integrated with the front door latch and lock actuator. Inspect the front door latch and lock actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items. x Front door lock actuator (See 09-14-72 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) x Door lock-link switch(Vehicles with theft-deterrent system) (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Door latch switch (See 09-14-74 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-62 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.)

09-14–67

SECURITY AND LOCKS R.H.D. LH

DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM DOOR LATCH SWITCH

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

UNLOCK

LOCK M

LOCK

UNLOCK

A

G

C

B

D

J

G L

J

C D

L

A B

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM DOOR LATCH SWITCH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK

LOCK M

LOCK

UNLOCK

G

A

B

D

J

A

G L

J

L

D

B

am6zzw0000451

09-14–70

SECURITY AND LOCKS RH DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM DOOR LATCH SWITCH

KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

UNLOCK

LOCK M

UNLOCK

LOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

K

E

I

L

J

D

K L

I J

F

B

E D

F

B

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM DOOR LATCH SWITCH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK

LOCK M

UNLOCK

LOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

L

J

D

K L

F

B

E J

F

D

B

am6zzw0000451

End Of Sie

09-14–71

SECURITY AND LOCKS FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

id091400428700

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000518 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–72

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation.

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM RH

LH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR G

LOCK

LOCK

A

M

M

UNLOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

E

A

G

K

DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM RH

LH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK

LOCK

M

M

UNLOCK

UNLOCK

C

A

G

G

C

A

K

E

K

I

I

E

am2zzw0000085

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

09-14–73

SECURITY AND LOCKS Power door lock system Terminal

Operation

B+ K A E G

RH LH RH LH

LOCK UNLOCK

Ground E G K A

Double locking system Terminal

Operation

B+ I C K A E G

RH LH RH LH RH LH

LOCK DOUBLE LOCK UNLOCK

Ground E G E G K,I A,C

End Of Sie FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION id091400430800

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000518 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER

CLOSE

LATCH LEVER

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER

OPEN am2zzw0000068

09-14–74

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. LH

RH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH L

J

D

J

L

D

B

B am2zzw0000068

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

End Of Sie : CONTINUITY DOOR LATCH SWITCH

TERMINAL LH:L RH:B

LH:J RH:D

OPEN CLOSE

am2zzw0000068

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION

id091400430200

Font Door Lock-link Inspection 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (driver's door) (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) am2zzw0000518 (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-13 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (6) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-63 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. If the door lock condition is to be inspected, pull the door lock-link switch cable, or press it in. Note x The door lock-link switch cable locks or unlocks only when the latch lever is locked.

09-14–75

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.

LOCK

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH CABLE

UNLOCK

am2zzw0000067

RH DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK L

J

D

J

D

LOCK

L

J

D

LH DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK B

LOCK

B

D

J am2zzw0000349

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

: CONTINUITY LOCK KNOB POSITION

TERMINAL RH:J LH:D

RH:D LH:J

RH:L LH:B

LOCK UNLOCK

am2zzw0000067

09-14–76

SECURITY AND LOCKS Rear Door Lock-link Inspection 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear inner handle (See 09-14-27 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-11-20 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (8) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. If the door lock condition is to be inspected, pull the door lock-link switch cable, or press it in. Note x The door lock-link switch cable locks or unlocks only when the latch lever is locked.

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH CABLE

LOCK UNLOCK

am2zzw0000067

09-14–77

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. RH DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK L

J

D

J

D

LOCK

L

J

D

LH DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK B

LOCK

B

D

J am2zzw0000349

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

End Of Sie : CONTINUITY LOCK KNOB POSITION

TERMINAL RH:J LH:D

RH:D LH:J

RH:L LH:B

LOCK UNLOCK

am2zzw0000067

DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400430300

1. Remove the screws, then remove the door lock striker. Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailnd manufactured vehicles

AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailnd manufactured vehicles

DOOR LOCK STRIKER 18—26 N·m {1.9—2.6 kgf·m, 14—19 ft·lbf}

SCREW

DOOR LOCK STRIKER 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

SCREW

am2zzw0000514

2. Install in the reverse order of removal. 3. Adjust the door lock striker. (See 09-11-22 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

09-14–78

SECURITY AND LOCKS REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091400430400

5HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the rear door latch and lock actuator. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

SCREW 4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm, 38—54 in·lbf}

REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

am2zzw0000067

4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door glass (See 09-12-10 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-20 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (5) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–79

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the rear door latch and lock actuator. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

SCREW 4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm, 38—54 in·lbf}

REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

am2zzw0000067

REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

id091400430600

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the rear door latch and lock actuator. Inspect the rear door latch and lock actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items. x Rear door lock actuator (See 09-14-85 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) x Rear door latch switch (See 09-14-83 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Rear door lock-link switch (Vehicles with theft-deterrent system) (See 09-14-75 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION.)

09-14–80

SECURITY AND LOCKS Double Locking System LH DOOR LATCH SWITCH

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH

REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

UNLOCK

LOCK M

LOCK

UNLOCK

A

G

C

B

D

L

J

G L

C D

J

A B

RH DOOR LATCH SWITCH

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH

REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

UNLOCK

LOCK M

LOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

I

L

J

D

K L

I J

B

E D

B

am2zzw0000378

09-14–81

SECURITY AND LOCKS Power Door Lock System LH DOOR LATCH SWITCH

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK

M

LOCK

UNLOCK

A

G

B

D

L

J

A

G L

J

D

B

RH DOOR LATCH SWITCH

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH UNLOCK

LOCK M

LOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

L

D

J

K L

B

E J

D

B

am2zzw0000511

End Of Sie

09-14–82

SECURITY AND LOCKS REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION

id091400430900

5HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-80 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER

CLOSE

LATCH LEVER

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER

OPEN am2zzw0000068

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. RH

LH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH D

D

B

B

L

J

J

L am2zzw0000068

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.

09-14–83

SECURITY AND LOCKS

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

DOOR LATCH SWITCH

RH:B LH:L

RH:D LH:J

OPEN CLOSE

am2zzw0000069

4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door glass (See 09-12-10 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-20 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (5) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-80 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER

CLOSE

LATCH LEVER

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

am2zzw0000518

LATCH LEVER

OPEN am2zzw0000068

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. RH

LH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH

DOOR LATCH SWITCH D

D

B

B

L

J

J

L am2zzw0000068

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.

09-14–84

SECURITY AND LOCKS End Of Sie : CONTINUITY DOOR LATCH SWITCH

TERMINAL RH:B LH:L

RH:D LH:J

OPEN CLOSE

am2zzw0000069

REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

id091400430700

5HB 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door glass (See 09-12-9 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-19 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–85

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation.

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM RH

LH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR G

LOCK

LOCK

A

M

M

UNLOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

E

A

G

K

DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM RH

LH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK

LOCK

M

M

UNLOCK

UNLOCK

C

A

G

G

C

A

K

E

K

I

I

E

am2zzw0000379

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.

09-14–86

SECURITY AND LOCKS Power Door Lock System Terminal

Operation LOCK UNLOCK

RH LH RH LH

B+ K A E G

Ground E G K A

Double Locking System Terminal

Operation LOCK DOUBLE LOCK UNLOCK

RH LH RH LH RH LH

B+ I C K A E G

Ground E G E G K,I A,C

4SD 1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the rear door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear 210 mm {8.27 in} beltline molding is approx. 210 mm {8.27 in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear door glass (See 09-12-10 REAR DOOR am2zzw0000518 GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-20 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (5) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-79 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–87

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation.

RH

LH

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR G

LOCK

LOCK

A

M

M

UNLOCK

UNLOCK

E

K

E

A

G

K

am2zzw0000511

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator. Power Door Lock System Terminal

Operation LOCK UNLOCK

RH LH RH LH

B+ K A E G

Ground E G K A

End Of Sie LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091400433100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim.(See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Disconnect the connector.

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000069

09-14–88

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

End Of Sie

BOLT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} am2zzw0000069

LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

id091400434100

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the liftgate latch and lock actuator. Inspect the liftgate latch and lock actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items. x Liftgate latch switch (See 09-14-90 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Liftgate lock actuator (See 09-14-89 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR

LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH

UNLATCH M

A

D

B

C

C

A

D

B

am2zzw0000379

LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION id091400433200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–89

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

LATCH LEVER

LATCH LEVER

LATCH

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER UNLATCH am2zzw0000260

5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator. Lock actuator operation UNLATCH

B+ D

Terminal Ground B

End Of Sie

LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR UNLATCH D

M

B

B

D am2zzw0000069

LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION id091400433300

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-88 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–90

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

LATCH LEVER

LATCH

LATCH LEVER

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH LEVER UNLATCH am2zzw0000069

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator.

C

A

A

C

am2zzw0000379

End Of Sie : CONTINUITY TERMINAL LATCH CONDITION

#

%

LATCH (LIFTGAE CLOSE) UNLATCH (LIFTGAE OPEN)

am2zzw0000069

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400444200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–91

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Pull out the retainer in the direction of the arrow. CONNECTOR

RETAINER

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH am2zzw0000070

5. Remove the liftgate opener switch. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000070

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION id091400444300

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the liftgate opener switch. (See 09-14-91 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify the continuity of liftgate opener switch terminals A and B.

A

A

B

B

am2zzw0000380

09-14–92

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the liftgate opener switch.

End Of Sie

: CONTINUITY SWITCH POSITION

TERMINAL

A

B

ON (PUSH) OFF (RELEASE)

am2zzw0000070

LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091400433400

1. Remove the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the liftgate lock 16—23 N·m {1.7—2.3 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf} striker. BOLT 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the liftgate lock striker. (See 09-11-30 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000069

TRUNK LID LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE id091400827100

Note x If the trunk lid cannot be opened due to a discharged battery or malfunction in the electrical system, it can be opened using the following procedure. 1. Fold down the rear seat back. Caution x Wear gloves when performing the procedure. The body edge can injure bare hands.

09-14–93

SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. Move the lever shown in the figure to the left to open the trunk lid.

End Of Sie

am2ccw0000014

TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

id091400828100

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Disconnect the connector. Remove the bolts. Remove the trunk lid latch and release actuator. 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} Install in the reverse order of removal. BOLT

End Of Sie

CONNECTOR

TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR am2zzw0000512

TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION id091400457300

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the trunk lid latch and release actuator. Inspect the trunk lid latch and release actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items. x Trunk lid latch switch (See 09-14-96 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.) x Trunk lid release actuator (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)

09-14–94

SECURITY AND LOCKS End Of Sie TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH

TRUNK LID RELEASE ACTUATOR RELEASE M

A

B

A

A

B

B

A

B

am2ccw0000027

TRUNK LID RELEASE ACTUATOR INSPECTION

id091400457400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Remove the trunk lid latch and release actuator. (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

UNLATCH

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

LATCH

am2ccw0000015

09-14–95

SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the trunk lid latch and release actuator. release actuator operation UNLATCH

Terminal B+ A

Ground B

End Of Sie

TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR A

UNLATCH

B

M

A

B

am2ccw0000015

TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION

id091400811200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Remove the trunk lid latch and release actuator. (See 09-14-94 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.

FATHEAD SCREW DRIVER

UNLATCH

LATCH

am2ccw0000014

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. A

A

B

B

am2ccw0000014

09-14–96

SECURITY AND LOCKS x If not as indicated in the table, replace the trunk lid latch and release actuator.

End Of Sie

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL LATCH CONDITION

A

B

LATCH (TRUNK LID CLOSE) UNLATCH (TRUNK LID OPEN)

am2ccw0000014

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4.

id091400445400

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Disconnect the connector. Pull out the retainer in the direction of the arrow. RETAINER

CONNECTOR

am2ccw0000015

5. Remove the trunk lid opener switch. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

End Of Sie

am2ccw0000015

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION id091400445500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Remove the trunk lid opener switch. (See 09-14-97 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–97

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Verify the continuity of trunk lid opener switch terminals A and B.

A A

B

B

am2ccw0000023

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the trunk lid opener switch.

End Of Sie

: CONTINUITY SWITCH POSITION

TERMINAL

A

B

ON (PUSH) OFF (RELEASE)

am2zzw0000070

TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400811300

1. Remove the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid lock striker. 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. BOLT 4. Adjust the trunk lid lock striker. (See 09-10-6 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT [4SD].)

End Of Sie

TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER am2zzw0000513

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004384b0

Note x If the keyless control module is replaced, always perform the following procedure. — Configuration (See 09-14-102 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) — Advanced key programming (See 09-14-123 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) — Steering lock unit programming (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) — Immobilizer system-related parts programming (See 09-14-136 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-14–98

SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles

1

AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles

2—10 N·m {21—101 kgf·cm, 18—88 in·lbf}

1

3

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

3

2

1

2

2—10 N·m {21—101 kgf·cm, 18—88 in·lbf}

1

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} am2zzw0000512

1 2 3

Bolt Connector Keyless control module

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004385b0

1. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table. x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the keyless control module. Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

2I

1E 2L

1D

2G

2C 2A

2H 2F 2D 2B

3AB 3Y 3V 3AC 3Z 3W

3P

3G 3N 3K

3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I

3F 3C

am2zzw0000509

Ter min al

Signal name

Connected to

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Under any condition 1D

Power supply

BCM

B+

Inspection item(s) ROOM 15 A fuse BCM Battery

09-14–99

SECURITY AND LOCKS Ter min al

Signal name

Connected to

1E

Power supply

P/W 20 A fuse

2A

Power supply

MIRROR 7.5 A fuse

2B

Rx-PATS*1

Coil antenna

2C

Power supply

ENG 10 A fuse

2D

Tx-PATS*1

Coil antenna

2F

BCM BCM communication

2G HS-CAN+

-

2H

Keyless entry Keyless receiver communication

2I

HS-CAN-

2L

3C 3F

Steering lock unit communication Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) Keyless antenna (LF)

-

Keyless antenna (interior, rear)

Under any condition

Keyless antenna (exterior, rear)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (LF)

Keyless antenna (interior, rear)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Liftgate opener switch/Trunk lid 3.0 opener switch pressed Liftgate opener switch*2/ Liftgate opener switch/Trunk lid Trunk lid opener switch*3 4.7 opener switch released Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Exterior keyless beeper sounds (transmitter unlock button pressed)

Other

Wave pattern (See 09-14101 Pattern 1.) Wave pattern Keyless beeper (See 09-14102 Pattern 2.) 1.0 or less

Keyless antenna (interior, center)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Body ground

Under any condition 1.0 or less Ground Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Driver's side door lock switch at 1.0 or less LOCK Driver's side door lock switch at Wave Door lock-link switch pattern (See UNLOCK 09-14-102 Pattern 3.)

Keyless antenna (RF)

3P

Lock input

Door lock-link switch (driver's door)

3R

Keyless antenna (interior, front)

Keyless antenna (interior, front)

09-14–100

B+

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless beeper Keyless beeper power supply

Keyless antenna *3 3L (interior, center) 3N GND Keyless 3O antenna (RF)

Inspection item(s)

P/W 20 A fuse Battery Ignition switch at ACC position B+ Ignition switch MIRROR 7.5 A fuse Ignition switch at LOCK position 1.0 or less Battery Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Ignition switch is at ON position B+ Ignition switch ENG 10 A fuse Ignition switch at LOCK position 1.0 or less Battery Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Exterior keyless beeper sounds (transmitter lock button pressed)

3K

Voltage (V)

Steering lock unit

Liftgate unlock Liftgate opener 3G input*2/Trunk lid switch*2/Trunk lid unlock input*3 opener switch*3 3I

Measurement condition

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

SECURITY AND LOCKS Ter min al 3U

Signal name

Connected to

Request switch Request switch (RF) input (RF)

3V

Start knob (push switch)

Steering lock unit

3W

Key reminder switch

Steering lock unit

3X

Request switch Request switch (LF) input (LF)

3Y*3

3Z

3AA 3AB 3AC 3AD *1 *2 *3

Keyless antenna (interior, center) Keyless antenna (interior, rear) Keyless antenna (interior, front) Keyless antenna (LF) Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) Keyless antenna (RF)

Measurement condition Outer handle (RF) side request switch ON Outer handle (RF) side request switch OFF Push switch in pressed condition Other Key inserted in steering lock Other Outer handle (LF) side request switch ON Outer handle (LF) side request switch OFF

Voltage (V)

Inspection item(s)

1.0 or less Front outer handle (RF) B+ B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

Steering lock unit Steering lock unit

1.0 or less Front outer handle (LF) B+

Keyless antenna (interior, center)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (interior, rear)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (interior, front)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (LF)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (exterior, rear)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Keyless antenna (RF)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

: With immobilizer system : 3HB, 5HB : 4SD

Generated pulse (reference) Pattern 1

0V

am2zzw0000510

x Terminal: — Keyless beeper power supply: 3K (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 100 ms/DIV (X), DC range

09-14–101

SECURITY AND LOCKS Pattern 2

0V

am2zzw0000510

x Terminal: — Keyless beeper power supply: 3K (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 100 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 3 Note x A wave pattern is displayed when keyless control module terminal 3P is measured using an oscilloscope. However, it may overlap with the output wave pattern of BCM terminal 7K which is displayed simultaneously. x Terminal: — Lock input (Door lock-link switch (driver’s door): 3P (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range

End Of Sie

0V am2zzw0000415

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004394b0

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Module Programing”. 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select “Programmable Module Installation”. 2. Select “RKE”. 4. Perform the configuration according to the directions on the screen.

End Of Sie

DLC-2 am2zzw0000210

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400809500

5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (passenger's side) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–102

SECURITY AND LOCKS (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (passenger's side) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. FRONT

2

9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

2 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

3

1

am2zzw0000044

1 2 3

Connector Nut Theft-deterrent siren

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-14–103

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

FRONT

2

9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

2 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

3

1

am2zzw0000328

1 2 3

Connector Nut Theft-deterrent siren

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN INSPECTION id091400819500

5HB 1. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (passenger's side) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (passenger's side) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the theft-deterrent siren with the connector connected.

09-14–104

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Measure the theft-deterrent siren terminal voltage using the short wiring harness connector in the position shown in the figure. Note x The theft-deterrent siren cannot be connected to a tester due to its waterresistance processing, therefore the short wiring harness connector is used for measuring the terminal voltage. x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in the table, inspect the short wiring harness connector for continuity. (See 09-14-105 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).)If the short wiring harness connecter is normal, inspect the parts under "Inspection items”. — If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the theft-deterrent siren.

FRONT

SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000157

Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

A B

D

am2zzw0000348

Terminal

Signal name

Connected to

A

Power supply

BCM

B

DATA

theft-deterrent control module

D

Ground

Body ground

Measurement Voltage (V) Inspection item(s) condition Under any B+ BCM condition Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any 1.0 or less Ground condition

Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector 1. Verify that the continuity between the short wiring harness connector terminals is as indicated in the table. x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the short wiring harness connector.

09-14–105

SECURITY AND LOCKS THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR C

B

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

A A B

D

: Continuity Test condition

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN CONNECTOR SIDE C

B

A

SHORT HARNESS CONNECTOR SIDE A

B

D

Under any condition

am2zzw0000044

3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 3. Remove the theft-deterrent siren with the connector connected. 4. Measure the theft-deterrent siren terminal voltage using the short wiring harness connector in the position shown in the figure. FRONT Note x The theft-deterrent siren cannot be connected to a tester due to its waterresistance processing, therefore the short wiring harness connector is used for measuring the terminal voltage. x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in the table, inspect the short wiring harness connector for continuity. (See 09-14-105 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).)If the short wiring harness connecter is normal, inspect the parts under "Inspection items”. — If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the theft-deterrent siren.

SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000478

09-14–106

SECURITY AND LOCKS Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

A B

D

am2zzw0000348

Terminal

Signal name

Connected to

A

Power supply

BCM

B

DATA

theft-deterrent control module

D

Ground

Body ground

Measurement Voltage (V) Inspection item(s) condition Under any B+ BCM condition Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any 1.0 or less Ground condition

Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector 1. Verify that the continuity between the short wiring harness connector terminals is as indicated in the table. x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the short wiring harness connector. THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR C

B

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

A A B

D

: Continuity Test condition

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN CONNECTOR SIDE C

B

A

SHORT HARNESS CONNECTOR SIDE A

B

D

Under any condition

am2zzw0000044

End Of Sie THEFT-DETERRENT HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400525100

5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (LH) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–107

SECURITY AND LOCKS (5) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 2 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 1 2 3

80—97 in·lbf}

Connector Bolt Theft-deterrent siren

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT

3

1

am2zzw0000446

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (LH) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 2 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 1 2 3

80—97 in·lbf}

Connector Bolt Theft-deterrent siren

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie 3 FRONT

1

am2zzw0000494

KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004383b0

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-14–108

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

Connector Nut Keyless receiver

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

1

3

End Of Sie

9— — 80—

·m · ·lbf}

2 am2zzw0000054

KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

id0914004383b3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

Connector Nut Keyless receiver

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

1

3

End Of Sie

9— — 80—

·m · ·lbf}

2 am2zzw0000054

KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004378b0

1. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table. x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the keyless receiver. 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-14–109

SECURITY AND LOCKS Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B

am2zzw0000379

Ter min Signal name al B GND

Connected to Body ground

C

DATA

Keyless control module

D

Power supply

BCM

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)/

Under any condition 1.0 or less Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any condition

B+

Inspection item(s) Ground Keyless control module x ROOM 15 A fuse x BCM x Battery

End Of Sie KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0914004378b3

4-pin Connector Type 1. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table. x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the keyless receiver. 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Terminal voltage table (reference) KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B

am2zzw0000379

Ter min Signal name al B GND

Connected to Body ground

C

DATA

BCM

D

Power supply

BCM

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Under any condition 1.0 or less Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any condition

B+

Inspection item(s) Ground BCM x ROOM 15 A fuse x BCM x Battery

6-pin Connector Type 1. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the glove compartment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/

09-14–110

SECURITY AND LOCKS INSTALLATION.) 3. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table. x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the keyless receiver. 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Terminal voltage table (reference) KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR

E

D

A

am2zzw0000384

Ter min al

Signal name

Connected to

A

Power supply

BCM

D

DATA

BCM

E

GND

Body ground

Measurement condition

Under any condition

Voltage (V)

B+

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any condition 1.0 or less

Inspection item(s) x ROOM 15 A fuse x BCM x Battery BCM Ground

End Of Sie THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091400820800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (driver's side)(3HB) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Front side trim (driver's side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].)(See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (5) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Lower panel (Driver’s side) (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–111

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

.

1 2 3

Connector Bolt Theft-deterrent control module

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

3

2 1 am2zzw0000045

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

id091400820900

1. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (driver's side)(3HB) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Shift lever knob (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [F35M-R].)(See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65MR].) (5) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table. x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the theft-deterrent control module. Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

W

U

S

Q

O

M

K

I

G

X

V

T

R

P

N

K

J

H

E

C

am2zzw0000059

09-14–112

SECURITY AND LOCKS Termin al C

E

Signal name x Intruder sensor signal x Theft-deterrent siren signal Start knob (push switch)

Key reminder switch signal

Connected to x Intruder sensor x Theft-deterrent siren

Measurement condition

B+ 1.0 or less

Key inserted

B+

Key removed

1.0 or less

G

Push switch signal

H

Bonnet latch switch signal

I

CAN_L

J

GND

K

CAN_H

M

Front door latch switch (passenger's door) signal

Start knob is pressed Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless Start knob is not pressed system)

Bonnet latch switch

Inspection item(s)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Start knob is pushed Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless Other system)

Key reminder switch (with keyless entry system)

Voltage (V)

Bonnet open (Bonnet latch switch off)

B+ 1.0 or less Inspect using the wave Profile. (See 09-14-115 Inspection Using An Oscilloscop e (Reference). )

x Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless system) x Related wiring harnesses x Key reminder switch (with keyless entry system) x Related wiring harnesses x Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless system) x Related wiring harnesses

x Bonnet latch switch x Related wiring harnesses

Bonnet closed (Bonnet latch 1.0 or less switch on) Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. x Related wiring Ground Under any condition 1.0 or less harnesses Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Inspect using the wave Profile. (See Front door (passenger-side) 09-14-115 Inspection open (Front door switch x Front door switch Using An (passenger' door) Front door latch switch (passenger' door) off) Oscilloscop x Related wiring (passenger's door) e harnesses (Reference). ) Front door (passenger's door) closed (Front door switch 1.0 or less (passenger's door) on)

09-14–113

SECURITY AND LOCKS Termin al

N

O

P

Q

R

S

Signal name

Rear door latch switch (RH) signal*1

Connected to

Rear door latch switch (RH)

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Any rear doors open (Rear door switch off)

Inspect using the wave Profile. (See 09-14-115 Inspection Using An Oscilloscop e (Reference). )

All rear doors closed (Rear door switch on)

1.0 or less

Inspection item(s)

x Rear door switches x Related wiring harnesses

Inspect using the wave Profile. (See Front door (driver' door) open 09-14-115 Inspection (Front door switch (driver' x Front door switch Front door latch Using An (driver' door) Front door latch switch door) off) switch (driver's door) Oscilloscop x Related wiring (driver' door) signal e harnesses (Reference). ) Front door (driver' door) closed (Front door switch 1.0 or less (driver' door) on) Inspect using the wave Profile. (See 09-14-115 Any rear door open (Rear x Rear door Inspection Rear door latch switches Rear door latch switch door switch off) Using An (LH) switch (LH) signal*1 Oscilloscop x Related wiring harnesses e (Reference). ) All rear doors closed (Rear 1.0 or less door switch on) x Keyless control module (with advanced keyless Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on Serial communication system) terminal voltage inspection not possible. x Keyless receiver (with keyless entry system) Liftgate is open. (Liftgate latch 1.0 or less switch on) Inspect using the wave x Liftgate latch Profile. (See Liftgate latch switch switch Liftgate latch switch 09-14-115 signal x Related wiring Liftgate is closed. (Liftgate Inspection harnesses latch switch off) Using An Oscilloscop e (Reference). ) Security light on 1.0 or less x Instrument cluster Security light on/off Instrument cluster x Related wiring Security light off B+ harnesses

09-14–114

SECURITY AND LOCKS Termin al

T

U

V

Signal name

Lock/unlock signal

IG 1

Connected to

Door lock link switch

METER 10 A fuse

Unlock input (Driver's Driver's door lock-link door lock-link switch) switch

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

All doors except the driver's door are locked

Inspect using the wave Profile. (See 09-14-115 Inspection Using An Oscilloscop e (Reference). )

Any door except the driver's door is unlocked IG ON

B+

IG OFF

1.0 or less

Driver's door locked

Driver's door unlocked W

Power supply

BCM

X

Hazard warning switch signal

BCM

Inspection item(s)

x Door lock link switch (Except driver's side) x Related wiring harnesses

1.0 or less

Inspect using the wave Profile. (See 09-14-115 Inspection Using An Oscilloscop e (Reference). ) 1.0 or less

Under any condition

B+

Hazard flash

1.0 or less

Other

5

x METER 10 A fuse x Ignition switch x Related wiring harnesses

x Driver's door lock-link switch x Related wiring harnesses

x Related wiring harnesses x BCM x Room 15 A fuse x BCM x Related wiring harnesses

*1 : 5HB Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference)

0V

am2zzw0000349

x Oscilloscope setting: 1 V/DIV (Y): 2 ms/DIV (X), DC range

09-14–115

SECURITY AND LOCKS AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE

W X

U V

S

Q

K

T

I

E

J

F

H

am2zzw0000440

Termin al

Signal name

E

Start knob (push switch)

F

Theft-deterrent horn signal

H

Bonnet latch switch signal

Connected to

Start knob is pushed Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless Other system)

Theft-deterrent horn relay

Bonnet latch switch

I

CAN_L

-

J

GND

Ground

K

CAN_H

-

Q

x Keyless control module (with advanced keyless system) Serial communication x Keyless receiver (with keyless entry system)

S

T

U

Security light on/off

Lock/unlock signal

IG 1

09-14–116

Measurement condition

Instrument cluster

Door lock link switch

METER 10 A fuse

Theft-deterrent siren not sounded

Voltage (V)

Inspection item(s)

B+

x Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless system) x Related wiring harnesses x Theft-deterrent horn relay x Related wiring harnesses

1.0 or less

B+

Theft-deterrent siren sounded 1.0 or less Bonnet open (Bonnet latch switch off)

Wave pattern (See 09-14-117 Pattern1.)

x Bonnet latch switch x Related wiring harnesses

Bonnet closed (Bonnet latch 1.0 or less switch on) Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. x Related wiring Under any condition 1.0 or less harnesses Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Security light on

1.0 or less

Security light off

B+

All doors except the driver's door are locked

Wave pattern (See 09-14-117 Pattern1.)

Any door except the driver's door is unlocked IG ON

B+

IG OFF

1.0 or less

1.0 or less

x Instrument cluster x Related wiring harnesses x Door lock link switch (Except driver's side) x Related wiring harnesses x METER 10 A fuse x Ignition switch x Related wiring harnesses

SECURITY AND LOCKS Termin al

V

W

X

Signal name

Connected to

Unlock input (Driver's Driver's door lock-link door lock-link switch) switch

Power supply

Hazard warning switch signal

BCMF

BCM

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Inspection item(s)

Driver's door unlocked

Wave pattern (See 09-14-117 Pattern1.) 1.0 or less

x Driver's door lock-link switch x Related wiring harnesses

Under any condition

B+

x Related wiring harnesses x BCM x Room 15 A fuse

Hazard flash

1.0 or less Wave pattern (See 09-14-117 Pattern2.)

x BCM x Related wiring harnesses

Driver's door locked

Other

Generated pulse (reference) Pattern1

0V

am2zzw0000349

x Oscilloscope setting: 1 V/DIV (Y): 2 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern2

0V

am2zzw0000462

x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y): 2 ms/DIV (X), DC range

End Of Sie

09-14–117

SECURITY AND LOCKS TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] Step

Procedure

id0914004374b3

Action after procedure

Disconnecting key from transmitter 1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the transmitter notch and remove the key from the transmitter by pressing the tab.

TAB

Go to the next step.

1

TRANSMITTER KEY

Notch position verification 1. Verify the position of the transmitter notch.

A-TYPE

B-TYPE

x For the A-type notch, go to Step 3. x For the B-type notch, go to Step 6.

2

NOTCH

NOTCH

Opening transmitter 1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the transmitter notch and open the transmitter.

3

09-14–118

Go to the next step.

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step

Procedure

Action after procedure

Battery removal 1. Press the hook in the direction of the arrow and remove the battery using the flathead screwdriver.

HOOK

4

Go to the next step.

BATTERY

Battery installation 1. Install the new battery (CR1620) with the positive (+) pole facing up.

HOOK

Go to Step 9.

5

Opening transmitter 1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the transmitter notch and open the transmitter.

Go to the next step.

6

Battery removal 1. Remove the battery by pressing it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

Go to the next step.

7

BATTERY

09-14–119

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step

Procedure

Action after procedure

Battery installation 1. Install the new battery (CR1620) with the plus pole facing down.

Go to the next step.

8

Battery removal 1. Align the upper and lower covers and close the transmitter.

Battery type 9

— Lithium battery CR1620

Go to the next step.

Battery life — Approx. 2 years (when used approx. 10 times/day) 2. Install the key to the transmitter. Verification of key and transmitter connection 1. When connecting the key to the transmitter, grip the key and the transmitter as shown in the figure and connect until a click sound is heard. Note x If the key is not completely connected to the transmitter, they may come apart.

Procedure is completed

10

End Of Sie TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0914004376b3

Note x Verify that the other transmitter is not being operated around the servicing area while updating the ID code. x After completing the work, remove the key from the steering lock and verify that all the door lock/unlock operation using the transmitter is correct.

09-14–120

SECURITY AND LOCKS

START Remove the key from the steering lock. Close all doors and liftgate/trunk lid. Open the driver-side door.

Insert the key into the steering lock.

Perform these procedures within 24 s.

Repeat the following three times. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then back to the LOCK position. Note Do not remove the key from the steering lock.

Open and close the driver-side door three times. Note Then leave the door open

Verify that the door lock actuators lock, then unlock.

NO

YES

Push any button on any single transmitter twice.

NO

Verify that the door lock actuators lock, then unlock. YES

If you have only one transmitter, push any button twice. If you have two or three transmitters, push any button on any of the other transmitters twice.

NO

Verify that the door lock actuators lock, then unlock. YES

If you have one or two transmitters, push any button on either transmitter twice. If you have three transmitters, push any button on the last transmitter twice.

NO

Verify that the door lock actuators lock, then unlock.

YES

END

am2zzw0000513

End Of Sie

09-14–121

SECURITY AND LOCKS ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004477b0

1. Pull out the auxiliary key.

adejjw00001676

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the notch in the transmitter and rotate it in the direction shown in the figure to open the transmitter.

adejjw00001677

3. Remove the battery.

adejjw00001678

4. Install the new battery (CR1620) with the positive pole facing down. 5. Align the upper and lower covers and close the transmitter.

adejjw00001679

09-14–122

SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. Insert the auxiliary key.

End Of Sie

adejjw00001705

ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004493b0

Caution x Do not place the following devices in the vehicle while programming, otherwise programming cannot be performed: — M-MDS — Personal computer — Devices that can send/receive radio waves x Verify that the other transmitter is not being operated around the servicing area during advanced key programming. Note x Use the M-MDS and start programming if the condition corresponds to the following: — No programmed advanced keys (two or more) — Keyless control module is replaced x If six advanced keys are already programmed, the programming mode does not launch. If programming is needed, use the M-MDS to erase the unnecessary advanced key programming. Two Programmed Advanced Keys Available 1. Bring two programmed advanced keys and one unprogrammed advanced key into the vehicle.

VALID KEY ADVANCED KEY 1

ADVANCED KEY 2

KEY FOR REGISTRATION ADVANCED KEY ADVANCED KEY am2zzw0000053

2. Close all doors. 3. Insert the auxiliary key into the ignition key cylinder. Note x Complete the procedures up to Step 7 within 30 s after the auxiliary key is inserted. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 5. Wait until the keyless indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates. (Turns off 3 s after ignition switch is turned to ON) 6. Press the UNLOCK button of advanced key 1. 7. Press the UNLOCK button of advanced key 2. 8. From the ignition switch in the ON position, turn the ignition switch in the order indicated below. x ACC_ONoACC_ONoACC_ON 9. Open/close the driver's door 3 times.

09-14–123

SECURITY AND LOCKS Note x After Step 9 is completed and the advanced key programming is activated, the door lock actuator operates to lock, and then operates to unlock. x If the door lock actuator does not operate, repeat the procedure from Step 2. 10. Press the UNLOCK button of the unprogrammed advanced key and wait approx. 5 s. Note x After Step 10 is completed and the advanced key is programmed, the door lock actuator operates to lock, and then operates to unlock. 11. If programming more advanced keys, remove the auxiliary key once, and then repeat the procedure from Step 2. Using the M-MDS 1. Fully lower the driver-side door glass. 2. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 3. Set the M-MDS outside the vehicle with its cable passing through the door glass opening. Caution x Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the cable. 4. After the vehicle is identified, select the following DLC-2 items from the initial screen of the M-MDS. x Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select "PATS Functions". x Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. Select "All Tests and Calibrations". 2. Select "PATS Functions". 5. Select the following from the screen menu. 1. Select “Program Additional Advanced Key”. 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.

am2zzw0000216

End Of Sie CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004496b0

1. Fully lower the driver-side door glass. 2. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 3. Pull out the M-MDS cable from the door glass opening and set the M-MDS outside the vehicle. Caution x Protect the cable and body contact area with a clean rag, otherwise they could be damaged. 4. After the vehicle is identified, select the following DLC-2 items from the initial screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select "Body". 2. Select "Security". 3. Select "PATS Functions". x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select "All Tests and Calibrations". 2. Select "PATS Functions". 5. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select “Advanced Key Code Erase and Program”. 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.

End Of Sie

09-14–124

am2zzw0000153

SECURITY AND LOCKS CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004397b0

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the CUSTOMIED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. 1. Select "Module Programming". 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select "Programmable Parameters". 2. Select "RKE". 4. Select the item name, and then select option. Item DLC-2 x Advanced Keyless Function (Disabled / Enabled) x Answer Back Buzzer Volume (Disabled / 5 — 10) x Advanced Key Battery Low Warning (Disabled / Enabled) x Prevention Function of Key Containment in Trunk or Liftgate (Disabled / Enabled) x Warning Buzzer Volume (5 — 10)

am2zzw0000216

End Of Sie KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004405b0

3HB, 5HB Vehicle Interior, Front 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the side wall. (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front console component. (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the keyless antenna (2) in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while pressing the keyless antenna tabs (1). 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

KEYLESS ANTENNA

CONNECTOR







am2zzw0000054

Vehicle Interior, Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–125

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Disconnect the connector. 3HB,5HB (Except AutoAlliance (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

5HB (AutoAlliance (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

CONNECTOR NUT

CONNECTOR NUT

2.0—8.0 N·m {21—81 kgf·cm, 18—70 in·lbf}

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

KEYLESS ANTENNA

KEYLESS ANTENNA am2zzw0000515

4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the keyless antenna. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Vehicle Exterior, Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the keyless antenna. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

KEYLESS ANTENNA

CONNECTOR SCREW

SCREW

KEYLESS ANTENNA am2zzw0000329

Vehicle Exterior, Driver's Door/Passenger's Door Note x The keyless antenna (vehicle exterior, driver's door/passenger's door) is built into the front outer handle. (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–126

SECURITY AND LOCKS

KEYLESS ANTENNA

am2zzw0000055

4SD Vehicle Interior, Front 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the side wall. (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front console component. (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the keyless antenna (2) in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while pressing the keyless antenna tabs (1). 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

KEYLESS ANTENNA

CONNECTOR







am2zzw0000054

Vehicle Interior, Center 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–127

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. 4. 5. 6.

Disconnect the connector. Remove the bolts. Remove the keyless antenna. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CONNECTOR NUT 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

KEYLESS ANTENNA am2zzw0000512

Vehicle Interior, Rear 1. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 4. Remove the C-pillar trim. (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the rear package trim. (See 09-17-68 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 6. Disconnect the connector. CONNECTOR

KEYLESS ANTENNA

am2ccw0000022

09-14–128

SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Remove the screw. 8. Remove the keyless antenna. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. SCREW

KEYLESS ANTENNA

am2ccw0000022

Vehicle Exterior, Rear 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the keyless antenna. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

KEYLESS ANTENNA SCREW

CONNECTOR KEYLESS ANTENNA SCREW am2ccw0000022

Vehicle Exterior, Driver's Door/Passenger's Door Note x The keyless antenna (vehicle exterior, driver's door/passenger's door) is built into the front outer handle. (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–129

SECURITY AND LOCKS End Of Sie KEYLESS ANTENNA

am2zzw0000055

KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004406b0

3HB, 5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove the nuts. 2.0—8.0 N·m — · 18— ·lbf}

NUT

KEYLESS BEEPER BRACKET am2zzw0000055

7. Press the keyless beeper tab aside using a tapewrapped flathead screwdriver. 8. Remove the keyless beeper from the bracket. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BRACKET

A

B

B A

KEYLESS BEEPER KEYLESS BEEPER FLAT HEAD SCREW DRIVER

TAB BRACKET

SEC. A—A

BRACKET

SEC. B—B am2zzw0000055

09-14–130

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove the nuts.

9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf}

NUT

KEYLESS BEEPER BRACKET am2zzw0000513

7. Press the keyless beeper tab aside using a tapewrapped flathead screwdriver. 8. Remove the keyless beeper from the bracket. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

A

B

BRACKET

B A

KEYLESS BEEPER

KEYLESS BEEPER FLAT HEAD SCREW DRIVER

TAB BRACKET

SEC. A—A

BRACKET

SEC. B—B am2ccw0000022

KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004416b0

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the keyless beeper. (See 09-14-130 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 6. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal and verify the keyless beeper sound operation. x If the beep sound cannot be verified, replace the keyless beeper.

09-14–131

SECURITY AND LOCKS

A

㪙

㪘

B adejjw00003254

End Of Sie REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004400b0

Note x The request switches are built into the front outer handles. (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

REQUEST SWITCH

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000054

REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004401b0

1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the front door glass so that the distance from the top of the front door glass to the upper part of the APPROX. 110 mm front beltline molding is approx. 110 mm {4.33 {4.33 in} in}. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT am2zzw0000519 DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door glass (See 09-12-7 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-12 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front door key cylinder (Driver’s side) (See 09-14-55 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (7) Front outer handle (See 09-14-17 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–132

SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Verify the continuity of request switch terminals A and D. A

D

A

D

am2zzw0000379

5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front outer handle.

End Of Sie

CONTINUITY REQUEST SWITCH

TERMINAL

A

D

PUSH (ON) NOT PUSH (OFF)

am2zzw0000379

COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004359b0

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Disconnect the coil antenna connector. STEERING LOCK Detach the coil antenna hooks and remove the coil antenna from the steering lock. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

COIL ANTENNA CONNECTOR COIL ANTENNA

TAB

am2zzw0000057

COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0914004359b3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-14–133

SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Disconnect the coil antenna connector. 4. Detach the coil antenna hooks and remove the coil antenna from the steering lock. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

STEERING LOCK

End Of Sie

COIL ANTENNA CONNECTOR COIL ANTENNA

TAB

am2zzw0000053

STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914004395b0

Caution x Do not place the following devices in the vehicle while programming, otherwise programming cannot be performed: — M-MDS — Personal computer — Devices that can send/receive radio waves Note x The steering lock unit and steering lock component are a single unit. Therefore, replace the steering lock component when replacing steering lock unit. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.]) x For this procedure, a programmed card key is necessary. If there is no programmed card key, perform the steering lock unit programming after the card key programming. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Bring the programmed card key into the vehicle. Fully lower the driver-side door glass. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. Pull out the M-MDS cable from the door glass opening and set the M-MDS outside the vehicle. Caution x Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the cable.

5. After the vehicle is identified, select the following DLC-2 items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select "Security". 3. Select "PATS Functions". x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select "All Tests and Calibrations". 2. Select "PATS Functions". 6. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming”. 7. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.

09-14–134

am2zzw0000153

SECURITY AND LOCKS End Of Sie INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091400809400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press the tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in the figure, and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow (2).

(1) (1) (1) (1) COVER TAB

COVER

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

(2) (1)

am2zzw0000046

3. Remove the connector under the condition from procedure 2. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000075

INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION

id091400819400

1. Remove the intruder sensor with the connector connected. 2. Measure the intruder sensor terminal voltage using the short wiring harness connector in the position shown in the figure. Note x The intruder sensor cannot be connected to a tester due to its water-resistance processing, therefore the short wiring harness connector is used for measuring the terminal voltage. x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in CONNECTOR the table, inspect the short wiring harness am2zzw0000260 connector for continuity. (See 09-14-136 Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector.)If the short wiring harness connecter is normal, inspect the parts under "Inspection items”. — If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the intruder sensor.

09-14–135

SECURITY AND LOCKS Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR D

C

B

am2zzw0000348

Terminal

Signal name

Connected to

B

GND

Body ground

C

DATA

Theft-deterrent control module

D

Power supply

BCM

Measurement Voltage (V) Inspection item(s) condition Under any 1.0 or less Ground condition Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any B+ BCM condition

Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector 1. Verify that the continuity between the short wiring harness connector terminals is as indicated in the table. x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the short wiring harness connector. INTRUDER SENSOR SHORT WIRING HANESS CONNECTOR

INTRUDER SENSOR WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR

D

C

B E

C B

: Continuity Test condition

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN CONNECTOR SIDE D

C

B

SHORT HARNESS CONNECTOR SIDE E

C

B

Under any condition

am2zzw0000348

End Of Sie IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id0914004419b0

Foreword x When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the immobilizer system-related parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer system-related parts programming, Select programming procedures according to the service. (See 09-14-137 Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.) Caution x If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle

09-14–136

SECURITY AND LOCKS may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts. Remove any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from the key when programming immobilizer system-related parts. x If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related parts may fail. Do not bring any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle when programming immobilizer system-related parts. — Advanced key — M-MDS — Personal computer — Devices that can send/receive radio waves x If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming mode cancels. Therefore, do not start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the immobilizer system-related parts programming. x If an advanced key is near the vehicle during immobilizer system-related parts programming, it may be programmed mistakenly. Keep advanced keys 1 m away from the vehicle unless indicated in the procedure. Note x The “Valid key” or “Valid advanced key” referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the engine. x Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start. x A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle. x The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS. x Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS operation. Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming 1. Verify that the room fuse is equipped. 2. Select applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer system-related parts. Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table No.

Service

1

Have two or more valid keys Additional key programming

2

Have one valid key or valid advanced key Disable programming using valid keys Enable programming using valid keys

3

Additional key programming procedure setting

4

Programming due to PCM replacement

5

Programming due to steering lock unit replacement

6

Programming due to keyless control module replacement

7

Programming due to simultaneous replacement of immobilizer system-related parts x PCM x Keyless control module x Steering lock unit

8

Programming due to coil antenna replacement

9

Programming after keyless receiver replacement

Programming procedure (See 09-14-138 No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).) (See 09-14-139 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the MMDS).) (See 09-14-140 No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing.) (See 09-14-141 No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.) (See 09-14-142 No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement.) (See 09-14-144 No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement.) (See 09-14-147 No.7 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer Systemrelated Parts (PCM, Keyless Control Module, and Steering Lock Unit).) Programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts is not necessary Programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts is not necessary

M-MDS Connecting Procedure Note x Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system. 1. Fully lower the door glass.

09-14–137

SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 3. Place the M-MDS outside the vehicle. Caution x Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the cable.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000210

No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys) Conditions x Have two or more valid keys. Note x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS. x If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared. x If “Customer spare key programming disable” is selected, perform additional key programming using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-139 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).) Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

KEY FOR REGISTRATION KEY 3

am2zzw0000379

Step 1

2

3

Procedure START ENGINE 1. Start the engine using key 1. 2. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. LAUNCH PROGRAMMING MODE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1. 2. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 1. 3. Remove key 1. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 2. 5. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 2. 6. Remove key 2. PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 3. 2. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 3. Remove key 3. 4. Are there other keys to be programmed?

09-14–138

Action after procedure Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Yes

Go back to Step 2.

No

Go to the next step.

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 4

Procedure VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMED CORRECTLY x Verify that the engine can start and run for approx. 5 s or more using all the programmed keys.

Action after procedure

Procedure is completed Note x When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5.s or more before starting the engine using the next key.

No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS) Conditions x There is only one valid key. Or, there is an advanced key which can start the engine. Note x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS. x If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared. Procedure

VALID KEY OR ADVANCED KEY

OR KEY 1

ADVANCED KEY

KEY FOR RESISTRATION KEY 2

am2zzw0000055

Step 1

Procedure START ENGINE 1. Start the engine using the key 1 or the advanced key. Caution x When starting the engine with key 1, key programming may not be performed correctly if the advanced key is inside the vehicle. Do not place the advanced key in the vehicle when starting the engine with key 1. x When starting the engine with the advanced key, remove the advanced key from the vehicle after the engine is started.

Action after procedure

Go to the next step.

2. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

09-14–139

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 2

Procedure PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 2.

Action after procedure Change the key and repeat Step 2.

Note x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to Yes perform the procedure as indicated. 3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Program Additional Ignition Key 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. Note x After executing the above menu, “The operation is successful” is displayed. This indicates that the programming of the key currently in the ignition switch ON position has been completed.

3

4

6. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 7. Remove key 2. 8. Are there other keys to be programmed? CLOSE THE M-MDS 1. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMED CORRECTLY Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed key. Note x When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5.s or more before starting the engine using the next key.

No

Note x Additional key programming can be performed using the procedure in No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Procedure is completed

No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing Note x This procedure is performed for disabling the No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys). x The setting is “Customer spare key programming enable” when the vehicle is new or the keyless control module is replaced with a new one.

09-14–140

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure Step 1

Procedure CHANGE CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the valid key or an unprogrammed key).

Action after procedure

Note x If an unprogrammed key is used, the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min. However, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. Procedure is completed 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Select either of the following from the M-MDS menu to change the additional key programming procedure. — When “Customer Spare Key Programming Enable” is selected: The additional key programming procedure using valid keys is enabled. — When “Customer Spare Key Programming Disable” is selected: The additional key programming procedure using valid keys is disabled. 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 6. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement Conditions x Prepare a valid key or an advanced key that can start the engine. Procedure

VALID KEY OR ADVANCED KEY

OR KEY 1

ADVANCED KEY

am2zzw0000055

Step 1

Procedure REPLACE THE PCM Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and configuration. (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].)

Action after procedure

Go to the next step.

09-14–141

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 2

Procedure

Action after procedure

PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using the valid key or the valid advanced key. Note x Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 23 is displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for approx 3 s, and then turns off. 4. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. Go to the next step. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 5. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 7. Select replaced parts (PCM) according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu.

3

8. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 10.Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 11.Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 12.Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. VERIFY PROGRAMMING IS PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys. 2. Can the engine be started?

Yes

No

Procedure is completed Perform the corresponding DTC inspection to repair the malfunctioning part.

No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement Note x Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys after the replacement. Conditions x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement. Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

am2zzw0000379

09-14–142

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 1

2

Procedure REPLACE STEERING LOCK UNIT Replace the steering lock unit. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].)

Action after procedure

Go to the next step.

CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1. Note x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated.

3

4

5

Go to the next step. 3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Ignition Key Code Erase and Program 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING Go to the next step. 1. Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS. 2. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen. PERFORM Steering Lock Unit Programming 1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Complete the Steering Lock Unit Programming according to the directions on the MMDS. (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED Go to the next step. KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 3. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 5. Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2. 6. Remove the programmed card key from the vehicle. VERIFY KEY 1 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 1. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 1.

IGNITION SWITCH

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

LOCK SECURITY LIGHT

ON

a Approx. 3s

1

Go to the next step. b a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

DISPLAY METHOD

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

09-14–143

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 6

Procedure VERIFY KEY 2 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 2. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 2. 4. Are there other keys to be programmed?

IGNITION SWITCH

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

LOCK SECURITY LIGHT

ON

DISPLAY METHOD a

Approx. 3s

1

No

b a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

Action after procedure Repeat Step 6 Yes using each programmed key.

Go to the next step.

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

7

VERIFY ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Bring the programmed advanced key into the vehicle. 2. Close all doors. 3. Remove the key from the key cylinder and place it on the front passenger's seat. 4. Start the engine using the advanced key. 5. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 6. After verifying that the keyless warning light turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. START (ENGINE START) IGNITION ON SWITCH LOCK SECURITY LIGHT KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

ON

Procedure is completed

Approx. 3s

OFF ON OFF Approx. 1 s

No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement Note x Before beginning the procedure, verify that the customer has turned in all of the advanced keys and keys for the vehicle. x The engine cannot be started unless an advanced key and two or more keys are programmed after the replacement. Conditions x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement. x Have one or more advanced keys to be programmed after the replacement.

09-14–144

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

KEY FOR RESISTRATION

am2zzw0000056

Step 1

2

Procedure REPLACE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Replace the keyless control module. (See 09-14-98 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1.

Action after procedure Go to the next step.

Note x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated.

3

4

5

3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 6. Select replaced part “RKE” according to the directions on the M-MDS. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu. CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS 1. Select “Ignition Key Code Erase and Program” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS. PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING 1. Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS. 2. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen. PERFORM ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING 1. Select “Program Additional Advanced Key” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Program the advanced key according to the directions on the M-MDS. 3. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

09-14–145

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 6

7

Procedure Action after procedure PERFORM Steering Lock Unit Programming 1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Complete the Steering Lock Unit Programming according to the directions on the MMDS. (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED Go to the next step. KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 3. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 5. Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2. 6. Remove the programmed card key from the vehicle. VERIFY KEY 1 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 1. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 1.

IGNITION SWITCH

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

LOCK SECURITY LIGHT

ON

a Approx. 3s

1

Go to the next step. b a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

DISPLAY METHOD

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

8

VERIFY KEY 2 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 2. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 2. 4. Are there other keys to be programmed?

IGNITION SWITCH

ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

Approx. 3s

Go to the next step.

1 b a

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

09-14–146

No

DISPLAY METHOD a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

Repeat Step 8 using each programmed key.

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON LOCK

SECURITY LIGHT

Yes

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 8

Procedure VERIFY ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Bring the programmed advanced key into the vehicle. 2. Close all doors. 3. Remove the key from the key cylinder and place it on the front passenger's seat. 4. Start the engine using the advanced key. 5. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. START (ENGINE START) IGNITION ON SWITCH LOCK SECURITY LIGHT KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

Action after procedure

Procedure is completed Approx. 3s

ON OFF ON OFF Approx. 1 s

No.7 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM, Keyless Control Module, and Steering Lock Unit) Caution x The menu and execution sequence of the M-MDS vary depending on the type of replaced unit and parts. Perform the procedures referring to the following table. M-MDS menu (1): Parameter Reset (2): Ignition Key Code Erase and Program (3): Program Additional Advanced Key (4): Steering Lock Unit Programming M-MDS execution menu/ sequence

Replacement part Keyless control module and PCM Keyless control module and steering lock unit

*1

(1)o(2)o(3)o(4) Keyless control module, PCM, and steering lock unit

PCM and steering lock unit *1

*1

(1)o(2)o(4)

Conditions x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement. x Have one or more advanced keys to be programmed after the replacement. Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement.

*1 : Because the steering lock unit is integrated with the ignition key cylinder, the key must also be replaced when replacing the steering lock unit.

09-14–147

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

KEY FOR RESISTRATION

am2zzw0000056

Step 1 2

Procedure REPLACE UNITS OR PARTS Replace the unit or parts. PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-137 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1.

Action after procedure Go to the next step.

Note x Although the security light flashes or illuminates and DTC 15 or 23 is displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure.

3

4

5

3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 6. Select replaced parts according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. — If the PCM is replaced: Select “PCM”. — If the keyless control module is replaced: Select“ RKE”. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu. CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS 1. Select “Ignition Key Code Erase and Program” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS. PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING 1. Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS. 2. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen. PERFORM ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING 1. Select “Program Additional Advanced Key” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Program the advanced key according to the directions on the M-MDS. 3. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen.

09-14–148

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 6

7

Procedure Action after procedure PERFORM Steering Lock Unit Programming 1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Complete the Steering Lock Unit Programming according to the directions on the MMDS. (See 09-14-134 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED Go to the next step. KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) 3. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 5. Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2. 6. Remove the programmed card key from the vehicle. VERIFY KEY 1 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 1. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 1.

IGNITION SWITCH

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

LOCK SECURITY LIGHT

ON

a Approx. 3s

1

Go to the next step. b a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

DISPLAY METHOD

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

8

VERIFY KEY 2 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Start the engine using key 2. 2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 2. 4. Are there other keys to be programmed?

IGNITION SWITCH

ON

NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS

No

Go to the next step.

DISPLAY METHOD a

Approx. 3s

1 b a

OFF KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

Repeat Step 8 using each programmed key.

EXAMPLE

START (ENGINE START) ON LOCK

SECURITY LIGHT

Yes

ON 2 OFF Approx. 1 s

b DISPLAY METHOD

a 3 b a : Approx. 0.3 s b : Approx. 0.9 s

09-14–149

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 9

Procedure VERIFY ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Bring the programmed advanced key into the vehicle. 2. Close all doors. 3. Remove the key from the key cylinder and place it on the front passenger's seat. 4. Start the engine using the advanced key. 5. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. START (ENGINE START) IGNITION ON SWITCH LOCK SECURITY LIGHT KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT

ON

Action after procedure

Procedure is completed Approx. 3s

OFF ON OFF Approx. 1 s

End Of Sie IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] id0914004419b3

Foreword x When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the immobilizer system-related parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer system-related parts programming, Select programming procedures according to the service. (See 09-14-150 Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.) Caution x If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts. Remove any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from the key when programming immobilizer system-related parts. x If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related parts may fail. Do not bring any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle when programming immobilizer system-related parts. — M-MDS — Personal computer — Devices that can send/receive radio waves x If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming mode cancels. Therefore, do not start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the immobilizer system-related parts programming. Note x The “Valid key” referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the engine. x Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start. x A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle. x The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS. x Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS operation. Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming 1. Verify that the room fuse is equipped. 2. Select applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer system-related parts.

09-14–150

SECURITY AND LOCKS Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table No.

Service

1

Have two or more valid keys Additional key programming

2

Have one valid key or none Disable programming using valid keys Enable programming using valid keys

3

Additional key programming procedure setting

4

Programming due to PCM replacement

5

Programming due to instrument cluster replacement

6

Programming due to simultaneous replacement of immobilizer system-related parts x PCM x Instrument cluster

7

Programming due to coil antenna replacement

Programming procedure (See 09-14-151 No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).) (See 09-14-152 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the MMDS).) (See 09-14-153 No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing.) (See 09-14-154 No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.) (See 09-14-155 No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Instrument Cluster Replacement.) (See 09-14-156 No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer Systemrelated Parts (PCM and Instrument Cluster).) Programming of immobilizer systemrelated parts is not necessary

M-MDS Connecting Procedure Note x Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system. 1. Fully lower the door glass. 2. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 3. Place the M-MDS outside the vehicle. Caution x Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the cable.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000214

No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys) Conditions x Have two or more valid keys. Note x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS. x If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared. x If “Customer spare key programming disable” is selected, perform additional key programming using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-152 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).)

09-14–151

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

KEY FOR RESISTRATION KEY 3

am2zzw0000056

Step 1

2

3

Procedure

Action after procedure

LAUNCH PROGRAMMING MODE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1. 2. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 1. Go to the next step. 3. Remove key 1. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 2. 5. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 2. 6. Remove key 2. PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING Yes Go back to Step 1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 3. 2. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. No Go to the next step. 3. Remove key 3. 4. Are there other keys to be programmed? VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMING IS CORRECT x Verify that the engine can start and run for approx. 5 s or more using all the programmed keys. Procedure is completed Note x When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5.s or more before starting the engine using the next key.

No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS) Conditions x There is only one valid key , or none. Note x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS. x If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared.

09-14–152

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY FOR RESISTRATION KEY 1

am2zzw0000214

Step 1

Procedure PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-151 M-MDS Connecting Procedure) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1.

Action after procedure Change the key and repeat Step 1.

Note x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to Yes perform the procedure as indicated. 3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Program Additional Ignition Key 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. Note x After executing the above menu, “This operation is successful” is displayed. This indicates that the programming of the key currently in the ignition switch ON position has been completed.

2

3

6. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 7. Remove key 1. 8. Are there other keys to be programmed? CLOSE THE M-MDS 1. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMING IS CORRECT Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed key. Note x When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5.s or more before starting the engine using the next key.

No

Note x Additional key programming can be performed using the procedure in No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Procedure is completed

No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing Note x This procedure is performed for disabling the No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).

09-14–153

SECURITY AND LOCKS x The setting is “Customer spare key programming enable” when the vehicle is new or the keyless control module is replaced with a new one. Procedure Step 1

Procedure CHANGE CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-151 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the valid key or an unprogrammed key).

Action after procedure

Note x If an unprogrammed key is used, the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min. However, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Body”. Procedure is completed 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 4. Select either of the following from the M-MDS menu to change the additional key programming procedure. — When “Customer Spare Key Programming Enable” is selected: The additional key programming procedure using valid keys is enabled. — When “Customer Spare Key Programming Disable” is selected: The additional key programming procedure using valid keys is disabled. 5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 6. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement Conditions x Have two or more valid keys. Procedure

VALID KEY KEY

am2zzw0000379

Step 1

Procedure REPLACE PCM Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and configuration. (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-16 PCM CONFIGURATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-19 PCM CONFIGURATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40A-28 PCM CONFIGURATION [ZJ, ZY].)

09-14–154

Action after procedure

Go to the next step.

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 2

Procedure

Action after procedure

PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-151 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a valid key. Note x Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 23 is displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 4. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 5. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 7. Select replaced parts “PCM” according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu.

3

8. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 10.Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 11.Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 12.Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. VERIFY PROGRAMMING IS PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys. 2. Can the engine be started?

Go to the next step.

Yes

No

Procedure is completed Perform the corresponding DTC inspection to repair the malfunctioning part.

No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Instrument Cluster Replacement Note x Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys after the replacement. Conditions x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement. Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

am2zzw0000380

09-14–155

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 1

2

Procedure Action after procedure REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform instrument Go to the next step. cluster replacement and configuration. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-151 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a valid key. Note x Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 4. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 5. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 7. Select replaced parts “IC” according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu.

3

4

5

8. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen. CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS 1. Select “Ignition Key Code Erase and Program” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS. PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING 1. Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS. 2. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 5. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 7. Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2. VERIFY PROGRAMMING IS PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys. 2. Can the engine be started?

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Yes

No

Procedure is completed Perform the corresponding DTC inspection to repair the malfunctioning part.

No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM and Instrument Cluster) Note x Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys after the replacement. Conditions x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement.

09-14–156

SECURITY AND LOCKS Procedure

VALID KEY KEY 1

KEY 2

am2zzw0000380

Step 1

2

3

Procedure Action after procedure REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER. Refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform instrument Go to the next step. cluster replacement and configuration. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) REPLACE PCM Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and configuration. (See 01-40C-5 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) Go to the next step. (See 01-40B-6 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40A-8 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40C-16 PCM CONFIGURATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].) (See 01-40B-19 PCM CONFIGURATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo].) (See 01-40A-28 PCM CONFIGURATION [ZJ, ZY].) PERFORM PARAMETER RESET 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. (See 09-14-151 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a valid key. Note x Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure as indicated. 3. Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 4. After vehicle identification, Select following from the M-MDS initial screen. — Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. Select “Body”. 2. Select “Security”. 3. Select “PATS function”. — Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. Select “All Tests and Calibrations”. 2. Select “PATS Functions”. 5. Then, select an item from the screen menu. x Parameter Reset 6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. 7. Select replaced parts according to the directions on the M-MDS screen. — If the instrument cluster is replaced: Select “IC”. — If the PCM is replaced: Select “PCM”. Caution x At this time, do not Select other parts from the M-MDS menu.

4

5

8. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen. CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS 1. Select “Ignition Key Code Erase and Program” from the M-MDS screen menu. 2. Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS. PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING 1. Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS. 2. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select “Finish (this menu)”. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 5. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 7. Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

09-14–157

SECURITY AND LOCKS Step 6

Procedure VERIFY PROGRAMMING IS PERFORMED CORRECTLY 1. Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys. 2. Can the engine be started?

Action after procedure Procedure is Yes completed Perform the corresponding DTC inspection to repair No the malfunctioning part.

End Of Sie SECURITY ACCESS PROCEDURE 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select the "Body" 2. Select the "Security" 3. Select the “PATS Functions” x When using the PDS (Pocket PC) 1. Select the "All Tests and Calibrations" 2. Select the "PATS Functions" DLC-2 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. x Program Additional Advanced Key x Advanced Key Code Erase and Program x Steering Lock Unit Programming x Program Additional Ignition Key x Ignition Key Code Erase and Program x Customer Spare Key Programming Enable x Customer Spare Key Programming Disable x Parameter Reset 4. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.

End Of Sie

09-14–158

id091400436400

am2zzw0000219

EXTERIOR TRIM

09-16

EXTERIOR TRIM

EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Standard Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sport Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . .

09-16–2 09-16–2 09-16–3 09-16–4 09-16–5 09-16–5 09-16–5 09-16–6 09-16–7 09-16–7 09-16–8 09-16–9 09-16–9 09-16–10

REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–10 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–10 REAR FLAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–11 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION . . . . . . 09-16–12 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL . . . . . . 09-16–12 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL [3HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–13 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–14 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION [3HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–15 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–17 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL [4SD] . . . . . 09-16–18 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . 09-16–19 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–20 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–21 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . 09-16–22 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL [3HB] . . . 09-16–22 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION . . . . 09-16–22 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION [3HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–23

End of Toc SOKYU_WM: EXTERIOR TRIM

09-16–1

EXTERIOR TRIM EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB]

id0916004454a1

4SD 1

2

4 5

3

8

9

6

7

10

11

am2zzw0000499 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

Radiator grille (See 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Roof molding (See 09-16-10 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-12 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION.) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-9 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Splash shield (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-16–2

7

8

9

10

11

Mudguard (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Door sash film (See 09-16-22 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-22 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION.) Extractor chamber (See 09-16-7 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-18 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL [4SD].) (See 09-16-20 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION [4SD].)

EXTERIOR TRIM 5HB 1

2

4 5

3

9

8

7

10

11

12

6

13 am2zzw0000250 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Radiator grille (See 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Roof molding (See 09-16-10 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-12 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION.) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-9 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Splash shield (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Side step molding (See 09-16-12 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-14 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION.)

8

9

10

11

12

13

Mudguard (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-17 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-19 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Door sash film (See 09-16-22 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-22 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION.) Extractor chamber (See 09-16-7 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

09-16–3

EXTERIOR TRIM EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] 1

2

id0916004454z3

4 5

3

9

8

7

10

6

11 am2zzw0000339 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

Radiator grille (See 09-16-5 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Roof molding (See 09-16-10 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-12 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION.) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-10 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Splash shield (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

09-16–4

7

8

9

10

11

Side step molding (See 09-16-13 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL [3HB].) (See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION [3HB].) Mudguard (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-17 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-19 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.) Door sash film (See 09-16-22 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL [3HB].) (See 09-16-23 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION [3HB].) Extractor chamber (See 09-16-7 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

EXTERIOR TRIM COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091600444000

1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the front fender molding. (See 09-10-17 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Disconnect the windshield washer hose and the connector. 4. Remove the fasteners. COWL GRILLE TAB

WINDSHIELD FASTENER

TAB

(2) COWL GRILLE

TOP END OF FASTENER A

(1)

COWL PANEL FASTENER A am2zzw0000373

Note x A screwdriver or other tool cannot be used to remove fasteners from the vehicle body panel. Therefore, insert a hand into the back side of the cowl panel, rotate fasteners A in the direction of the arrow (1), and press them up in the direction of the arrow (2). 5. Pull the cowl grille and remove it while detaching tabs. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091600468000

Standard Type 1. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-16–5

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Remove the fasteners. TAB

B

FASTENER

B

A

A RADIATOR GRILLE

TAB

FRONT BUMPER am2zzw0000189

3. Press the tab in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and detach the front bumper from the radiator grille. 4. Remove the radiator grille. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Sport Type 1. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the screws, and remove the radiator grille. SCREW

RADIATOR GRILLE

FRONT BUMPER am2zzw0000189

09-16–6

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Remove the fasteners. RADIATOR GRILLE REINFORCEMENT

FASTENER

TAB

TAB

FRONT BUMPER am2zzw0000189

4. Press the tab in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and detach the front bumper from the radiator grille reinforcement. 5. Remove the radiator grille reinforcement. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091600451200

1. Open the front door. 2. Pull the sail garnish in the direction shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie CLIP

CLIP

SAIL GARNISH am2zzw0000189

EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091600449500

1. Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-9 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (See 09-10-25 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 4. Pull the extractor chamber in the direction of the arrow (1), (2) shown in the figure using a fastener remover and remove the extractor chamber. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

(1) EXTRACTOR CHAMBER

(2) am2zzw0000192

09-16–7

EXTERIOR TRIM MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091600467600

1. Remove screw A joined to the front bumper.

FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW A

am2zzw0000190

2. Remove fastener B. FRONT FENDER PANEL

MUDGUARD FRONT

FRONT BUMPER

FASTENER B am2zzw0000499

3. After removing screw C and fastener D, insert a fastener remover in the position indicated by the arrow in the figure and detach the mudguard from the front fender panel.

FRONT FENDER PANEL MUDGUARD

SCREW C

MUDGUARD

FASTENER D

FRONT FENDER PANEL am2zzw0000499

09-16–8

EXTERIOR TRIM 4. Remove fasteners E, then remove the mudguard in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

FASTENER E

FASTENER E

FASTENER E

FASTENER E

FRONT

REAR

am2zzw0000499

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091600461200

1. Remove the screws A and B, then remove the splash shield in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

REAR

End Of Sie

SCREW B SCREW A am2zzw0000451

FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091600447700

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fully open the front door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-16–9

EXTERIOR TRIM 6. Remove clip A using a fastener remover and pull the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure. 7. Rotate the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching tab B. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT

(1) B (2)

End Of Sie

B

B

B

B

FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING

A

CLIP • •

TAB • • adejjw00003032

FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0916004477z3

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fully open the front door glass. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove clip A using a fastener remover and pull the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure. 7. Rotate the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure and remove it (1) while detaching tab B. (2) 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

B

A

B

B

B

B

B

FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING

CLIP A

TAB B am2zzw0000339

REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. Fully open the rear door glass. 2. Remove clip A using a fastener remover and pull up the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure. 3. Remove clip C using a fastener remover and pull up the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure. 4. Rotate the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching tabs B. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

id091600447900

REAR BELTLINE MOLDING (1) (2)

C

B

B

B

(3)

B

CLIP • •

A

TAB • •

CLIP C am2zzw0000189

ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL id091600447800

1. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the position shown in the figure. 2. Rotate the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the roof molding from the T-stud (figure A).

09-16–10

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Rotate the roof molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, pull up the roof molding in the direction of the arrow (3) while detaching it from the clip (figure B), and then remove the roof molding. R ROOF MOLDING CLIP FRONT

T-STUD T-STUD

TOP VIEW (3)

CLEAN RAG (2) (2) (1)

(1)

B

R ROOF MOLDING A

CLIP

R ROOF MOLDING

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

(2) T-STUD CLIP am2zzw0000373

End Of Sie REAR FLAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091600806600

1. Remove the fastener. 2. Remove the bolts A and B.

REAR

REAR FLAP

BOLT A 0.8—1.2 N· m {8.2—12 kgf· cm, 7.1—10 in· lbf} FASTENER BOLT B 0.8—1.2 N· m {8.2—12 kgf· cm, 7.1—10 in· lbf} am2zzw0000340

3. Remove the rear flap. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

09-16–11

EXTERIOR TRIM ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION

id091600447600

1. Install the roof molding to the front T-stud. FRONT

R ROOF MOLDING b

a

T-STUD T-STUD b CLIP

a

TOP VIEW

T-STUD

CLIP SEC. b—b

SEC. a—a

am2zzw0000189

2. Hook the roof molding to the clip and attach the roof molding while pressing it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 3. Install the roof molding to the rear T-stud.

End Of Sie SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL id091600717600

1. Remove the rivet. 2. Cut the double-sided adhesive tape shown in the figure using a utility knife and pull clips A and B in the direction of the arrow to remove them. Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE SIDE STEP MOLDING RIVET

FRONT

CLIP A CLIP B CLIP A, B

am2zzw0000450

3. Cut the double-sided adhesive tape shown in the figure using a utility knife and pull clip B in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

SIDE STEP MOLDING

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

CLIP B

REAR

CLIP B

am2zzw0000450

09-16–12

EXTERIOR TRIM 4. Slide the side step molding in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the side step molding from clips B and C. 5. After removing the side step molding, remove clips B and C from the body using a fastener remover.

SIDE STEP MOLDING

End Of Sie

CLIP B

FRONT

REAR

FRONT CLIP C SIDE STEP MOLDING

REAR

CLIP C

CLIP B

am2zzw0000450

SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL [3HB]

id0916007176z3

1. Remove the rivet. 2. Cut the double-sided adhesive tape shown in the figure using a utility knife and pull clips A and B in the direction of the arrow to remove them. Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE SIDE STEP MOLDING RIVET

FRONT

CLIP A CLIP B CLIP A

CLIP B

am2zzw0000451

3. Cut the double-sided adhesive tape shown in the figure using a utility knife and pull clip B in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

SIDE STEP MOLDING

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE CLIP B

CLIP B

REAR am2zzw0000451

09-16–13

EXTERIOR TRIM 4. Slide the side step molding in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the side step molding from clips B and C. 5. After removing the side step molding, remove clips B and C from the body using a fastener remover.

SIDE STEP MOLDING

CLIP B

End Of Sie FRONT

REAR SIDE STEP MOLDING

CLIP C

CLIP B

CLIP C

CLIP C

am2zzw0000451

SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION

id091600717700

Note x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been adhered to a new side step molding for installation. x When a side step molding is to be reused, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the side step molding. 2. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the DOUBLE-SIDED DOUBLE-SIDED position shown in the figure. ADHESIVE TAPE

ADHESIVE TAPE

1. Install new clips A, B, C to the side step molding.

REAR-SIDE

FRONT-SIDE am2zzw0000190

CLIP B

CLIP C

CLIP A, B

CLIP B CLIP A CLIP C

CLIP B

am2zzw0000451

09-16–14

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Peel the tape backing of double-sided adhesive tape to the position shown in the figure.

BACKING OF DOBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

BACKING OF DOBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

FRONT-SIDE

REAR-SIDE am2zzw0000190

3. Install the side step molding while pushing the clip A, B and C installation area shown in the figure. SIDE STEP MOLDING CLIP A

CLIP B FRONT

REAR

FRONT CLIP C SIDE STEP MOLDING

REAR

am2zzw0000451

4. Press the position shown in the figure.

FRONT-SIDE

REAR-SIDE am2zzw0000191

5. Install the rivet.

End Of Sie

RIVET

FRONT am2zzw0000451

SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION [3HB] id0916007177z3

Note x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been adhered to a new side step molding for installation. x When a side step molding is to be reused, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the side step molding.

09-16–15

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the position shown in the figure.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

1. Install new clips A, B, C to the side step molding.

REAR-SIDE

FRONT-SIDE am2zzw0000340

CLIP B

CLIP B CLIP B CLIP A CLIP C

am2zzw0000340

2. Peel the tape backing of double-sided adhesive tape to the position shown in the figure.

BACKING OF DOBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

FRONT-SIDE

BACKING OF DOBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

REAR-SIDE am2zzw0000340

09-16–16

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Install the side step molding while pushing the clip A, B and C installation area shown in the figure. SIDE STEP MOLDING

CLIP B

FRONT CLIP A

CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP C

REAR SIDE STEP MOLDING

CLIP C

CLIP C

am2zzw0000451

4. Press the position shown in the figure.

FRONT-SIDE

REAR-SIDE am2zzw0000340

5. Install the rivet.

End Of Sie

RIVET

FRONT am2zzw0000451

REAR SPOILER REMOVAL id091600451500

1. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the nuts.

NUT am2zzw0000192

09-16–17

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Peel off double-sided adhesive tape from the position shown in the figure using a utility knife. Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.

REAR SPOILER DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

am2zzw0000192

4. Pull up the end of the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the clips.

CLIP CLIP

END OF THE REAR SPOILER

adejjw00003311

5. Pull up the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the guide pins.

End Of Sie

GUIDE PIN

GUIDE PIN

am2zzw0000192

REAR SPOILER REMOVAL [4SD] id0916004515z7

1. Peel off double-sided adhesive tape from the position shown in the figure using a utility knife.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE am2zzw0000508

09-16–18

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Pull up the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow (1), (2), (3 ) shown in the figure and remove the clips. 3. Remove the rear spoiler.

End Of Sie

REAR SPOILER

CLIP

(3) (2) (1)

CLIP

am2zzw0000508

REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION

id091600451600

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife. Note x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been adhered to a new rear spoiler for installation. 1. When installing a new rear spoiler, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the liftgate. 2. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the liftgate. 2. If the rear spoiler is to be reused, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the rear spoiler and liftgate after removal. 2. Remove any grease and dirt from the double-sided adhesive tape affixing area. 3. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the DOUBLE-SIDE ADHESIVE TAPE position shown in the figure. Note x Use the 3M 5079-type of double-sided adhesive tape, or the equivalent.

am2zzw0000192

09-16–19

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Install the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while inserting the guide pins in the vehicle side. GUIDE PIN

GUIDE PIN

am2zzw0000192

4. Press the end of the rear spoiler and affix doublesided adhesive tape while installing the clips.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE CLIP CLIP END OF THE REAR SPOILER

adejjw00003325

5. Tighten the nuts. 6. Install the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

NUT 7.8—9.8 N·m {80—90 kgf·cm,70—86 in·lbf} am2zzw0000193

REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION [4SD] id0916004516z7

Warning x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility knife. Note x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been adhered to a new rear spoiler for installation. 1. When installing a new rear spoiler, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the trunk lid. 2. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the trunk lid. 2. If the rear spoiler is to be reused, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the rear spoiler and trunk lid after removal. 2. Remove any grease and dirt from the double-sided adhesive tape affixing area.

09-16–20

EXTERIOR TRIM 3. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the position shown in the figure.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

Note x Use the 3M GT7116-type of double-sided adhesive tape, or the equivalent.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE am2zzw0000497

3. Install the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure while inserting the clips in the vehicle side.

CLIP

REAR SPOILER (1) (2)

(3)

CLIP

am2zzw0000497

4. Press the rear spoiler and affix double-sided adhesive tapes.

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE

End Of Sie

DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE am2zzw0000498

REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091600445700

1. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-16–21

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Remove the screw from the inside of the vehicle. 3. Pull the rear door garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clip. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

REAR DOOR GARNISH SCREW CLIP

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000192

DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL

id091600445500

1. Partially peel back the glass run channel. 2. Partially peel back the door weatherstrip. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-7 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Peel off the door sash film by pulling it outward from one end. Note x Slowly remove the door sash film because it could tear easily.

End Of Sie DOOR SASH FILM

am2zzw0000192

DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL [3HB]

id0916004455z3

1. Partially peel back the glass run channel. 2. Partially peel back the door weatherstrip. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-10 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 4. Peel off the door sash film by pulling it outward from one end. Note x Slowly remove the door sash film because it could tear easily.

End Of Sie DOOR SASH FILM

am2zzw0000192

DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION id091600445600

1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the door.

09-16–22

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Cut away the unused portion along the dotted lines. 3. Peel off the tape backing and attach the door sash film onto the door as shown in the figure. UNUSED PORTION

DOTTED LINES

am2zzw0000192

C A A

a

c

C

B

B

b

b

a c

a a

SEC. B—B SEC. A—A

SEC. C—C adejjw00003343

Standard clearance a: 4.0 mm {0.16 in} b: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in} c: 3.0 mm {0.12 in} or more 4. Peel off the transparent protective film on the door sash film. 5. Install the following parts: (1) Rear door garnish (See 09-16-21 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-10 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-9 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION [3HB] id0916004456z3

1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the door.

09-16–23

EXTERIOR TRIM 2. Cut away the unused portion along the dotted lines. 3. Peel off the tape backing and attach the door sash film onto the door as shown in the figure. UNUSED PORTION

DOTTED LINES

am2zzw0000192

A A

B

B

c a

b

a SEC. A—A

SEC. B—B am2zzw0000339

Standard clearance a: 4.0 mm {0.16 in} b: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in} c: 3.0 mm {0.12 in} or more 4. Peel off the transparent protective film on the door sash film. 5. Install the following parts: (1) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-10 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-44 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

09-16–24

PAGE 1 OF 2

09-17

INTERIOR TRIM

INTERIOR TRIM

INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–2 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–3 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–5 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–6 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–7 INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–7 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–10 Dashboard Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–13 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note . . . . . . 09-17–14 Dashboard Installation Note. . . . . . . . . 09-17–14 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–14 Dashboard Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–18 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note . . . . . . 09-17–18 Dashboard Installation Note. . . . . . . . . 09-17–18 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–18 Dashboard Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–22 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note . . . . . . 09-17–22 Dashboard Installation Note. . . . . . . . . 09-17–22 DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–22 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–24 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–25 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–28 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–29 Driver's Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–29 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–30 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . 09-17–30 Driver's Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–30 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–31 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–32 VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–32 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–33 Right-side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–33 Left-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–33 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–34 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–35 Center Panel Removal Note. . . . . . . . . 09-17–36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–36

FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–38 ATX/CVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–38 MTX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–39 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–41 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–41 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–42 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–45 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–46 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–46 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–51 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–52 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–53 Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–53 Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–54 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–55 FRONT SIDE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–55 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–57 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–59 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB] . . . . 09-17–63 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–65 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-17–66 Tire House Trim Installation Note . . . . . 09-17–68 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-17–68 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–70 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–70 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–72 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–73 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–75

09-17–1

PAGE 2 OF 2 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5HB, 3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]. . . . . LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . LIFTGATE RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTERIOR TRIM 09-17–75 09-17–76 09-17–77 09-17–78 09-17–79 09-17–79 09-17–80 09-17–80 09-17–80 09-17–81

HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–81 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–81 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–84 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–86 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–88 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–88 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–89 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–90 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–91 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-17–93

INTERIOR TRIM INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [4SD, 5HB] WM: INTERIOR TRIM

id0917004542a1

R.H.D. 2

1

10

9

3

8

7

6

4

5 am2zzw0000446

.

1

2

3

4

Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Dashboard (See 09-17-18 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-17-14 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-17-22 DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-17–2

5

6

7

8

9

10

Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front side garnish (Vehicles with CVT) (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 2

3

4

5

6

8

7

6

9

10 11 12

EXCEPT DRIVER SIDE

1

20

19

18

17

15

16

14

13 am2zzw0000491

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Shock-absorbing pad (See 09-17-88 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].)

09-17–4

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Headliner (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear package trim (See 09-17-68 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Floor covering (See 09-17-91 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear console (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-38 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

INTERIOR TRIM 5HB R.H.D. 2

3

4

5

6

7

6

8

9

10 11 12 13

14

PASSENGER-SIDE ONLY

1

21

20

19

18

17

16

15 am2zzw0000222

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front door trim (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-60 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Shock absorbing pad (See 09-17-88 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

7

8

9

10

11

12

B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear door trim (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-66 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Sail inner garnish (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-17–5

INTERIOR TRIM 13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Headliner (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Floor covering (See 09-17-91 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Rear console (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-38 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

4SD

am2ccw0000014 .

1

2

Trunk lid trim (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-17–6

3

Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

INTERIOR TRIM 5HB

adejjw00003361 .

1

2

Liftgate recess (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE RECESS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Liftgate lower trim (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

3

Liftgate upper trim (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie id0917004542z3

09-17–7

INTERIOR TRIM INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] R.H.D. 2

1

9

3

8

7

6

4

5 am2zzw0000348

.

1

2

3

4

Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Dashboard (See 09-17-10 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-17-22 DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ ASSEMBLY.) Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Inner garnish (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-17–8

5

6

7

8

9

Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Lower panel (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 3

2

4

5

6

7

6

8

9

10

11

PASSENGER-SIDE ONLY

1

17

16

15

14

13

12 am2zzw0000222

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front door trim (See 09-17-59 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-17-63 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB].) Shock absorbing pad (See 09-17-90 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].)

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Headliner (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Floor covering (See 09-17-93 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) Rear console (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-38 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-17–9

INTERIOR TRIM

1 2

3

adejjw00003362 .

1

2

Liftgate recess (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE RECESS REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Liftgate lower trim (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

3

Liftgate upper trim (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004535z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Heat duct (passenger side). (5) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (6) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (9) Front side trim (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (10)Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (11)Driver-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Driver-side air bag module. (13)Steering wheel (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (14)Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (15)Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (16)Instrument cluster (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (17)Combination switch (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (18)Center panel unit (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (19)Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (20)Climate control unit

09-17–10

INTERIOR TRIM (21)Shift lever (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (22)Selector lever (ATX) (23)Interlock cable (ATX) (24)Passenger-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (25)Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (26)A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (27)Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (28)Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (29)Windshield wiper motor (L.H.D.) (30)Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (31)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (32)Steering shaft (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) 3. Disconnect antenna feeder No.2 from the antenna feeder No.1. (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 4. Disconnect antenna feeder No.1 clip from the A-pillar inner panel. 5. Disconnect the dashboard wiring harness connectors. 6. Remove nuts A and bolts B then remove the dashboard bracket. 7. Remove nut C and bolt D from the outside of the vehicle (upper dashboard area). NUT A L.H.D. BOLT B NUT A BOLT B DASHBOARD BRACKET adejjw00003087

BOLT D

NUT C

BOLT D:16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,12—16 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000025

09-17–11

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 8. Remove nuts E and F shown in the figure.

BOLT D

NUT C

BOLT D:16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,12—16 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000149

L.H.D. A/C UNIT

GLOVE COMPARTMENT DAMPER

NUT F

A/C UNIT

DRIVER'S SIDE

NUT E

PASSENGER'S SIDE am2zzw0000026

R.H.D. 9. Disconnect the A/C unit related connector. 10. Remove the caps, remove bolts I and J. (See 0917-14 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note)

GLOVE COMPARTMENT DAMPER

NUT E

A/C UNIT

PASSENGER'S SIDE

A/C UNIT

NUT F DRIVER'S SIDE am2zzw0000149

09-17–12

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. (1)

BOLT I 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT J

CAP

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT I (2)

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT J 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000180

11. Lift the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, disconnect the A/C unit, and then rotate the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove it from the vehicle. (See 09-17-13 Dashboard Removal Note) 12. Install in the reverse order of removal. Dashboard Removal Note Warning x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, it could fall and cause injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the dashboard from falling. Caution x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, be careful not to damage the door and surrounding area. 1. Take the dashboard out through the opened front door.

09-17–13

INTERIOR TRIM Bolt I Removal/Installation Note 1. If the bolt falls off during the removal and installation procedure, remove it from the service hole shown in the figure.

DROPPED BOLT

SERVICE HOLE am2zzw0000150

Dashboard Installation Note 1. When inserting the bolt on the dashboard side, verify that the through-hole positions of the air intake duct and A/C unit are aligned. L.H.D. AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

R.H.D.

End Of Sie

AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles] id0917004535z5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Heat duct (passenger side) (5) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (6) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (11)Driver-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Driver-side air bag module (13)Steering wheel (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].)

09-17–14

INTERIOR TRIM

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

(14)Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (15)Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (16)Instrument cluster (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (17)Combination switch (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (18)Center panel unit (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (19)Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (20)Climate control unit (See 07-40A-32 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-24 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) (21)Shift lever (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (22)Selector lever (ATX/CVT) (23)Interlock cable (ATX/CVT) (24)Passenger-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (25)Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (26)A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (27)Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (28)Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (29)Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (30)Windshield wiper motor (L.H.D.) (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (31)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (32)Steering shaft (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) Disconnect antenna feeder No.2 from the antenna feeder No.1. (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Disconnect antenna feeder No.1 clip from the A-pillar inner panel. Disconnect the dashboard wiring harness connectors. Remove nuts A and bolts B then remove the dashboard bracket. Remove nut C and bolt D from the outside of the vehicle (upper dashboard area).

NUT A BOLT B NUT A BOLT B DASHBOARD BRACKET NUT A, BOLT B:9—15 N·m {92—152 kgf·cm, 80—132 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000500

09-17–15

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 8. Remove nuts E and F shown in the figure.

BOLT D

NUT C

BOLT D:20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000500

R.H.D. 9. Disconnect the A/C unit related connector. 10. Remove the caps, remove bolts I and J. (See 0917-18 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note)

A/C UNIT

GLOVE COMPARTMENT DAMPER

NUT E

NUT F

A/C UNIT

PASSENGER'S SIDE

DRIVER'S SIDE am2zzw0000149

R.H.D. (1)

BOLT I 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

BOLT J

CAP

20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

BOLT I (2)

20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

BOLT J 20—28 N·m {2.1—2.8 kgf·m, 15—20 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000500

11. Lift the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, disconnect the A/C unit, and then rotate the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove it from the vehicle. (See 09-17-18 Dashboard Removal Note)

09-17–17

INTERIOR TRIM 12. Install in the reverse order of removal. Dashboard Removal Note Warning x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, it could fall and cause injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the dashboard from falling. Caution x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, be careful not to damage the door and surrounding area. 1. Take the dashboard out through the opened front door. Bolt I Removal/Installation Note 1. If the bolt falls off during the removal and installation procedure, remove it from the service hole shown in the figure.

DROPPED BOLT

SERVICE HOLE am2zzw0000150

Dashboard Installation Note 1. When inserting the bolt on the dashboard side, verify that the through-hole positions of the air intake duct and A/C unit are aligned. L.H.D. AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

R.H.D.

End Of Sie

AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles]

id0917004535z6

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-17–18

INTERIOR TRIM

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

(3) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Heat duct (passenger side) (5) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (6) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (11)Driver-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Driver-side air bag module (13)Steering wheel (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (14)Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (15)Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (16)Instrument cluster (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (17)Combination switch (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (18)Center panel unit (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (19)Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (20)Climate control unit (See 07-40A-32 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-24 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) (21)Shift lever (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (22)Selector lever (ATX) (23)Interlock cable (ATX) (24)Passenger-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (25)Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (26)A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (27)Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (28)Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (29)Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (30)Windshield wiper motor (L.H.D.) (31)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (32)Steering shaft (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) Disconnect antenna feeder No.2 from the antenna feeder No.1. (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Disconnect antenna feeder No.1 clip from the A-pillar inner panel. Disconnect the dashboard wiring harness connectors. Remove nuts A and bolts B then remove the dashboard bracket. Remove nut C and bolt D from the outside of the vehicle (upper dashboard area). NUT A BOLT B NUT A BOLT B DASHBOARD BRACKET adejjw00003087

09-17–19

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 8. Remove nuts E and F shown in the figure.

BOLT D

NUT C

BOLT D:16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,12—16 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000149

R.H.D. 9. Disconnect the A/C unit related connector. 10. Remove the caps, remove bolts I and J. (See 0917-22 Bolt I Removal/Installation Note)

A/C UNIT

GLOVE COMPARTMENT DAMPER

NUT E

NUT F

A/C UNIT

PASSENGER'S SIDE

DRIVER'S SIDE am2zzw0000149

R.H.D. (1)

BOLT I 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT J

CAP

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT I (2)

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

BOLT J 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 12—16 ft·lbf}

am2zzw0000180

11. Lift the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, disconnect the A/C unit, and then rotate the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove it from the vehicle. (See 09-17-22 Dashboard Removal Note)

09-17–20

INTERIOR TRIM 12. Install in the reverse order of removal. Dashboard Removal Note Warning x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, it could fall and cause injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the dashboard from falling. Caution x When the dashboard is removed from the vehicle, be careful not to damage the door and surrounding area. 1. Take the dashboard out through the opened front door. Bolt I Removal/Installation Note 1. If the bolt falls off during the removal and installation procedure, remove it from the service hole shown in the figure.

DROPPED BOLT

SERVICE HOLE am2zzw0000150

Dashboard Installation Note 1. When inserting the bolt on the dashboard side, verify that the through-hole positions of the air intake duct and A/C unit are aligned. L.H.D. AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

R.H.D.

End Of Sie

AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT AIR INTAKE DUCT

A/C UNIT THROUGH-HOLE DASHBOARD am2zzw0000150

DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY 1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

09-17–22

id091700453600

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 1

••

•• •• ••

A

••

B

••

•• ••••

3

A

B

am2zzw0000150 .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Dashboard wiring harness Dashboard bracket Upper garnish Duct Dashboard member Dashboard Center ventilator grille

8 9

10

Glove compartment damper Glove compartment striker (See 08-10-7 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION) Passenger-side airbag module (See 08-10-7 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION)

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700454300

1. Pull the meter hood in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips.

09-17–24

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

CLIP

End Of Sie

METER HOOD CLIP

CLIP

am2zzw0000151

COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700453700

1. Pull down the steering wheel. 2. Remove the key cylinder cap. (Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system) 3. Pull the upper column cover in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove the upper column cover while detaching the tabs and pin.

R.H.D. 4. Rotate the steering wheel to the left and right until it reaches the positions shown in the figure and remove screws A.

(1) UPPER COLUMN COVER

(2)

PIN

TAB

TAB adejjw00003368

R.H.D. 5. Pull up the steering wheel. 6. Remove screw B, then remove the lower column cover in the direction of the arrow (4) while keeping it open in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.

SCREW A

PROTECTIVE TAPE

LOWER COLUMN COVER

PROTECTIVE SCREW A TAPE

LOWER COLUMN COVER adejjw00003094

09-17–25

R.H.D. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie (3)

(3) (4)

LOWER COLUMN COVER SCREW B adejjw00003369

GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700453800

1. Move the hook in the direction of the arrow in the order of remove them. R.H.D.

GLOVE COMPERTMENT

HOOK am2zzw0000150

2. Push both ends of the inner-side glove compartment in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, detach the pins from the dashboard, and remove the glove compartment in the direction of the arrow (2).

09-17–26

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D.

(1)

(1)

PIN

PIN

(2) GLOVE COMPERTMENT am2zzw0000150

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700466700

1. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the glove compartment cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. R.H.D. Caution x Be careful not to damage the guide during removal. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FASTENER FASTENER

GUIDE

End Of Sie FASTENER am2zzw0000028

LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700453900

Driver's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (4) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (5) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the screw, pull the lower panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), and remove the lower panel while detaching the clips.

09-17–27

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 4. Disconnect the switch connector. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. CLIP

CLIP CLIP CLIP (2) (1)

LOWER PANEL CLIP

GUIDE SCREW GUIDE

adejjw00003103

Passenger's Side 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the front side trim. (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the lower panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching the clips. L.H.D. CLIP

CLIP

(2)

LOWER PANEL

(1) am2zzw0000444

R.H.D. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CLIP

CLIP

(2)

LOWER PANEL

(1) am2zzw0000444

LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004539z3

Driver's Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) (2) Front side trim (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) (3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (4) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (5) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-17–30

INTERIOR TRIM (6) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the screw, pull the lower panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), and remove the lower panel while detaching the clips. L.H.D.

CLIP CLIP CLIP CLIP LOWER PANEL

(1) (2)

CLIP

GUIDE SCREW GUIDE

am2zzw0000180

R.H.D. 4. Disconnect the switch connector. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. CLIP

CLIP CLIP CLIP (2) (1)

LOWER PANEL CLIP

GUIDE SCREW GUIDE

adejjw00003103

Passenger's Side 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 2. Remove the front side trim. (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 3. Pull the lower panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching the clips. L.H.D. CLIP

CLIP

(2)

LOWER PANEL

(1) am2zzw0000180

09-17–31

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

End Of Sie

CLIP

(2)

LOWER PANEL

(1) am2zzw0000180

CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700454800

1. Route the wiring harness as shown in the figure and pull on the center ventilator grille in the direction of the arrow to remove it. L.H.D. CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE

WIRING HARNESS am2zzw0000151

R.H.D. 2. When installing the center ventilator grille, press it in the dashboard.

CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE

End Of Sie

WIRING HARNESS am2zzw0000151

VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. Remove the side panel. (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-17–32

id091700454100

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Rotate the ventilator grille to the notch in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and pull it in the direction of the arrow (2) to remove it. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

NOTCH

•• ••••

VENTILATOR GRILLE

NOTCH •• ••••

VENTILATOR GRILLE

am2zzw0000151

SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700454400

Right-side 1. Remove the fastener.

FASTENER SIDE WALL

adejjw00003381

2. Pull the side wall in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching clips A and tab B. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP A

TAB B

CLIP A

FRONT CONSOLE

(1) (2) SIDE WALL

TAB B SIDE WALL am2zzw0000151

Left-side 1. Remove the fastener.

FASTENER SIDE WALL

am2zzw0000151

09-17–33

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Pull the side wall in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching clips A and B and tab C. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CLIP A

CLIP B

TAB C CLIP B CLIP A

FRONT CONSOLE

(1) TAB C

SIDE WALL

(2) SIDE WALL am2zzw0000151

INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700460500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable (vehicles with tweeter). 2. Pull the inner garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 3. Disconnect the tweeter connector (vehicles with tweeter). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

INNER GARNISH CLIP

End Of Sie

adejjw00002979

SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700454000

1. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (4) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the side panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips A and B. L.H.D. CLIP A CLIP A CLIP B SIDE PANEL CLIP A

CLIP B am2zzw0000180

09-17–34

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. CLIP A

End Of Sie CLIP A

CLIP B SIDE PANEL CLIP A

CLIP B am2zzw0000180

DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700470000

1. While pressing the hook inside the service hole in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull the dashboard under cover in the direction of the arrow (2), and then remove the hook and the guide pin. L.H.D. HOOK

HOOK GUIDE PIN

GUIDE PIN

DASHBOAD UNDER COVER

HOOK (1)

(2) SERVICE HOLE am2zzw0000151

R.H.D. 2. Remove the dashboard under cover. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

HOOK

HOOK GUIDE PIN

End Of Sie

GUIDE PIN

DASHBOAD UNDER COVER

(2) SERVICE HOLE

HOOK (1) am2zzw0000151

CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700455200

Note x For vehicles with the audio unit, refer to the CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. (See 0920-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the shift lever knob. (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R]) 3. Remove the side wall. (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 4. Remove the front console component. (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the screw, pull the center panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and remove the center panel while detaching the clips A and B. (See 09-17-36 Center Panel Removal Note)

09-17–35

INTERIOR TRIM L.H.D. CLIP B

CLIP B

CLIP B

CLIP A CENTER PANEL

CLIP A

CLIP A

SCREW

am2zzw0000374

R.H.D. 6. Disconnect the hazard warning switch connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger-side seat belt reminder indicator connector. (vehicles with passenger-side seat belt reminder indicator) 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP B

CLIP B

CLIP A CENTER PANEL

CLIP A

SCREW

am2zzw0000374

Center Panel Removal Note 1. When the center panel is removed, clips A could interfere with the climate control unit bracket and cause damage. Pull the center panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (upward at a approx. 20°angle) when removing it. CENTER PANEL

CLIP A

APPROX. 20° BRACKET

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT am2zzw0000326

End Of Sie FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700458500

1. Shift lever to neutral position. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].)

09-17–36

INTERIOR TRIM 3. Remove the screws, pull the lower side of the front console component in the direction of the arrow, and remove the clips.

CLIP

CLIP

CLIP SCREW

SCREW

am2zzw0000500

Caution x Affix protective tape to the ATX/CVT shift panel to prevent scratches or damage. (ATX/CVT)

PROTECTIVE TAPE

am2zzw0000265

09-17–37

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Pull the front console assembly in the direction of the arrow in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. CLIP

CLIP

CLIP

am2zzw0000500

5. Install the boot panel and front console as a single unit. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ATX/CVT 1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

09-17–38

id091700458600

INTERIOR TRIM

1

2

am2zzw0000265

1 2

Boot panel Front console

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. MTX 1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

09-17–39

INTERIOR TRIM

1

4

3 2

5

am2zzw0000502

1 2 3

Boot panel Screw Set panel

09-17–40

4 5

Boot Front console

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700457500

L.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Pull the console in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips A, hooks B, and the tab. 3. Disconnect the cigarette lighter connector and auxiliary jack connector (vehicles with auxiliary jack).

CLIP A

CONSOLE

TAB

HOOK B

HOOK B

CLIP A

HOOK B

CLIP A adejjw00003123

4. Remove nut C.

PIN D NUT C

PIN D am2zzw0000245

5. Pull up the rear console in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, remove clips E, move the rear console in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it avoiding the parking brake lever.

CLIP E PIN F REAR CONSOLE CLIP E

Caution x When moving the rear console in the direction of the arrow (2), be careful not to damage pins D and F. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

REAR CONSOLE BRACKET REAR CONSOLE (1)

CLIP E

PIN F

REAR CONSOLE (2) CLIP E

REAR CONSOLE BRACKET adejjw00003125

R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-17–41

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Pull the console in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips A, hooks B, and the tab. 3. Disconnect the cigarette lighter connector and auxiliary jack connector (vehicles with auxiliary jack).

CONSOLE

CLIP A TAB

HOOK B

HOOK B

CLIP A

HOOK B

CLIP A

adejjw00003120

4. Remove nut C.

NUT C PIN D

PIN D am2zzw0000181

5. Pull up the rear console in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, remove clips E, move the rear console in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it avoiding the parking brake lever.

CLIP E PIN F REAR CONSOLE CLIP E

Caution x When moving the rear console in the direction of the arrow (2), be careful not to damage pins D and F. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

PIN F

REAR CONSOLE (1)

End Of Sie

CLIP E

REAR CONSOLE BRACKET REAR CONSOLE (2) CLIP E

REAR CONSOLE BRACKET adejjw00003122

A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700458700

1. Partially peel back the seaming welt.

09-17–42

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Pull the upper end of the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips A and B. R GROMMET

R CLIP B R CLIP B A-PILLAR TRIM CLIP A

CLIP A am2zzw0000181

3. Cut the lead wire connecting clip B and grommet using a nipper and pull out the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

R

GROMMET

R CLIP B LEAD WIRE

R

CLIP B

A-PILLAR TRIM

TAB

am2zzw0000181

Caution x When pulling out the A-pillar trim, be careful not to damage the tabs.

09-17–43

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach it from the A-pillar inner panel. A-PILLAR INNER PANEL HOOK

R GROMMET (1)

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

R GROMMET

(3)

(2) HOOK A-PILLAR INNER PANEL

am2zzw0000231

5. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure. 6. When installing the A-pillar trim, install the new clip B and grommet to the A-pillar trim in advance. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700459000

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Remove the adjuster anchor cover. Remove the upper anchor installation bolts of the front seat belt. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Partially peel back the seaming welt. Remove the B-pillar lower trim. (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Grasp the lower end of the B-pillar upper trim, pull it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, CLIP D and remove hook A, guide pin B, pin C, and clip D. CLIP D B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM PIN C HOOK A GUIDE PIN B

PIN C GUIDE PIN B HOOK A

am2zzw0000181

09-17–44

INTERIOR TRIM 8. Remove the B-pillar upper trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB

Caution x When removing the B-pillar upper trim, be careful not to damage the tabs.

B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

adejjw00003390

9. If there is a remaining clip D, rotate it 90° in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it. 10. Remove clip D and install it to the B-pillar upper trim. 11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP D

End Of Sie

CLIP D

am2zzw0000182

B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004590z3

1. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat belt adjuster anchor cover (2) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (3) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 4. Remove the C-pillar trim. (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 5. Remove the fastener. 6. Grasp the lower end of the B-pillar upper trim, pull CLIP B CLIP A CLIP B it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, CLIP A and remove clip A, clip B, tab C, and pin D. TAB C B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

FASTENER PIN D

CLIP A TAB C

PIN D

PIN D

CLIP B am2zzw0000341

09-17–45

INTERIOR TRIM 7. Remove the B-pillar upper trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB E

Caution x When removing the B-pillar upper trim, be careful not to damage the tabs E.

B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

am2zzw0000341

8. If there is a remaining clip A, rotate it 90° in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it. 9. Remove clip A and install it to the B-pillar upper trim. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP A

End Of Sie

CLIP A

am2zzw0000341

B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700458900

1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Partially peel back the seaming welt. Pull the B-pillar lower trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, detach tab A, pin B, clip C, pin D, then remove the B-pillar lower trim. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. TAB A

End Of Sie

TAB A PIN B B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM

PIN D PIN D

PIN D CLIP C

PIN B

CLIP C

CLIP C CLIP C DITAIL

FRONT

am2zzw0000182

C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700459100

4SD Removal 1. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]) 4. Partially peel back the seaming welt.

09-17–46

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clip A. R GROMMET

R CLIP A

CLIP A

C-PILLAR TRIM

am2ccw0000010

09-17–47

INTERIOR TRIM 6. Cut the lead wire connecting clip A and grommet using a nipper.

R GROMMET

LEAD WIRE

CLIP A

R CLIP A

C-PILLAR TRIM

am2ccw0000016

09-17–48

INTERIOR TRIM 7. Slide the C-pillar trim in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure and remove the C-pillar trim from clip B.

CLIP B

TAB TAB

TAB

C-PILLAR TRIM

am2ccw0000010

8. Remove the C-pillar trim. 9. Remove clip B from the positions shown in the figure using a fastener remover and install the Cpillar trim.

CLIP B CLIP B

FASTENER REMOVER

am2zzw0000503

09-17–49

INTERIOR TRIM 10. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach it from the rear pillar inner panel. REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL

HOOK

R GROMMET

(1)

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

R GROMMET

(3)

(2) HOOK REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL

am2ccw0000016

11. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure. 12. When installing the C-pillar trim, install the new clip and new grommet to the C-pillar trim in advance. Installation 1. Insert the tabs into the rear package trim in the positions shown in the figure.

REAR PACKAGE TRIM

CLIP B CLIP A

CLIP A

CLIP B C-PILLAR TRIM

TAB B am2zzw0000503

09-17–50

INTERIOR TRIM 2. 3. 4. 5.

Install clip A and B to the body. Install the tire house trim. (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Install the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) Install the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

5HB 1. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (4) Lower anchor installation bolts of the rear seat belt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 4. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips A and B. R GROMMET R CLIP B

CLIP A

R CLIP B

CLIP A

CLIP A

am2zzw0000182

09-17–51

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Cut the lead wire connecting clip B and grommet using a nipper.

R GROMMET

LEAD WIRE

C-PILLAR TRIM

R CLIP B

am2zzw0000374

6. Pull out the rear seat belt lower anchor and remove the C-pillar trim. 7. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach it from the rear pillar inner panel. REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL

HOOK

R GROMMET

(1)

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

R GROMMET

(3)

(2) HOOK REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL

am2zzw0000181

8. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure. 9. When installing the C-pillar trim, install the new clip and new grommet to the C-pillar trim in advance. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004591z3

1. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].)

09-17–52

INTERIOR TRIM (3) Lower anchor installation bolts of the rear seat belt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 4. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching tab A, clips B, pin C, pin D and tab E. TAB A TAB A

TAB E

CLIP B

PIN C

CLIP B CLIP B PIN D CLIP B

CLIP B

PIN C

PIN D C-PILLAR TRIM

TAB E

am2zzw0000341

5. Pull out the rear seat belt lower anchor and remove the C-pillar trim. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700467100

1. Grasp the upper end of the sail inner garnish, pull the sail inner garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and remove it while detaching the clips. 2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

End Of Sie

CLIP am2zzw0000184

FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700459600

Driver-side 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the fastener.

09-17–53

INTERIOR TRIM L.H.D.

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM CLIP

FASTENER

REAR am2zzw0000459

R.H.D. 4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM CLIP

FASTENER

REAR

am2zzw0000459

Passenger-side Vehicles without CVT 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the fastener. L.H.D.

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM CLIP

FASTENER

REAR

adejjw00001828

R.H.D. 4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT SIDE TRIM

CLIP

CLIP

REAR

FASTENER

adejjw00001829

Vehicles with CVT 1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-17–54

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the fastener. 4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

GUIDE

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM CLIP

FASTENER REAR am2zzw0000446

FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0917004596z3

1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]) 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the fastener. L.H.D.

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM CLIP

FASTENER

REAR am2zzw0000459

R.H.D. 4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

FRONT SIDE TRIM

End Of Sie

CLIP

REAR

FASTENER

am2zzw0000460

FRONT SIDE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700467400

1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 2. Remove the front side trim. (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the front side garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while remove the clips CLIP 4. Remove the front side garnish. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CLIP

End Of Sie

FRONT SIDE GARNISH am2zzw0000442

09-17–55

INTERIOR TRIM FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700457900

1. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach tab B, pin C, and clip D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2). FRONT

(1)

TAB B

(2) TAB A TAB B PIN C

CLIP D

TAB A

PIN C

FRONT SCUFF PLATE

CLIP D

am2zzw0000460

2. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (4), and remove it while detaching tab B, pin C, and clip D.

REAR

TAB B

(4)

TAB B (3) PIN C

TAB A

FRONT SCUFF PLATE TAB A

PIN C

CLIP D

CLIP D am2zzw0000460

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

09-17–56

INTERIOR TRIM FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004579z3

1. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach tab B, pin C, and clip D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2). FRONT

(1)

TAB B

(2) TAB A TAB B PIN C

TAB A

CLIP D

FRONT SCUFF PLATE

PIN C

CLIP D am2zzw0000460

2. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (4), and remove it while detaching tab B, pin C, clip D, and pin E.

REAR TAB B (4) TAB B PIN E TAB A CLIP D

TAB A

(3) PIN C

PIN C

CLIP D FRONT SCUFF PLATE PIN E

am2zzw0000460

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

09-17–57

INTERIOR TRIM REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700458000

1. Detach tab A while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach clip B, and pin C while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).

FRONT TAB A CLIP B

(1)

TAB A (2)

PIN C

CLIP B PIN C REAR SCUFF PLATE am2zzw0000460

2. Detach tab A while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (4), and remove it while detaching clip B, pin C and tab D. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

REAR

TAB A (4)

TAB A

(3)

TAB D PIN C

PIN C

CLIP B

CLIP B REAR SCUFF PLATE

TAB D am2zzw0000460

FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700459700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the cover of inner handle while remove the COVER tabs. SCREW 4. Remove the cover. 5. Remove the screw.

SCREW

COVER TAB

am2zzw0000261

6. Pull in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips A from the door inner panel using a fastener remover.

FRONT DOOR TRIM

CLIP A

CLIP A CLIP A adejjw00003404

09-17–58

INTERIOR TRIM 7. Remove the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. a a

SEC. a—a am2zzw0000249

8. Remove the inner handle and move the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. TAB • • TAB • • TAB • • TAB • • INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000249

9. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the front door trim. 10. Disconnect the driver-side power outer mirror switch connector, driver-side power window main switch connector, and passenger-side power window subswitch connector. 11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000249

FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0917004597z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the cover of inner handle while remove the COVER tabs. SCREW 4. Remove the screw.

SCREW

COVER TAB

am2zzw0000341

09-17–59

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Pull in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips A and B from the door inner panel using a fastener remover.

FRONT DOOR TRIM

CLIP A FRONT DOOR TRIM

CLIP B

CLIP B CLIP A

CLIP A

am2zzw0000341

6. Remove the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. a a

SEC. a—a am2zzw0000341

7. Remove the inner handle and move the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. TAB B TAB A TAB A TAB B INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000342

8. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the front door trim. 9. Disconnect the driver-side power outer mirror switch connector, driver-side power window main switch connector, and passenger-side power window subswitch connector. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000342

FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY id091700720000

1. Disassemble in the order shown in the figure.

09-17–60

INTERIOR TRIM L.H.D. DRIVER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 8

7 3 1

PASSENGER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 9

7 3 1

am2zzw0000195

09-17–61

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. DRIVER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 8

7 3 1

PASSENGER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 9

7 3 1

am2zzw0000196 .

1 2 3 4 5

Front door trim Screw A Front door decoration panel Screw B Screw C

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie

09-17–62

6 7 8 9

Switch panel Screw D Power window main switch Power window subswitch

INTERIOR TRIM FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [3HB]

id0917007200z3

1. Disassemble in the order shown in the figure. L.H.D. DRIVER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 8

7 3 1

PASSENGER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 9

7 3 1

am2zzw0000342

09-17–63

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. DRIVER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 8

7 3 1

PASSENGER-SIDE

2 5

6 4 9

7 3 1

am2zzw0000342 .

1 2 3 4 5

Front door trim Screw A Front door decoration panel Screw B Screw C

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie

09-17–64

6 7 8 9

Switch panel Screw D Power window main switch Power window subswitch

INTERIOR TRIM REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700460000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Pull the cover of inner handle while remove the SCREW SCREW tabs. 4. Remove the screw. COVER TAB

am2zzw0000261

5. Pull in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips A from the door inner panel using a fastener remover.

REAR DOOR TRIM

CLIP A

CLIP A CLIP A adejjw00003405

6. Remove the rear door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. a a

SEC. a—a am2zzw0000249

7. Remove the inner handle and move the rear door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. TAB • • TAB • • TAB • • TAB • • INNER HANDLE

adejjw00003399

09-17–65

INTERIOR TRIM 8. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the rear door trim. 9. Disconnect the power window subswitch connector. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

INNER HANDLE

am2zzw0000184

REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

id091700463300

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the figure. 2 3

5 4

1

am2zzw0000252 .

1 2 3

Rear door trim Screw A Power window subswitch panel

4 5

Screw B Power window subswitch

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0917008027a3

1. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Lower the rear seatbacks.

09-17–66

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Remove the fasteners in the positions shown in the figure.

FASTENER FASTENER

TIRE HOUSE TRIM

am2ccw0000016

5. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 6. Pull the tire house trim in the direction of the arrow and remove the tab and pin. TAB TAB

PIN

PIN

am2ccw0000016

09-17–67

INTERIOR TRIM 7. Set the rear seat backs out of the way while removing the tire house trim. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See 09-17-68 Tire House Trim Installation Note.) Tire House Trim Installation Note 1. Verify that part A is inserted into the trunk side trim as shown in the figure.

TIRE HOUSE TRIM

A

am2ccw0000024

End Of Sie REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0917008028a3

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Remove the C-pillar trim. (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Pull out the left and right rear seat belts from the slit areas of the rear package trim. REAR PACKAGE TRIM

REAR SEAT BELT

am2ccw0000016

09-17–68

INTERIOR TRIM 6. Remove the fasteners.

REAR PACKAGE TRIM

FASTENER am2ccw0000016

7. Lift up the position shown in the figure in the direction of the arrow and remove the clips and pin. CLIP

PIN

CLIP

CLIP

PIN REAR PACKAGE TRIM CLIP am2ccw0000016

09-17–69

INTERIOR TRIM 8. Slide the rear package trim in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure and remove the pins from the body.

PIN

PIN

REAR PACKAGE TRIM

am2ccw0000016

9. Remove the rear package trim. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700462300

4SD 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (4) Trunk mat. (5) Trunk board. (6) Trunk end trim. (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

09-17–70

INTERIOR TRIM 3. Remove the fasteners in the positions shown in the figure. FASTENER

FASTENER

FASTENER

TRUNK SIDE TRM am2ccw0000012

4. Lower the rear seat backs and make the trunk side trim visible from the vehicle interior.

TRUNK SIDE TRIM

am2ccw0000012

5. Set the trunk side trim away from the rear seat back frame cover. 6. Remove the trunk side trim. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TRUNK SIDE TRIM

REAR SEAT BACK FRAME COVER am2ccw0000012

09-17–71

INTERIOR TRIM 5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) 3. Remove the screw A and fastener B.

SCREW A

FASTENER B

am2zzw0000374

09-17–72

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Pull the trunk side trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove the clips C. TRUNK SIDE TRIM

CLIP C

CLIP C

(2) (1)

am2zzw0000182

5. Pull the trunk side trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (3) and remove it while detaching pins D, tabs E, and pin F.

PIN D

PIN D TAB E

TAB E TAB E PIN F TAB E

(3)

PIN D

PIN F

am2zzw0000182

6. Disconnect the cargo compartment light connector. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0917004623z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-17–73

INTERIOR TRIM (2) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the screw A and fastener B. SCREW A

FASTENER B

am2zzw0000348

4. Pull the trunk side trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove the clips C and clip D. TRUNK SIDE TRIM

CLIP C

CLIP C CLIP C CLIP D

CLIP C

(2) (1) CLIP D

am2zzw0000348

09-17–74

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Pull the trunk side trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (3) and remove it while detaching hooks E, and pins F. HOOK E

HOOK E HOOK E

PIN F

(3)

PIN F

am2zzw0000460

6. Disconnect the cargo compartment light connector. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700462400

4SD 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the trunk mat. 3. Remove the trunk board.

09-17–75

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Remove the fasteners.

TAB

TAB

PIN A

CLIP

TRUNK END TRIM

CLIP

CLIP

TAB

PIN A PIN A FASTENER FASTENER

PIN B PIN B FASTENER

PIN B

am2zzw0000519

5. Pull the trunk end trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the tabs, clips, and pins A, B. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5HB, 3HB 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the trunk mat. 3. Partially peel back the seaming welt.

09-17–76

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Remove the fasteners. TRUNK END TRIM

HOOK

HOOK

CLIP CLIP PIN

CLIP

PIN TAB

PIN

TAB

TAB

FASTENER HOOK

FASTENER am2zzw0000184

5. Pull the trunk end trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the hooks, tabs, clips, and pins. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id0917008035a3

1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the fasteners. TRUNK LID TRIM FASTENER

FASTENER

FASTENER am2ccw0000016

3. Remove the trunk lid trim.

09-17–77

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700462900

Caution x Do not remove the liftgate upper trim by rotating as shown in the figure as it could damage clip A and F. NO GOOD

LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM

am2zzw0000357

1. Pull the end of liftgate upper trim outward and detach clip A, tabs B, C, pins D, and clips E. TAB B PIN D

TAB C

PIN D

CLIP A

CLIP E TAB B

CLIP A

TAB B

TAB C

PIN D

CLIP E am2zzw0000357

09-17–78

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Remove the clip F then remove the liftgate upper trim. CLIP F

LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM

CLIP F am2zzw0000357

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700463100

1. Remove the fasteners. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

FASTENER

FASTENER

am2zzw0000185

LIFTGATE RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700467500

1. Insert a fastener remover in the position indicated by the arrow in the figure and detach tabs A. TAB A

TAB A am2zzw0000185

09-17–79

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Remove the liftgate recess in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure avoiding tabs B. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LIFTGATE RECESS

End Of Sie

TAB B TAB B am2zzw0000503

SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700458100

1. Remove the screw, move the sunvisor in the direction of the arrow, and remove the sunvisor.

SCREW

SUNVISOR

adejjw00002681

2. Remove the center adaptor (sunvisor stopper) from the body using a fastener remover. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CENTER ADAPTER (SUNVISOR STOPPER)

am2zzw0000186

ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700458200

Removal 1. Insert a fastener remover into the assist handle service hole and remove the assist handle cover.

SERVICE HOLE

ASSIST HANDLE COVER

ASSIST HANDLE am2zzw0000186

09-17–80

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Insert the fastener remover in the position indicated by the arrow shown in the figure, push down the clip by moving the fastener remover in the direction of the arrow, and remove the assist handle from the assist handle bracket while shaking the assist handle up and down. Caution x When inserting a fastener remover, be careful not to damage the tabs.

ASSIST HANDLE

TAB

TAB

CLIP

HEADLINER ASSIST HANDLE BRACKET am2zzw0000186

Installation 1. Insert the assist handle in the assist handle bracket. 2. Push the assist handle cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to install the assist handle.

End Of Sie

ASSIST HANDLE adejjw00002680

HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700458300

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (6) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (9) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-17–81

INTERIOR TRIM 4. Disconnect the roof wire link wiring harness and remove the clip. ROOF WIRING HARNESS CONNECT FASTENER

CLIP FASTENER

CLIP

ROOF WIRING HARNESS CONNECT

ROOF WIRING HARNESS

HEADLINER

am2zzw0000503

5. Remove the fasteners.

09-17–82

INTERIOR TRIM 6. Open all the doors and rotate the headliner in the vehicle so that it is as shown in the figure. PASSENGER SIDE FRONT

HEADLINER

PASSENGER SIDE FRONT

HEADLINER

FRONT

DRIVER SIDE

HEADLINER am2ccw0000009

09-17–83

INTERIOR TRIM 7. Remove the headliner from the vehicle through the front passenger door opening. FRONT HEADLINER

am2ccw0000014

8. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (6) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (13)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (14)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (15)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector (vehicles with auto light / wiper system).

09-17–84

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Disconnect the rear window washer hose. FASTENER

ROOF WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR

FASTENER

ROOF WIRING HARNESS REAR WINDOW WASHER HOSE

RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR

HEADLINER

am2zzw0000374

6. Disconnect the roof wiring harness connector. 7. Remove the fasteners.

09-17–85

INTERIOR TRIM 8. Take the headliner out from the opened liftgate.

am2zzw0000491

9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0917004583z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 3. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (5) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (8) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (9) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (10)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (13)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector (vehicles with auto light / wiper system).

09-17–86

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Disconnect the rear window washer hose. FASTENER

ROOF WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR

FASTENER

ROOF WIRING HARNESS REAR WINDOW WASHER HOSE

RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR

HEADLINER

am2zzw0000341

6. Disconnect the roof wiring harness connector. 7. Remove the fasteners.

09-17–87

INTERIOR TRIM 8. Take the headliner out from the opened liftgate.

am2zzw0000341

9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091700453300

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (6) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Tire house trim (See 09-17-66 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) (9) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Headliner (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-17–88

INTERIOR TRIM 3. Pinch the tab using pincers, remove clips A and B, then remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB

TAB

CLIP A

TAB

CLIP B

CLIP A CLIP B

CLIP A

CLIP B

SHOCK ABSORBING PAD am2ccw0000003

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (6) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (13)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (14)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (15)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (16)Headliner (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-17–89

INTERIOR TRIM 3. Pinch the tab using pincers, remove clips A and B, then remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB

TAB

CLIP A

TAB

CLIP B

CLIP A

CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP B

SHOCK ABSORBING PAD

am2zzw0000187

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004533z3

1. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (3) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (5) Rear seat belt lower anchor installation bolt (See 08-11-5 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (8) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (9) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (10)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (13)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (14)Headliner (See 09-17-86 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-17–90

INTERIOR TRIM 2. Pinch the tab using pincers, remove clips A and B, then remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB

CLIP A

CLIP B

TAB

CLIP A

TAB

CLIP B

CLIP A

CLIP B

SHOCK ABSORBING

am2zzw0000340

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091700461900

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (7) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Rear console (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (11)Front side garnish (CVT) (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (13)Lower anchor installation bolts on the front seat belt.

09-17–91

INTERIOR TRIM 3. Remove the nuts, then remove the rear console bracket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 4. Cut the floor covering at the position indicated by the arrow (1) in the figure using scissors, detach the fasteners, then remove the floor covering in the direction of the arrow (2).

NUT

REAR CONSOLE BRACKET

am2zzw0000187

L.H.D. FASTENER

A/C UNIT

(2)

(1) FLOOR COVERING am2zzw0000187

R.H.D. FASTENER

A/C UNIT

(2)

(1) FLOOR COVERING

am2zzw0000187

Note x The cut part does not need to match up when installing the floor covering.

09-17–92

INTERIOR TRIM 5. Take the floor covering out from the opened liftgate. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0917004619z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front seat (See 09-13-6 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (4) Front side trim (See 09-17-55 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (5) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R] .) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (6) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear console (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (10)Rear seat back (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (11)Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (13)Lower anchor installation bolts on the front seat belt 3. Remove the nuts, then remove the rear console NUT bracket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 4. Cut the floor covering at the position indicated by the arrow (1) in the figure using scissors, detach the fasteners, then remove the floor covering in the direction of the arrow (2). REAR CONSOLE BRACKET

am2zzw0000342

09-17–93

INTERIOR TRIM R.H.D. FASTENER

A/C UNIT

(2)

(1) FLOOR COVERING

am2zzw0000342

Note x The cut part does not need to match up when installing the floor covering. 5. Take the floor covering out from the opened liftgate. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

09-17–94

LIGHTING SYSTEMS

09-18

LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LIGHTING SYSTEMS LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 2-Beam Type Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Beam Type Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . HEADLIGHT AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-Beam Type Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Beam Type Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Front Fog Light Bulb Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING . . . . . . . . . FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . Inboard Light Installation Note . . . . . . . INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . REAR FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . .

09-18–2 09-18–4 09-18–5 09-18–6 09-18–6 09-18–6 09-18–7 09-18–8 09-18–12 09-18–16 09-18–16 09-18–16 09-18–16 09-18–18 09-18–19 09-18–20 09-18–20 09-18–23 09-18–23 09-18–23 09-18–24 09-18–25 09-18–25 09-18–25 09-18–25 09-18–26 09-18–26 09-18–26 09-18–26 09-18–27 09-18–27 09-18–27 09-18–28 09-18–28 09-18–28 09-18–28 09-18–29

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–29 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–29 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–29 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–30 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–30 F35M-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–30 B65M-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–32 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–33 Combination Switch Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–34 COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-18–34 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–35 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . 09-18–35 Vehicles Without Auto Light System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–36 Vehicles With Auto Light System. . . . . . 09-18–37 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–38 REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–39 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–41 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–41 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–42 AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–43 Vehicles With Intruder Sensor. . . . . . . . 09-18–43 Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor . . . . . 09-18–44 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–44 Vehicles With Intruder Sensor. . . . . . . . 09-18–44 Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor . . . . . 09-18–44 INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . 09-18–44 Vehicles With Intruder Sensor. . . . . . . . 09-18–44 Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor . . . . . 09-18–45 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–46 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-18–47

End of Toc WM: LIGHTING SYSTEMS

09-18–1

LIGHTING SYSTEMS LIGHTING SYSTEMS LOCATION INDEX R.H.D. 5

1 6

2 9

8

7

3 5 9 10

4

6 12

13

14 8

16

11

15 am2zzw0000483

.

1

2

3

Front combination lights (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-7 HEADLIGHT AIMING.) (See 09-18-6 HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-16 PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-16 FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front side turn light (See 09-18-23 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front fog light (See 09-18-16 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-19 FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)

09-18–4

4

5

6

Back-up light switch (See 09-18-30 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-31 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) High-mount brake light (See 09-18-28 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-29 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Rear combination light (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-25 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Cargo compartment light (See 09-18-46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT INSPECTION.) License plate light (See 09-18-29 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-29 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear fog light (See 09-18-26 REAR FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-27 REAR FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Inboard light (See 09-18-25 INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) (See 09-18-26 INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [4SD].) Trunk compartment Light (See 09-18-47 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) Interior light (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-44 INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION.) (See 09-18-44 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Hazard warning switch (See 09-18-40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-41 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION.) Light switch (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-18-38 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-18-39 REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) Headlight leveling switch (See 09-18-41 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-42 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH INSPECTION.) Combination switch (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-34 COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800800700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

09-18–5

LIGHTING SYSTEMS .

1 2 3 4

Connector Bolt Fastener Front combination light

1

3 2

4

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. Adjust the headlight aiming.(See 09-18-7 HEADLIGHT AIMING.)

End Of Sie

2 BOLT: 6.9—9.8 N·m {71—99 kgf·cm, 62—86 in·lbf} am2zzw0000499

HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800800500

2-Beam Type Headlight 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the connector.

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000248

3. Remove the rubber cover. 4. Press the bulb retaining wire in the direction of the arrow to release the lock. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Caution x A bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated.If the surface of the bulb is soiled, heat of higher temperature than normal will build, shortening the life of the bulb. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the glass. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4-Beam Type Headlight Low-beam 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-18–6

RETAINING WIRE

HEAD LIGHT BULB RUBBER COVER am2zzw0000248

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 2. Disconnect the connector.

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000248

3. Remove the rubber cover. 4. Press the bulb retaining wire in the direction of the arrow to release the lock. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Caution x A bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated.If the surface of the bulb is soiled, heat of higher temperature than normal will build, shortening the life of the bulb. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the glass.

RETAINING WIRE

HEAD LIGHT BULB RUBBER COVER am2zzw0000248

6. Install in the reverse order of removal. High-beam 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to remove it. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the headlight bulb. Caution x A bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated.If the surface of the bulb is soiled, heat of higher temperature than normal will build, shortening the life of the bulb. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the glass.

SOCKET

HEAD LIGHT BULB

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000371

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie HEADLIGHT AIMING

id091800800400

Note x The reflectors for the low and high beams are integrated. Therefore, perform the headlight aiming adjustment on either the low or high beam.

09-18–7

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 2-Beam Type Headlight Low-beam Adjustment 1. Point the headlight beams to a wall and verify that the headlight beams are as shown in the figure.

L.H.D. RH

LH

BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE R.H.D. LH

RH

BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE am2zzw0000335

2. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. 3. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 4. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded condition. 5. Sit on the driver-side seat alone. 6. Put the white screen in front of the vehicle. 7. Line up the headlights with the white screen at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.

L.H.D. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT 15°

ELBOW POINT 30 mm {1.2 in}

BRIGHTNESS BORDER LINE

R.H.D. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT 15°

ELBOW POINT 30 mm {1.2 in}

BRIGHTNESS BORDER LINE am2zzw0000335

09-18–8

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 8. Measure the height at the center of the headlight. Note x Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of the headlight using the actual vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEADLIGHT

9. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the position indicated in the figure, then affix the screen to the wall.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

90° 90° am2zzw0000371

WALL

WALL

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 610 mm {24.0 in} CENTER OF HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

610 mm {24.0 in}

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT WALL 3 m {9.8 ft}

am2zzw0000335

10. 11. 12. 13.

Start the engine and charge the battery. Turn on the headlight low beams. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted. Switch the headlight leveling switch at “0” position.

09-18–9

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 14. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is at the position indicated by the adjustment screen. x If the elbow point is not at the position indicated by the adjustment screen, turn the INWARD OUTWARD adjustment screw as shown in the figure to UPWARD adjust the elbow point to the position indicated by the adjustment screen.

DOWNWARD

am2zzw0000335

High-beam Adjustment 1. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. 2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 3. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded condition. 4. Sit on the driver-side seat alone. 5. Put the wall in front of the vehicle. 6. Line up the headlights with the wall at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.

CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT

am2zzw0000335

7. Measure the height at the center of the headlight. Note x Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of the headlight using the actual vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEADLIGHT

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

90° 90° am2zzw0000371

09-18–10

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 8. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the position indicated in the figure, then affix the screen to the wall. WALL

WALL

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 610 mm {24.0 in} CENTER OF HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

610 mm {24.0 in}

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT WALL 3 m {9.8 ft}

am2zzw0000335

9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Start the engine and charge the battery. Turn on the headlight high beams. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted using a partition. Switch the headlight leveling switch at “0” position. Verify that the center of the hot zone (the bright part of high beam) is at the center of the headlight on the adjustment screen. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT (CENTER OF HOT ZONE)

HOT ZONE

am2zzw0000335

09-18–11

LIGHTING SYSTEMS x If the center of the hot zone is not at the center of the headlight on the adjustment screen, turn the adjustment screw to adjust the center of the hot zone.

INWARD

OUTWARD

UPWARD

DOWNWARD

am2zzw0000336

4-Beam Type Headlight Low-beam Adjustment 1. Point the headlight beams to a wall and verify that the headlight beams are as shown in the figure.

L.H.D. RH

LH

BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE R.H.D. LH

RH

BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE am2zzw0000335

2. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. 3. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 4. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded condition. 5. Sit on the driver-side seat alone. 6. Put the white screen in front of the vehicle. 7. Line up the headlights with the white screen at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.

L.H.D. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT 15°

ELBOW POINT 30 mm {1.2 in}

BRIGHTNESS BORDER LINE

R.H.D. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT 15°

ELBOW POINT 30 mm {1.2 in}

BRIGHTNESS BORDER LINE am2zzw0000335

09-18–12

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 8. Measure the height at the center of the headlight. Note x Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of the headlight using the actual vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

9. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the position indicated in the figure, then affix the screen to the wall.

MEASURED HEADLIGHT

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

90° 90° am2zzw0000372

WALL

WALL

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 560 mm {22.0 in} CENTER OF HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

560 mm {22.0 in}

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT WALL 3 m {9.8 ft}

am2zzw0000371

10. 11. 12. 13.

Start the engine and charge the battery. Turn on the headlight low beams. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted. Switch the headlight leveling switch at “0” position.

09-18–13

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 14. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is at the position indicated by the adjustment screen. x If the elbow point is not at the position indicated by the adjustment screen, turn the adjustment screw as shown in the figure to OUTWARD INWARD UPWARD adjust the elbow point to the position indicated by the adjustment screen.

DOWNWARD

am2zzw0000372

High-beam Adjustment 1. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. 2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 3. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded condition. 4. Sit on the driver-side seat alone. 5. Put the wall in front of the vehicle. 6. Line up the headlights with the wall at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.

CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT

am2zzw0000335

7. Measure the height at the center of the headlight. Note x Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of the headlight using the actual vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEADLIGHT

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

90° 90° am2zzw0000372

09-18–14

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 8. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the position indicated in the figure, then affix the screen to the wall. WALL

WALL

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 683 mm {26.9 in} CENTER OF HEADLIGHT

MEASURED HEIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

683 mm {26.9 in}

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE HEADLIGHT WALL 3 m {9.8 ft}

am2zzw0000371

9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Start the engine and charge the battery. Turn on the headlight high beams. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted using a partition. Switch the headlight leveling switch at “0” position. Verify that the center of the hot zone (the bright part of high beam) is at the center of the headlight on the adjustment screen. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT (CENTER OF HOT ZONE)

HOT ZONE

am2zzw0000335

09-18–15

LIGHTING SYSTEMS x If the center of the hot zone is not at the center of the headlight on the adjustment screen, turn the adjustment screw to adjust the center of the hot zone.

End Of Sie

UPWARD INWARD

DOWNWARD

OUTWARD

am2zzw0000372

PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800804200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove it. 3. Remove the parking light bulb from the socket in the direction of the arrow (2). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

SOCKET

End Of Sie

(2)

PARKING LIGHT BULB

(1)

am2zzw0000248

FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800805000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it. 3. Remove the front turn light bulb. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB

am2zzw0000239

FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles Standard type 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle.

09-18–16

id091800802100

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000250

4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the screws, then remove the front fog light component.

FRONT FOG LIGHT COMPONENT

SCREW

SCREW CONNECTOR SCREW

am2zzw0000248

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Remove the aiming adjustment bolt. Remove the screw. Remove the front fog light. Install in the reverse order of removal. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)

FRONT FOG LIGHT BRACKET

FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT BOLT SCREW

1.0—3.4 N·m {11—34 kgf·cm, 8.9—30 in·lbf} am2zzw0000446

Sport type 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle. 3. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000250

09-18–17

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the screws, then remove the front fog light component. SCREW FRONT FOG LIGHT COMPONENT

SCREW

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000446

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Remove the aiming adjustment bolt. Remove the screw. Remove the front fog light. Install in the reverse order of removal. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)

FRONT FOG LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT BRACKET

AIMING ADJUSTMENT BOLT

SCREW

1.0—3.4 N·m {11—34 kgf·cm, 8.9—30 in·lbf} am2zzw0000446

AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles Standard Type 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle. 3. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000250

4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the screws, then remove the front fog light component. SCREW

FRONT FOG LIGHT COMPONENT CONNECTOR

SCREW

am2zzw0000446

09-18–18

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Remove the aiming adjustment bolt. Remove the screw. Remove the front fog light. Install in the reverse order of removal. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)

FRONT FOG LIGHT BRACKET

FRONT FOG LIGHT SCREW AIMING ADJUSTMENT BOLT 1.0—3.4 N·m {11—34 kgf·cm, 8.9—30 in·lbf} am2zzw0000443

Sport Type 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle. 3. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000250

4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the screws, then remove the front fog light component. SCREW

FRONT FOG LIGHT COMPONENT

SCREW

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000446

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Remove the aiming adjustment bolt. Remove the screw. Remove the front fog light. Install in the reverse order of removal. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See 09-18-20 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)

FRONT FOG LIGHT

End Of Sie

FRONT FOG LIGHT BRACKET

AIMING ADJUSTMENT BOLT SCREW

1.0—3.4 N·m {11—34 kgf·cm, 8.9—30 in·lbf} am2zzw0000446

FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800802300

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-18–19

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 2. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000382

3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Rotate the front fog light bulb in the direction of the arrow (1) and pull it out. CONNECTOR

Caution x A bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated.If the surface of the bulb is soiled, heat of higher temperature than normal will build, shortening the life of the bulb. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the glass.

FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB (1)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See 0918-20 Front Fog Light Bulb Installation Note.)

am2zzw0000382

Front Fog Light Bulb Installation Note 1. Install the front fog light bulb by turning it in the direction of the arrow. LH

RH FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB

FTONT FOG LIGHT BULB

am2zzw0000217

End Of Sie FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING 1. Make a front fog light adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper. 2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 3. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface. 4. Seat one person in the driver’s seat.

id091800802200

SAME FOR BOTH RIGHT AND LEFT

CENTER OF FRONT FOG LIGHT

60 mm {2.4 in}

BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE am2zzw0000444

09-18–20

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 5. Line up the vehicle with the wall so that the center of the front fog light is 3 m {9.8 ft} away from the wall. ACTUAL CENTER OF THE FRONT FOG LIGHT

WALL

3 m {9.8 ft}

am2zzw0000444

6. Measure the height at the center of the front fog light. Note x Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of the front fog light using the actual vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE FRONT FOG LIGHT

MEASURED HEIGHT

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE FRONT FOG LIGHT

90° 90° am2zzw0000496

09-18–21

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 7. Align the center of the front fog light with the center of the screen.

WALL

WALL

FRONT FOG LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN

*1

*1

CENTER OF FRONT FOG LIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

ACTUAL CENTER OF THE FRONT FOG LIGHT

VEHICLE CENTER

MEASURED HEIGHT

*1

Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles STANDARD TYPE : 652.7 mm {25.7 in} SPORT TYPE : 652.7 mm {25.7 in} AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles STANDARD TYPE : 654.1 mm {25.75 in} SPORT TYPE : 655.5 mm {25.81 in}

am2zzw0000444

8. 9. 10. 11.

Block the light of the other front fog light using a partition. Start the engine so that the battery remains charged. Turn the front fog lights on. Verify that brightness border line of the front fog light is at the position indicated on the adjustment screen. x If the brightness border line is not at the position indicated on the adjustment screen, perform the following adjustment. 12. Remove the screws shown in the figure and bend back the mudguard in the direction of the arrow. FRONT BUMPER

MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000250

09-18–22

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 13. Loosen the aiming adjustment bolt, adjust the center of the front fog light to the position shown in the figure, and tighten the screws.

End Of Sie SCREW

UP WARD

DOWN WARD

AIMING ADJUSTMENT BOLT 1.0—3.4 N·m {11—34 kgf·cm, 8.9—30 in·lbf} am2zzw0000444

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Move the front side turn light in the direction of the arrow (1) (toward the vehicle rear) and detach the tab. 3. Pull area A of the front side turn light in the direction of the arrow (2) and remove the front side turn light. 4. Disconnect the front side turn light connector. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x Always assemble the front side turn light with the tab towards the vehicle rear.

id091800800900

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT CONNECTOR FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT

TAB A (1)

REAR

(2) am2zzw0000336

End Of Sie REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800801000

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the screws.

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

SCREW

am2zzw0000218

09-18–23

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Slide the rear combination light to the vehicle rear, avoiding the clip.

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

CLIP

A

A

SEC. A—A

am2zzw0000336

4. Disconnect the connectors in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the rear combination light. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000219

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the fasteners and slightly bend back the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the connector in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the rear combination light. BRAKE/TAILLIGHT BULB REAR TURN LIGHT BULB

am2zzw0000496

5. Remove the nuts and slide the rear combination light to the vehicle rear, avoiding the clip. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

CLIP

NUT 4.1—6.1 N·m {42—62 kgf·cm, 37—53 in·lbf}

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT am2zzw0000497

09-18–24

LIGHTING SYSTEMS REAR COMBINATION LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800805900

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light. (See 09-18-23 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear combination light bulbs. BULB POSITION 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR TURN LIGHT BULB

BRAKE / TAILLIGHT BULB BACK-UP LIGHT BULB

BULB SOCKET

BULB am2zzw0000497

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the service hole cover. 3. Remove the socket. 4. Remove the rear combination light bulbs. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

BULB POSITION

End Of Sie BRAKE / TAILLIGHT BULB REAR TURN LIGHT BULB

BULB

SOCKET

BULB am2zzw0000497

INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0918008061a5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)

09-18–25

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3 4

Nut Bracket Connector Inboard light (See 09-18-26 Inboard Light Installation Note.)

4

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2 3 1 2.9—4.9 N·m {30—49 kgf·cm, 26—43 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000494

Inboard Light Installation Note 1. Insert the inboard light into the trunk lid as shown in the figure, then pivot it inward and fix in place.

End Of Sie

TRUNK LID INBOARD LIGHT

am2zzw0000482

INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] id0918008060a5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. With rear fog light 1 2 3

Connector Socket Rear fog light bulb (driver-side) / back-up light bulb (passenger-side)

3

Without rear fog light 1 2 3

Connector Socket Back-up light bulb

1

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

2 am2ccw0000021

End Of Sie REAR FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800805100

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear fog light bulb. (See 09-18-27 REAR FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-23 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the screws.

09-18–26

LIGHTING SYSTEMS L.H.D.

REAR FOG LIGHT

REAR BUMPER

SCREW am2zzw0000373

R.H.D. 5. Remove the rear fog light in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR FOG LIGHT

REAR BUMPER

SCREW

am2zzw0000373

4SD Note x Rear fog light is integrated with the inboard light (RH). 1. Refer to 09-18-25 INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].

End Of Sie REAR FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800851300

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Rotate the rear fog light socket in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove the rear fog light socket and rear fog light bulb in the direction of the arrow (2). L.H.D. REAR FOG LIGHT SOCKET

(1)

(2) am2zzw0000337

09-18–27

LIGHTING SYSTEMS R.H.D. REAR FOG LIGHT SOCKET

(1)

(2) am2zzw0000337

3. Remove the rear fog light bulb from the rear fog light socket in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

REAR FOG LIGHT SOCKET

REAR FOG LIGHT BULB

am2zzw0000029

4SD Note x Rear fog light is integrated with the inboard light (RH). 1. Refer to 09-18-26 INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

End Of Sie HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800802000

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove tabs A (4 locations). 4. Remove the high-mount brake light while removing tabs B (4 locations). TAB B CONNECTOR 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. A

A

A

A

HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT am2zzw0000228

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)

09-18–28

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Disconnect the socket. 4. Remove the nuts.

HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

NUT

NUT

2.9—6.9 N·m {30—70 kgf·cm, 26—61 in·lbf}

2.9—6.9 N·m {30—70 kgf·cm, 26—61 in·lbf}

SOCKET am2zzw0000483

5. Disengage the tabs by pressing both ends of the lens in the directions indicated by the arrows and remove the high-mount brake light. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TAB

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE RIGHT

TAB

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000491

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id0918008664a5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-77 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2

Socket Bulb

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

End Of Sie

2 1

am2zzw0000491

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800857800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole, push it in the direction of the arrow, and remove the lens. 3. Remove the license plate light bulb from the socket. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB LENS am2zzw0000250

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800801100

5HB/3HB 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (3HB) (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Rear scuff plate (5HB) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-18–29

LIGHTING SYSTEMS

3. 4. 5. 6.

(3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) Disconnect the connector. Pull the tabs shown in the figure in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove them in the direction of the arrow (2). Remove the license plate light. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

(2) (1)

am2zzw0000249

4SD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Pull the tabs shown in the figure in the direction of the arrow (1) and remove them in the direction of the arrow (2). 4. Remove the license plate light. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

(2) (1)

am2ccw0000021

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION F35M-R 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-18–30

id091800800200

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 2. Drain the transaxle oil. 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2

Connector Back-up light switch

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 1

2

GASKET

R

20—29 N·m {2.1—2.9 kgf·cm, 15—21 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000337

B65M-R 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2

Connector Back-up light switch

20—29 N·m {2.1—2.9 kgf·cm, 15—21 ft·lbf}

2 GASKET

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

R

End Of Sie 1

am2zzw0000337

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION id091800800300

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Drain the transmission oil (F35M-R). Remove the back-up light switch. (See 09-18-30 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify that the continuity between the back-up light switch terminals is as indicated in the table F35M-R B65M-R using a circuit tester. A

B

A

A B

B am2zzw0000496

09-18–31

LIGHTING SYSTEMS x If not as indicated in the table, replace the back-up light switch.

End Of Sie

: Continuity Shift lever position

Terminal B

A

Reverse Other PUSH

am2zzw0000240

COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION R.H.D. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Driver-side air bag module. (2) Steering wheel (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (3) Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Clock spring. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the bolt.

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

BOLT

BOLT: 4—12 N·m {41—129 kgf·cm, 36—112 in·lbf} am2zzw0000351

09-18–32

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 5. Detach the tab. 6. Remove the combination switch. (See 09-18-34 Combination Switch Installation Note.) 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TAB

am2zzw0000219

Combination Switch Installation Note 1. Align the combination switch rib with the steering shaft guide and press the combination switch until it contacts.

End Of Sie

GUIDE COMBINATION SWITCH RIB STEERING SHAFT am2zzw0000219

COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY id091800802600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Driver-side air bag module. (2) Steering wheel (See 06-13- 10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (3) Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Clock spring 3. Remove the combination switch. (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Press the tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove the light switch, and the wiper and washer switch. VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE

LIGHT SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH (2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(1)

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

(1)

(1)

(1)

am2zzw0000336

5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie

09-18–34

LIGHTING SYSTEMS LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800802800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the connector. Vehicles with light switch on left side LIGHT SWITCH (2) TAB

(1)

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000220

Vehicles with light switch on right side 4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the light switch in the direction of the arrow (2). 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

LIGHT SWITCH TAB

(2)

(1)

CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000220

LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4.

id091800802900

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch.

09-18–35

LIGHTING SYSTEMS Vehicles Without Auto Light System Headlight switch VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE D

H

F

: Continuity

J

Terminal

Switch position FLASH-TO-PASS

TNS OFF

HI LO

HEAD LIGHT

Light

Dimmer

OFF

-

TNS

-

Flash-topass

B

D

F

H

J

OFF ON OFF ON

B

* *

* J

* H

* F

* D

Headlight

* B

OFF

LO

ON HI

-

VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE L

H

J

: Continuity

F

Terminal

Switch position FLASH-TO-PASS

TNS OFF

HI LO

HEAD LIGHT

Light

Dimmer

OFF

-

TNS

-

Flash-topass

F

H

J

L

N

OFF ON OFF ON

N

* *

* N

* L

* J

* H

* F

*

*

*

*

Headlight

LO

OFF ON

HI

-

am2zzw0000483

09-18–36

LIGHTING SYSTEMS Turn switch VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE I

LEFT

: Continuity

RIGHT

Terminal

Switch position E

E

G

G

I

Left OFF * *

I

G

E

*

*

*

* *

* *

Right

VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE E

LEFT

: Continuity

RIGHT

Terminal

Switch position I

G

G

I

E

Left OFF *

*

*

I

G

E

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Right

am2zzw0000515

Vehicles With Auto Light System Headlight switch

: Continuity Terminal

Switch position K AUTO

D

F TNS

H FLASH-TO-PASS

J

Light

Dimmer

OFF

-

TNS

-

HI LO

OFF HEAD LIGHT

Flash-topass

B

D

F

H

J

K

OFF ON OFF ON

Headlight

B

LO

ON HI

K *

* J

* H

* F

* D

OFF OFF

* B

LO Auto HI

ON am2zzw0000380

09-18–37

LIGHTING SYSTEMS Turn switch I

LEFT

: Continuity

RIGHT

Terminal

Switch position E

E

G

G

I

Left OFF * *

I

G

E

*

*

*

* *

* *

Right

am2zzw0000380

End Of Sie FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION id091800803200

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify that the continuity between the front fog light switch terminals is as indicated in the table using a circuit tester. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch.

09-18–38

LIGHTING SYSTEMS VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE

: Continuity A

Switch position

FRONT FOG LIGHT

OFF

Terminal B

A

OFF FRONT FOG LIGHT

B

* *

*

*

*

*

*

*

A B

* *

VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE

: Continuity M

Switch position

FRONT FOG LIGHT

OFF

Terminal M

N

OFF FRONT FOG LIGHT

N

*

M

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

N

*

*

*

*

*

*

am2zzw0000515

End Of Sie REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION id091800475500

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-35 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify that the continuity between the front fog light switch terminals is as indicated in the table using a tester. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch.

09-18–39

LIGHTING SYSTEMS WITHOUT FRONT FOG LIGHT : Continuity

C REAR FOG LIGHT

OFF

Terminal

Switch position

B

C

OFF REAR FOG LIGHT B

* *

*

*

*

C

*

*

*

*

* B

WITH FRONT FOG LIGHT : Continuity FRONT FOG LIGHT

C

A

Switch position REAR FOG LIGHT

OFF

Terminal A

B

C

OFF FRONT FOG LIGHT REAR FOG LIGHT

B

* *

*

*

*

C

*

*

*

*

A B

am2zzw0000515

End Of Sie HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800803000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (Vehicles with center panel unit) (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (Vehicles with center panel unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (6) Center panel (Vehicles without center panel unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-18–40

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Remove the hazard warning switch in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the hazard warning switch tabs in the direction of the arrow (1). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL (2)

End Of Sie

(1)

(1)

HAZARD SWITCH am2zzw0000249

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION

id091800803100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (Vehicles with center panel unit) (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (Vehicles with center panel unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (6) Center panel (Vehicles without center panel unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (7) Hazard warning switch (See 09-18-40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Verify that the continuity between the hazard warning switch terminals is as indicated in the C A table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the hazard warning switch. D

B

C

B

A

D am2zzw0000482

End Of Sie : Continuity

: Bulb

Terminal Switch position

A

D

C

B

ON OFF

am2zzw0000482

HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800803600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (driver-side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front side trim (driver-side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (4) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-18–41

LIGHTING SYSTEMS (6) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Lower panel (driver-side) (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Press the tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the auto leveling switch in the direction of the arrow (2). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

(1) (1)

TAB HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH

(1) (1)

(2) TAB

am2zzw0000254

HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH INSPECTION

id091800803700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (driver-side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Front side trim (driver-side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (4) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Lower panel (driver-side) (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Headlight leveling switch (See 09-18-41 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the headlight leveling switch terminals is as E J indicated in the table using a tester. x If not as indicated in the table, or if the E * A 0 * * * resistance is not within the specification, L J D * 1 * * replace the headlight leveling switch. L 2

3 A

D am2zzw0000348

09-18–42

LIGHTING SYSTEMS End Of Sie : Bulb

: Resistance Switch position

Terminal H

0

J R1

R2

R3

R4

2

R5

R6

3

R7

R8

1

A

D

E

R1: 910 Ω R2: 3785 Ω R3: 1716 Ω R4: 2979 Ω R5: 2276 Ω R6: 2419 Ω R7: 2895 Ω R8: 1800 Ω am2zzw0000228

AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING

id091800803300

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Module Programming”. 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select "Programmable Parameters". 2. Select "Exterior Lighting". 4. Select the item name, and then select option. DLC-2

Items

am2zzw0000251

x Autolamp On Setting (Standard (Other) / Low (Other))

End Of Sie INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091800801500

Vehicles With Intruder Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the lens. (See 09-18-44 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the interior light. 6. Disconnect the interior light connector. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

INTERIOR LIGHT

SCREW

am2zzw0000224

09-18–43

LIGHTING SYSTEMS Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rain sensor cover (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Set the headliner out of the way. 4. Release the tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the interior light in INTERIOR LIGHT the direction of the arrow (2). CONNECTOR 5. Disconnect the interior light connector. INTERIOR LIGHT 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

TAB (1)

TAB (1)

(2) am2zzw0000213

INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Vehicles With Intruder Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole, push it in the direction indicated by the arrow, and remove the lens. 3. Remove the interior light bulbs. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

id091800801400

INTERIOR LIGHT

SERVICE HOLE

INTERIOR LIGHT BULB LENS am2zzw0000225

Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole, push it in the direction indicated by the arrow, and remove the lens. 3. Remove the interior light bulb. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

INTERIOR LIGHT

End Of Sie

INTERIOR LIGHT BULB SERVICE HOLE LENS am2zzw0000250

INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION id091800801600

Vehicles With Intruder Sensor 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-135 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the lens. (See 09-18-44 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-18–44

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 4. Remove the interior light. (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Verify that the continuity between the interior light terminals is as indicated in the table. C

MAP LIGHT SWITCH

MAP LIGHT SWITCH

INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH ON

OFF DOOR

H

H

*

F

F

*

C

*

*

*

am2zzw0000496

x If not as indicated in the table, replace the interior light.

: Bulb Terminal

Switch Position H Map Light Switch

F

C

OFF ON

OFF Interior Light DOOR Switch ON am2zzw0000496

Vehicles Without Intruder Sensor 1. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Rain sensor cover (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the interior light. (See 09-18-43 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Set the headliner out of the way. 4. Verify that the continuity between the interior light D terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the interior light. D INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH

C

B

*

OFF ON DOOR C

B am2zzw0000496

09-18–45

LIGHTING SYSTEMS End Of Sie : Bulb Switch Position

Terminal D

C

B

OFF DOOR ON

am2zzw0000496

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800801700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Insert hand through the service hole, release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, and pull area A in the direction of the arrow (2) to remove the cargo compartment light. 3. Disconnect the cargo compartment light connector. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

CONNECTOR (2) A

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT

(1) TAB am2zzw0000227

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091800807800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the cargo compartment light. (See 09-18-46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the cargo compartment light bulb. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000227

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT INSPECTION id091800801800

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the cargo compartment light. (See 09-18-46 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

09-18–46

LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3. Verify that the continuity between the cargo compartment light terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the cargo compartment light.

A

B

A

OFF ON

B am2zzw0000482

End Of Sie : Bulb Switch position

Terminal A

B

ON OFF

am2zzw0000482

TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]

id0918008507a5

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disengage the tabs by pressing both ends of the lens in the directions indicated by the arrows and remove the lens. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

TAB

End Of Sie TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB LENS

am2zzw0000483

09-18–47

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM

09-19

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–2 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–5 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–7 Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–8 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–8 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-19–11 Ball Joint Assembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–11 Windshield Wiper Motor Assembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–11 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–12 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–12 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–13 Washer Hose Installation Note. . . . . . . 09-19–14 WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14 WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . 09-19–14 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–15 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17 Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note . . . . . 09-19–18 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–18 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–18 REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION . . . 09-19–19 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–20 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–20 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . . 09-19–22 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–24 Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–24 Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Right Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–25 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–27 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–28 RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING . . . . . . 09-19–31 Rain Sensor Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–31 Rain Sensor Re-initialization . . . . . . . . . 09-19–31

End of Toc SOKYU_WM: WIPER/WASHER SYSTEMS

09-19–1

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX id091900910000

R.H.D. 1

VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE

2

12

11

3

4

5

VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE

11

12

6

5HB

7

8 9

10

am2zzw0000495 .

1

2

3

Windshield wiper motor (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-11 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-19-12 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION.) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-8 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.) Windshield washer nozzle (See 09-19-15 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-16 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)

09-19–2

4

5

6

7

Windshield washer hose (See 09-19-16 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Washer tank (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Washer motor (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-11 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Rear washer hose (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 8

9

10

11

12

Rear washer nozzle (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.) Rear wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-18 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.) Rear wiper motor (See 09-19-18 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-19 REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION.) Wiper and washer switch (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Rain sensor (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-31 RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING.)

End Of Sie

09-19–4

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [3HB] R.H.D. 1

id0919009100z3

VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE

2

12

11

3

4

5

VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE

11

12

6

7

8

9

10

am2zzw0000495 .

1

2

3

Windshield wiper motor (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-11 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-19-12 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION.) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-8 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.) Windshield washer nozzle (See 09-19-15 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-16 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)

4

5

6

7

Windshield washer hose (See 09-19-16 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Washer tank (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Washer motor (See 09-19-9 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-11 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) Rear washer hose (See 09-19-22 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-19–5

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 8

9

10

11

12

Rear washer nozzle (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.) Rear wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-18 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.) Rear wiper motor (See 09-19-18 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-19 REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION.) Wiper and washer switch (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) Rain sensor (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-31 RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING.)

End Of Sie WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900474600

Warning x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and the wiper and washer switch is in the AUTO position, the windshield wipers could operate accidentally under the following conditions. Always turn the ignition switch, and the wiper and washer switch off before handling the windshield wipers; otherwise a pinched hand or fingers could result in injury or a wiper system malfunction: — The windshield in the rain sensor installation area is touched. — The windshield is subjected to an impact. — The rain sensor is subjected to an impact from inside the vehicle. — Water is poured on the windshield. 1. Remove in the order indicated in the table. R.H.D. 1

.

1 2 3

4 5 6

Cap Nut Windshield wiper arm (See: 09-19-8 Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note.) Windshield wiper blade Backing plate Rubber brush

2. Install in the reverse order of removal. 3. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-8 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.)

2 3 4 5

4 5 6 NUT : 24—27 N·m {2.5—2.7 kgf·m, 18—19 ft·lbf} am2zzw0000506

09-19–7

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note 1. Clean the serrated connecting part with a wire brush before installing the windshield wiper arm.

End Of Sie

SERRATED CONNECTING PART

am2zzw0000212

WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT id091900474700 1. Turn off the windshield wiper switch while operating the windshield wiper motor to stop the windshield wiper at the auto-stop position. 2. Slide the serrated connecting part and position the windshield wiper arm and blade as shown in the figure. R.H.D.

End Of Sie

29.5—33.5 mm {1.17—1.31 in} 28—32 mm {1.11—1.25 in}

COWL GRILL END LINE

MOLDING END LINE COWL GRILL END LINE

id091900474800

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

am2zzw0000213

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the cowl grille. (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) am2zzw0000432 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. R.H.D. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) 1

1

2

3 BOLT:4.0—6.8 N·m {41—69 kgf·cm, 36—60 in·lbf}

09-19–8

1 am2zzw0000216

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM R.H.D. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) .

1 2 3

1

Bolt Windshield wiper motor Connector

1

2

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-8 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

3 BOLT: 4.5—6.3 N·m {46—64 kgf·cm, 40—55 in·lbf}

1 am2zzw0000216

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

id091900474900

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the figure.

.

GREASE

GREASE

6

2

4

1

1

TAB A A

A

A A

A

A GREASE GREASE

3

A

GREASE

5

A

adejjw00003084

1 2 3

Cover Bolt Wiper link No.1 (See 09-19-11 Ball Joint Assembly Note.)

4 5 6

09-19–10

Windshield wiper motor (See 09-19-11 Windshield Wiper Motor Assembly Note.) Wiper link No.2 (See 09-19-11 Ball Joint Assembly Note.) Main link (See 09-19-11 Ball Joint Assembly Note.)

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Ball Joint Assembly Note 1. Use a clean cloth to protect the link and squeeze using pliers.

BALL JOINT

CLEAN RAG

LINK am2zzw0000218

Windshield Wiper Motor Assembly Note 1. Connect the windshield wiper motor to the vehicle wiring harness connector, operate the windshield wipers, and then stop them at the auto-stop position. 2. Adjust the motor crank and wiper link No.1 so that MOTOR CLANK they are parallel as shown in the figure. WIPER LINK No.1

End Of Sie

PARALLEL

am2zzw0000218

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION R.H.D. 1. Disconnect windshield wiper motor connector. 2. After connecting the windshield wiper motor terminal D or E to the positive battery terminal, and terminal C to the negative battery terminal, verify that the windshield wipers operate as shown in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the windshield wiper motor. Terminal applied to battery Battery negative Battery positive voltage voltage D C E

id091900475000

CI RCUI T BREAKER AUTO STOP SWITCH

M

• • • • E

• • • •

B C

D

A BB

Operation condition C

HI LO

B

A

D

E adejjw00003085

09-19–11

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 3. Disconnect the positive battery from terminal E while the wipers are operating, then verify that the wipers do not stop at the auto-stop position. 4. Connect windshield wiper motor terminals E and A, and apply battery positive voltage to terminal B. 5. Verify that the windshield wipers operate at low speed again and they are at the auto-stop position. x If there is any malfunction, replace the windshield wiper motor.

End Of Sie WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091900476100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front combination light on the left side. (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. .

5

3

4

1 2

2

2 adejjw00004723

1 2 3

Connector Washer hose Bolt

4 5

Clip Washer tank (See 09-19-14 Washer Hose Installation Note.)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

09-19–13

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Washer Hose Installation Note 1. Install the washer hoses by inserting them in the washer tank grooves as shown in the figure. FRONT

GROOVE

GROOVE

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE

WASHER TANK

REAR WASHER HOSE am2zzw0000226

End Of Sie WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900477100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front combination light on the left side. (See 09-18-5 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the washer tank. (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove in the order indicated in the table. .

1 2

Washer motor Grommet

1

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

2

adejjw00002618

WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-8 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the washer tank. (See 09-19-13 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the washer motor. (See 09-19-14 WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-19–14

id091900477200

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 6. After connecting washer motor terminal A to the positive battery terminal, and terminal B to the negative battery terminal, verify that washer fluid flows to the windshield washer hose. x If there is any malfunction, replace the washer motor. 7. After connecting washer motor terminal B to the positive battery terminal, and terminal A to the negative battery terminal, verify that washer fluid flows to the rear washer hose. x If there is any malfunction, replace the washer motor.

End Of Sie

A

B

A

M

B adejjw00002688

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900476300

1. Remove the windshield wiper arm. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove the cowl grille. (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the windshield washer hose from the windshield washer nozzle. 4. Press the windshield washer nozzle tab in the FRONT WASHER NOZZLE direction of the arrow shown in the figure to detach it. 5. Pull out the windshield washer nozzle from the TAB cowl grille and remove. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000220

09-19–15

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT

id091900476400

1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the windshield washer nozzle and adjust the area washer fluid is sprayed as shown in the figure.

489.6 mm {19.28 in} 98.8 mm {3.89 in}

115.7 mm {4.555 in}

535.5 mm {21.08 in}

535.5 mm {21.08 in}

170.2 mm {6.701 in}

146.0 mm {5.75 in}

491.9 mm {19.37 in}

CERAMIC END LINE

94.5 mm {3.72 in}

95.1 mm {3.74 in} 194.6 mm {7.661 in}

346.6 mm {13.65 in} 436.1 mm {17.17 in}

220.4 mm {8.677 in}

353.8 mm {13.93 in} 437.0 mm {17.2 in} am2zzw0000225

End Of Sie WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091900476500

1. Remove the mudguard on the left side. (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Remove windshield washer hose No.1 from the FRONT washer tank. 3. Detach clip A. CLIP A WASHER TANK WINDSHELD WASHER HOSE No.1

WINDSHELD WASHER HOSE No.1 am2zzw0000224

09-19–16

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 4. Remove windshield washer hose No.1 from clip B and joint pipe A in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. 5. Remove the windshield washer base No.1 from joint pipe A. 6. Remove windshield washer hose No.1 from joint pipe A. 7. Remove the cowl grille. (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 8. Remove the windshield wiper arm. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 9. Remove the windshield washer nozzle. (See 0919-15 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 10. Remove the windshield washer hose from the hook. 11. Remove windshield washer hoses No.2, No.3 and No.4 from joint pipes B and C. 12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

WINDSHELD WASHER HOSE No.1

CLIP B JOINT PIPE A CLIP B WINDSHELD WASHER HOSE No.1 am2zzw0000224

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE No.3

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE No.2

End Of Sie

JOINT PIPE B

HOOK

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE No.3 JOINT PIPE• •

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE No.4

HOOK

REVERSE SIDE OF COWL GRILL am2zzw0000373

REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900910100

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table. Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 5 4 6

3 1 2

NUT : 5.9—9.8 N·m {60—100 kgf·cm, 53—86 in·lbf} am2zzw0000496

AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 5

.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Cap Nut Rear wiper arm (See 09-19-18 Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note.) Rear wiper blade Backing plate Rubber brush

2. Install in the reverse order of removal. 3. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See 09-1917 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

4 3 1 2

6

NUT : 6.7—9.0 N·m {69—91 kgf·cm, 60—79 in·lbf} am2zzw0000432

09-19–17

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note 1. Clean the serrated connecting part with a wire brush before installing the rear wiper arm.

End Of Sie

SERRATED CONNECTING PART

am2zzw0000225

REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT id091900910200

1. Turn off the rear wiper switch while operating the rear wiper motor to stop the rear wiper at the auto-stop position. 2. Slide the serrated connecting part and position the rear wiper arm and blade as shown in the figure.

FILAMENT 25 mm {0.98 in} CERAMIC END LINE

10 mm {0.39 in}

am2zzw0000225

End Of Sie REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900475500

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear wiper arm. (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove in the order indicated in the table.

09-19–18

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 2

1

2

3 BOLT:3.0—5.8 N·m {30—59 kgf·cm, 27—52 in·lbf} am2zzw0000225

AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles 2

.

1 2 3

Connector Bolt Rear wiper motor

1

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See 09-1918 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.)

2

End Of Sie

3 BOLT: 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} am2zzw0000433

REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION

id091900475600

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-79 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear wiper motor connector. Apply battery positive voltage to rear wiper motor connector terminal C, and connect terminals B and D to the ground. 5. Verify that the rear wiper motor operates smoothly.

M

C

*

D

B

AUTO STOP SWITCH D

B

C

adejjw00003442

09-19–19

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 6. Disconnect the ground connecting rear wiper motor connector terminal D and the negative battery terminal while the rear wipers are operating, then verify that the rear wipers stop at the auto-stop position. x If there is any malfunction, replace the rear wiper motor.

M

C

*

D

B

AUTO STOP SWITCH

End Of Sie

D A

B

C D am2zzw0000225

REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091900476700

1. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-78 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Release the tabs in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the rear washer nozzle. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 4. Adjust the spray area of the rear washer nozzle. TAB (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

TAB am2zzw0000225

REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT id091900476800

259.6 {10.22} 2.9 {0.11}

18.3 {0.720}

1. Insert a needle or similar thin tool into the rear washer nozzle and adjust the area where washer fluid is sprayed as shown in the figure.

226.0 {8.898} 183.1 {7.209}

CERAMIC END LINE

164.3 {6.469}

mm {in} adejjw00002289

End Of Sie REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900475700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the mudguard on the left side. (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-19–20

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the washer tank. 4. Remove rear washer hose No.1 from clip A.

FRONT

CLIP A

WASHER TANK

REAR WASHER HOSE

CLIP A am2zzw0000226

JOINT PIPE A a

CLIP D CLIP C

REAR WASHER HOSE No.2

CLIP B

CLIP A JOINT PIPE A

REAR WASHER HOSE No.1 REAR WASHER HOSE No.1

CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP C

CLIP D am2zzw0000226

5. Remove the A-pillar trim on the left side. (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 7. Remove the grove compertment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 8. Remove rear washer hose No.2 from clips B, C, and D. 9. Remove rear washer hose No.2 and joint pipe B. 10. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-19–21

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM (4) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (5) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (7) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)C-pillar trim (See 09-17-46 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Rain sensor cover (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (13)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 11. Remove joint pipe C. 12. Remove the headliner. (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 13. Peel off the tape and remove rear washer hose No.3. REAR WASHER HOSE No.3

JOINT PIPE B

TAPE

TAPE

CLIP F

CLIP G JOINT PIPE D

REAR WASHER HOSE No.5

JOINT PIPE E

CLIP E

REAR WASHER NOZZLE

CLIP E

CLIP F

REAR WASHER HOSE No.4 CLIP G

JOINT PIPE C

REAR WASHER HOSE No.6

am2zzw0000226

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Remove rear washer hose No.4 from clips E, F, and G. Remove rear washer hose No.4 from joint pipe D. Remove rear washer hose no.5 from joint pipe E. Remove the rear washer nozzle. (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove rear washer hose No.6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] id0919004757z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the mudguard on the left side. (See 09-16-8 MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-19–22

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the washer tank. 4. Remove rear washer hose No.1 from clip A.

FRONT

CLIP A

WASHER TANK

REAR WASHER HOSE

CLIP A am2zzw0000343

JOINT PIPE A a

CLIP D CLIP C

REAR WASHER HOSE No.2

CLIP B

CLIP A JOINT PIPE A

REAR WASHER HOSE No.1 REAR WASHER HOSE No.1

CLIP A

CLIP B

CLIP C

CLIP D am2zzw0000343

5. Remove the A-pillar trim on the left side. (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 7. Remove the grove compertment cover. (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 8. Remove rear washer hose No.2 from clips B, C, and D. 9. Remove rear washer hose No.2 and joint pipe B. 10. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (3) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-45 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].)

09-19–23

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM (4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (7) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (8) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Rain sensor cover (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (11)Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) 11. Remove joint pipe C. 12. Remove the headliner. (See 09-17-81 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 13. Peel off the tape and remove rear washer hose No.3. REAR WASHER HOSE No.3

CLIP F CLIP E CLIP G

TAPE

TAPE

JOINT PIPE

JOINT PIPE D REAR WASHER HOSE No.5 JOINT PIPE REAR WASHER HOSE No.6

CLIP H

REAR WASHER NOZZLE

CLIP I

CLIP E

CLIP F

REAR WASHER HOSE No.4 CLIP J CLIP G

CLIP H

JOINT PIPE C

CLIP H HEAD IMPACT PAD (VEHICLES WITH HEAD IMPACT PAD)

CLIP I AIR BAG CURTAIN (VEHICLES WITH AIR BAG CURTAIN)

CLIP J am2zzw0000343

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Remove rear washer hose No.4 from clips E, F, G, H, I, and J. Remove rear washer hose No.4 from joint pipe D. Remove rear washer hose no.5 from joint pipe E. Remove the rear washer nozzle. (See 09-19-20 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove rear washer hose No.6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id091900910300

Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Left Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-19–24

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, pull up the wiper and washer switch in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

(1) (2)

TAB

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CONNECTOR adejjw00002490

Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Right Side 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) (1) WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH shown in the figure, pull up the wiper and washer (2) TAB switch in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000050

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION id091900910400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the windshield wiper and washer switch terminals as indicated in the table. x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, or if the resistance is not within the specification, replace the windshield wiper and washer switch.

09-19–25

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Left Side D

K

1

E

*

F

FRONT WASHER SWITCH

OFF

2 MIST

2

3 4 5

1 6 J

H

C

• EHICLES WITH AUTO LIGHT• W • IPER SYSTEM• A • UTO *• V • V • EHICLES WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT• W • IPER SYSTEM• I•NT

K *

* J

* H

E F

C D

* * am2zzw0000226

:CONTINUITY TERMINAL SWITCH POSITION C

D

E

F

K

OFF WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH

MIST AUTO/INT 1 2

WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH

ON

am2zzw0000226

: RESISTANCE SWITCH POSITION

TERMINAL J

H

1

R1

2

R2

3

R3

4

R4

5

R5

6 R1: 4010 • • R2: 1310 • • R3: 630 • •

R4: 300 • • R5: 120 • •

am2zzw0000226

09-19–26

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Right Side L

I

C

1

*

J

FRONT WASHER SWITCH

OFF

2 MIST

2

3 4 5

1 6 F

H

• EHICLES WITH AUTO LIGHT• W • IPER SYSTEM• A • UTO *• V • V • EHICLES WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT• W • IPER SYSTEM• I•NT

K

* *

* *

K L

I J

* H

* F

C

* *

*

am2zzw0000038

:CONTINUITY TERMINAL SWITCH POSITION C

I

J

K

L

OFF WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH

MIST AUTO/INT 1 2

WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH

ON

am2zzw0000038

End Of Sie : RESISTANCE SWITCH POSITION

TERMINAL F

H

1

R1

2

R2

3

R3

4

R4

5

R5

6 R1: 4010 • • R2: 1310 • • R3: 630 • •

R4: 300 • • R5: 120 • •

am2zzw0000038

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION

id091900910500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See 09-19-24 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Verify that the continuity between the rear wiper and washer switch terminals is as indicated in the table.

09-19–27

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM x If not as indicated in the table, replace the wiper and washer switch. VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE : CONTINUITY G

I

TERMINAL SWITCH POSITION C REAR WASHER

ON OFF

REAR WIPER SWITCH

I

OFF ON

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

REAR WASHER

G

ON

C

*

I

G

*

C

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE : CONTINUITY G

E

TERMINAL SWITCH POSITION

ON

REAR WASHER

OFF

REAR WIPER SWITCH REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

REAR WASHER

E

G

K

OFF ON ON

K

* *

* *

K *

* *

G

E

*

*

* *

* * am2zzw0000431

End Of Sie RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id091900474200

Caution x The reflection rate at the moment the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position after replacing the rain sensor with a new one is stored as the condition indicating no precipitation on the windshield. Therefore, remove water and dirt from the windshield before turning on the ignition switch. x Perform the rain sensor initialization in the following cases: (See 09-19-31 RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING.) — The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused — The auto wiper system operates incorrectly 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

09-19–28

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the notch on the rain sensor cover, turn it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and detach the tab A.

NOTCH REARVIEW MIRROR

A A A A TAB A

adejjw00003446

3. Remove the rain sensor cover in the direction shown in the figure. 4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. FRONT RAIN SENSOR COVER

adejjw00003422

(1) HOOK

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

HOOK

FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER

CONNECTOR FRONT (2)

RAIN SENSOR am2zzw0000363

09-19–29

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 5. Slide the tab B in the direction of the arrow and remove the rain sensor while supporting it with the hand. RIGHT-SIDE

TAB B

TAB B

LEFT-SIDE

TAB B

TAB B am2zzw0000262

09-19–30

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 6. Remove the rain sensor in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

FRONT

RAIN SENSOR am2zzw0000262

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie RAIN SENSOR INITIAL SETTING

id091900474300

Caution x Rain sensor initialization is performed when it is newly replaced and when its previously programmed setting is modified due to the reflection rate change caused by the replacement of the windshield. Rain Sensor Initialization x The reflection rate at the moment the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position after replacing the rain sensor with a new one is stored as the condition indicating no precipitation on the windshield. Therefore, remove water and dirt from the windshield before turning on the ignition switch. Rain Sensor Re-initialization 1. Remove water and dirt from the windshield surface. 2. Turn the ignition switch off. 3. Move the windshield wiper switch to the AUTO position. 4. Perform the windshield wiper switch operation (AUTOoOFFoAUTO) five times within 10 s after turning the ignition switch to the ON position.The windshield wiper will operate once at low speed when the reinitialization setting is performed correctly. Caution x If the operation is too fast, the windshield wiper switch position cannot be detected and the initialization may not be performed. Operate the windshield wiper switch one cycle every 1 s.

End Of Sie

09-19–31

ENTERTAINMENT

09-20

ENTERTAINMENT

ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Center Panel Unit Removal Note . . . . . CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Switch Panel Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Front Door Speaker Removal Note . . . FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Speaker Removal Note . . . REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB] . . . . Rear Speaker Removal Note . . . . . . . . REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . TWEETER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . Center Roof Antenna (Type B) Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTER ROOF ANTENNA INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION . . . . . .

09-20–2 09-20–3 09-20–4 09-20–4 09-20–5 09-20–6 09-20–7 09-20–7 09-20–8 09-20–9 09-20–9 09-20–10 09-20–11 09-20–11 09-20–12 09-20–12 09-20–13 09-20–15 09-20–15 09-20–16

ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–19 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–20 Antenna Feeder No.2 (Type B) Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–21 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–21 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–23 Cover Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–24 Cover Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–24 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–24 ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–25 Accessory Socket Removal Note . . . . . 09-20–26 Cap Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION . . . . . . . 09-20–27 Except Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–28 CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–29 Socket Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–30 Ring Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–30 CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION . . . 09-20–30

End of Toc WM: AUDIO

09-20–1

ENTERTAINMENT ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION INDEX

id092000800100

1 2

3

4

3HB

5 6

7 11

10

8

9

am2zzw0000328 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

Center roof antenna (See 09-20-13 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-15 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA INSPECTION.) Tweeter (See 09-20-12 TWEETER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-12 TWEETER INSPECTION.) Antenna feeder No.2 (See 09-20-16 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) (See 09-20-20 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-21 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSPECTION.) Audio control switch (See 09-20-23 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-24 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION.) Antenna feeder No.1 (See 09-20-16 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) (See 09-20-17 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-19 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION.) Center panel unit (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-4 CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)

09-20–2

7

8

9

10

11

Accessory socket (See 09-20-25 ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-27 ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION.) Cigarette lighter (See 09-20-29 CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-30 CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION.) Auxiliary jack (See 09-20-27 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-27 AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION.) Front door speaker (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-7 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-9 REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.) Rear speaker (3HB) (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [3HB].) (See 09-20-11 REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION [3HB].)

ENTERTAINMENT End Of Sie

CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092000800600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Caution x If the wiring harness or the antenna feeder is caught between the center panel unit and dashboard, it could cause a malfunction. When installing the center panel unit, make sure that the wiring harness and antenna feeders are not caught between the center panel unit and dashboard. 4

5

FRONT

3

2 1.0—6.0 N·m {11—61 kgf·cm, 8.9—53 in·lbf}

1 am2zzw0000030

1 2 3

Screw Bolt Center panel unit (See 09-20-4 Center Panel Unit Removal Note.)

4 5

Connector Antenna feeder plug

09-20–3

ENTERTAINMENT Center Panel Unit Removal Note 1. Remove the center panel unit tabs A and clips B, C from the dashboard. Caution x When the center panel unit is removed, clips C could interfere with the climate control unit bracket and cause damage. Pull the center panel unit in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (upward at a approx. 20 °angle) when removing it.

B

A

A

B

B

TAB A

B CLIP B

C

C CLIP C

am2zzw0000277

CENTER PANEL UNIT

CLIP C

APPROX. 20°

BRACKET

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT am2zzw0000318

End Of Sie CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY id092000800700

Note x When disassembling the center panel unit, it could get scratched if it is placed directly on the ground. When disassembling the center panel unit, spread a soft cloth underneath to perform the work. 1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the figure.

09-20–4

ENTERTAINMENT 2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

1 10

8 2

9

7 6

2

6 6 6

3

7

4 5

4 5 am2zzw0000331

1

2 3 4 5

Hazard warning switch panel (See 09-20-5 Hazard Warning Switch Panel Removal Note.) Screw Audio unit Screw Bracket A

Hazard Warning Switch Panel Removal Note 1. Press the hazard warning switch panel upward in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure using a tape-wrapped fastener remover while avoiding the center panel tabs.

6 7 8 9 10

Screw Screw Bracket B Knob Center panel

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL TAB

CENTER PANEL

TAB

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL

TAB

am2zzw0000039

09-20–5

ENTERTAINMENT 2. Remove the hazard warning switch panel in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the hazard warning switch panel clips indicated by the arrow (1).

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL

(2)

End Of Sie (1) (1)

am2zzw0000039

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 1 2 3

id092000802200

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove in the order indicated in the table. Connector Screw Front door speaker (See 09-20-7 Front Door Speaker Removal Note.)

1

3

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

2 am2zzw0000029

09-20–6

ENTERTAINMENT Front Door Speaker Removal Note 1. Remove the front door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

End Of Sie

(1) (2) HOOK

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER TAB

am2zzw0000035

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION id092000802300

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-58 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-6 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify the resistance between the front door VEHICLES WITH TWEETER speaker terminals. A D

B

C

B

A

C D VEHICLES WITH TWEETER am2zzw0000035

x If not within the specification, replace the front door speaker. Resistance 3.4—4.6 ohms 6. Have a 1.5 V battery ready.

:Resistance Test condition Under any condition

Terminal A

B

C

D *

*:VIEHICLES WITH TEETER

am2zzw0000035

09-20–7

09

ENTERTAINMENT 7. Connect the battery positive (+) pole to front door speaker terminal C, and the negative (-) pole to terminal B. 8. Verify that sound is output from the front door speaker. x If sound is not output, replace the front door speaker.

D

C

B

A

End Of Sie

adejjw00004089

REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 1 2 3

id092000805000

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove in the order indicated in the table. Connector Screw Rear door speaker (See 09-20-9 Rear Door Speaker Removal Note.)

1

3

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

2 am2zzw0000029

09-20–8

ENTERTAINMENT Rear Door Speaker Removal Note 1. Remove the rear door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

End Of Sie

(1) (2)

HOOK

REAR DOOR SPEAKER TAB

am2zzw0000035

REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION id092000804900

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-53 SAIL INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-65 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-8 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify the resistance between the rear door speaker terminals. B

*

C

B

*

C

adejjw00001161

x If not within the specification, replace the rear door speaker. Resistance 3.4—4.6 ohms 6. Have a 1.5 V battery ready.

: Resistance Test condition

Taeminal B

C

Under any condition

am2zzw0000497

09-20–9

ENTERTAINMENT 7. Connect the battery positive (+) pole to rear door speaker terminal C, and the negative (-) pole to terminal B. 8. Verify that sound is output from the rear door speaker. x If sound is not output, replace the rear door speaker.

*

C

B

*

End Of Sie

adejjw00004090

REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB]

id0920008024z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

Connector Screw Rear speaker (See 09-20-11 Rear Speaker Removal Note.)

3

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

1

2

am2zzw0000328

09-20–10

ENTERTAINMENT Rear Speaker Removal Note 1. Remove the rear speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

TAB

REAR SPEAKER

End Of Sie

HOOK

(2)

(1)

am2zzw0000328

REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION [3HB] id0920008025z3

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-57 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (2) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Rear seat back (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-70 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) Rear speaker (See 09-20-10 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 3. Verify the resistance between the rear speaker terminals. B

*

C

B

*

C

adejjw00001161

x If not within the specification, replace the rear speaker. Resistance 3.4—4.6 ohms 4. Have a 1.5 V battery ready.

: Resistance Test condition

Taeminal B

C

Under any condition

am2zzw0000468

09-20–11

ENTERTAINMENT 5. Connect the battery positive (+) pole to rear speaker terminal C, and the negative (-) pole to terminal B. 6. Verify that sound is output from the rear speaker. x If sound is not output, replace the rear speaker.

*

C

B

*

End Of Sie

adejjw00004090

TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000808000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the tweeter in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

TWEETER (1) INNER GARNISH

TAB

am2zzw0000030

TWEETER INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4.

id092000808100

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-34 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the tweeter. (See 09-20-12 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify the resistance between tweeter terminals. x If not within the specification, replace the tweeter.

A

A

B

B

A

B

adejjw00000750

09-20–12

ENTERTAINMENT Resistance 3.4—4.6 ohms : Resistance

5. Have a 1.5 V battery ready. Test condition

Terminal A

B

Under any condition

am2zzw0000030

6. Connect the battery positive (+) pole to tweeter terminal B, and the negative (-) pole to terminal A. 7. Verify that sound is output from the tweeter. x If sound is not output, replace the tweeter.

End Of Sie B

A

adejjw00004091

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000801600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear scuff plate (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) B-pillar lower trim (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (3HB) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear seat back (3HB) (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Trunk end trim (3HB) (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk side trim (3HB) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)C-pillar trim (3HB) (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (12)Front seat belt adjuster anchor cover. (13)Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt (14)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-45 BPILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (15)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (vehicles with auto light/wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 5. Partially peel back the headliner. 6. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

09-20–13

ENTERTAINMENT TYPE A 3

4

2

1 0.98—2.9 N·m {10—29 kgf·cm, 8.7—25 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000278

1 2 3 4

Nut Antenna feeder No.2 Antenna rod Center roof antenna

TYPE B 3

4

2

1 0.98—2.9 N·m {10—29 kgf·cm, 8.7—25 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000278

1 2 3 4

Nut Antenna feeder No.2 Antenna rod Center roof antenna (See 09-20-15 Center Roof Antenna (Type B) Installation Note.)

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

09-20–14

ENTERTAINMENT 8. After installation, verify that the rubber of the center roof antenna is installed to the roof panel with no space between the two. Center Roof Antenna (Type B) Installation Note 1. Install the antenna feeder No.2 stopper to the pin of the center roof antenna.

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA

End Of Sie PIN

STOPPER

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA

ANTENNA FEEDER No.2

STOPPER PIN

ANTENNA FEEDER No.2 am2zzw0000373

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA INSPECTION id092000801700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear scuff plate (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) B-pillar lower trim (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (3HB) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear seat back (3HB) (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Trunk end trim (3HB) (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk side trim (3HB) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)C-pillar trim (3HB) (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (12)Front seat belt adjuster anchor cover. (13)Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (14)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-45 BPILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (15)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (16)Center roof antenna (See 09-20-13 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-20–15

ENTERTAINMENT 3. Inspect for continuity between center roof antenna sections A and B. x If there is no continuity, replace the center roof antenna.

A

End Of Sie

B

adejjw00001376

ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION R.H.D.

ANNTENA FEEDER No.2

ANNTENA FEEDER No.1

am2zzw0000059

09-20–16

ENTERTAINMENT End Of Sie ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092000812200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Glove compartment cover (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Heat duct (passenger side). (5) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (6) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (9) Front side trim (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-28 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (11)Driver-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (12)Driver-side air bag module. (13)Steering wheel (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (14)Column cover (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (15)Meter hood (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (16)Instrument cluster (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (17)Combination switch (See 09-18-32 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (18)Center panel unit (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (19)Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (20)Climate control unit (See 07-40A-32 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-24 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].) (21)Shift lever (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (22)Selector lever (ATX/CVT) (23)Interlock cable (ATX/CVT). (24)Passenger-side lower panel (See 09-17-29 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (25)Side panel (See 09-17-34 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (26)A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (27)Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (28)Cowl grille (See 09-16-5 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (29)Sail garnish (See 09-16-7 SAIL GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (30)Windshield wiper motor (L.H.D.) (31)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (32)Steering shaft (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) (33)Dashboard (See 09-17-14 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-17-18 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-17-10 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) 3. Remove clips A and B. 4. Remove the antenna feeder No.1 from the dashboard hook. 5. Remove antenna feeder No.1. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

09-20–17

ENTERTAINMENT R.H.D. DASHBOARD FRONT ANTENNA FEEDER No.1

FRONT

B

CLIP A

HOOK A

A B

A CLIP B

ANTENNA FEEDER No.1 B

A

A

am2zzw0000250

End Of Sie ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION

id092000812400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (See 09-17-26 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect antenna feeder No.2. ANNTENA FEEDER No.2

ANNTENA FEEDER No.1

am2zzw0000159

4. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.1 terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace antenna feeder No.1.

A

B

D

C

adejjw00000959

09-20–19

ENTERTAINMENT End Of Sie : Continuity Test condition

Terminal A

B

C

D

Under any condition

am2zzw0000031

ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000812300

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (5) Rear scuff plate (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (6) B-pillar lower trim (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Rear seat cushion (3HB) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Rear seat back (3HB) (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Trunk end trim (3HB) (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk side trim (3HB) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)C-pillar trim (3HB) (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (12)Front seat belt adjuster anchor cover. (13)Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (14)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-45 BPILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (15)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (vehicles with auto light/wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Partially peel back the seaming welt. 5. Partially peel back the headliner. 6. Disconnect antenna feeder No.1. ANNTENA FEEDER No.2

ANNTENA FEEDER No.1

am2zzw0000159

09-20–20

ENTERTAINMENT 7. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 5 4

2

3 0.98—2.9 N·m {10—29 kgf·cm, 8.7—25 in·lbf}

CLIP A

CLIP B

1

am2zzw0000278

1 2 3 4 5

Clip A Clip B Nut Antenna feeder No.2 (Type A) Antenna feeder No.2 (Type B) (See 09-20-21 Antenna Feeder No.2 (Type B) Installation Note.)

8. Install in the reverse order of removal. Antenna Feeder No.2 (Type B) Installation Note 1. Install the antenna feeder No.2 (Type B) stopper to the pin of the center roof antenna (Type B).

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA (TYPE B)

End Of Sie PIN

STOPPER

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA (TYPE B)

ANTENNA FEEDER No.2 (TYPE B)

STOPPER PIN

ANTENNA FEEDER No.2 (TYPE B) am2zzw0000277

ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSPECTION id092000812500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-42 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-20–21

ENTERTAINMENT (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

3. 4. 5. 6.

Sunvisor (See 09-17-80 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Assist handle (See 09-17-80 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear scuff plate (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-58 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) B-pillar lower trim (5HB,4SD) (See 09-17-46 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear seat cushion (3HB) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Rear seat back (3HB) (See 09-13-26 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (See 09-13-27 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [Except AutoAlliance (AAT) Thailand manufactured vehicles].) (9) Trunk end trim (3HB) (See 09-17-75 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (10)Trunk side trim (3HB) (See 09-17-73 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (11)C-pillar trim (3HB) (See 09-17-52 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (12)Front seat belt adjuster anchor cover. (13)Front seat belt upper anchor installation bolt. (14)B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-44 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-45 BPILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [3HB].) (15)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (vehicles with auto light/wiper system) (See 09-19-28 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Partially peel back the seaming welt. Partially peel back the headliner. Remove the nut.

ANNTENA FEEDER No.2 NUT 0.98—2.9 N·m (10—29 kgf·cm, 8.7—25 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000159

7. Disconnect antenna feeder No.1.

ANNTENA FEEDER No.2

ANNTENA FEEDER No.1

am2zzw0000159

8. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.2 terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace antenna feeder No.2.

A

B

D C adejjw00000960

09-20–22

ENTERTAINMENT End Of Sie : Continuity Test condition

Terminal A

B

C

D

Under any condition

am2zzw0000031

AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000800200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more. 2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. 3. Remove the steering wheel. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].) 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2 4

6

8

4

5

3

6 7

1 am2zzw0000024

1 2

3 4

Screw Cover (See 09-20-24 Cover Removal Note.) (See 09-20-24 Cover Installation Note.) Wiring harness Screw

5 6 7 8

Panel Screw Audio control switch Cruise control switch (vehicles with cruise control system)

09-20–23

ENTERTAINMENT Cover Removal Note 1. Remove the cover tabs and pins from the steering wheel.

PIN

PIN TAB

TAB

am2zzw0000024

2. Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.

COVER TAB am2zzw0000024

Cover Installation Note 1. Secure the audio control switch wiring harness to the cover hooks.

End Of Sie WIRING HARNESS HOOK

am2zzw0000024

AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more. 2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. 3. Disconnect the clock spring connector.

09-20–24

id092000800300

ENTERTAINMENT 4. Inspect for resistance and continuity between clock spring connector terminals M—K/I using a tester. CLOCK SPRING

G E VOLUME DOWN SWITCH

K VOLUME UP SWITCH UP SEEK SWITCH DOWN SEEK SWITCH

O

M

K

I

G

E

C

A

P

N

L

J

H

F

D

B

MODE SWITCH

*

MUTE SWITCH

INFO SWITCH

*: PART WIRING HARNESS-SIDE

M I

am2zzw0000497

x If not within the specification, replace the audio control switch. : Resistance Terminal Switch Position

M

K

Volume Down Switch ON Volume Up Switch ON

Resistance (ohm) I

50.9—56.3 139—155

Up Seek Switch ON

285—316

Down Seek Switch ON

533—590

Mode Switch ON

984—1,089

Mute Switch ON

1,934—2,139

Info Switch ON

50.9—56.3

OFF

4,794—5,300

am2zzw0000445

5. Apply battery positive voltage to audio control switch terminal G, and connect terminal E to ground. 6. Verify that the LED illuminates. x If the LED does not illuminate, replace the audio control switch.

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000445

ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000800400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the console. (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

09-20–25

ENTERTAINMENT Type A 1

2

CONSOLE

am2zzw0000432

Type B 1 2

Accessory socket (See 09-20-26 Accessory Socket Removal Note.) Cap (See 09-20-27 Cap Removal Note.)

1

2

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

CONSOLE

am2zzw0000433

Accessory Socket Removal Note 1. Remove the socket in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while opening the caps in the direction of the arrow (1) using a tapewrapped fastener remover.

(2) SOCKET CAP

(1)

PROJECTION

(1)

PROJECTION

am6zzw0000136

09-20–26

ENTERTAINMENT Cap Removal Note 1. Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the cap tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).

(2)

End Of Sie CAP (1)

(1)

TAB

TAB am6zzw0000136

ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION id092000800500

1. Connect a tester as shown in the figure and verify that there is continuity. x If the continuity cannot be verified, replace the accessory socket.

TERMINAL C

End Of Sie TERMINAL B

C

* B

C

B B6U0920W005

AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092000809900

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the console. (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the auxiliary jack in the direction of the (2) arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the auxiliary jack tabs in the direction of the arrow (1). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

TAB

TAB

AUXILIARY JACK (1)

(1)

TAB

TAB

CONSOLE

am2zzw0000022

AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION id092000812600

Except Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the console. (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the auxiliary jack. (See 09-20-27 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-20–27

ENTERTAINMENT 4. Connect a commercially-available nonresistant plug to the auxiliary jack. 5. Verify that the continuity between the auxiliary jack terminals is as indicated in the table. Type A

PLUG

F

AUXILIARY JACK

TYPE A

WITHOUT WHITE

E

D

C

B

*

TYPE B

WITH WHITE

am2zzw0000492

: Continuity Test condition

Terminal C

D

E

F

Plug is connected Plug is not connected

am2zzw0000202

Type B x If not as indicated in the table, replace the auxiliary jack. : Continuity Test condition

Terminal A

B

C

D

E

F

Plug is connected Plug is not connected

acxuuw00003306

Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the console. (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the auxiliary jack. (See 09-20-27 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-20–28

ENTERTAINMENT 4. Connect a commercially-available nonresistant plug to the auxiliary jack.

PLUG

F

AUXILIARY JACK

E

D

C

B

*

am2zzw0000432

5. Verify that the continuity between the auxiliary jack terminals is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the auxiliary jack.

End Of Sie

: Continuity Terminal

Test condition

A

B

C

D

E

F

Plug is connected Plug is not connected

acxuuw00003306

CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092000803100

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the console. (See 09-17-41 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 2 3

Cigarette lighter plug Socket (See 09-20-30 Socket Removal Note.) Ring (See 09-20-30 Ring Removal Note.)

1 2

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 3

CONSOLE

am2zzw0000022

09-20–29

ENTERTAINMENT Socket Removal Note 1. Remove the socket in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while opening the caps in the direction of the arrow (1) using a tapewrapped fastener remover.

(2) SOCKET RING CONSOLE (1)

(1)

PROJECTION

PROJECTION

am2zzw0000023

Ring Removal Note 1. Remove the ring in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the ring tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).

(2)

End Of Sie RING CONSOLE (1)

(1)

TAB

TAB am2zzw0000023

CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION

id092000803200

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position. 2. Press the cigarette lighter into the socket and verify that it returns to its original position in 10— 20 s. x If the cigarette lighter does not operate normally, replace the cigarette lighter and the socket.

End Of Sie

am2zzw0000023

09-20–30

POWER SYSTEMS

09-21

POWER SYSTEMS

POWER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–1 FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–3 MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-21–3 KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–5 KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–5 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–6 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-21–6

IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–6 IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . 09-21–7 RELAY LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–8 Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–8 AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–9 RELAY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–10 Relay Type (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–10 Relay Type (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–12 Relay Type (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–13

POWER SYSTEMS POWER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX SOKYU_WM: KEY REMINDER SWITCH

id092100800700

L.H.D.

3

1

2

4

5 3

R.H.D.

4

5 am2zzw0000404

1

2

3

Main fuse (See 09-21-3 MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) Relay and fuse block (See 09-21-8 RELAY LOCATION.) (See 09-21-10 RELAY INSPECTION.) Ignition switch (See 09-21-6 IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-21-7 IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION.)

4

5

Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless and start system) (See 09-21-6 STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) Key reminder switch (without advanced keyless and start system) (See 09-21-5 KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].) (See 09-21-5 KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)

.

09-21–1

POWER SYSTEMS FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS id092100800400

Caution x If a fuse is burnt out, inspect the cause and repair the malfunctioning part, then replace the fuse with the specified value. If the fuse is replaced before doing this, it could burn again.

End Of Sie MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092100801500

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the main fuse cover in the direction of the arrow while pressing the tab indicated in the figure.

TAB

MAIN FUSE COVER

am2zzw0000199

3. Remove nuts A, B, and C shown in the figure. 4. Remove the main fuse. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

NUT A 10—15 N·m {102—152 kgf·cm, 89—132 in·lbf}

MAIN FUSE

NUT B 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

NUT C 4.2—6.3 N·m {43—64 kgf·cm, 38—55 in·lbf}

am2zzw0000199

09-21–3

POWER SYSTEMS KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id092100491900

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the coil antenna. (See 09-14-133 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].) 4. Insert the key into the key cylinder and turn the ignition switch to the ACC position. 5. Disconnect the key reminder switch connector. KEY REMINDER SWITCH KEY REMINDER SWITCH CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000199

6. Detach the key reminder switch tab. 7. Install the key reminder switch in the direction of the arrow. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie TAB KEY REMINDER SWITCH

am2zzw0000193

KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] id092100492000

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Disconnect the key reminder switch connector. KEY REMINDER SWITCH KEY REMINDER SWITCH CONNECTOR

am2zzw0000193

4. Verify that the continuity between the key reminder switch terminals is as indicated in the table.

A B

A

B adejjw00000710

09-21–5

POWER SYSTEMS x If not as indicated in the table, replace the key reminder switch.

End Of Sie

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

KEY POSITION

A

B

KEY INSERTED KEY REMOVED

am2zzw0000194

STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id092100491800

1. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 2. Measure each terminal voltage under the measurement condition. x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”. — If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items are normal, replace the steering lock unit. Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) G

E C

A

H

F D

B

adejjw00000721

Term inal

Signal name

Connected to

Measurement condition

Voltage (V) B+ 1.0 or less

A

Push switch signal

Keyless control module

Start knob is pressed Start knob is not pressed

B

Power supply

Fuse

Under any condition

B+

C

Key reminder switch signal

Keyless control module

Key is inserted Key is not inserted 

B+ 1.0 or less 



D



E

Power supply

F

  Serial Keyless control communication module Ground Body ground

G H

Fuse

Inspection item(s) x Keyless control module x Related wiring harness x Fuse x Related wiring harness x Keyless control module x Related wiring harness

 x Fuse Under any condition B+ x Related wiring harness    Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible. Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness

End Of Sie IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092100800200

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-21–6

POWER SYSTEMS 3. Press tabs A in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and pull the ignition switch in the direction of the arrow (2).

IGNITION SWITCH TAB A

(1) (2) TAB A

TAB A

(1)

(1)

(1) TAB A

am2zzw0000199

4. Pull the pin in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and release the lock. PIN

CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH

am2zzw0000200

5. Pull the connector in the direction of the arrow (4) shown in the figure and remove it while pressing tab B in the direction of the arrow (3). 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

TAB B

(3)

CONNECTOR (4)

IGNITION SWITCH

am2zzw0000200

IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION id092100800100

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-25 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the ignition switch. (See 09-21-6 IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Verify that the continuity between the ignition switch terminals is as indicated in the table. F E x If not as indicated in the table, replace the ignition switch. START ON (IG1) D

START LOCK ACC B

ON (IG2) C

E

C

A

F

D

B

LOCK ACC

A

adejjw00003501

09-21–7

POWER SYSTEMS End Of Sie

: CONTINUITY IGNITION KEY POSITION

TERMINAL

F

E

D

C

B

A

LOCK ACC ON START am2zzw0000200

RELAY LOCATION

id092100800600

Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles Except Hong Kong specs.

COOLING FAN RELAY No.1 BLOWER RELAY A/C RELAY STERTER RELAY

FUEL PUMP RELAY

HORN RELAY

REAR FOG LIGHT RELAY HEADLIGHT RELAY (LO)

FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY

FRONT

HEADLIGHT RELAY (HI)

COOLING FAN MAIN RELAY RELAY No.2

am2zzw0000200

Hong Kong specs.

A/C RELAY STERTER RELAY

COOLING FAN RELAY No.1 HORN RELAY

BLOWER RELAY FUEL PUMP RELAY COOLING FAN RELAY No.2

FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY

HEADLIGHT RELAY (LO) HEADLIGHT RELAY (HI)

FRONT

MAIN RELAY

am2zzw0000432

09-21–8

POWER SYSTEMS AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

COOLING FAN RELAY No.1 A/C RELAY STERTER RELAY

THEFT-DETERRENT HORN RELAY

HORN RELAY

FUEL PUMP RELAY COOLING FAN RELAY No.2

FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY

HEADLIGHT RELAY (LO)

BLOWER RELAY

REAR FOG LIGHT RELAY

FRONT

MAIN RELAY

HEADLIGHT RELAY (HI)

am2zzw0000432

RELAY INSPECTION

id092100800300

Relay Type (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) Except Hong Kong specs. Connector type

Type A 4-pin

Type B Type C Type D

Part name x Front fog light relay x Rear fog light relay x Starter relay x A/C relay x Horn relay x Cooling fan relay No.1 x Headlight relay (LO) x Headlight relay (HI) x Blower relay Cooling fan relay No.2 Main relay Fuel pump relay

Type A 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

C

E

E

A C D

A

D

am2zzw0000262

STEP

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL E

A

B+

GROUND

C

D

1 2

am2zzw0000195

09-21–9

POWER SYSTEMS Type B 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

D

D

C

A

C B

A

B

adejjw00003060

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

STEP

D

B

B+

GROUND

C

A

1 2

am2zzw0000195

Type C 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

A

A

D

C

D B

C

B

am2zzw0000432

STEP

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL A

B

B+

GROUND

C

D

1 2

am2zzw0000195

09-21–10

POWER SYSTEMS Type D 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

E

C

A

E C D

A

D

am2zzw0000262

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

STEP

E

A

B+

GROUND

D

C

1 2

am2zzw0000195

Relay Type (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) Hong Kong specs. Connector type

4-pin

Type A

Type B

Part name x Front fog light relay x Cooling fan relay No.1 x Cooling fan relay No.2 x Starter relay x A/C relay x Horn relay x Headlight relay (LO) x Headlight relay (HI) x Blower relay x Fuel pump relay Main relay

Type A 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

C

E

E

A C D

A

D

am2zzw0000262

STEP

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL E

A

B+

GROUND

C

D

1 2

am2zzw0000195

09-21–11

POWER SYSTEMS Type B 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

A

A

D

C

D B

C

B

am2zzw0000432

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

STEP

A

B

B+

GROUND

D

C

1 2

am2zzw0000195

Relay Type (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) Connector type

Type A 4-pin

Type B Type C

Part name x Front fog light relay x Starter relay x A/C relay x Horn relay x Cooling fan relay No.1 x Cooling fan relay No.2 x Headlight relay (LO) x Headlight relay (HI) x Theft-deterrent horn relay x Fuel pump relay x Blower relay x Rear fog light relay Main relay

Type A 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

C

E

E

A C D

D

A

am2zzw0000262

09-21–13

POWER SYSTEMS : CONTINUITY TERMINAL

STEP

E

A

B+

GROUND

D

C

1 2

am2zzw0000195

Type B 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

D

D

C

A

C B

A

B

adejjw00003060

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL

STEP

D

B

B+

GROUND

C

A

1 2

am2zzw0000195

Type C 1. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table. x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.

A

A

D

C

D B

C

B

am2zzw0000432

End Of Sie

STEP

: CONTINUITY TERMINAL A

B

B+

GROUND

C

D

1 2

am2zzw0000195

09-21–14

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.

09-22

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

09-22–2 09-22–5 09-22–7 09-22–8 09-22–8 09-22–8 09-22–9

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–10 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–19 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–19 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . 09-22–20

End of Toc SOKYU_WM: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

09-22–1

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. LOCATION INDEX

id092200495000

R.H.D.

1

3

2

4 5 am2zzw0000086 .

1 2

3

Horn (See 09-22-20 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Oil pressure switch (See 09-22-18 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION.) Instrument cluster (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-14 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE.)

4

5

Passenger seat belt reminder (See 09-22-19 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-19 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER INSPECTION.) Fuel gauge sender unit (See 09-22-15 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-18 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092200496

Caution x When replacing the instrument cluster, always perform the configuration procedure before removing the instrument cluster. Replacing the instrument cluster without performing the configuration procedure will result in system malfunction.

09-22–2

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. 1. When replacing the instrument cluster, always perform the configuration procedure. (See 09-22-7 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.) 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the meter hood. (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 4 1 Screw .

2 3 4

Connector Instrument cluster Wiring harness clip

2

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Program the immobilizer system-related parts when replacing the instrument cluster. (With keyless entry system) (See 09-14-150 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)

2 1

Caution x Place the removed instrument cluster with the display surface facing upward. Otherwise grease could leak from the meter unit.

3 1 1 am2zzw0000260

DISPLAY FACING UPWARD

End Of Sie GOOD

DISPLAY FACING DOWNWARD

NO GOOD

am2zzw0000189

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION

id092200496200

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION. Note x If all the following conditions are met, the odometer data (total traveled distance) in the previous instrument cluster is automatically transferred to a new instrument cluster during the configuration. If any of the conditions are not met, odometer-data transfer cannot be performed. Previous instrument cluster — No malfunction (Configuration data can be read using the M-MDS) New instrument cluster — Odometer display is less than 100 km — Odometer has no malfunction

09-22–6

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. 1. Select “Module Programming”. 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select “Programmable Module Installation”. 2. Select “IC”. 4. Perform the configuration according to the directions on the screen. DLC-2 5. Select “Programmable Parameters“ from the menu. 6. Select “Odometer Write“, and perform the procedure following the screen. 7. Retrieve DTCs by the M-MDS, then verify that there is no DTC present. x If a DTC (s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)

am2zzw0000251

End Of Sie INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

id092200496300

Caution x Do not drop the instrument cluster or damage the printed board. This will lead to a system malfunction. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the meter hood. (See 09-17-24 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Remove the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Disassemble in the order indicated in the figure.

.

1 2 3

Lens Cover Instrument cluster unit

5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie 3

2

1 adejjw00003498

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION

id092200496400

Speedometer (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) 1. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the tester reading is as indicated in the table. x If the speedometer does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses. — If the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the instrument cluster.

09-22–7

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. Hong Kong specs. Speedometer tester indication (km/h) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Allowable range (km/h) 20—25 40—45 61—66 81—87 102—108 122—129 143—150

U.K. specs. Speedometer tester indication (mph) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Allowable range (mph) 10—13 20—23 30—33 40—43 50—54 60—64 70—75 80—85

Speedometer (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles) 1. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. 2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the tester reading is as indicated in the table. x If the speedometer does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses. — If the PCM, ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, and related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the instrument cluster.

09-22–9

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. Arab Gulf Cooperation Council, Australian specs. Speedometer tester indication (km/h) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Allowable range (km/h) 20—25 40—44 60—65 80—86 100—107 121—127 141—148

Except Arab Gulf Cooperation Council; General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs., and Thailand Speedometer tester indication (km/h) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Allowable range (km/h) 18—22 38—42 58—62 77—83 97—103 117—123 138—144

Tachometer Caution x If the engine speed exceeds the allowable range, the engine could be damaged. Therefore, when inspecting the tachometer, do not allow the engine speed to exceed the allowable range indication on the tachometer. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen. x Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. “Data logger” 2. “Module” 3. “IC” x Using a PDS (Pocket PC): 1. “Module test” 2. “IC” 3. “Data logger” 3. Select “TACHOMTR” from PID/DATA Monitor Table. 4. Verify the monitored value according to the directions on the screen.

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

Note x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.

09-22–10

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. Fuel gauge 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen. x Using an IDS (laptop PC): 1. “Data logger” 2. “Module” 3. “IC” x Using a PDS (pocket PC): 1. “Module test” 2. “IC” DLC-2 3. “Data logger” 3. Verify that all the segments are displayed using am2zzw0000251 “LCD_SEG”. x If any of the segments are not displayed, replace the instrument cluster. (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Remove the service hole cover. 7. Disconnect the fuel pump connector. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Connect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to fuel pump unit connector terminals C and D. 10. Verify the fuel gauge reading is as indicated in the C D A B table using the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker). x If not as indicated in the table, inspect the wiring harness. — If there is any malfunction, repair or replace the wiring harness. — If the wiring harness is normal, replace the instrument cluster. adejjw00004328

09-22–11

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. Except Hong Kong specs. Fuel gauge indication (instrument cluster)

Resistance of SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) (ohm) Approx. 60 or less Approx. 61—93 Approx. 94—128 Approx. 129—160 Approx. 161—192 Approx. 193—226 Approx. 227—260 Approx. 261—277 Approx. 278—293

Approx. 294 or more

Hong Kong specs. Fuel gauge indication (instrument cluster)

Resistance of SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) (ohm) Approx. 71 or less Approx. 71—104 Approx. 105—136 Approx. 137—166 Approx. 167—196 Approx. 197—229 Approx. 230—262 Approx. 263—277 Approx. 278—293

Approx. 294 or more

End Of Sie INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE id092200555500

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (pocket PC) does not support the customized functions setting procedure of the instrument cluster.

09-22–12

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After vehicle identification, the following can be selected from the M-MDS initialization screen. 1. “Module Programming” 3. Then, select the following from the screen menu. 1. “Programmable Parameters” 2. “Warning Lamps/Chimes” 4. Select the following items and change the setting according to the directions on the screen. Supported items x DIS Correction (0%, 5%, 10%, 15%, -15%, 10%, -5%) x Distance to Empty Response Data (1.50— 5.25) x Driver Beltminder Status (Disabled/Enabled) x Passenger Beltminder Status (Disabled/Enabled)

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

Caution x The M-MDS screen displays the following items, however, do not change the setting. If the setting is changed, a difference occurs between the instrument cluster indication and actual fuel level leading to unexpected fuel shortage. — Fuel response data (level 1—16)

End Of Sie FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id092200497000

(See 01-14A-15 FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [ZJ, ZY].) FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the fuel pump unit. 3. Move the float to the topmost and bottommost positions, and verify that the resistance between terminals C and D of the fuel gauge sender unit and the position of the float are as shown in the figure. x If they are not as shown in the figure, replace the fuel gauge sender unit.

End Of Sie

id092200497100

TOPMOST POSITION 9—11 ohms ARM FULCRUM

160.4—166.4 mm {6.315—6.551 in} 325—327 ohms BOTTOMMOST 13.5—19.5 mm POSITION {0.532—0.767 in}

D

C

B

A

am2zzw0000181

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION

id092200495300

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and verify that the oil pressure warning light illuminates. 2. Start the engine and verify that the oil pressure warning light turns off. x If the oil pressure warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated, inspect the BCM and the related wiring harnesses. (See 09-02G-2 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].) — If the related wiring harnesses are normal, inspect the oil pressure.

09-22–15

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092200997700

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].) (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (6) Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Hazard warning switch (See 09-18-40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the screw from the hazard warning PASSENGE SEAT switch panel. BELT REMINDER HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL

SCREW am2zzw0000087

4. Remove the clips A and B.

CLIP A‫ޓ‬

CLIP B

am2zzw0000088

5. Remove the seat belt reminder from the hazard warning switch panel. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER

PA S

SE

NG

ER

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH PANEL am2zzw0000087

PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER INSPECTION id092200997600

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the following parts: (1) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [F35M-R].) (See 05-16B-2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION [B65M-R].)

09-22–19

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. (2) Side wall (See 09-17-33 SIDE WALL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (3) Front console component (See 09-17-36 FRONT CONSOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (4) Glove compartment (vehicles with audio unit) (See 09-17-28 GLOVE COMPARTMENT COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (5) Center panel unit (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-20-3 CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) (6) Center panel (vehicles without audio unit) (See 09-17-35 CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (7) Hazard warning switch (See 09-18-40 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (8) Passenger seat belt reminder (See 09-22-19 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Apply battery positive voltage to passenger seat belt reminder terminal A, and connect terminal B to ground. 4. Verify that the LED illuminates. x If the LED does not illuminate, replace the passenger seat belt reminder.

End Of Sie

B

A

am2zzw0000190

HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION id092200497400

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Slightly bend back the mudguard. MUDGUARD SCREW

am2zzw0000192

4. 5. 6. 7.

Disconnect the connector. Remove the bolt. Remove the horn. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie CONNECTOR HORN

BOLT 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

adejjw00003495

09-22–20

CONTROL SYSTEM

09-40

CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . Generated pulse (reference) . . . . . . . .

09-40–1 09-40–1 09-40–3 09-40–4 09-40–5 09-40–13

Liftgate Opener Switch Input Signal Pulse (Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–15 Liftgate Opener Switch Signal Pulse (Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–15 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . 09-40–16 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–16 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–17

CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX WM: POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

id094000801000

1 am2zzw0000025 .

1

BCM (body control module) (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION.) (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION.) (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION R.H.D.

id094000800400

Caution x When replacing the BCM, the configuration procedure must be performed before removing the BCM. Replacing the BCM without performing the configuration procedure will result in system malfunction. 1. Perform the BCM configuration when replacing it. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION.) 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the dashboard under cover. (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the front scuff plate. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the front side trim. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

09-40–1

CONTROL SYSTEM 6. Disconnect the connectors at the position shown in the figure.

BCM

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR am2zzw0000177

7. Disconnect the wiring harness at the position shown in the figure.

WIRING HARNESS

WIRING HARNESS BCM

am2zzw0000177

09-40–3

CONTROL SYSTEM 8. Remove the nuts. BCM

NUT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} *2

*1: Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles *2: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

NUT 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} *1 9—11 N·m {92—112 kgf·cm, 80—97 in·lbf} *2

am2zzw0000452

9. Remove the BCM. 10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION

id094000800300

1. Remove the dashboard under cover. (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 2. Measure the voltage at each terminal and inspect for the continuity between the terminals and ground is as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Tables (Reference). x If the voltage or continuity is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference), inspect the parts under “Inspection item (s)”. — If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the BCM.

09-40–4

CONTROL SYSTEM Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

1 4 7

2

1O 1M

1K

1I

1G

1E 1C 1A

2O 2M

2K

2I

2G

2E 2C

1P 1N

1L 1J

1H

1F 1D 1B

2P 2N

2L 2J

2H

2F 2D 2B

2A

3 3 1 2

6

3O 3M

3K

3I

3G

3E 3C

3A

3P 3N

3L

3J

3H

3F

3B

3D

4

6

4W 4U 4S 4Q 4O 4M 4K

4I

4G 4E 4C 4A

6W 6U 6S 6Q 6O 6M 6K

4X

4J

4H 4F

6X

4V 4T

4R 4P 4N

4L

4D 4B

6V

6T 6R 6P 6N

6L

6I

6G 6E 6C

6A

6J

6H 6F 6D

6B

7 7W 7U 7S 7Q 7O 7M 7K

7I 7G 7E

7C 7A

7X

7J

7D 7B

7V 7T

7R 7P 7N

7L

7H 7F

adejjw00000675

Termin al 1A

1B

1C 1D 1E

1F

1G

1H

Signal

Connected to

Measurement condition

Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Ignition switch at operating at low signal motor ON OFF Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Ignition switch at operating at high signal motor ON OFF Rear window defroster power R.DEF 20 A fuse Under any condition supply Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Ignition switch at ON power supply motor Ignition switch is off. TNS power TAIL 15 A fuse Under any condition supply Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Ignition switch at operating auto stop signal motor ON Windshield wiper not operating TNS ON Front TNS Parking light inhibited TNS OFF Rear washer motor operating Rear window Ignition switch at washer motor Washer motor Rear washer ON control motor not operating

Voltage (V)

Inspection item (s)

B+

x Windshield wiper motor x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

x Windshield wiper motor x Related wiring harness

B+

x R.DEF 20A fuse x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less

x Windshield wiper motor x Related wiring harness

B+

x TAIL 15A fuse x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

x Windshield wiper motor x Related wiring harness x Parking light x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less

x Washer motor x Related wiring harness

09-40–5

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al

Signal

Connected to

Windshield washer motor control

Washer motor

Hazard power supply

HAZARD 10A fuse

1K

Front turn light (RH) control

x Front turn light (RH) x Front side turn light (RH)

1L

Front turn light (LH) control

x Front turn light (LH) x Front side turn light (LH)

1I

1J

1M 1N 1O 1P 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E

— — Interior light power supply Door lock power supply — — — — —

2F

Windshield wiper power supply (IG 2)

2G

Meter power supply (IG 1)

2H

Windshield washer switch signal

2I 2J 2K

2L

2M 2N

2O

— — — Rear window washer switch signal Signal ground Rear window wiper power supply (IG 2) Illumination output

09-40–6

— —

Measurement condition Windshield washer motor Ignition switch at operating ON Windshield washer motor not operating Under any condition

Voltage (V) B+

x Washer motor x Related wiring harness 1.0 or less B+

Turn switch (RH) Alternates on between 1.0 Front turn light or less and Hazard warning (RH) flashes B+ switch on Front turn light (RH) not illuminated 1.0 or less Turn switch (LH) Alternates on between 1.0 Front turn light or less and Hazard warning (LH) flashes B+ switch on Front turn light (LH) not illuminated 1.0 or less — — — —

ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition

B+

D/L 20 A fuse

Under any condition

B+

— — — — — Ignition switch at ON

— — — — — B+

Ignition switch at off.

1.0 or less

Ignition switch at ON

B+

Ignition switch is off.

1.0 or less

x x x x

— — — — — F.WIP 20 A fuse Ignition switch METER 10 A fuse Ignition switch

Wiper and washer switch

— — —

Wiper and washer switch

Windshield washer switch Ignition switch at on ON Windshield washer switch off — — — Rear window washer switch Ignition switch at on ON Rear window washer switch off Under any condition Ignition switch at ON

Body ground x R.WIP 10 A fuse x Ignition Ignition switch at off. switch x ILLUMI 7.5 A TNS ON fuse x Illumination TNS OFF light

Inspection item (s)

1.0 or less

B+

x HAZARD 10A fuse x Related wiring harness x Front turn light (RH) x Front side turn light (RH) x Related wiring harness x Front turn light (LH) x Front side turn light (LH) x Related wiring harness

x x x x

— — ROOM 15 A fuse Related wiring harness D/L 20 A fuse Related wiring harness — — — — —

x F.WIP 20A fuse x Ignition switch x Related wiring harness x METER 10A fuse x Ignition switch x Related wiring harness

x Wiper and washer switch x Related wiring harness

— — —

— — —

1.0 or less

x Wiper and washer switch x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less

Related wiring harness x R.WIP 10 A fuse x Ignition switch x Related wiring harness x ILLUMI 7.5 A fuse x Illumination light x Related wiring harness

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin Signal al 2P Power ground 3A*7

Liftgate opener actuator ground

3B

Rear window defroster output

3C

Liftgate opener actuator power supply

3D

Rear window wiper power supply

3E*6

Connected to

Voltage (V)

Inspection item (s)

Under any condition

1.0 or less

Liftgate latch Under any condition and lock actuator

1.0 or less

Related wiring harness x Liftgate latch and lock actuator x Related wiring harness

Body ground

Measurement condition

Rear window Ignition switch at defroster on Filament ON Rear window defroster off Liftgate opener actuator switch Liftgate latch pressed, lock release operation and lock actuator Other Ignition switch at ON Rear wiper motor Ignition switch is off.

Door lock Door lock control actuator

Double locking system activated Other

3F 3G 3H

3I

3J

3K

3L

3M

3N 3O

Rear window wiper control — Rear TNS light signal

Interior light control

Rear turn light (RH) control — Rear turn light (LH) control

Rear wiper motor

— x Tail light x License plate TNS OFF light

Interior light

Rear turn light (RH) — Rear turn light (LH)

Door lock Door lock control actuator — Door unlock control

Rear wiper Ignition switch at activated ON Rear wiper not activated — TNS ON

— Door lock actuator

Interior light at DOOR position

B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less 1.0 or less o B+ o 1.0 or less 1.0 or less 1.0 or less B+ — B+ 1.0 or less

Any door is open Within 5 seconds after all doors closed Five seconds after all doors closed

Turn switch (RH) on Rear turn light Hazard warning (RH) flashes switch on Rear turn light (RH) not illuminated — Turn switch (LH) on Rear turn light Hazard warning (LH) flashes switch on Rear turn light (LH) not illuminated Door lock actuator locking (without double locking system) Door lock actuator locking (with double locking system) Other — Door lock actuator unlocking Other

x Filament x Related wiring harness x Liftgate latch and lock actuator x Related wiring harness x Rear wiper motor x Related wiring harness x Door lock actuator x Related wiring harness

x Rear motor x Related wiring harness

x Tail light x License plate light x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less 5

x Interior light x Related wiring harness

B+ Alternates between 1.0 or less and B+

x Rear turn light (RH) x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less —

—

Alternates between 1.0 or less and B+

x Rear turn light (LH) x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less 1.0 or less — B+ 1.0 or less

x Door lock actuator x Related wiring harness — x Door lock actuator x Related wiring harness

09-40–7

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al

Signal

3P

Power supply

4A

Brake fluid level signal

4B*4

Oil pressure switch signal

4C*3

Back-up light signal

4D 4E 4F 4G 4H 4I 4J 4K 4L 4M 4N 4O

— Rear fog light control — Headlight low control (4-Beam Type Headlight) — Front fog light control — — — Headlight low control (2-Beam Type Headlight) — Headlight high control

4P 4Q 4R 4S 4T

— — — — —

4U

CAN_H

4V*8

CAN_H

09-40–8

Connected to

Measurement condition

x Climate control unit x Instrument cluster x Audio unit x Keyless Under any condition receiver x Steering lock unit x Theftdeterrent control module Brake fluid level Brake fluid level Ignition switch at less than MIN sensor ON Brake fluid level above MIN. Engine running Oil pressure switch Engine not running Shift lever is in R position Back-up light switch Shift lever is not in R position — — Rear fog light switch ON Rear fog light Headlight ON relay Rear fog light switch OFF — — Headlights on Headlight low relay Headlights off — Front fog light relay — — — Headlight relay (LO) — Headlight relay (HI)

— Front fog light Headlights on or switch ON TNS ON Front fog light switch OFF — — — Headlights on

Voltage (V)

B+

1.0 or less 5

Inspection item (s)

x x x x x x

Climate control unit Instrument cluster Audio unit Keyless receiver Steering lock unit Theft-deterrent control module x Related wiring harness

x Brake fluid level sensor x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less B+ 1.0 or less —

x Oil pressure switch x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less

x Rear fog light relay x Related wiring harness

B+ — 1.0 or less

x Back-up light switch x Related wiring harness —

—

B+

x Headlight low relay x Related wiring harness

—

—

1.0 or less

x Front fog light relay x Related wiring harness

B+ — — — 1.0 or less

— — —

Headlights off

B+

x Headlight relay (LO) x Related wiring harness

— High beam during passing or lights on Other — — — — —

—

—

1.0 or less

x Headlight relay (HI) x Related wiring harness

B+ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — x PCM x ABS HU/CM Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal (with ABS) voltage inspection not possible. x DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal TCM voltage inspection not possible.

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al

Signal

4W

CAN_L

4X*8

CAN_L

Connected to

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Inspection item (s)

x PCM x ABS HU/CM Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal (with ABS) voltage inspection not possible. x DSC HU/CM (with DSC) Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal TCM voltage inspection not possible. Turn switch at RH position 1.0 or less Wave x Turn switch Turn switch pattern (See x Related wiring harness Turn switch at off position 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) Turn switch at LH position 1.0 or less Wave x Turn switch Turn switch pattern (See x Related wiring harness Turn switch at off position 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) Rear wiper at on position 1.0 or less x Wiper and washer Wave Wiper and switch pattern (See washer switch Rear wiper at off position x Related wiring harness 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) Rear window defroster switch 1.0 or less pressed x Climate control unit Climate control (rear window defroster Wave unit (rear window switch) pattern (See defroster switch) Rear window defroster switch not x Related wiring harness pressed 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) Light switch in ON position 1.0 or less x Light switch Light switch x Related wiring harness Light switch not at ON position B+ Wiper switch in HI position 1.0 or less x Wiper and washer Wiper and switch washer switch Wiper switch not at HI position B+ x Related wiring harness Rear window defroster 1.0 or less indicator Climate control x Climate control unit illuminated unit (rear window Ignition switch at (rear window defroster defroster ON indicator) Rear window indicator) x Related wiring harness defroster B+ indicator turned off x Wiper and washer Wiper and Under any condition 1.0 or less switch washer switch x Related wiring harness HI beam at passing position or 1.0 or less x Light switch lights on status Light switch x Related wiring harness Except above B+ TNS ON 1.0 or less x Light switch Light switch x Related wiring harness TNS OFF B+

6A

Turn switch input (RH)

6B

Turn switch input (LH)

6C

Rear wiper switch input (ON)

6D

Rear window defroster switch input

6E

Headlight switch input (ON)

6F

Windshield wiper switch input (HI)

6G

Rear window defroster indicator signal

6H

Wiper speed volume ground

6I

Headlight switch input (HI)

6J

TNS switch signal

6K

Headlight switch input (front fog Light switch light)

6L

Headlight switch input (vehicles Light switch with auto light/ wiper system)

6M

Headlight switch input (rear fog Light switch light)

Front fog light switch in on position

1.0 or less

Front fog light switch in off position

B+

Light switch in AUTO position

Rear fog light switch in on position

1.0 or less Wave pattern (See 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) 1.0 or less

Rear fog light switch in off position

B+

Light switch not at AUTO position

x Light switch x Related wiring harness x Light switch x Related wiring harness

x Light switch x Related wiring harness

09-40–9

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al 6N

6O

6P

6Q

6R

6S

6T 6U*2

6V

Signal

Connected to

Windshield wiper Wiper and switch input (Lo) washer switch Headlight switch Light switch input (LO)

Wiper speed volume signal

Hazard warning switch signal

Wiper and washer switch

Hazard warning switch

Measurement condition Windshield wiper Ignition switch at LO operation ON Windshield wiper not operation Light switch at headlight position and low beam Light switch at OFF or TNS position Switch position 1 position Switch position 2 position Voltage decreases when Switch position 3 position speed control volume is turned Switch position 4 from - position to position + position Switch position 5 position Switch position 6 position Hazard warning switch on Hazard warning switch off

x Steering lock Key inserted unit (Advanced keyless and start system) Key reminder x Key reminder Key removed switch switch (Keyless entry system) x Wiper switch in AUTO position (vehicles with auto light/wiper system) x Wiper switch in INT position (vehicles without auto light/ Windshield wiper Wiper and wiper system) switch input washer switch

— Liftgate opener switch input

CAN_L

09-40–10

— Liftgate opener switch x CAN system related module (L.H.D.) x Keyless control module (R.H.D.)

Voltage (V)

Inspection item (s)

1.0 or less

x Wiper and washer switch x Related wiring harness

B+ 1.0 or less B+

x Light switch x Related wiring harness

0.72 0.48 0.32 0.18

x Wiper and washer switch x Related wiring harness

0.08 0 1.0 or less Wave pattern (See 09-40-14 Pattern 6.) B+

1.0 or less

x Hazard warning switch x Related wiring harness

x Steering lock unit (Advanced keyless and start system) x Key reminder switch (Keyless entry system) x Related wiring harness

1.0 or less

Wave pattern (See Except above 09-40-13 Pattern 1.) — — Wave pattern (See 09-40-15 Liftgate Opener Switch Input Signal Pulse (Reference).)

x Wiper and washer switch x Related wiring harness

— x Liftgate opener switch x Related wiring harness

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al

Signal

6W

Serial communication

6X

CAN_H

Connected to x Keyless control module (with advanced keyless and start system) x Keyless receiver (vehicles with keyless entry system) x CAN system related module (L.H.D.) x Keyless control module (R.H.D.)

Measurement condition

Liftgate opener switch

Liftgate opener switch

7B

Parking brake switch signal

Parking brake switch

7C

Key cylinder switch signal

Door key cylinder switch

7D 7E 7F

7G*5

7H

7I

7J

— All outer door handles — Rear door latch switch (LH) — Front door latch switch (driver side) —

— Power window main switch — Rear door latch switch (LH) — Front door latch switch (driver side) —

Inspection item (s)

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.

Liftgate opener switch not pressed

7A

Voltage (V)

Liftgate opener switch pressed

1.0 or less Wave pattern*2 (See 09-4013 Pattern 2.)

approx. 3*1 Parking brake applied 1.0 or less Wave pattern (See Parking brake not applied 09-40-13 Pattern 3.) Wave Driver's door key cylinder rotated to pattern (See lock direction 09-40-14 Pattern 4.) Driver's door key cylinder rotated to 1.0 or less unlock direction Wave Driver’s door key cylinder at neutral pattern (See position after rotating in lock or 09-40-14 unlock direction Pattern 5.) — — Any door open 1.0 or less All doors closed

B+ —

Rear door (LH) open Rear door (LH) closed — Front door (driver side) open Front door (driver side) closed —

— Wave pattern (See 09-40-14 Pattern 6.) 1.0 or less — Wave pattern (See 09-40-14 Pattern 6.) 1.0 or less —

x Liftgate opener switch x Related wiring harness

x Parking brake switch x Related wiring harness

x Door key cylinder switch x Related wiring harness

— x Power window main switch x Related wiring harness — x Rear door latch switch (LH) x Related wiring harness — x Front door latch switch (driver side) x Related wiring harness —

09-40–11

CONTROL SYSTEM Termin al

7K

7L

7M

7N

7O*5

7P

7Q

7R 7S 7T 7U

7V

7W

7X

*1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8

Signal

Connected to

Measurement condition

Voltage (V)

Inspection item (s)

Wave pattern (See Driver's door locked 09-40-14 Pattern 6.) x Door lock-link switch Lock input (door Door lock-link x Related wiring harness lock-link switch) switch Wave pattern (See Driver's door unlocked 09-40-14 Pattern 7.) — — — — — Wave pattern (See x Front door latch switch Front door latch Front door latch Front door (passenger side) open 09-40-14 (passenger side) switch switch Pattern 6.) x Related wiring harness (passenger side) (passenger side) Front door (passenger side) closed 1.0 or less — — — — — Wave pattern (See x Rear door latch switch Rear door latch Rear door latch Rear door (RH) open 09-40-14 (RH) switch (RH) switch (RH) Pattern 6.) x Related wiring harness Rear door (RH) closed 1.0 or less — — — — — Wave pattern (See Unlock input Driver's door locked x Door lock-link switch Door lock-link 09-40-14 (door lock-link switch Pattern 6.) x Related wiring harness switch) Driver's door unlocked 1.0 or less — — — — — Liftgate opened 1.0 or less x Liftgate switch Liftgate switch Liftgate switch signal x Related wiring harness Liftgate closed B+ — — — — — LIN Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal Rain sensor communication voltage inspection not possible. x CAN system related Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal CAN_L module voltage inspection not possible. x DLC-2 Wipers moving B+ x Rain sensor Windshield wiper Ignition switch at Rain sensor Wipers not auto stop signal ON 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness moving x CAN system Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal related CAN_H voltage inspection not possible. module x DLC-2

: Vehicles with advanced keyless and start system : Vehicles without advanced keyless and start system : MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) : Except MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6) : 5HB : With double locking system : With terminal 3A : CVT

09-40–12

CONTROL SYSTEM Generated pulse (reference) Pattern 1

0V adejjw00005004

x Terminal: — Turn switch input (RH): 6A (+) œ body ground (-) — Turn switch input (LH): 6B (+) œ body ground (-) — Rear wiper switch input (ON): 6C (+) œ body ground (-) — Rear defroster switch input: 6D (+) œ body ground (-) — Headlight switch input: 6L (+) œ body ground (-) — Windshield wiper switch input: 6S (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 2

0V am2zzw0000414

x Terminal: 7A (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 3

0V am2zzw0000414

x Terminal: 7B (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range

09-40–13

CONTROL SYSTEM Pattern 4

0V am2zzw0000414

x Terminal: 7C (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 5

0V am2zzw0000414

x Terminal: 7C (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 6

0V am2zzw0000414

x Terminal: — Hazard warning switch signal: 6Q (+) œ body ground (-) — Rear door latch switch (LH): 7G (+) œ body ground (-) — Front door latch switch (driver side): 7I (+) œ body ground (-) — Lock input (door lock-link switch) (vehicles without advanced keyless and start system): 7K (+) œ body ground (-) — Front door latch switch (passenger side): 7M (+) œ body ground (-) — Rear door latch switch (RH): 7O (+) œ body ground (-) — Unlock input (door lock-link switch): 7Q (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range Pattern 7 Note x The output signals from BCM terminal 7K and keyless control module terminal 3P are displayed simultaneously and the wave patterns may overlap each other.

09-40–14

CONTROL SYSTEM x Terminal: 7K (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range

0V am2zzw0000415

Liftgate Opener Switch Input Signal Pulse (Reference) Liftgate opener switch not pressed

0V adejjw00005004

x Terminal: 6U (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range x Measurement condition: Liftgate opener switch not pressed Liftgate opener switch pressed

0V adejjw00005005

x Terminal: 6U (+) œ body ground (-) x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range x Measurement condition: Liftgate opener switch pressed Liftgate Opener Switch Signal Pulse (Reference)

0V adejjw00005005

x Terminal: 7A (+) œ body ground (-)

09-40–15

CONTROL SYSTEM x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range x Measurement condition: Liftgate opener switch pressed

End Of Sie BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION

id094000800900

Note x Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the BCM CONFIGURATION. 1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. 2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the M-MDS. x When using the IDS (laptop PC) 1. Select “Module Programming”. 3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order. 1. Select “Programmable Module Installation”. 2. Select “BCM/GEM”. 4. Perform the configuration according to the directions on the screen. 5. Retrieve DTCs by the M-MDS, then verify that there is no DTC present. x If a DTC (s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02G-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)

DLC-2 am2zzw0000251

End Of Sie BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

id094000801500

Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the dashboard under cover. (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 3. Remove the front scuff plate. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 4. Remove the front side trim. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Remove the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 6. Insert a fastener remover in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and release the tabs. Caution x Because the tabs will break if they are bent excessively, bend the tabs only so far as to allow them to release from the BCM.

(1) (1)

A (1)

BCM

TAB

SEC. A—A

BCM BRACKET A am2zzw0000412

09-40–16

CONTROL SYSTEM 7. Pull the BCM in the direction of the arrow (2) as shown in the figure and remove the BCM bracket.

(2) BCM

(2)

BCM BRACKET

TAB

TAB am2zzw0000412

Installation 1. Bend the tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) so that clearance (a) indicated in the figure is within the specification. Clearance a: 0.81.2 mm {0.0320.047 in}

(1)

A •• ••••

TAB

BCM BRACKET A

SEC. A—A

am2zzw0000412

2. Press the BCM in the direction of the arrow (2) as shown in the figure and install it. 3. Install the BCM. (See 09-40-1 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 4. Install the front scuff plate. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 5. Install the front side trim. (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-53 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.) 6. Install the dashboard under cover. (See 09-17-35 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)

(2) BCM

(2)

BCM BRACKET

TAB

TAB am2zzw0000412

End Of Sie

09-40–17

TECHNICAL DATA

09-50

TECHNICAL DATA

BODY AND ACCESSORIES TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-50–2

09-50–1

TECHNICAL DATA BODY AND ACCESSORIES TECHNICAL DATA SOKYU_WM: BODY AND ACCESSORIES

id095000498800

Item

Specifications (W) X number 60 u 2 55 u 2 5u2

Headlight bulb (HI) Headlight bulb (LO) Parking light bulb Front fog light bulb

Exterior light bulb capacity

Interior light bulb capacity

End Of Sie

09-50–2

Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

Rear fog light bulb Front turn light bulb Front side turn light bulb Brake/taillight bulb Rear turn light bulb Back-up light bulb (5HB/3HB) Back-up light bulb (4SD) License plate light bulb High-mount brake light (LED) (5HB/3HB) High-mount brake light bulb (4SD) Interior light bulb (Vehicles with intruder sensor) Interior light bulb (Vehicles without intruder sensor) Cargo compartment light bulb (5HB/3HB) Trunk compartment light bulb (4SD)

55 u 2 51 u 2 21 u 1 21 u 2 5u2 21/5 u 2 21 u 2 16 u 2 21 u 2 5u2 2.4 u 1 18 u 1 8u2 10 u 1 5u1 5u1

SERVICE TOOLS

09-60

SERVICE TOOLS

BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST . . . . . . 09-60–2

09-60–1

SERVICE TOOLS BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST WM: BODY AND ACCESSORIES

id096000800100

49 N088 0A0

49 F042 001*

Fuel and Thermometer Checker

Wrench

*

: MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

End Of Sie

09-60–2

—